eia report - ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯ ಮಾಲಿನ್ಯ...

Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar, Karnataka

Sponsor

Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructural Development Corporation Ltd., Bangalore

CCSSIIRR--NNaattiioonnaall EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall EEnnggiinneeeerriinngg RReesseeaarrcchh IInnssttiittuuttee

NNeehhrruu MMaarrgg,, NNaaggppuurr-- 444400 002200

AAuugguusstt 22001144

(QCI-NABET Accredited Consultant Organization - Listed on Aug. 05, 2014 at Sr. No. 104)

Karnataka

Tadadi

Port

Draft Report

Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar,

Karnataka

Sponsor

Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructural Development Corporation Ltd., Bangalore

CCSSIIRR--NNaattiioonnaall EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall EEnnggiinneeeerriinngg RReesseeaarrcchh IInnssttiittuuttee

NNeehhrruu MMaarrgg,, NNaaggppuurr-- 444400 002200

AAuugguusstt 22001144

Draft Report

Project Personnel

Component Functional Area Expert/ (QCI/NABET)

Scientific Staff

Project Assistants

Air Environment

Meteorology, Air Quality Monitoring & Prediction (AQ)

Dr. Rama Krishna, T.V.B.P.S.

Mr. Gaikwad, G. Mr. Kadu, R. Mr. Guddhe, S. Mr. Meshram, R. Mr. Sahare, S. Air Pollution Monitoring

Prevention and Control (AP) Ms. Padma Rao Dr. Srivastava, A. Mr. M.K. Sen Mr. Hariram Samudrala

Noise Environment

Noise & Vibration (NV)

Dr. Bodhe, G.L.

Mr. Gaikwad, G. Mr. Kadu, R. Mr. Guddhe, S.

Water Environment

Water Pollution Monitoring, Prevention Control (WP)

Dr. Shastry, S. Dr. Krupdam, R.J. Mr. Baseshankar, Y.J.

Ms. Ladwani, Kiran Ms. Ladwani, Krishna

Land Environment

Land-use (LU)

Mr. Deshbhratar, P.B. Dr. Singh, H.V. Mr. Ritesh Vijay Dr. Pujari, P.

Ms. Lakde, P. Ms. Mahadik, P. Ms. Bhannare, P. Ms. Shinde, P. Ms. Rafat, A.

Solid Hazardous Waste Management (SHW))

Dr. Vaidya, A.N. Dr. Patil, M.P.

Biological Environment

Ecology and Biodiversity (EB)

Dr. Sangolkar, L.N. Dr. Shalini Dhyani Dr. Kanchan Kumari Mr. Deshpande, S. (Project Advisor)

Ms. Bhannare, P. Ms. Shinde, P. Mr. Indurkar, M. Mr. Patil V.

Socio-economic Environment

Socio-Economic Aspects (SE) Dr. Deshmukh, R. (Project Advisor)

Ms. Nagrare, V. Ms. Patil, V. Ms. Waghmare, S.

Component Functional Area Expert/ (QCI/NABET)

Scientific Staff

Project Assistants

Risk Assessment (RA) Mr. Ghuge, S. Mr. Gadbail, S. Mr. Nagarkar, S.

Project Leaders

Dr. Ramteke, D.S. Mr. P.B. Deshbhratar

Dr. S.K. Goyal (March 1, 2013 onwards)

Project Coordinator

Dr. S. R. Wate

Director

TITLE : Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar,

Karnataka

TITLE : Environmental Impact Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar,

Karnataka

CERTIFICATE

This is to certify that M/s. National Environmental Engineering Research Institute

has carried out Environmental Impact Assessment Study titled “Environmental Impact

Assessment Studies for Development of Sea Port at Tadadi, Karwar, Karnataka”.

The primary baseline data was collected by NEERI during Post-monsoon 2010

within the 10 km radial distance from the port. The data was further supported by the

secondary data collected from various govt. agencies, like forest department, census

office and meteorological department. The data were used for the prediction of impacts

for air, noise, water, land, biology/ecology and socio-economics environments. It was

observed that with implementation of suggested environmental management plan, the

project does not have any major negative impacts on the receiving environment and shall

help in development of the region.

M/s. National Environmental Engineering Research Institute is a constituent

laboratory of Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR), New Delhi working in the

field of environmental science and technology. The Institute has accreditation under “EIA

Consultant Organizations Accreditation Scheme” of Quality Council of India under sector

33 (Sr. No. 9) for “Ports, harbours, jetties, marine terminals, break waters and dredging”.

The Institute has ISO 9001-2008 accreditation.

REGD. OFFICE:

CSIR-National Environmental Engineering Research Institute

Nehru Marg, Nagpur 440020 (India) Ph.: 0712-2247844 ; Fax: 0712-2249896 E-mail: [email protected]

DISCLAIMER

The information contained in the report is based on the

scientific analysis of data/information/drawings provided by the sponsor

as also collected from other sources during the time of the study. While

efforts have been made to ensure accuracy of information in the report,

NEERI shall not own, in any manner, any legal, financial or consequential

responsibility for any event of occurrence of any accident/hazard or direct

or indirect damage/ loss to any third party or to sponsor due to the use or

inability to use the information contained in the report.

The sponsor shall exercise due diligence and make their own

decision to implement the content of the report. The report shall not be

construed as any guarantee or warranty from NEERI.

Abbreviations and Acronyms

AAQM Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Official

AAS Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer

ACGIH American Conference of Govt. Industrial Hygienists

ADCP Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler

ANM Auxiliary Nurse Midwife

APHA American Public Health Association

AWC Aviation Weather Center

BCD Bival Collecting Days

BDL Below Detectable Limit

BHH Bivalve Collecting Households

BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand

BOOST Build Own Operate Share & Transfer

BOT Build Operate Transfer

CD Chart Datum

CDMG Central Disaster Management Group

CEA Central Electricity Authority

CEC Cation Exchange Capacity

CERC Central Electricity Regulatory Commission

CFU Colony Forming Unit

CREP Corporate Responsibility for Environmental Protection

CMFRI Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute

CMMS Computerized Maintenance Management Systems

CPCB Central Pollution Control Board

CODAR Coastal Ocean Dynamics Application Rader

CRZ Coastal Regulation Zone

CSR Corporate Social Responsibility

DGTD/CCI & E Directorate General of Trade and Development

DHH Department of Health & Hospitals

DMP Disaster Management Plan

DO Dissolved Oxygen

DWT Dry Weight Tonnage

EAC Expert Appraisal Committee

EC Electrical Conductivity

ECF Environmental Consultancy Fund

Abbreviations

A2

ECO Emergency Co-ordinating Officers

EFLS Equivalent Finite Line Source

EGS Education Guarantee Scheme

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

EMP Environmental Management Plan

EMS Environmental Management System

ENE East North-East

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

EPABX Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchanges

EPO Emergency Planning Officer

EPP Environmental Planning Process

ERDMP Emergency Response Disaster Management Plan

ESDV Emergency Shutdown Valves

ESE East South-East

ESH Environment Safety Health

ESP Exchangeable Sodium Percentage

EW Estuary Water

EWS Early Warning System

FCC False Colour Composite

FDM Fugitive Dust Model

FHWA Federal Highway Administration

FTIR Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy

FWC Family Welfare Center

GSE Ground Support Equipment

GDP Gross Domestic Product

GIS Geological Information System

GLC Ground Level Concentration

GoK Government of Karnataka

GPS Global Positioning System

HDPE High Density Polyethylene

HM Harbour Master

Hs Significant Wave Height

HSE Health, Safety & Environment

HTL High Tide Line

ICP Inductive Coupled Plasma

Abbreviations

A3

IDD Infrastructure Development Department

IMD India Meteorological Department

IMO International Maritime Organization

INCOIS Indian National Central for Ocean Information Service

INS Indian Naval Ship

IRC Indian Roads Congress

ISCST-3 Industrial Source Complex Short Term -Version 3

ISO International Organization for Standardization

ITI Industrial Training Institute

IWT Inland Water Transport

Kd Disturbance Coefficient

KEB Karnataka Electricity Board

KIADB Karnataka Industrial Areas Development Board

Kr Reflection Coefficient

KSIIDCL Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd.

LGP Length of Growth Period

LNG Liquefied Natural Gas

LRF Laboratory Reserve Fund

LSD Long Store Drift

LTL Low Tide Line

MARPOL Marine Pollution (The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships)

MAV Manually Actuated Valve

MCA Maximum Credible Accident

MCW Maternal & Child Welfare

MDO Marine Diesel Oil

MHHW Mean Highest High Water

MHLW Mean Highest Lower Water

MLHW Mean Lower High Water

MLLW Mean Lowest Low Water

MOS Ministry of Shipping

MoEF Ministry of Environmental and Forests

MSL Mean Sea Level

MTPA Million Tonnes Per Annum

Abbreviations

A4

NAAQ National Ambient Air Quality

ND Not Detected

NE North-East

NEERI National Environmental Engineering Research Institute

NGO’s Non-Governmental Organizations

NH National Highway

NMHCs Non Methane Hydrocarbons

NMP New Mangalore Port

NMPT New Mangalore Port Trust

NNE North and North-East

NNW North and North-West

NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit

NW North-West

OHT Overhead Tank

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PAH Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon

PAH Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons

PCU Progressive Care Unit

PHC Primary Health Center

PHI Roadway – Wind Angle

PHS Primary Health Sub-center

PMC Pollution Monitoring Committee

PPBV Parts / Billion (by Volume)

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PPP Public Private Participation

PPTV Parts / Trillion (by Volume)

QoL Quality of Life

RMP Risk Management Plan

SATCOM Satellite Communication

SAV Submerged Aquatic Vegetation

SDI Simpson’s Diversity Index

SDV Switched Digital Video

SECR Site Emergency Control Room

SEE Soil Excavated Earth Material

SHH Shell Selling Households

Abbreviations

A5

SODAR Sonic Detection and Ranging

SOP Standard Operating Procedure

SPCB State Pollution Control Board

SSE South South-East

SW Sea Water

SWBH South-Western Boreholes

SWDI Shannon Weaver Diversity Index

TCLP Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure

TSHD Trailling Suction Hopper Dredge

TC Total Cloud

TPD Tonnes Per Day

THC Total Hydrocarbon

TOC Total Organic Carbon

TOR Terms of Reference

UNEP United Nations Environment Programme

USDA United States Department of Agriculture

USEPA United State Environment Protection Agency

VOC Volatile Organic Compound

WTP Water Treatment Plant

Contents

Item Page No.

List of Figures (xiv) List of Tables (xx) Abbreviations A1-A5 Executive Summary E1-E51 Compliance to ToR Points C1-C4 Chapter 1 : Introduction 1.1-1.34

1.0 Introduction 1.1

1.1 Port Function 1.1

1.2 Indian Ports Scenario 1.1

1.3 Cargo handled by the Major and the Non Major Ports 1.2

1.4 Maritime Agenda 2010 - 20 1.2

1.5 Preamble 1.3

1.6 Details of Existing Port in the State 1.4

1.6.1 Major Ports 1.4

1.6.1.1 New Mangalore Port 1.5

1.6.2 Minor Ports 1.5

1.6.2.1 Karwar Port 1.6

1.6.2.2 Belekeri Port 1.7

1.6.2.3 Tadri Port 1.7

1.6.2.4 Honnavar Port 1.8

1.6.2.5 Bhatkal Port 1.8

1.6.2.6 Kundapura Port 1.8

1.6.2.7 Hangarakatta Port 1.8

1.6.2.8 Malpe Port 1.8

1.6.2.9 Padubidri Port 1.8

1.6.2.10 Old Mangalore 1.8

1.7 Rationale for Development of the Proposed Port at Tadadi 1.9

1.8 Purpose of the Report 1.9

1.9 Justification of the Project 1.10

1.10 Alternative Sites (Locations) for Tadadi Port 1.11

1.11 Objectives of Study 1.12

1.12 Scope of Work (Proposed ToR) 1.12

1.13 Additional ToR 1.14

1.14 Detailed Work Plan 1.16

1.14.1 Air Environment 1.16

1.14.2 Noise Environment 1.16

1.14.3 Water Environment 1.17

1.14.4 Marine Environment 1.17

ii

Item Page No.

1.14.5 Land Environment 1.18

1.14.6 Biological Environment 1.19

1.14.7 Socio-economical Environment 1.19

1.15 Risk Assessment 1.20

1.16 Methodology for EIA 1.20






1.16.6 Socio-economical Environment 1.22

1.17 Environmental Management Plan 1.23

1.18 Risk Assessment 1.23

Chapter 2 : Project Description 2.1-2.33


2.2 Project Location 2.3

2.3 Topography and Port Layout 2.3

2.4 Existing Port 2.4

2.5 Proposed Facility 2.4

2.6 Traffic Projections 2.4

2.7 Hinterland Connectivity 2.4

2.7.1 Road Connectivity 2.4

2.7.2 Rail Connectivity 2.5

2.7.3 Inland water connectivity 2.5

2.8 Design of Ship Sizes 2.5

2.9 Number of Berths 2.6

2.10 Details of Mechanized Iron Ore/Coal Berths 2.6

2.11 Cargo Handling Equipment at the Berths 2.6

2.12 Iron Ore Export Circuit 2.7

2.13 Coal Import circuit 2.7

2.14 Iron ore Handling System on the Berth 2.7

2.15 Coal Handling System on the Berth 2.8

2.16 Steel Product & General Cargo loading/unloading on the Berth 2.8

2.17 Stacker / Reclaimers 2.9

2.18 Iron Ore unloading System 2.9

2.19 Coal Loading System at the Station 2.10

2.20 Storage Areas 2.10

2.21 Port Railway 2.11

iii

Item Page No.

2.22 Salient Features of Berths 2.11

2.23 Dredging Requirement 2.12

2.23.1 Capital Dredging Requirement 2.12

2.23.2 Annual Maintenance of Dredging requirement 2.15

2.24 Navigational Aids 2.16

2.24.1 Navigational Buoys 2.16

2.24.2 Leading Line 2.16

2.24.3 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS) 2.17

2.25 Mooring of Vessel 2.17

2.26 Tugs and other floating crafts required for berthing /un-berthing of Vessels 2.17

2.27 Utilities 2.17

2.28 Water 2.17

2.29 Power 2.18

2.30 Control System 2.18

2.31 Communication System 2.18

2.32 Information Technology and Communication 2.19

2.32.1 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS) 2.19

2.33 Fire Protection and Alarm System 2.19

2.34 Facilities for Treatment or Disposal of Solid Waste / Liquid Effluent 2.19

2.35 Dust Control System 2.20

2.36 Cost Estimates 2.20

2.37 Clearances Required for the Project Implementation 2.20

Chapter 3 : Baseline Environmental Status 3.1-3.158

3.1 Background 3.1

3.1.1 Climate and Meteorology 3.1

3.1.2 Micrometeorology of Port Site 3.4

3.2 Air Environment 3.6

3.2.1 Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 3.6

3.2.2 Baseline Status 3.6

3.3 Noise Environment 3.18

3.4 Water Environment 3.22

3.4.1 Bathymetry and Geophysical Study 3.22

iv

Item Page No.

3.4.2 Hydraulic Data 3.23

3.4.2.1 Tides 3.23

3.4.2.2 Currents 3.24

3.4.2.3 Waves 3.24

3.4.2.4 Aghanashini River : Sedimentation 3.25

3.4.3 Water Quality Status 3.25

3.4.3.1 Methodology of Water Quality Assessment 3.25

3.4.3.2 Surface Water Quality (Sea and Estuary Water of River Aghanashini) 3.26

3.4.3.3 Heavy Metals in Surface Water Samples 3.27

3.4.3.4 Ground Water Quality 3.27

3.4.3.5 Bacteriological Characteristics 3.27

3.4.3.6 Biological Characteristics 3.28

3.5 Sediment Quality Assessment 3.46

3.5.1 Sediment Characterization – Baseline Status 3.46

3.5.2 Physical and chemical Characteristics of sediment 3.46

3.5.3 Heavy Metals 3.47

3.5.4 Oil and Grease and Hydrocarbon 3.47

3.6 Land Environment 3.52

3.6.1 Reconnaissance 3.52

3.6.1.1 Land Form 3.54

3.6.1.2 Agro Climate Zone 3.54

3.6.1.3 Agro-Ecological Sub region 3.54

3.6.1.4 Natural Vegetation 3.54

3.6.2 Physiography 3.54

3.6.2.1 West Coast Plain 3.55

3.6.2.2 Soils of Coastal Plain 3.55

3.6.3 Geology 3.55

3.6.4 Climate 3.55

3.6.5 Soil Type of the Study Area 3.56


3.6.6.1 Soil Characteristics 3.56

3.6.6.2 Physical Properties of Soil 3.57

v

Item Page No.

3.6.6.3 Chemical Properties of Soil 3.57

3.6.6.4 Fertility/Nutrient Status of Soil 3.58

3.6.6.5 Heavy Metal Content in the Soil 3.58

3.6.6.6 Soil Microbiology 3.59

3.6.6.7 Landuse Pattern 3.59

3.6.6.8 Cropping Pattern 3.59

3.6.7 Remote Sensing Studies 3.60

3.6.7.1 Remote Sensing Data Used 3.60

3.6.7.2 Landuse / Landcover Classification 3.61

3.7 Biological Environment 3.74

3.7.1 Study Area 3.74

3.7.2 Sampling Locations 3.75

3.7.2.1 Vegetation – Holistic Site 3.75

3.7.3 Survey Methodology 3.76

3.7.4 Quadrate study in proposed study area 3.77

3.7.5 Biodiversity in Study Area 3.77

3.7.6 Medicinal Plant in the Study Area 3.78

3.7.7 Wetland flora 3.79

3.7.8 Coastal Vegetation: Mangrove vegetation 3.80

3.7.9 Economic and Social Forestry 3.81

3.7.10 Faunal Biodiversity 3.82

3.7.10.1 Mammals 3.82

3.7.10.2 Avifauna (Birds) 3.83

3.7.10.3 Insect 3.86

3.7.10.4 Butterfly 3.88

3.7.11 Agriculture 3.88

3.7.11.1 Marketable Produce 3.89

3.7.11.2 Agricultural Customs 3.89

3.7.12 Fisheries Resources 3.90

3.7.13 Gaonkar Mines 3.91

3.8 Socio-economic Environment 3.131


3.8.2 Demographic Structure 3.131

vi

Item Page No.

3.8.2.1 Infrastructure Resource Base 3.132

3.8.2.2 Economic Attributes 3.133

3.8.2.3 Health Status 3.134

3.8.2.4 Cultural and Aesthetic Attributes 3.135

3.8.3 Socio-Economic Survey 3.137

3.8.3.1 Public Awareness and Opinion 3.139

3.8.4 Quality of Life 3.141

Chapter 4 : Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures 4.1-4.62


4.2 Air Environment 4.2

4.2.1 Micrometeorology 4.2

4.2.2 Air Quality Models Description 4.3

4.2.2.1 Fugitive Dust Model (FDM) 4.3

4.2.2.2 SCREEN-3 Model 4.4

4.2.2.3 CALINE-4 for mobile sources 4.4

4.2.3 Air Emissions 4.5

4.2.3.1 Air Emissions during Construction Phase 4.5

4.2.3.2 Air Emissions during Operation Phase 4.6

4.2.3.3 Impacts of Air Emissions during Construction Phase 4.7

4.2.3.4 Impacts of Air Emissions during Operation Phase 4.7

4.2.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase 4.8

4.2.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase 4.10

4.3 Noise Environment 4.17

4.3.1 Noise Sources 4.17

4.3.1.1 Prediction of Noise Levels during Construction Phase 4.17

4.3.1.2 Prediction of Noise Levels during Operational Phase 4.18

4.3.2 Noise due to Transportation 4.18

4.3.3 Impact of Noise on Occupational and Community Health 4.19

vii

Item Page No.

4.3.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase 4.19

4.3.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase 4.20

4.4 Water Environment 4.23

4.4.1 Water Requirement for Port 4.23

4.4.2 Source of Water 4.23

4.4.3 Marine Ecology 4.23

4.4.4 Estuarine Environment 4.24

4.4.4.1 Vertically homogenous 4.25

4.4.4.2 Physicochemical variation 4.25

4.4.4.3 Implications for marine life 4.25

4.4.5 Impact on Water Body 4.26

4.4.6 Water Quality 4.27

4.4.6.1 Impacts on Fishing and Salt Pan 4.27

4.4.6.2 Mitigation Measures for Impacts of Maintenance Dredging 4.29

4.4.6.3 Measures for Fish and fish Habitat Protection 4.29

4.4.6.4 Measures for Ship Operations 4.30

4.4.6.5 Other Mitigation Measure 4.30

4.4.7 Construction Phase 4.31

4.4.8 Operation Phase 4.33

4.4.9 Potential Impact on Surface Water 4.33

4.5 Land Environment 4.37

4.5.1 Littoral Drift and Impact on the Shoreline 4.37



4.5.4 Mitigation Measures due to dredging and Dust Emission Iron Ore/Coal Handling 4.39

4.5.5 Mitigation Measures 4.42

4.6 Biological Environment 4.45



4.6.3 Potential Impact on Marine Biology 4.45

4.6.4 Potential Impacts on Marine/Coastal Ecology 4.47

4.6.4.1 Impact of Mangrove Vegetation and Mitigation Measure 4.47

viii

Item Page No.

4.6.4.1.1 Mangrove vegetation 4.47

4.6.4.1.2 Importance of Mangroves 4.48

4.6.5 Impact of Bivalves 4.49

4.6.6 Mitigation of impacts of port development 4.49

4.7 Socio-economic Environment 4.54

4.7.1 Mitigation Measure 4.55

4.7.2 Region / Community Development Plan 4.55

4.7.2.1 Positive Impact 4.57

4.7.2.2 Negative Impact 4.57

4.8 Current Facilities at Tadadi 4.62

4.9 Sensitive (Holy) places in the study area 4.62

Chapter 5 : Environmental Monitoring Plan 5.1-5.9


5.2 Environmental Monitoring 5.2

5.3 Training 5.4

5.4 Summary of Impacts and Monitoring Plan 5.4

Chapter 6 : Environmental Management Plan 6.1-6.39

6.1 Environmental Management Plant (EMP) 6.1

6.1.1 Environmental Policy 6.2

6.2 Environmental Management System 6.2

6.3 Budgetary Provision for EMP 6.3

6.4 Construction Phase 6.4

6.4.1 Preparation of Site and Creation of Basic Facilities 6.4

6.4.1.1 Basic Facilities 6.4

6.4.1.2 Construction Equipments and Waste 6.5

6.4.1.3 Transportation of Materials and Waste 6.5

6.5 Operation Phase 6.6


6.5.1.1 Discharge of pollutants due to operation of ships 6.6

ix

Item Page No.

6.5.1.2 Management of Ambient Air Quality 6.7


6.5.2.1 Management of Ambient Noise Quality 6.8


6.5.3.1 Disposal of Dredge Spoil 6.9

6.5.3.2 Disposal of Material 6.10

6.5.3.3 Alternative Plan for dredged Material Management 6.11

6.5.3.4 Ship Generated Wastes 6.11

6.5.3.5 Sediment Transport and Quality 6.11

6.5.3.6 Marine Environment 6.12

6.5.3.7 Marine Water Quality 6.12

6.5.3.8 Development of Marine Facility and Environmental Management 6.13

6.5.3.9 Water Facility and Site Sanitation 6.13


6.5.4.1 Landuse/Landscape 6.14

6.5.4.2 Soil Quality 6.15

6.5.4.3 Quarry Material Sources 6.15

6.5.4.4 Hydrology 6.16

6.5.4.5 Morphology 6.16

6.5.4.6 Greenbelt Development 6.16


6.5.5.1 General Marine Ecosystem 6.19

6.5.5.2 Fisheries 6.19

6.5.5.3 Terrestrial Biology 6.19

6.5.5.4 Aquatic Biology 6.19

6.5.6 Socio-economic and Public Interest 6.20

6.5.6.1 Loss of Land, Livelihoods, Health and Safety 6.20

6.5.6.2 Status of the Fishing activities around the 6.21 Port Site and Management Plan

6.5.6.3 Management Plan (Resettlement and Rehabilitation)6.23

6.5.6.4 General Recommendations 6.25

6.6 Occupational Safety 6.26

6.6.1 Safety Requirements for Handling and Transfer of Cargo 6.27

x

Item Page No.

6.6.2 Safety Requirements for Port Area 6.29

6.6.3 Fire-Fighting Requirements 6.30

6.7 General Mitigation Measures Proposed 6.30

6.8 Cyclone Contingency Plan 6.31

6.8.1 Cyclone Watch 6.32

6.8.2 Cyclone Warning 6.32

6.9 Post-Project Monitoring 6.33

Chapter 7 : Project Benefits 7.1-7.3

7.1 Project Benefits 7.1

Chapter 8 : Disaster Management Plan 8.1-8.29

8.1 Preamble 8.1

8.2 Objectives 8.2

8.2.1 Purpose of Disaster Management Plan 8.2

8.2.2 Disaster Management Cycle 8.2

8.2.3 Different Phases of Disaster 8.3

8.3 Key Elements 8.3

8.3.1 Basis of the Plan 8.4

8.3.2 Emergency Planning and Response Procedures 8.4

8.3.3 On-site Disaster Management Plan 8.5

8.3.3.1 Central Disaster Management Group 8.7

8.3.3.2 On-site Action Group 8.8

8.3.4 Offsite Disaster Management Plan 8.9

8.4 Disaster Prevention Measures 8.12

8.5 Action Plan for Natural Disasters 8.13

8.5.1 Earthquake 8.13

8.5.2 Flood / Cyclones 8.14

8.5.3 Tsunami 8.15

8.6 Oil Spill Contingency Management Plan 8.17

8.6.1 Response Strategies – Onsite Spills 8.18

8.6.2 Response Strategies – Off-Site Spills 8.20

xi

Item Page No.

8.7 Shoreline Response Operations 8.21

8.7.1 Main Steps in Shoreline Clean-up Methods 8.21

8.7.2 Shoreline Clean-up Methods 8.22

8.7.2.1 Pumping and Skimming Techniques 8.22

8. 7.2.2 Flushing Techniques 8.23

8. 7.2.3 Sediment Removal Techniques 8.23

8. 7.2.4 Biodegradation Techniques 8.24

8.8 Reporting Oil Spills 8.24

Chapter 9 : Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary 9.1-9.38

9.1 Introduction 9.1 9.2 Oysters 9.2 9.2.1 Occurrence 9.2 9.3 Molluscs 9.3 9.4 Lamellibranchia (Pelecypoda or Bivalvia) 9.3 9.5 Economic Importance of Bivalves 9.6 9.5.1 Harmful Molluscs 9.7 9.6 Morphology of Bivalves 9.8 9.7 Economic Valuation 9.10 9.8 Objective 9.11 9.9 Materials and Methods 9.11 9.9.1 Study Area 9.11

9.9.2 Methods 9.12

9.10 Results 9.12

9.10.1 Distribution of bivalves 9.13

9.10.2 Bivalve harvesting and trade 9.13

9.10.3 Processing 9.14

9.10.4 Shell Mining 9.15

9.10.5 Dried Meat 9.16

9.10.6 Valuation of estuary based only on bivalve production 9.16

9.11 NEERI Work 9.17

9.11.1 Management 9.17

9.11.2 Study 9.17

xii

Item Page No.

Chapter 10 : Traffic and Demand Study 10.1-10.11

10.1 Traffic Study and Demand Assessment 10.1

10.2 Export of Iron Ore 10.1

10.3 Import of Coal 10.2

10.4 Export of Steel 10.2

10.5 Complementary traffics 10.2

10.6 Analysis of Connectivity to Port 10.3

10.6.1 Connectivity by road 10.3

10.6.1.1 Existing connections 10.9

10.7 Connectivity by Railway 10.4

10.7.1 Existing Connection

10.7.2 Conclusion 10.4

10.7.3 Road and rail layout within the port 10.5

10.7.4 Connectivity with the mainland 10.5

Chapter 11 : Hydrodynamic Study 11.1

Chapter 12 : Sediment Dispersion Study 12.1-12.9

12.0 Dispersion Study 12.1


12.2 Methodology 12.1

12.2.1 Definition of the Sediment 12.2

12.2.2 Definition of the Climate Condition 12.2

12.2.3 Modelling 12.3

12.2.4 Analysis of the Result 12.4

Chapter 13 : Disclosure of Consultants Engaged 13.1-13.17

13.1 NEERI Profile 13.1

13.1.1 NEERI Mission and Vision 13.1

13.1.2 Mandate of NEERI 13.2

13.1.3 NEERI Activities 13.2

13.1.4 NEERI Services & Goods 13.3

13.1.5 NEERI Human Resources 13.3

13.1.6 Organisational Chart of CSIR and NEERI 13.4

xiii

Item Page No.

13.1.7 Financial Resources of NEERI 13.5

13.1.8 Analytical Instruments, Computer Systems and Software at NEERI 13.6

13.1.8.1 Analytical Instrumentation Resource 13.6

13.1.8.2 Computer Hardwares & Prepherials 13.7

13.1.8.3 Supporting Software 13.7

13.1.9 Clients of NEERI 13.11

13.1.9.1 Clients: International 12.11

13.1.9.2 Clients: Central Government 13.11

13.1.9.3 Clients: State Government 13.12

13.1.9.4 Clients: Private Industries (National) 13.12

13.1.9.5 Clients: Private Industries (Multi-National) 13.13

13.1.10 Studies with International Funding 13.14

13.1.11 US-EPA AWARD TO NEERI 13.15

13.1.12 Conformity to ISO 9001:2008 13.16

13.1.13 Contact Persons 13.16

xiv

List of Figures

Figure No. Title Page No.

1.1 Location of Tadadi Port 1.24 1.2 Minor Ports in Karnataka 1.25 1.3 National Highway 66(17) – Karwar to Mangalore 1.26 1.4 Basic Components of EIA Study 1.27 1.5 Map of Coastal Regulation Zone 1.28 1.6 Multi-Criteria Analysis of the Alternatives for the Location of the 1.29

Tadadi Port 1.7 Location Map of Tadadi Port on Toposheet 1.30 1.8 10 km Study Area around the Proposed Port Site 1.31 2.1 (a) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary

near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.21 2.1 (b) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary

near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.21

2.1 (c) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.22

2.1 (d) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary

near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.22 2.1 (e) Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary

near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River 2.23 2.2 Area available for the development of Tadadi Port 2.23 2.3 Location of the Proposed Berths 2.24 2.4 Typical Ship Loader 2.24 2.5 Typical Ship Unloader 2.24 2.6 Typical Harbour Mobile Crane 2.25 2.7 Navigational Channel Alignment and Turning Circles 2.25 2.8 Typical Reclamation Area with Overflow Weir 2.26 2.9 Typical Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger 2.26 2.10 Typical Cutter Suction Dredger 2.27 2.11 Typical Grab Dredger 2.27

xv


2.12 Typical Back Hoe Dredger 2.27 2.13 Arrangement of leading lines for Tadadi Port 2.28 2.14 Typical 100 Tonne Bollard 2.28 3.1.1 Windrose during Post-monsoon season at Tadadi 3.4 3.2.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3.12 3.3.1 Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring Locations 3.19 3.4.1 Water Sampling Locations 3.31

3.5.1 Sediment Sampling Locations of the Study Area 3.48 3.6.1 Soil Sampling Locations 3.63 3.6.2 Soil Textural Class 3.64 3.6.3 Land Use Pattern (as per Census Records) 3.64 3.6.4 False colour composite of Study Area around proposed

Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka 3.65 3.6.5 Landuse/Land cover Classification of Study Area around proposed

Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka 3.66 3.7.1 Biological Sampling Locations in Study Area 3.92 3.7.2 Vegetation near the Om Beach at Gokarna 3.93 3.7.3 Cocao Plantation (Kumta) 3.93 3.7.4 Scrub Vegetation near Agnashini river 3.93 3.7.5 Scrub Vegetation near Tadadi sea coast 3.93 3.7.6 Quadrate study at Kumta 3.93 3.7.7 Quadrate Study at Tadadi 3.94 3.7.8 Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Kumta Road 3.94 3.7.9 Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Sirsi site 3.94 3.7.10 Medicinal Plant (Typha sp.) 3.94 3.7.11 Medicinal Plant (Entada Sp.) 3.94 3.5.12(a) Mangroves Plant Species, Tadadi 3.95 3.7.12(b) Mangroves Vegetation 3.96

xvi


3.7.13 Mangroves Vegetation Gokarna 3.96 3.7.14 Social Forestry Programme (a, b, c, d) 3.96 3.7.15 Semnopithecus sp (Langur) 3.97 3.7.16 Spotted Deer 3.97 3.7.17 Common Birds observed in the Study Area (a, b, c, d, e, f) 3.98 3.7.18(a) Termite hills 3.99 3.7.18(b) Termite sp. 3.99 3.7.19 Camponotus compressus 3.99 3.7.20 Tramea limbata 3.99 3.7.21 Bark Mantis 3.99 3.7.22 Mantis Nymph 3.99 3.7.23 Vanessa cardui (Butter fly) 3.100 3.7.24 Colotis amata (Butter fly) 3.100 3.7.25 Paddy Field 3.100 3.7.26 Loligo sp. (Gokarna beach) 3.100 3.7.27 Fishes Collection at Tadadi Jetty 3.101 3.7.28 Trash Fishes used for Manure 3.101 3.7.29 Species of Fishes Observed at Kumta Market 3.101 3.7.30(a) Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine 3.101 3.7.30(b) Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine 3.101 3.8.1 Survey Village for Socio-economic Study 3.144 3.8.2(a) Employment Pattern 3.145 3.8.2 (b) Employment Pattern 3.145

3.8.3(a) Representative of Gram Panchayat Office at Gokarna 3.146 3.8.3(b) Data Collection in Agarvayangani Gram Panchayat Office 3.146 3.8.4(a) Fish Caching in Study Area 3.146 3.8.4(b) Fish Caching in Study Area 3.146

xvii


3.8.5 Source of Drinking Water in Study Area 3.146 3.8.6 Educational Institution 3.146 3.8.7 PHC Primary Health Center at Ankola Taluka 3.146 3.8.8 Road Condition of the Villages 3.146 4.2.1 Impact Network for Air Environment 4.12 4.2.2 Incremental GLCs of PM10 during the Construction Phase 4.13 4.2.3 Incremental GLCs of SO2 due to simultaneous operation of

ships/ vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations 4.13 4.2.4 Incremental GLCs of NOx due to simultaneous operation of ships/

vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations 4.14 4.2.5 Incremental GLCs of PM10 due to simultaneous operation of ships/

vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations 4.14 4.3.1 Impact Network for Noise Environment 4.21

4.4.1 Impact Network for Surface Water Environment 4.35 4.4.2 Impact Network for Ground Water Environment 4.36 4.5.1 Impact Network for Land Environment 4.44 4.6.1 Impact Network for Biological Environment 4.53 4.7.1 Impact Network for Socio-economic Environment 4.59 5.1 Development of Environmental Monitoring Program 5.5 6.1 Environmental Planning Process 6.35 6.2 Environmental Management Plan 6.36 8.1 Disaster Management cycle 8.26 8.2 Conceptual Plan Framework for Disaster Management 8.27 8.3 Conceptual Plan Framework for Emergency Planning Process 8.28 8.4 Onsite Port Disaster Management Organization 8.29 9.1 Paphia malabarica 9.20 9.2 Perna viridis attached to stone by thread-like byssus. 9.20 9.3 (a) Bivalve shells burnt along with coconut shell to make lime powder 9.20

xviii


9.3 (b) Lime powder packing 9.20 9.4 General features of a bivalve 9.21

9.5 Sampling points in Aghanashini Estuary 9.22 9.6 Spatial distribution of Calm, Mussel and Oysters in the

Aghanashini Estuary 9.23 9.7 Oyster bed 9.24 9.8(a) Perna viridis 9.24 9.8(b) Crassostrea sp. 9.24

9.8(c) Paphia malabarica 9.24

9.8(d) Katelysia opima 9.24 9.8(e) Meretrix meretrix 9.24

9.8(f) M. Casta 9.25 9.8(g) Arca granosa 9.25 9.8(h) Vellorita cyprinoides 9.25 9.9 (a) Bivalve collection 9.25 9.9 (b) Bivalve collection 9.25 9.10 Women removing empty and dead shells from the collection 9.25 9.11(a) Harvester selling the bivalves to the wholesaler 9.26 9.11 (b) Women selling the bivalves in Kumta market 9.26 9.12 (a) Shell mining people 9.26 9.12 (b) Shell transporting people 9.26 9.13 Dried meat 9.26 9.14 Edible portion of bivalves 9.26 9.15 Bivalve harvesting and shell mining areas 9.27 9.16 Bivalves (calms, mussels and oysters) 9.27 10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Traffic Study and Demand Assessment 10.5 10.2 Iron Ore Export Traffic Scenarios 10.6

xix


10.3 Coal Import Traffic Scenario 10.6 10.4 Steel Export Traffic Scenario 10.7 10.5 Road connections between Bellary – Hospet and Tadadi 10.8 10.6 The Road and Rail Layout within the Port Premises 10.9 10.7 The Road and Rail Connection to the Existing Rail / Road

Infrastructure 10.10 12.1 Grain Size Distribution of Seabed in the Outer Approach Channel 12.5 12.2 Grain Size Distribution of Seabed at the Estuary 12.5 12.3 Annual Frequency of Wind speed by Direction 12.6 12.4 Horizontal Displacements of the Particles during the

Sedimentation Process 12.7 12.5 Areas of Dumping and Sedimentation 12.7 12.6 Identified Areas for Dumping and Sedimentation of Dredged Material 12.8

xx

List of Tables

Table No. Title Page No.

1.1 Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Major Ports 1.32 1.2 Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Non-Major Ports 1.32 1.3 Traffic Projections of Major and Non Major Ports as per

Maritime Agenda 2010-20 1.33 1.4 Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the Locations of the Tadadi Port 1.33 1.5 Summary of Environmental Parameters and Frequency of Monitoring1.34 2.1 Design Vessels for the Tadadi Port 2.29 2.2 Total Quantity of Maintenance Dredging 2.29 2.3 Preliminary Bill of Quantities and Cost Estimates 2.30 2.4 Clearances Required from Central / State Govt. Departments 2.31 3.1.1 Climatological Data – IMD Honavar, Karnataka (1951-1980) 3.5 3.2.1 Techniques Used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 3.13 3.2.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations at Study area 3.14 3.2.3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring at Study Area (Post monsoon 2010) 3.15 3.2.4 Levels of Particulate Associated (Pb, Ni, As and BaP)

Toxic Pollutants (Post monsoon 2010) 3.16 3.2.5 Ambient Air Quality status of CO, Benzene and HC (Post monsoon 2010) 3.17 3.3.1 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Locations 3.20 3.3.2 Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring at Study Area 3.21 3.4.1 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Sampling Locations

(Summer 2010) 3.32 3.4.2 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Physical Parameters

(Summer 2010) 3.33 3.4.3 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters 3.34 3.4.4 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality -Nutrient and Demand Parameters 3.35

3.4.5 Coastal & Estuary Water Quality-Heavy Metals 3.36 3.4.6 Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton 3.37

xxi


3.4.7 Phytoplankton Species Observed in Water Sample 3.37 3.4.8 Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton 3.38 3.4.9 List of Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples 3.38 3.4.10 Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Meiobenthos 3.39 3.4.11 List of Meiobenthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples 3.39 3.4.12 Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Macrobenthos 3.40 3.4.13 List of Macrob enthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples 3.40 3.4.14 Ground Water Quality Sampling Locations 3.41 3.4.15 Ground Water Quality - Physical Parameters 3.41 3.4.16 Ground Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters 3.42 3.4.17 Ground Water Quality -Nutrient and Demand Parameters 3.42 3.4.18 Ground Water Quality-Heavy Metals 3.43 3.4.19 Ground Water Quality-Bacteriological Parameters 3.43 3.4.20 Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton 3.44 3.4.21 Phytoplankton Species Observed In Water Sample 3.44 3.4.22 Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton 3.45 3.4.23 List of Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples 3.45 3.5.1 Sediment Sampling Locations 3.49 3.5.2 Particle Size Distribution of Sediment in the Study Area 3.49 3.5.3 Chemical Characteristics of Sediment in Study Area 3.49 3.5.4 Organic Carbon and Nutrient Content in Sediment 3.50 3.5.5 Heavy Metal content in the Sediment 3.50 3.5.6 Heavy Metals Content in the Sediment by using (TCLP) 3.51 3.5.7 Hydrocarbons and Oil and Grease Content in Sediments 3.51 3.6.1 Soil Sampling Locations 3.67 3.6.2 Textural Class of Soil in the Study Area 3.67 3.6.3 Physical Characteristics of Soil in the Study Area 3.68

xxii


3.6.4 Chemical Characteristics of Soil Extract in the Study Area 3.68 3.6.5 Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) Exchangeable Cations

Content and Exchangeable Sodium Percentage (ESP) of Soils in Study Area 3.69

3.6.6 Relationship of CEC with Productivity 3.69 3.6.7 Relationship of CEC with Adsorptivity 3.69 3.6.8 Fertility Status of Soils in Study Area 3.70 3.6.9 Heavy Metals Content of Soil in Study Area 3.71 3.6.10 Microbiological Characteristics of Soil in Study Area 3.71 3.6.11 Land Use Pattern 3.72 3.6.12 Land use Land cover of the proposed area of Port at Tadari

(Tadadi) Karwar Karnataka. (3 May 2010, 10 Km radius) 3.73 3.7.1 Details of Biological Sampling Locations with Agricultural Crop 3.102 3.7.2 List of Forest Flora - Common Trees of Honnavar Division (Kumta) 3.103 3.7.3 List of Common Shrubs and Climbers of Honnavar division (Kumta) 3.108 3.7.4 List of Common Bamboos and Canes - Honnavar division

near Kumta 3.110 3.7.5 Characteristics of Trees - Morba Forest 3.111 3.7.6 Characteristics of Trees - Mithal Gazani Forest 3.111 3.7.7 Characteristics of Trees - Hiregutti Forest 3.112 3.7.8 Characteristics of Trees - Gokrna Forest 3.112 3.7.9 Characteristics of Trees - Bargi Gazal Forest 3.113

3.7.10 Characteristics of Trees - Hittal Makki Forest 3.113 3.7.11 Characteristics of Trees - Kimmani Forest 3.113 3.7.12 Characteristics of Trees - Yennamadi Forest 3.114 3.7.13 Characteristics of Trees - Korebail Forest 3.114 3.7.14 Characteristics of Trees - Khurigadda Forest 3.114 3.7.15 Characteristics of Trees - Haskari Forest 3.115 3.7.16 Characteristics of Trees - Balole Forest 3.115

xxiii


3.7.17 Characteristics of Trees -Yettinbail Forest 3.115 3.7.18 Characteristics of Trees - Madangeri Forest 3.116 3.7.19 Simpson’s Diversity Index 3.116

3.7.20 List of Medicinal Plants recorded in Conservation Area (MPCA) at Devimane - Honnavar division 3.117 3.7.21 List of Common Wild animals of Honnavar division (Kumta) 3.122 3.7.22 List of Common Birds of Honnavar Division (Kumta) 3.123 3.7.23 Hotspots of Uttar Kannada District (Kumta) 3.128

3.7.24 Fish Production by Different Types of Boats at Tadadi

Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007) – Kumta 3.129 3.7.25 Fish Production at Kumta Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007) 3.130 3.8.1 Village Location: Socioeconomic Survey 3.147 3.8.2 Summary of Demographic Structure of Study Area 3.148 3.8.3 Demographic structure of study area 3.149 3.6.4 Infrastructure Resource Base of the Study Area 3.152 3.8.5 Employment Pattern of the Study Area 3.155 3.8.6 (a) Health Statistics - Gokarna (2009-2010) 3.156 3.8.6 (b) Health Statistics - Gokarna (From Jan 2010 to June 2010) 3.156 3.8.7(a) Information on Fisherman 3.157 3.8.7 (b) Fisherman Houshold Census – 2010 (Ankola Taluk) 3.157 3.8.7(c) Fisheries Co-operative Society 3.157 3.8.8 Quality of Life Existing in the Villages surveyed 3.158 4.2.1 Meteorological data used for Air Quality Predictions 4.15 4.2.2 Stack Details with Pollutant Emission Rate 4.16 4.3.1 Typical Noise from Construction Equipment & Machinery 4.22 4.7.1 Prediction of Likely Impacts on Socio-economic Environment 4.60 4.7.2 Expected Change in Subjective and Cumulative Quality of Life

Before and After EMP & Welfare Measures 4.61

xxiv


5.1 Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan : Construction Phase 5.6

5.2 Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan : Operation Phase 5.8 6.1 Plant Species for Greenbelt Development at Port 6.37 9.1 Some edible species of bivalves in India 9.28 9.2 Chemical composition of a few important edible Indian Bivalves 9.29 9.3 Medicinal uses of Molluscs 9.29 9.4 Species-wise habitat and distribution of edible bivalves in Aghanashini estuary and elsewhere in India 9.30 9.5 Taxonomic hierarchy of Paphia malabarica (Chenmitz),

Katelysia opima (Gmelin), Meretrix meretrix (Linne), M. casta, Villorita cyprinoides (Gray.), Perna viridis (Linne), Area granosa (Lamarek), Crassostrea sp. 9.31

9.6 Village-wise estimated number of bivalve collecting (BC)

households (HH) and number of individuals involved in bivalve harvesting 9.32

9.7 Village and season-wise average quantity (Kg. wet weight

with shells) of bivalves harvested per day 9.33 9.8 (a) Village and season-wise average quantity of bivalves

harvested (in Kg. wet weight with shells) by men 9.34 9.8 (b) Village and season-wise average quantity of bivalves

harvested (in Kg. wet weight with shells) by men 9.35 9.9 Village and season and gender-wise income per year

from bivalve collection 9.36 9.10 Village-wise income (Rs.) per year from shell sale 9.37 9.11 Village-wise income (Rs.) per year from dried meat sale 9.38 10.1 Projected Total Traffic Generated at the Tadadi Port 10.11 12.1 Wind Speed (m/s) Vs. Annual Exceedance Probability 12.9

Executive Summary

1.0 Introduction

Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited

(KSIIDC) has proposed to develop a port at Tadadi. The port is to be constructed in the

PPP (Public Private Partnership) mode on DBFOT (Design, Build, Finance, Operate &

Transfer) basis. The port is being designed to handle about 62.360 MTPA of Cargo.

For development of port at Tadadi, the Karnataka Industrial Area Development

Board (KIADB) had acquired a total of about 1416 acres (560 hectares) of land in 1970s.

The land acquired from different villages is as follows:

Sr. No. Village Acres Guntas

1 Hilalmakki 288 36

2 Yemme Madi 126 26

3 Midla gazani 364 03

4 Hiregult 475 30

5 Morba 151 01

6 Torke 12 06

1.1 Project Setting

The proposed port at Tadadi will be located at latitude 14032.40’ and longitude

74022.03’E. The backwaters of the river have a huge waterfront area, which make the

location a natural harbour. At present, it is a fair weather lightrage fishing port situated on

the estuary of the Aghanashini River at a distance of about 50 km from Karwar, about 24

km from Belekeri and approximately 35 km from Honnavar.

The Konkan Railway Line and National Highway (NH-66) pass very close to

the port site. The nearest station on the Konkan Railway line is Ankola, which is at a

distance of about 25 km from Tadadi.

Executive Summary

E-2

1.2 Port Details based on Preliminary Design

1.2.1 Traffic/ Cargo Handling

The port of Tadadi is proposed to start its activities with traffic of 2.87 million

tonnes in the year 2015-16. Over the following years, this volume of traffic will increase

until the year 2040-42, where it is estimated to reach 62.36 million tonnes. For rail, it is

estimated to reach 27.952 million tonnes in 2040-41.

Sea ports are important gateways for effective trading amongst countries.

Currently there is a huge gap between available capacities of port in the State vis-à-vis

the demand for service development of the port at Tadri. The port should be strategically

located so as to provide the required advantages of land. Since the Bellary-Hospet region

is rich in iron ore mines and most of the produced ore is exported out of the country, this

area has been considered as the hinterland for the analysis. The port at Tadri could form

a gateway for trade in the Bellary-Hospet region to handle cargo transport facilities of

ultimate capacity of 50.51 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of coal and iron ore as well

as 11.85 MTPA of steel products, general cargo and containers as under.

Iron Ore Export - 27.17 MTPA

Coal Import - 23.34 MTPA

Steel Products Export - 8.78 MTPA

General Cargo and Containers - 3.07 MTPA

To meet this requirement, seven berths are proposed as under.

Iron ore export - 2 berths

Coal import - 2 berths

Steel products export - 2 berths

General Cargo and containers - 1 berth

Tadadi port has been designed to have seven berths as under.

Two berths for export of iron ore

Two berths for import of coal

Two multipurpose berths for export of steel products

One multipurpose berth for general cargo and containers

Executive Summary

E-3

The berths will be an open type R.C.C (M 40 Grade) bored cast in situ piles

socketed into hard rock. The super structure will be R.C.C beam and slab construction.

1.2.2 Dimension of Berth

The berth will be an ‘L’ shaped structure with a long arm of four berths of total

length of 1,192 m long for handling of iron ore and coal capable of handling 100,000 DWT

bulk carriers and a short arm of 866 m long for handling multipurpose cargo vessels of

40,000 DWT (steel products, general cargo and containers). However, the berth

structures have been designed to accommodate 100,000 DWT vessels in the future.

1.3 Purpose of EIA

EIA is an exercise to be carried out before any project or major activity is

undertaken to ensure that it will not in any way affect the environment on either a short-

term or a long-term basis. Any development endeavour requires not only the analysis of

the need of the project, the monetary costs and benefits involved but also most

importantly, it requires a consideration and detailed assessment of the effect of the

proposed developmental activity on the environment.

Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructure Development Corporation

(KSIIDC) Ltd. has committed that it will implement the proposed project in a manner

consistent with sustainable development, which would be based on openness,

cooperation and in consultation with local communities. The approach and methodology

in executing this EIA has been to comply with Indian national legislation, standards,

guidelines and regulatory requirements.

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for ports and harbours is a

mandatory requirement as per the Ministry of Environmental and Forest (MoEF) EIA

Notification of September 14, 2006 and is also governed under CRZ Notification of

February 1991 (as amended on January 25, 2005 and in 2011). Port and Harbour

projects fall under activity No. 7(e) and handling of cargo greater than 5 Million Tonnes

Per Annum are classified as category 'A'.

Karnataka State Industrial and Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited

(KSIIDC) retained CSIR-National Environmental Engineering Research Institute (NEERI),

Nagpur to undertake Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study, which will include

baseline data for various environments components, viz. air, noise, water, land, biological

environment and socio-economic to delineate Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to

ultimately minimize the adverse impacts based on studies of one season.

Executive Summary

E-4

2.0 Baseline Environmental Quality Status

The baseline environmental quality was assessed for various components of

the environment, viz. air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-economic through field

studies within the impact zone. The baseline environmental quality was assessed during

October-November 2010 for post monsoon season in the study area of 10 km radial

distance from the proposed project site, in support with the secondary data collection

within the 15 km radial distance from the proposed project site.

2.1 Air Environment

The 24 hourly wind rose diagram for post monsoon season indicates that the

predominant winds are from east and west direction with speed ranging between 1.0 m/s

and 3.5 m/s. Accordingly, the impact zone will be spread over W-SE-NE-E sector during

the post monsoon season.

Keeping in view the prevailing meteorological conditions for the study area, air

quality monitoring at 10 locations was conducted following the CPCB guidelines. At all the

sampling locations, PM10 and PM2.5 as well as gaseous pollutants like SO2, NOX, NH3 and

heavy metals (Pb, Ni, As), CO, Benzene, Hydrocarbon, Benzo-a-pyrene (BaP) were

monitored within the study area. The data collected was subjected to statistical analysis

for finding out the range (minimum-maximum), average and standard deviation.

The 24 hourly averaged particulate matter (PM10 and PM2.5) concentrations in

the rural/residential areas were observed to be 49-62 µg/m3 for PM10 and 23-28 µg/m3 for

PM2.5. The values of all the parameters were found to be well within the CPCB limits,

prescribed in the National Ambient Air Quality Standard notified in November 2009.

2.2 Noise Environment

The spot noise levels were monitored at residential, commercial, silence zones

and roadside in the study area. The noise levels observed during day and night time

varied in the range of 39-47 dBA and 33-41 dBA respectively in the residential area,

whereas in the commercial zone, the noise levels varied from 44-56 dBA and 40-48 dBA

during day and night times respectively. The noise levels in the silence zones (school,

temple and hospitals) were found closer to those observed elsewhere in the villages and

were observed in the range of 32-40 dBA and 25-35 dBA during day and night time

respectively. The noise levels monitored on roadside during day and night time ranged

between 48-60 dBA and 42-55 dBA respectively. A higher noise level at road crossing of

Executive Summary

E-5

NH-66 is attributed to vehicular movement. The noise levels in general are observed to

be well within the stipulated standards of CPCB.

2.3 Water Environment

2.3.1 Hydraulic Data

The tides at the site are semi-diurnal, which means that the tidal cycle is

approximately of 12 hours. There are two types of tides: high tides and low tides.

According to the information from the Navigation chart number 2024 the main tide levels

are as follows:

MHHW (Mean Highest High Water): + 1.8 m above CD (Chart Datum)

MLHW (Mean Lowest High Water): + 1.7 m above CD

MSL (Mean Sea Level): + 1.2 m above CD

MHLW (Mean Highest Low Water): + 1.0 m above CD

MLLW (Mean Lowest Low Water): + 0.4 m above CD

GTS Bench Mark was established with brass plate fixed on cement concrete,

0.4m below ground level in premises of Tadadi port office building. The MSL value of this

BM is RL: 1.556 m (which means + 2.756 m CD)

2.3.2 Bathymetric and Geophysical Surveys

From the Bathymetric and Geophysical survey, it is noted that the offshore

area of the sea bottom is quite regular and flat with gentle slopes of 1:300 to 1:500. The

(-) 10 m CD depth is located approximately 3000 m from the coastline and the (-) 20 m

CD is located at about 8000 m from coastline. The depth of the sea-bed gradually varies

from the 5 m contour in the North-Eastern corner to (-) 21 m CD on the South-Western

boundary of the offshore block. The maximum water depth of (-) 21.4 m CD is observed

along South Western boundary while the minimum water depth of (-) 3.9 m CD is noted in

the North-Eastern corner. Sea-bed features include fine sediments, coarse to very coarse

sediments, boulders, cobbles and scar marks. A minor rocky patch is exposed on the

sea-bed in the North East corner of the block.

The seabed sediment grain size distribution pattern reflects the exposure of

the sea-bed to winnowing process which is driven by the stress put on the sea bed by sea

wind, tidal currents and by non-directional or oscillatory forms of winds and waves. The

morphological features within the survey area indicate that there is constant reworking of

Executive Summary

E-6

sediment by the tidal action. Fine-grained clay sediment was observed on the sea floor

throughout the offshore survey block. The clay sediment also contains gravel fraction

consisting of shell fragment of various sizes in some places.

At the river estuary, there exist some shallow areas that emerge at the lowest

low tides. The bathymetric contours of the inner block reveal a considerable steep slope

along the channel of the proposed Tadadi port, oriented Northwest-Southeast within the

Tadadi creek. The sea-bed exhibits a very gentle to negligible slope in the areas away

from the channel on both sides. The depth of water column varies from negative values to

5 m. The sediments vary from sand to cobbles and gravel with bioclasts.

2.3.3 Current

The general currents in the area are of monsoonal origin but tend to follow the

trend of the coast in December and January. Currents are North-Westerly with velocity

rate up to 1 knot (1 knot=0.51 m/s). In July and August, when South-West monsoon is

well established, South-Easterly current sets in when rates of up to 2 knots are

experienced.

The existing currents at the mouth of the Aghanashini River (very close to the

proposed Tadadi port location) have a double component or origin: the flow of the river

itself and the tides. Moreover the speed of the current component due to the river

depends directly on the flow carried, getting its maximum during the rainy season.

2.3.4 Waves

The wave’s distribution along the year present two clear periods: the calm/fair

from (November-April) and rough (corresponding to the South-West monsoon). The

significant wave height in the rough period exceeds 1 m for more than 90% of the time

and it exceeds 2.5 m for 60-80% of time. During the fair period the significant wave height

seldom exceeds 1.58 m and 8% of the time the height is less than 1.2 m and the median

significant height is about 0.8 m.

2.3.5 Dredging Requirement & Quantity

Based on the results of the bathymetric survey and the navigation channel

dimension the total dredging quantity was estimated to be about 50 million m3, out of

which about 27 million m3 corresponds to the outer navigation channel and about

23 million m3 to the inner navigation channel & turning circles.

Executive Summary

E-7

Near the location of the proposed site, the bed was found at a depth of (-) 0.80

m CD and at the proposed location of the multipurpose terminal berth, the depth

observed was from (-) 0.40 to (-) 1.2 m CD. To handle vessels of 1,00,000 DWT, the

water depth needs to be increased to (-) 16 m CD allowing enough keel clearance. Hence

a dredging depth of (-) 16 m CD has to be maintained along the inner channel and

mooring area to accommodate 1,00,000 DWT Vessels. The multipurpose berth is

currently expected to receive 40,000 DWT vessels, for which the draft is to be increased

to (-) 14.5 m CD allowing enough keel clearance. Based on the results of the bathymetric

survey, the total dredging quality for the mooring area is estimated to be about

10 million m3.

From the analysis of results of the boreholes falling in the area of dredging, the

quantity of dredging of hard material worked out to be about 69,00,000 m3. Out of the

total dredged material of about 5,00,00,000 m3, about 1,80,00,000 m3 will be used for the

purpose of reclamation and the balance is proposed to be disposed offshore.

2.3.6 Surface Water

2.3.6.1 Sea and Estuary Water

A total of 18 water samples were collected, which included 8 were surface

water samples [3 from Arabian Sea & 5 from Aghanashini river estuary water], and 10

ground water samples (3 from dug wells & 7 from bore wells).

The pH, Temperature, Turbidity and Total Suspended Solid ranged from 6.5-

7.5, 26-300C, <1-9 NTU and 15-104 mg/l respectively in sea water samples. Inorganic

parameters like Chloride, Total Alkalinity, Sulphate and Total Salinity were in the range of

10598-21769 mg/l, 106-122 mg/l, 342-390 mg/l, 18-66% respectively. DO and BOD were

found to be in the range of 2.9-6.8 mg/l and <5 mg/l respectively. Nitrate-nitrogen and

total phosphate were found to be in the range 0.014-0.032, 0.05-0.27 mg/l respectively.

Surface water contained 4.8-13.2 mg/l oil & grease and 0.12-2.46 mg/l hydrocarbon. The

heavy metals contents were within permissible limit. Shannon Wiener Diversity Index

(SWDI) values for phytoplanktons and zooplanktons varied from 0.9 to 1.9 indicating

moderate productivity. The Shannon-Weiner diversity represents the proportion of

species abundance in the population. It’s being at maximum when all species occur in

similar number of individuals and the lowest when the sample contains one species. So,

observed values reflect that in dug wells meio-benthos were more diverse than macro

benthos and phytoplanktons respectively.

Executive Summary

E-8

2.3.6.2 Ground Water

The pH, Temperature, Turbidity, Total Suspended Solids and Conductivity of

surface water varied in the range of 5.7-7.8, 28-310C, <1-3 NTU, 70-180 mg/l and 100-

315 us/cm respectively in ground water (Dug well and Bore well). Total Dissolved Solids,

Total Hardness, Chloride; Sulfate, Sodium, and Potassium were found in the range of 70-

180 mg/l, 16-92 mg/l, 4-30 mg/l, 8-19 mg/l, 8-59 mg/l and 1-5 mg/l respectively. In ground

water samples, DO and COD were observed in the range of 2.8-6.2 mg/l and 12-64 mg/l

respectively. Nitrate as Nitrogen and total phosphate were found in range of ND-0.08 mg/l

and 0.01-0.52 mg/l. Nickel, Lead, Iron, Manganese and Zinc concentration were reported

to be in the range of 0.38-6.05 mg/l, 0.03-0.13 mg/l, ND-7.56 mg/l, ND-0.07 mg/l, ND-0.26

mg/l respectively. In the ground water of dug well and bore well, total coliforms and fecal

coliforms varied between 65-145 CFU/100 ml and ND-54 CFU/100 ml respectively. The

SWDI values for phytoplankton and zooplankton were 0.9-1.5 and 0-1.5 respectively,

indicated poor to moderate productivity.

2.3.6.3 Sediment Quality

Several contaminants on entering the aquatic environment are adsorbed by

suspended solids in water and are transported to the sediment. Thus the sediment of

area received anthropogenic pollutants such as trace metals, organics etc. The collected

sediment samples from Sea, Estuary and Aghanashini river were analyzed. The data

indicated that the particle sizes <0.002mm and 0.02-0.022 mm were prominent. pH of the

sediment was neutral to slightly alkaline and was observed in the range of 7.10-7.83. The

sediment samples were strongly saline in nature (7.30-9.20 dS/m).

The dissolved solids ranged between 4672 to 5760 mg/l. Organic carbon

content in sediment was observed in the range of 0.24-1.60 %. Total nitrogen, Total

Phosphorus and Total Potassium varied from 0.12-0.34%, 0.097-0.169% and 0.018-

0.058% respectively. Organic Carbon content showed lower to higher concentrations

(0.24-1.60%). Concentration of heavy metal (Ni, Cd, Cr, Pb, Fe, Mn, Zn and Co by TCLP

method) was observed as Ni: 0.096-0.115 mg/l, Cd: 0.011-0.017 mg/l, Cu: 0.007-0.025

mg/l, Fe: 6.66-18.13 mg/l, Mn: 3.781-4.361 mg/l, Zn: 0.077-0.114 mg/l, Co: 0.054-0.064

mg/l respectively, whereas, Cr and Pb was not found in the sediment samples. Oil &

grease and hydrocarbon were found in the range of 0.22-0.83 mg/kg and 0.14-0.53 mg/kg

respectively.

Executive Summary

E-9

2.4 Land Environment

2.4.1 Land Use Pattern

The land use pattern in different villages of the study area is dominated by rain

fed area i.e. 31.89% followed by 7.46% irrigated land, 27.44% forest land, 18.32 %

cultivable waste land and 14.89% non cultivable wasteland.

2.4.2 Cropping Pattern

Agriculture being the main occupation in the State, around 65% of the people

of Karnataka are engaged in agriculture and other related agricultural occupation. Coastal

Karnataka is a land of many climates and varieties of soils, providing scope for much

diversity in agriculture. Rice is the popular cropping system in irrigated lands in humid and

coastal ecosystems of Karnataka. Coastal region too has given more importance to the

growing of commercial crops. Locals also grow Ragi (finger millet), sugarcane in small

portions on their agriculture lands. Most of the farmers grow crops like paddy, ragi,

cashewnut jowar, bajra, maize and other cereals and pulses like gram; oilseed crops like

coconut, ground nut, sunflower, etc. Non-food crops like areca nut sugarcane, tobacco,

cotton, etc., are also grown here. Locals prefer growing green vegetables for personal

and commercial purpose in their crop lands.

2.4.3 Soil Characteristics

Physical Properties

In the study area, sandy loam is the prominent soil texture followed by clay,

and sandy clay loam. The clay content in the soils varied from 6.2 to 45.2%. The bulk

density was found to be in the range of 1.20-1.43 g/cm3, which is considered as

moderately good. The porosity and water holding capacity of soil was found in the range

of 38.80-48.84 % and 18.20-55.43% respectively.

Chemical Properties

pH of the soil samples was observed in the range of 4.9-6.1, whereas,

Electrical conductivity was in the range of 0.05-0.21 dS/m. Soils are normal with Calcium,

Magnesium, Sodium and Potassium concentrations in the range of 0.11-0.39 meq/l,

0.015-0.158 meq/l, 0.001-0.007 meq/l and 0.011-0.196 meq/l respectively.

The soil had low to high cation exchange capacity. Exchangeable cations,

Ca++ and Mg++ were found in the range of 2.2-3.6 cmol(p+) kg-1 and 1.2-1.8 cmol(p+) kg-1

of soil respectively. Na+ and K+ were in the range of 0.02-0.18 cmol(p+) kg-1 and 0.08-

Executive Summary

E-10

0.70 cmol(p+) kg-1 of soil respectively. Exchangeable Sodium percentage was in the

range of 0.17-1.96, and soils were observed normal with respect to alkalinity. The

productivity of the soils is very low to moderate on the basis of cation exchange capacity.

Organic Carbon, available Nitrogen, Phosphorous and Potassium were

observed in the range of 0.18-0.75%, 200-297 kg/ha, 10.3-16.5 kg/ha and 113-118 kg/ha

respectively. The soils are poor to medium with respect to the Organic Carbon content,

whereas fertility of soil is poor with respect to available Nitrogen, Phosphorus and

Potassium. The heavy metals contents in the soil are normal. Total viable microbial

population per gram of soil varied from 6-60 x 106 CFU. Different micro floras observed

per gram of soil were fungi (4-53 x 106 CFU), Actinomycetes (1-20 x 104 CFU), Rhizobium

(1-10 x 104 CFU) and Azotobacter (1-12 x 104 CFU).

2.4.4 Remote Sensing Studies

Remote sensing technology has emerged as a powerful tool in providing

reliable information on various natural resources at different levels of details in a spatial

format. It has played an important role in effective mapping and periodic monitoring of

natural resources including environment. Remote sensing data of May 30, 2010 was used

to estimate the land use/ land cover of the study area. The land-use/ land-cover

classification of the 10 km radius study area revels that as much as 38.82% area is

occupied by sea On landside, the land-use classification is: Agriculture: 11.44%, Forests:

15.02%, Barren land: 1.75%, Fallow land: 18.07%, Built-up land: 0.70%, river: 4.58%,

saltpans: 0.64%, creek land: 2.22%, mangrove: 0.87% and 5.77% other water bodies

such as wetland/ submerged area: 5.77% .

2.5 Biological Environment

The study area comes under Uttar Kannada District, which is known for its

dense forests, covering about 80% of the area of the district. Depending on phyto-

sociological conditions and other ecological factors, the forests of the Uttar Kannada are

broadly divided into moist and dry types.

The Moist Forest type is subdivided into Evergreen, Semi evergreen and Moist

deciduous types in the study area. The dry type is divided into dry deciduous and thorny

forest. These forests have semi evergreen species in the upper canopy and evergreen in

the lower storey. These forests have predominance of bamboo. On the red soil, xylia is

present.

Executive Summary

E-11

2.5.1 Biodiversity

Floral biodiversity of the area comprises of several species of medicinal and

aromatic plants. However, there was no commercial utilization of these plants. Major

reasons are lack of awareness about the medicinal value of plants and lack of market

access. The daily requirement of local inhabitants for fuel wood is fulfilled from their

orchards, agro-forests and nearby forests. Every household is having a kitchen garden

and orchard comprising of vegetables, fruit trees and some medicinal plants. The major

species observed are:

Evergreen species: Dipterocarpus indicus, Diospyros candolleana,

Artocarpus hirsutum, Vateria indica, Hoppea intergrifolia, Memecylon umbellatum,

Mangifera indica, Actinodaphne agustifolia, Holigarna grahmie, and Calamus rotang.

Semi evergreen species: Cinnamomum malabaricum, Holigarna arnottiana,

Dalbergia latifolia, Ficus spp., Pterocarpus marsupium, and Aglaia roxbhurgiana.

Moist deciduous species: Terminalia paniculata, Terminalia tomentosa,

Xylia xylocarpa Careya arborea, Spondias spp., Tectona grandis, Lagerstroemia

parviflora, Dillenia pentagyna, Strychnos nuxvomica, and Bambusa arundinaceae.

Dry deciduous species: Acacia catechu, Sepium insigne, Anoegissus spp.,

Bauhinia racemosa, and Bombax ceiba.

Plantations: Tectona grandis, Areca catechu, Cocos nucifera, Casuarina

equisetifolia, Acacia auriculiformis, Acacia nilotica, and Eucalyptus sp.

2.5.2 Wetland Flora

The study area is covered with 15.02 % forest. The estuarine systems support

fisheries of great regional importance. The mangroves forests provide a wide range of

useful forest product. The study area is located on seashore line of Arabian Sea. Out of

the total study area of 314 km2, about 191 km2 area is having terrestrial habitat, which is

rich in flora and fauna. Fisheries and agriculture are the main occupation and source of

livelihood for local people. Total 14 sampling locations were selected for in-depth

exploration of floral biodiversity based on topography, landuse, vegetation pattern etc. In

the study area studied, 211 plant species were recorded, comprising 145 trees, 61

shrubs, and 5 bamboos. In the study area, 156 medicinal plants were recorded, of which

61 plants are known for their peculiar medicinal values. Further, 20 species of mangroves

belonging to 7 families were identified.

Executive Summary

E-12

Schoenoplectus lateriflorus was the most widely occurring species followed by

Cyperus halpan, and Geissaspis cristata. Cyperus halpan has 2 sub-species C.

halpan subsp. halpan and C.halpan subsp. juncoides. Species of Schoenoplectus and C.

halpan are found in shallow temporary waters, fringes of permanent water bodies and in

slow running streams. G. cristata occurs mostly in wet soils along the marshes, ponds

and river banks and hence, it is commonly observed in many localities. These were

associated with species of Lindernia, Fimbristylis, Eriocaulon, etc. Deeper waters were

mostly harbored by species of Nymphea, Nymphoides and other rooted floating species.

2.5.3 Mammals

The commonly found mammals in the study area were Spotted Dear (Chital)

(Axix axis), Jungle Cat (Felis chaus), Common Langur (Presbytis entellus), Leopard (Felis

bengalensis), Mongoos (Anropunctatus species) etc.

2.5.4 Birds

Due to prevailing extreme climatic conditions, sighting and recording the

presence of birds was restricted to only 55 bird-species. This included birds of prey and

common passerine species. Dominant birds spotted at remaining sites were spotted dove

and Jungle Crow. Common birds observed at various places were Cattle egret, Indian

Parakeet, Nightjar & Common Babbler, Common Swift, Large Egret, Little Cormorant.

2.5.5 Insects

The termites are a group of eusocial insects usually classified at the taxonomic

rank of order Isopteran. Along with ants and some bees and wasps which are all placed

in separate order hymenoptera were recorded. Termites are major detrivores, particularly

in the subtropical and tropical region and their recycling of wood and other plant matter is

of considerable ecological importance.

2.5.6 Agriculture

In the order of importance the main agriculture crops are paddy, coconut, ragi

and areca nut. Betel nut, black pepper and cardamoms are other prominent cash crop

species. Sandalwood carving is a famous craft for which this tract is well known and

Sandalwood trees are also present in the area.

2.5.7 Marketable Product

The marketable products consist of timber, firewood, bamboos and minor

forest products such as Catechu (Katha), Honey and Wax, Shikakai Pods, Hylgal Seeds,

Executive Summary

E-13

Jumri leaves, Wild pepper, Dalchinni bark, Canes, halamaddi and Cashew nut. The most

common species of timber extracted are Teak (Tectona grandis), Sisam (Dalbergia

sissoo), Honne Pterocarpus marsupium), Matti (Terminalia elliptica), Nandi (Spathodea

campanulata), Kalam (Mitragyna parvifolia), Kindal (Terminalia paniculata), Heddi,

Bharangi (Clerodendron serration), Surhonne, Dhaman (Grewia tiliifolia), Neral, Lare,

Bilakhambi and Sagadi.

2.5.8 Fisheries Resources

Tadadi and Kumta are the major fish landing centres in the study area with

annual total fish production of 3265 MT and 389 MT respectively. Trash fishes are used

for making poultry food and manures. The dominant fish species observed at market

place of Kumata are Oil sardines, Mackerels, Carrangids, Pomfrets and Seer fishes.

2.5.9 Shell Mine

Nearly 500 m from the Tadadi Jetty, sea-shells mining was being done by M/s

Gaonkar. The basic purpose of the mine was to drain sea-shells and Molluscan species

found near seashore as raw material. Sea-shells are crushed for separating flesh and

shells. The flesh is used for making fish & poultry food, and the dead shells were used for

making sweet lime.

2.6 Socio-economic Environment

The socio-economic profile of 21 villages falling in the study area was

analyzed with respect to demography, infrastructural facilities, economy, health, literacy,

cultural and aesthetic attributes. The demographic structure of the study area is given

below:

Total population of the region as per 2001 census is 68,390 out of

which 34,539 are male and 33,851 are female

Total number of households in the region are 13,140

Sex ratio (number of female per thousand male) in the region is 980;

this shows that male population is higher in the region as compared to

the female

Out of the total population, SC and ST populations are 6.41 % and

0.06% respectively

Executive Summary

E-14

Total main workers are worked out to about 30.25 %, 10.88 % comes

under marginal worker category and 58.86 % belongs to non workers

category

Literacy rate of the population in the study area is about 68.85%

The socio-economic indicators for QoL assessment are income, employment

and working conditions, housing, food, clothing, water supply, sanitation, health, energy,

transportation, communication, education, environment and pollution, recreation, social

security and human rights.

Based on the status of various infrastructure and amenities present in the

surveyed villages, quality of life index was estimated to be satisfactory.

3.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts

3.1 Air Environment

In order to predict Ground Level Concentration (GLC’s) of SO2, NOX and PM10

for different temporal variations during the construction and operational phase, Fugitive

Dust Model (FDM), SCREEN-3 and CALINE-4 models were used.

3.1.1 Impacts during Construction Phase

The particulate emission and meteorological data were used for predictions.

The 24 hourly average maximum GLCs of PM10 were found to be 72.4 µg/m3. The

maximum GLC is less than the NAAQS for PM10 (100 µg/m3). As construction is a

temporary activity the impacts, will die down soon.

3.1.2 Impacts during Operation Phase

(a) Ships/Vessels and Dock/Port operations

The air pollution impact due to ships movement and berthing at the proposed

berths (7 nos.) in the Tadadi port on air environment is studied. The berths are designed

for operating ships with capacity ranging from 40,000 DWT to 100,000 DWT. It is

assumed that all 7 berths will be occupied with one ship each with two auxiliary engines

and are under operation continuously during berthing. The pollutant emissions from the

ships are estimated based on the emission factors for the pollutants SO2, NOx and PM10

with ships having four main (> 2000 KW) and four auxiliary (600 KW) engines in operation

moving with medium speed (SKM, 2007: Air quality impact assessment; DEH, 2001;

National pollutant inventory emission estimation technique manual for marine operations

Executive Summary

E-15

v1.1). The estimated emissions of SO2, NOx and PM10 from 7 ships simultaneously

berthed at all berths along with the standard stack characteristics of auxiliary engines

(SKM, 2004: Port botany upgrade EIS-Air quality impact assessment commission of

inquiry) and the emissions of SO2, NOx and PM10 from different dock/port operations are

considered for computing the incremental ground level concentrations of pollutants.

The 24 hrly maximum GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8

µg/m3 and 3.0 g/m3 respectively due to simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each

berth along with dock/port operations during post-monsoon season. The predicted 24

hourly GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are found to be less than the 24 hourly

concentrations of 228 µg/m3 for SO2 and 50 µg/m3 as given in ground level impact

assessment criteria (DECC, 2005; Approved methods for the modeling and assessment

of air pollutants in new South Wales, ISBN 1 74137 488 X). However, the 24 hourly

concentrations of NOx are found to be higher than the ground level impact assessment

criteria of 98 µg/m3.

(b) Vehicles Movement on State Highway (SH)

Apart from the Ship and dock emissions, movement of vehicles and trucks will

result in exhaust emissions as well as fugitive emissions and re-suspension of road dust.

Around 4000 truck trips will be in operation per day to transport material from the

proposed port on SH-63 with existing lane (2 lanes), which will be increased to about

12000 truck trips per day after widening of road to 4 lanes. CALINE-4, a line source

model developed by California Transport Department is used to predict the pollutant

concentrations from mobile sources that transport materials, etc. It is found that the 1-

hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10 and CO are 74 µg/m3, 46 µg/m3

and 76 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities on SH-63 with existing 2-lane

road. However, the 1-hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10 and CO are

185 µg/m3, 115 µg/m3 and 192 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities on SH-63

with 2+2-lanes or 4-lane road. The pollutant concentrations on 24-hourly basis will be less

than the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS).

The baseline maximum concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 were monitored

to be 8 µg/m3, 18 µg/m3 and 65 µg/m3 respectively near the proposed site. The

incremental concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at berths and

dock/port operations would be 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8 µg/m3 and 3.0 µg/m3 on 24- hourly

basis. The cumulative concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at

Executive Summary

E-16

berths and dock/port operations superimposed over the baseline values would be

36.4 µg/m3, 144.8 µg/m3 and 68.0 µg/m3 on 24 hourly basis.



The major noise generating sources will be DG sets, crusher excavators,

crane, blasting, concrete mixer / dredgers etc., which produce noise level in the range of

70-90 dBA. Depending upon the placement, operation schedules etc., these activities at

the site are likely to increase the background noise levels by 2-3 dBA at distance of 0.5

km. Since the major human settlements are more than 2.5 km away from the site, hence,

there will not be any impact of noise on the community.

3.2.2 Impacts during Operational Phase

The cumulative noise levels due to the combined operation of booster pumps,

power generating units, dredgers, ships loading/unloading and generators at the port

could be in the range of 70-75 dBA, which is predicted to be 50 dBA at a distance of 250

m and 44 dBA at a distance of 500 m from the sources. Thus there will be an incremental

noise level of 1-2 dBA over the baseline at a distance of 500 m from the proposed on-

shore terminals. As no major settlement is located within 2.5 km from the storage

terminals, impact of noise is not envisaged on the community.

3.2.3 Noise due to Transportation

The equivalent noise level due to traffic is estimated using FHWA (Federal

Highway Administration) Traffic Noise Model. It is predicted that maximum contribution of

vehicles during construction period at 10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road will be

about 60 dBA and 56 dBA respectively. Considering the background noise level of 60

dBA along the roads, the incremental noise level will be 1-2 dBA. There may be marginal

increase in noise level in residential area situated at 100 m, and beyond it will be

insignificant.

3.2.4 Impact of Noise on Occupational Community Health

Sound pressure level (Leq) generated by various equipment, averaged over 8

hours is used to describe noise exposure in work place environment. The damage risk

criteria for hearing ascertained by CPCB and OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health

Administration) stipulate that the noise level upto 90 dBA are acceptable for 8 hour

exposure per day.

Executive Summary

E-17


The impacts on water environment typical to a port and harbor project can be

classified into two broad categories.

Resource Availability

The nearest water source identified is from the river Ganga Valli that is within

8 km from the Tadadi port. The total consumption will be about 1.5 lakhs liters per day.

Marine Ecology

The location of port affects aquatic fauna and flora through changes of water

quality, coastal hydrology and bottom contamination. Impact on bottom biota is usually

linked to a reduction in fishery resources. Deteriorations of water quality usually give rise

to change in biota. The proposed construction is mainly on landward side where the land

is under water.


Construction work in water would cause re-suspension of sediment and turbid

water. Re-suspension of sediments in water leads to an increase in the level of

suspended solid (SS) and the concentration of organic matter possibly to toxic or harmful

levels. It also reduces sunlight penetration. Work vessels are a possible cause of oil spills

and leakage of other substances into water.

Dredging may lead to changes in current pattern and flow as well as salt

wedge intrusions into river mouth or littoral drifts in the shore zone. Disposal of dredged

material on land/sea may possibly cause leakage of harmful substances. Dredging

activity disturbs bottom sediments and induces re-suspension of dispersed material.

Dumping of dredged material directly alters bottom configuration and biota may disperse

toxic or harmful chemicals around the disposal site.

3.3.2 Impacts during Operation phase

Possible discharges from ships that could be sources of water pollution are

bilge water, ball ash water oily wastes, sewage, garbage and other residues in a ship spill

of oils, lubricants and fuel may be the source of water pollution.

Executive Summary

E-18



For the construction of the multipurpose sea port, about 1400 acres of land

has been acquired. In fact, the land was acquired way back in early 1970’s for industrial

development. However, with the passage of time and due to proximity of estuary, the

area got submerged and slowly-slowly various commercial activities like fishing, mining of

shell and mangrove growth took place. The development of port will require reclaiming of

the whole submerged area, and the present activities will require to be restored suitably in

the possible adjoining area.

Since, most of the land is under water before the construction, more land

would be reclaimed. The movement of vehicles and heavy construction may also result in

minor consolidation of top soil and sub soil.

Soil contamination may take place due to movement of vehicles and solid

waste generated from the labour camp setup during pre-construction phase stage. The

impact would be significant at locations of construction phase primarily due to allied

activities and adequate measure would be taken to ensure that all operations avoid

potential land contamination. The solid and hazardous wastes generated from ship and

from port operations will have to be disposed off properly to avoid land contamination.

3.4.2 Impacts during Operation Phase

Operational activities would comprise construction of buildings, laying of

roads, electricity and water line and other such structures that are normally associated

with port development project. Therefore no change is anticipated on the land use due to

such activities in the study area, except at the project site.

The impact on soil would be due to disposal of solid wastes such as

construction material, rubble, composite garbage and discarded topsoil.



The project site area does not cover any reserved or protected forest in Tadadi

port. Therefore, there is no danger to wild animals. Mangrove plantation of about 217 ha

exists within the 5 km radial area. The mangroves existing in the project site area will be

affected, which will need to be suitably compensated by re-afforestation.

Executive Summary

E-19

3.5.2 Impact during Operation phase

Ship traffic and discharges may directly cause damage to fishery resources,

aquatic biota and coastal habitat. Indirect damages to bottom biota and habitat may also

be caused. Dust dispersion on land may cover plants and change terrestrial habitats.

Water pollution and bottom contamination resulting from these effluents lead to

deterioration of aquatic biota and fishery resources.

3.5.3 Impact on Marine Environment

Dredging activities may affect flora and fauna biodiversity due to:

Re-suspension and settlement of sediment

Increase in turbidity, thereby decreasing the light penetration and photo

synthetic activity

Reduction in dissolved oxygen levels

Changes in species diversity and structure of benthic communities

Loss of benthic habitat due to disturbance of the bottom sea floor

Reduction in bottom biota which is usually linked to a reduction in

fishery resources

Heavy construction and dredging activities in the intertidal and sub-tidal areas

proposed for the development of the port will influence the local ecology and impact on

the intertidal biota of the affected areas, loss of bottom habitat, number of bacteria,

phytoplankton, zooplankton, and benthic organism.

Effective sediment control measures would be needed before starting work,

more to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water body. Monitor and

inspect sediment control measures regularly to ensure that they are functioning properly.

3.5.4 Impact on Fishing Activity

Tadadi village is traditionally important village for fishing and marketing of fish.

Aghanashini river flowing through Tadadi is one of the major sources for fishing. There

are two groups of villages dependent on fishing and shell-fish collected in Aghanashini

river. During the construction of port, the fishing activity will be shifted to some other

location. It will also affect the salt production of the region at Sanekatta and Nagarbaillu.

Alternative locations for fishing activities will need to be found out in due course of time, if

possible.

Executive Summary

E-20

3.6 Socio-Economic Environment

The proposed project would lead to some beneficial as well as some adverse

effects on the Socio-Economic Environment.

3.6.1 Positive impacts

New jobs will be created during construction phase, mostly on temporary

basis, for skilled and unskilled workers.

General growth in commercial activities will take place in the project

area.

The civil amenities like medical facilities, market, education, sport and

cultural activities are expected to improve in the study area.

Improvement in infrastructure facilities by way of transport,

communication and other basic requirements is envisaged.

Overall, it is expected to contribute general improvements of quality of

life in the region.

3.6.2 Negative Impacts

Traditional navigation routes in the vicinity may get affected.

Air pollution levels may increase marginally.

Increase in traffic flow and congestion in and around the project site.

Increase in transient population in the project area, migration of

workers may cause economic, social and cultural conflicts or

displacement of local populations.

The fishing and related activities, the livelihood of the locals dwelling in

and around the project area will be definitely affected.

4.0 Mitigation Measures

4.1 Air Environment

4.1.1 Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

The environmental pollution during construction phase is purely temporary,

localized and of shorter duration.

To control fugitive emissions, the following measures are suggested:

Executive Summary

E-21

Methods for controlling dust emissions include water sprinkling at the

construction site, use of proper transport methods, such as a conveyor

belt, for excavated material and screens around the construction site to

prevent the materials from beings spilled / scattered or wind blown on

public streets

Temporary pavement of roads at construction site would considerably

reduce dust emission

Nose masks or earmuff should be provided to construction workers

while carrying out operations that may entail potential for dust

inhalation

There will be no on-site burning of any waste arising from any

construction activities

Engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipment will be

maintained in accordance with manufactures guidance and the exhaust

emissions do not reach statutory limits

The storage and handling of soil, sub-soils, top-soils and materials will

be carefully managed to minimize the risk of windblown material and

dust, e.g., by the use of cover sheets like tarpaulin sheets

Fugitive dust emissions shall be controlled by application of water

sprinkling on unpaved roads properly.

4.1.2 Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase

Routine operational activities at berth would have the potentially significant

environmental impacts.

The air quality surveillance program should be undertaken for

proposed multipurpose sea port, and iron ore & coal handling systems.

However, keeping in view the combined maximum impacts from post-

project activities, particularly in critical downwind directions, the air

quality surveillance program may be strengthened properly. Moreover,

in view of the industrialization in the region, the possibility of an

integrated ambient air quality monitoring program together with

surrounding industries may be explored in consultation with SPCB

Executive Summary

E-22

The estimated NOX emissions for the proposed iron ore & coal

handling trucks and dumpers would result in marginal increases in

SPM, NOX and SO2 concentration in ambient air quality. However, the

post-project ground level concentrations would be well within the

prescribed air quality standards.

Natural gas will be normally used as fuel in power generating sources.

However, standby DG sets of equivalent capacities will be made

available to meet the emergency power requirements. Engines should

operate with maximum efficiency to minimize fuel consumption and

hence NOx emissions.

The following options shall be considered during detailed engineering

to mitigate NOX emissions from fuel combustion:

Low NOX / tangential burners

Multistage combustion engines

Regular inspection of tank roof seals

Preventive maintenance of valves and other equipment

To mitigate adverse impacts due to fugitive emissions, about 31% of

the total area of storage terminals will be developed with plantation.

Ambient air quality monitoring stations would be installed at four

sampling locations within the proposed project area. PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX, methane and non-methane hydrocarbons considering the

proximity of the port and other industries should be continuously

monitored to establish ambient air quality data base.

Bulk material should be transported in closed trucks to avoid wind

entrainment.

Proper bag filters in conveyor belts must be used for collection of dust

and use of conveyor belts should be minimized.

No vehicle should be allowed without proper Pollution Under Control

certificate in the port area and highly polluting vehicles (especially

heavy trucks) should be avoided.

Executive Summary

E-23



From the noise modeling, the peak noise levels from construction

activities have been predicted to be 65 dBA at a distance of 500 m

from the construction site. Since, the populated areas are located at

more than 2.5 km away from the project areas, the noise levels are

considered to have insignificant impact on community. The following

noise mitigation measures shall be followed to further attenuate noise

levels.

Noise could be considerably reduced by adoption of low noise

equipment or installation of sound insulation fences.

Plants are good barrier of noise. Adequate plantation will be done in

the port premises.

Limitation of working hours may be considered to mitigate the nuisance

from construction activities, particularly during night time.

Earth movers and construction machinery with low noise levels should

be used.

Transport of construction material to the site should be restricted in

daytime.

Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc.

should be enforced wherever necessary.

Periodic maintenance of construction machinery and transportation

vehicles should be undertaken to reduce the noise generation.

Overall, the impact of generated noise on the environment is likely to be

insignificant, reversible and localized in nature and mainly confined to the day

hours as sufficient noise control measures would be undertaken

4.2.2 Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase

For the high noise generating equipment/zones, proper acoustic

barriers/ enclosures/ shelters shall be provided.

Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc.

shall be enforced, wherever necessary

Executive Summary

E-24

Plantation and vegetation are expected to reduce noise impacts within

the project premises.


4.3.1 Mitigation Measures during Dredging Activity

The main environmental impact is envisaged from the capital as well as

maintenance dredging activity/process, which will affect marine water quality by increase

in suspended solid concentration due to re-suspension of sediment. This may result in

decrease in dissolved oxygen concentration. Further, accidental release of untreated

sewage bilge water or other wastewater and Oil/Coal spills (including those resulting from

collisions or groundings) may happen.

Some of the measures to protect fish and fish habitat during dredging are:

Minimize the riparian area disturbed by activities along the adjacent

upland

Carryout routine maintenance dredging to protect spawning fish and

incubating eggs

Adopt effective sediment control measures before starting work to

prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water body

Ensure proper functioning of sediment control measures

Restrict dredging quantity and avoid bottom stock piling or side casting

during dredging

Promulgation of regulations on discharge of oily residues, and proper

detection are keys to successful control of ship discharges

Discharges from repair docks would also be connected to appropriate

waste treatment systems

Appropriate regulations on ship discharges and provision of reception

facilities for proper control of emissions and effluents from ships

Proper contingency plans and a prompt reporting system are keys to

prevention of oil dispersal. Periodical clean-up of floating wastes is also

necessary for preservation of port water quality

Executive Summary

E-25

Recycling / reuse of wastewater and modification of equipment for

water conservation

Treated effluent would be used for floor washings and plantation

development etc.

Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase

Monitoring of salinity concentration will be undertaken as part of the

regular water quality and biodiversity monitoring programs.

Geotechnical studies, including coring of sediments to design depth will

be undertaken as part of detailed dredging design studies.

Samples of cored sediments will be sent for chemical analysis to

confirm suitability for deep sea disposal.

Suspended solid load and turbidity levels will be monitored during

dredging and disposal operations.

A sewage treatment unit will be provided on all vessels to treat sewage

to the sewage discharge standards of the SPCB or CPCB prior to

discharge.

Bilge water from the floating transfer vessel will not be directly released

into the surrounding environment. Instead, a holding tank will be

installed to retain any “bilge” water on board unit. It will be pumped into

a waste barge and taken for treatment to wastewater treatment plant.

Solid and hazardous waste will be segregated and stored in

appropriate containers before transfer to an appropriate landfill site.

An awareness programme will be conducted to educate crew about the

need for water conservation and pollution control.

Regular monitoring of discharged effluent will be undertaken to ensure

compliance with CPCB standard.

4.3.2 Sediment Transport and Quality

The potential sources of impacts on sediment transport and quality during the

construction phase will be due to excavation, filling & disposal of capital dredging spoil.

Executive Summary

E-26

The disposal of capital dredge spoil will be carried out in accordance with the

dredged disposal scheme based on modeling simulations so that the impact on sediment

quality is minimal. The selection and operation of dredging equipment and coincidence of

dredging schedules with low flow periods will be considered wherever practical, to reduce

turbidity and sediment re-suspension.

The sediment dispersed in the water column during construction may settle

elsewhere thereby causing minor change in the texture of the sediment.



Following measures are recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on land

during construction phase:

The adverse impacts of disposal of contaminated dredged material or

other wastes from construction activities could be offset by using such

materials in land reclamation.

Appropriate design, according to the characteristics of the wastes, is a

basic requisite for retaining walls, settling ponds, capping of landfills,

and land use after completion.

Temporary drainage channels would be provided to minimize soil

erosion due to solid / hazardous waste.

A record with respect to quantity, quality and treatment / management

of solid / hazardous waste shall be maintained.

Centralized waste management facility is recommended to collect all

wastes during construction phase.

The stockpiles, construction camps etc. will be located on barren land

to the extent possible.

On completion of construction works, all temporary structures, surplus

materials and wastes will be completely removed to avoid future land

use incompatibility.

The impact on soil due to land disposal of construction debris,

composite garbage and discarded top soil is likely to be insignificant in

view of the appropriate measures to be undertaken.

Executive Summary

E-27

Standard construction procedures will be followed to ensure that the

impact on surface drainage pattern and soil erosion is minimal.

4.4.2 Disposal of Dredged Material on Land

The material dredged will be partly used for filling or reclamation of the backup

area of port. The area to be reclaimed will be enclosed with a retention bund and an

overflow weir for discharge of excess water. The dredged material contains clay, silt and

fine sand (soil). Hence, it can be used for nutrient enrichment of degraded land for

promoting life and vegetative growth.

4.4.3 Use of Dredged Materials

The dredged material can be used for production of construction materials e.g.

bricks clay aggregate and for construction works e.g. foundation fill dykes. Further,

dredged material can be used for soil composting.


4.5.1 Mitigation Measures

The project site area does not cover any reserved and protected forest in

Tadadi Port. Therefore, there is no danger to wild life flora and fauna. Potential impact on

marine biological environment during the port construction may result because of

alterations in the wetland zone. However, measures should be undertaken to ensure that

there are minimum disturbances to mangroves and other coastal vegetation. Additional

measures would be taken to protect, preserve and proliferate mangrove growth.



The following measures will be undertaken for socio-economic upliftment of

the region:

Preference shall be given for employing the local people during

construction phase as well as during the operation phase.

Drinking water requirements during the construction phase will be met

from packaged water or water transported through tankers to the

construction sites.

Executive Summary

E-28

Suitable arrangements shall be made at the construction camps for

water, power supply, sanitation and fuel consumption to ensure that

there are no undue pressures on the local resources

4.7 General Mitigation Measures to be adopted during Port

Development

During construction and operation of the Port, the following general aspects of

mitigation measures shall be to minimize any adverse environmental impacts.

During construction, the activities shall be confined to the minimum

area required for the specific jobs/works.

During construction and port operation, best practices shall be followed

to minimize the risk any disturbance/damage to species/habitats

present in the area.

Habitats will be restored and rehabilitation tasks will be carried out after

construction works are over.

Dredging and reclamation would not extend beyond the designated

areas.

Good practices in dredging will be adopted, and continuous monitoring

for the same would be conducted at regular time intervals.

The development work will be carried out considering the requirements

of the National Environmental Management Protected Areas Act

(2003), Biodiversity Act (2004) and Integrated Coastal Management

Act (2008), and all the relevant coastal management policies,

strategies and plans.

Adequate measures would be taken to prevent beach erosion, e.g.

construction of sea walls, jetties, offshore breakwaters and beach

nourishment.

The dumping sites will be selected carefully and scientifically for

dredged material

A port environmental management master plan will be developed

Executive Summary

E-29

Regular monitoring will be undertaken to ensure compliance with the

port environmental management master plan and any relevant project

specific requirement.

Regular water quality monitoring of port water sources will be done to

protect estuarine ecosystem health

5.0 Environmental Monitoring Programme

Continuous environmental monitoring will be carried out in the impact

zone with suitable sampling stations and frequency with respect to

different environmental components.

An Environmental Management Apex Review Committee (EMARC) shall

be constituted to review, assess and monitor the progress and

implementation of Environment Management Plan.

6.0 Environmental Management Plan

6.1 Air Environment

Measures proposed for mitigating impact on ambient air quality during the port

operations include the following:

Continuous sources of emissions such as DG sets and boilers will be

installed with sufficient number of stacks and of sufficient height

(Karnataka State Pollution Control Board (KSPCB) norms) to ensure

adequate dispersion of pollutants. Further, pollution control systems

such as low NOX burners and Sulfur free fuels will be used.

Gas powered or low sulfur diesel and unleaded petrol in conventional

vehicles will be used within the port area.

Burning of solid or oil wastes in the open will be avoided.

Storage areas and conveyor systems will be adequately covered

during the handling of materials, to reduce or completely eliminate

fugitive emissions. Free fall of materials shall be minimized by

installation of telescoping arm loaders and conveyors, to further

minimize the fugitive dust emission.

Executive Summary

E-30

It will be ensured that transport vehicles are covered and as far as

possible idling of vehicles will also be minimized during transport and

handling activities

On-loading/Off-loading and storage areas will be paved to reduce dust

emissions

Release of air emissions from operation of ships/ dredgers will be reduced by

using the following control measures:

Efforts will be taken to encourage the use of alternative fuels and fuel

mixture in ships/dredgers and keep fuel control systems in proper

working conditions

Fuel leaks will be prevented from on-land equipment, vehicle fueling by

considering installation and maintenance of vapour recovery systems

wherever required and/or appropriate. Further, installation of leak

detection systems and conducting leak detection tests on fuel systems

including distribution lines and tanks shall be done.

The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicle and equipment will be

maintained so that exhaust emissions should not reach statutory limits

(set for that vehicle/equipment type and mode of operation by KPCB),

and that all vehicles and equipment are maintained in accordance with

manufacturers guidelines

The exhausts of other equipment used for construction (e.g.

generators) will be positioned at a sufficient height to ensure dispersion

of exhaust emissions meet in accordance with the standards set by

KSPCB


Considering the impact scenario on ambient noise levels due to operation of

transport vehicles and construction equipment, some of the mitigation measures

proposed for noise environment during the construction phase are:

Noise from DG set shall be controlled by providing acoustic

enclosures, which shall be designed for minimum 25 dB(A) insertion

loss. The performance of acoustic enclosure shall be checked by

measuring noise levels in different directions.

Executive Summary

E-31

Each item of powered machinery used on site will be properly

maintained and serviced so as to prevent unnecessary noise

emissions. All items of plant operating on the site in intermittent use will

be shut down in the intervening periods.

Any item on equipment found to be emitting excessive noise levels due

to a faulty silencer, broken or ill-fitting engine covers or other reasons,

will immediately be taken out of service and be adequately serviced,

repaired or replaced.

The design of the port will be such that the sound pressure level in the work

area will not exceed 85 dB(A). Restricted areas will be those locations where it is not

reasonably practicable to reduce the noise level below the work area limit. Wherever

practicable, attempts shall be made to reduce the noise level below 90 dB (A). The noise

levels will not exceed 60 dB (A) at the perimeter of the port area. The equipment will be

chosen in such a way that the above noise limit shall not be exceeded.


6.3.1 Ship Generated Wastes

The IMO stipulation requires that port/berth that regularly handles deep-sea

ships should be equipped with facilities to accept and dispose off up to 100 Tonnes of oily

ballast and bilge water. These pump trucks will transport the wastes to the treatment

facility where the oil is separated from water in a standard grit/oil separator.

The IMO guidelines permit the discharge of water contaminated with oil, in

harbor area provided the oil content is less than 15 mg/l. Such facilities will be created at

the project site and the effluent will be released in the coastal water at the location

identified for disposal of treated sewage.

6.3.2 Marine Water Quality

There is a distinct advantage of reduction in time of marine construction

operations by fabricating the structures such as beams, modules, slabs etc. in a yard on

land and transporting them to the site for assembling. Given that this is also economically

efficient, it is expected that marine operations for construction will be as limited and short

as possible. As a part of the management strategy, it is advantageous to coordinate

various activities to avoid time-overruns, and complete the project within an agreed time

schedule.

Executive Summary

E-32

The intertidal and near shore sub-tidal segments outside the port area will be

restored to their original contours, once the construction activities are completed. General

clean-up, adjacent to intertidal areas, creeks etc. will be undertaken and entire discarded

materials will be removed from the site and aesthetic quality of the surroundings will be

restored, once the construction operations are over.

The sewage from the ships will be treated within the ships, in the absence of

such facilities (e.g., in older vessels, barges), the sewage will be brought for treatment in

the sewage treatment plant on land. Therefore, it is not likely that there would be any

risks of contamination of surface or groundwater as a result of the effluent or waste

discharge from the ships. Oily wastes from the ships will also not affect any surface or

groundwater, as ships will not be allowed to release any oily bilge waste or ballast water

within port limits. Regular monitoring of water quality will be carried out at the port site

and in nearby surface bodies to keep track of environmental changes.

Port will provide sufficient facilities to receive residues and oily mixtures

generated from ship operations, according to provisions of the International Convention

for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973 (MARPOL, 1978) as amended by the

1978 Protocol (MARPOL, 1973/78). Besides oily residues, reception of sewage and

garbage is also required in accordance with the needs of ships.


Adequate preventive measures would be undertaken to ensure that there are

no disposal of solid wastes generated from port or ship operations and no unconfined

spillages occur which may contaminate the soil.

Following measures are recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on land

activities:

Development of greenbelt with carefully selected plant species with

due consideration to the requirement of local inhabitants of the area in

terms of their fuel wood, fodder and livelihood demands is of prime

importance due to their capacity to reduce noise and air pollution

impacts by attenuation/assimilation, as food and habitat for local macro

and micro fauna and source for subsistence life style of locals. This

will not only overcome the socio-economic problem but will also

enhance the aesthetic significance of the area. A well-developed green

belt will solve many objectives and will also attract birds, insects and

Executive Summary

E-33

other pollinator species and thus, ecology of the area can be protected

and conserved sustainably.

Survival of the planted tree seedlings and saplings will be closely

monitored for their survival and mortality and equal number of trees

should be replaced for dead saplings.

The rainwater harvesting would be done. Treated sewage and effluent

can be the best combination to be used for greenbelt development.

Provision of water for irrigation purpose would be made as an

important part of proposed project


There are no potential sources of impacts on terrestrial biology during berth

operation. However, coal and iron ore dust from transport system need to be properly

controlled and managed throughout its operation phase.

6.5.1 Marine Biology

The construction of berth should be planned to minimize the number of

construction days, so that the effect will be minimized. Though project area is ecologically

very sensitive and spillages of material during loading/unloading operations and other

such impacts are likely to influence the marine biological environment adversely,

appropriate technology and contemporary standards and procedures would be adopted to

minimize possibility of such an occurrence. The guiding principle of marine environment

management is to ensure that the perturbations due to the proposed coastal activities are

within the assimilative capacity of the coastal marine environment of harbour area.

6.5.2 Fisheries

Adverse impacts on fish or fisheries are expected during construction and

operation phase of port. However, these impacts would be closely monitored and a

suitable compensation scheme will be provided for the fishermen affected.

A separate fishing harbour may be developed with more facilities like cold

storage, space for parking for more boats and other materials required like diesel, ice, fish

tray etc.

6.5.3 Terrestrial Biology

The measures enumerated earlier will be entrusted in all contractual and

procedural obligations of the contractors and the team deployed at site for the

Executive Summary

E-34

construction. This will ensure that the measures are enforced. However, there are no

potential sources of impacts envisaged on terrestrial biology during the berth operations.

6.5.4 Aquatic Biology

The impacts on marine ecology due to such activities would largely be

confined to the duration over which the activities are spread. The marine biota would

recover and regenerate over a period of time once construction activities are completed.

Environment friendly construction technologies would be used so as to follow

internationally acceptable standards of construction. Though, deforestation of mangrove

patches during construction phase is not envisaged and if damage to mangrove patches

occur, it would be compensated by planting double number of mangrove plants at

appropriate locations around port and affected villages. All efforts will be made to

reinstate the site.

6.6 Socio-economic

It is envisaged that implementation of welfare measures including provision of

the basic facilities/amenities would result in better quality of life of the people in the

region. However, the fishing related activities and the livelihoods of people living in the

area surrounding Aghanashini River will definitely be affected. People from the nearby

villages (Sangama region) where the port is proposed are scared of losing their houses.

Local inhabitants are concerned about their relocation, if their residential area would not

be far away from the sea, as they fear of loosing the fishing occupation.

A separate fishing harbour having more facilities like cold storage space for

parking more boats and required materials like diesel, ice fish tray etc. would be

constructed for the affected villagers. The harbor would be equipped with latest

technologies that would assist fishermen with satellite information etc. regarding fishing

harbor. For marketing of fish, marketing network would be expanded through the new sea

port.

Salt production workers in Sanekatta (using the backwater from sea) i.e. about

350 families will be majorly affected in terms of their livelihood. The affected people must

be given appropriate and adequate compensation for loss of their settlements and

occupation as per State/Central R & R regulation.

The farmers and the fishermen from whom the land is acquired would be given

appropriate and adequate compensation as per the Resettlement and Rehabilitation Plan

of the State/Central Government.

Executive Summary

E-35

7.0 Occupational Safety

The main safety hazards involve oily spills, splashes and fugitive emissions,

while handling iron ore and coal. Proposed safety measures would be made to prevent

and reduce accidents during construction and operation:

Electrical equipment will be grounded and checked for defective

insulations.

The maintenance personnel would be provided with special footwear,

masks and dust proof clothing.

Electricity and maintenance work would be carried out in the presence

of a supervisor.

The noise levels within the port development facility would be kept

lower than 90 dB(A). If possible, those working with the equipment

would have alternative in-house measures to reduce noise levels

below 75 dB(A).

7.1 Safety Requirements for Handling and Transfer of Cargo

The organization structure would be well defined to ensure proper and

safe handling of cargo material.

Weather prediction updates from the IMD would be acquired daily

during the operation periods.

The port limits would be clearly marked and the movement of other

traffic would be appropriately controlled during operations. The

Department of Fisheries needs to be notified for further information to

local fishermen.

Safe operation plans (SOP) would be prepared for every operation.

According to the SOP, a checklist would be prepared. These checklists

would be completed prior to any transfer operation. All operating crew

would be required to be familiar with such procedures. No procedure

would be by-passed to expedite unloading / loading of ship.

Barges used would be double-hulled barges as per MARPOL

requirements, suitably designed for each chemical/material duly

approved by a competent authority.

Executive Summary

E-36

Pigging operations, flushing, washing, conditioning of pipelines, etc.,

will be performed under the supervision of a qualified safety

professional.

Adequate security for the area would be provided to avoid risks due to

vandalism, theft, riots, etc. Efforts would be made to declare the area

as a "Prohibited Area".

Smoking at the operating areas viz., Port area tank farm, barge and

ship would be prohibited.

All employees must wear cotton clothes. Synthetic clothes would not

be permitted. Shoes would not have nails or metallic components.

All vehicles entering into operating area would be fitted with automobile

spark arrestors.

All employees would be properly trained and experienced. Annual

training and refresher training lessons/courses would be provided to re-

emphasize the need for safety procedures and handling of emergency

releases.

Adequate caution boards would be prominently placed to highlight the

hazards of the Chemicals. Notices such as 'No Smoking', 'No Naked

Lights', and 'No entry to unauthorized Persons' would be placed at

different locations of the premises.

The flexible hoses would have appropriate color codes for easy

identification of products to be handled.

All hoses, pipelines and fittings would be inspected and monitored

during operation for evidence of leakage.

Wireless communications between operating personnel would be

provided.

First aid kits would be provided at all locations. For emergencies,

protective clothing such as neoprene gloves, boots, safety goggles,

self breathing apparatus, fire fighting suits, safety shower and eye

wash fountain, combination units, canister gas masks for the different

organic vapour would be readily available at the location.

Executive Summary

E-37

Unauthorized persons would not be permitted in the premises under

any circumstances. Drugged or intoxicated persons would be kept

away from the premises.

No person with ignition materials (like matchsticks, lighters etc.) would

be permitted in the area of operation.

Buoys marked with appropriate navigational symbols would be placed

along the port area.

Restricted areas would be clearly marked.

There would be a proper environmental monitoring plan.

8.0 Summary and Conclusions

8.1 Summary

Development of ports and harbour contribute substantially to the successful

economic development of the country by way of reducing dependence on air

transportation and providing many others associated economic benefits. Water based

transportation is the key component of many coastal areas.

The area identified for development of port at Tadadi was acquired by

Karnataka Industrial Areas Development Board way back in 1970s. It was a barren land

at that time, however, over the years, the area got submerged due to the proximity of the

estuary and due to damage to the bund, biological growth including mangroves took

place. Subsequently, fishing and shell mining activity started taking place, which became

a source of livelihood for the people of the nearby villages.

Development of port shall initially have some adverse impacts depending upon

the extent of activity being carried out. Accordingly, the impact characteristics will vary in

nature (positive, negative, direct, indirect), magnitude (small/large scale, incremental),

timing (construction / operation phase), duration (short-term, long-term), extent

(area/volume), uncertainty (frequency) and reversibility. A combination of the above

criteria with the location of receptors determines whether an impact can be considered

significant or not. The major activities associated with development of port are given in

Table 1.

Executive Summary

E-38

Table 1: Major Activities Proposed during Different Stages of Port Development

Stage Activity

Construction Phase

Proposed construction activities

Proposed capital dredging activities

within the port area and deepening of

navigational channel

o Construction material handling/ transportation of construction materials

o Construction activities (marine terminals, railway tracks, roadways)

o Labour force

o Construction of jetty on piles

o Capital dredging

o Land reclamation / dredge spoil dumping at sea/ shoreline

Operation Phase

Operations of Iron ore & coal terminals o Vehicular traffic

o Storage & stacking of iron ore

o Loading / unloading of iron-ore and coal through conveyors

o Ship Operations

o Maintenance dredging

Operations of container terminals o Vehicular traffic

o Ship Operations

Details of the parameters likely to be affected by each of the activities taking place

during construction and operation phases of the port, with their impact characteristics and

level of significance with low cost EMP are summarized in Tables 2 and 3 respectively.

Table 2: Summary of Impacts with Significance Level and EMP: Construction Phase

Activity Impacts Impact Characteristic

Significance Level with low cost EMP

Parameter Cause Duration/ Nature / Reversibility

Construction material handling/ transportation of construction materials/ quarrying

Air Generation of dust from handling and transport of fine & coarse aggregate in uncovered trucks

Short term Negative Reversible

Low, by covering the trucks with tarpaulin sheets or by using water sprays

Noise Vehicular noise, use of excavation equipment


Medium when there are noise sensitive receptors

Low when there are no noise sensitive receptors in the vicinity

Executive Summary

E-39




Construction activities

Air Fugitive dust emissions and dust generation from concrete mixing, cement handling, welding, operation of construction machinery


Low, by sprinkling water and wearing masks

Noise Use of construction equipment and power tools


Low when workers are provided with ear plugs

Water Water utilisation for construction

Turbid runoff from construction site washings


Low, as groundwater shall not be tapped

Turbid runoff from construction site can be minimized by construction of small bunds

Labour force Water Exploitation of water resources for domestic usage

Disposal of untreated waste


Low, when workers are local, current usage pattern is maintained and when groundwater is not be tapped

Low, when wastewater is disposed with basic treatment such as soak pits.

Land / Aesthetics

Springing up of temporary buildings / dwellings. Generation of solid wastes


Low, when proper collection and disposal is practised

Low, when hutments are within premises

Socio-Economics

Increased employment opportunities

Short term, Positive Reversible

Low, since employment is temporary

Capital dredging

Noise Use of dredging equipment and power tools


Low when soil is soft, silty clay

Medium when noise sensitive marine species are present

Water Sediment resuspension Short term Negative Reversible

Medium for turbidity when the material is clay

Sediment Release of toxic substances and nutrients


Low for toxicity when sediment toxicity is minimal

Benthic Ecology

Disturbance of bottom sediments and/or destruction of spawning grounds


Low, when commercially valuable species/ breeding/spawning grounds are not present

Land reclamation

Water Sediment resuspension Short term Negative Reversible


Sediment Release of toxic substances and nutrients



Executive Summary

E-40




Ecology Loss of inter tidal area Long term Negative Irreversible

Low since the area is a barren salt marsh with no vegetation

Shoreline Material dumping Long term Positive /Negative Irreversible

Low when the site is km away from the water front or when the dumping provides nourishment to the existing shoreline

Construction of berths on piles

Noise Use of pile drivers, boring equipment, power tools, drill bits etc.

Continuous for a Short period Negative Reversible

Medium when noise sensitive receptors are in the vicinity

Low when ear protection devices are used

Water Increased suspended solids and turbidity


Low, since area of impact is localised and negligible

Table 3: Summary of Impacts with Significance Level and EMP: Operation Phase




Handling of iron ore & coal, stacking and loading through conveyors

Air Fugitive dust emissions from stockpiles and conveyors due to dislodging of fine particulate matter by wind

Short-term Negative Reversible

Low, when dust suppression is done using water sprinklers

Low, when wind direction is towards sea-side

Water Spillage into the marine environment

Short term

Low, since quantity of spill is expected to be negligible with Standard Operating Procedures

Sediment Accumulation in sediments

Short-term Low, as spills will be minimum and localised

Iron-ore/coal is not toxic or hazardous to cause sediment toxicity

Land / groundwater table

Infiltration from stockpiles into the ground

Short term, negative, irreversible

Low, as groundwater table is low or potable water resource is not within the vicinity.

Low, when the stockpile area is lined and infiltration is minimum

Executive Summary

E-41




Ecology Concentration of heavy metals from spillage on the sediments

Long term Negative Irreversible

Low, since commercially valuable species are not common and iron-ore/coal is not hazardous or toxic

Maintenance dredging

Water Sediment re-suspension, release of toxic substances and nutrients



Sediment Movement of dredge spoils



Benthic Ecology

Disturbance of bottom sediments and/or destruction of spawning grounds

Short term Negative Irreversible

Low, when commercially valuable species/ breeding/spawning grounds are not present

Shipping Operations

Air Exhaust emissions Short term, Negative Reversible

Low, with well maintained vehicles with proper covering

Water Discharge of bilge, cargo residues, operational wastes, waste water

Short term Negative Irreversible

Low as there shall be strict adherence to MARPOL convention

8.2 Conclusion

The construction phase impacts on different environmental

components shall be mostly intermittent and of short-term duration with

reversible in nature. The extent of influence shall mostly be confined to

the construction activity area, except transport related impacts, which

shall be managed by the transport agency. The impacts on ecology

would be of long term duration, which though will be irreversible in

nature, however with green belt development and other measures

taken shall be restored and improved in due course of time.

The impacts during operation phase shall also be of short-term

duration and confined mostly to the port premises area. The severity of

impacts shall be minimized by the strict implementation of relevant

standards/ procedures, adoption of mitigation measures, environmental

management plans and following good working practices for each

activity.

Further, environmental monitoring shall be undertaken during the

construction and operation phases of the project. The responsibility of

Executive Summary

E-42

implementation shall lie with the construction contractor during the

construction phase and the Port Operating Agency during the

operations phase, while the overall responsibility of monitoring shall

always lie with Port Authority.

Adequate budgetary provision shall be made towards implementation

of suggested management plans towards control of air, noise & water

pollution, solid waste management, green belt development, CSR

activities etc. including regular environmental monitoring/auditing and

continual improvement leading to sustainable development of the

region.

Though with the implementation of suggested measures and EMP, the

port development can be undertaken, yet the port area itself is

considered ecologically sensitive and needs special attention. The

critical issues related to the port area with some preliminary

management plans are summarized in the Annexure. Current status of

these port area related critical issues needs to be further assessed and

addressed in detail to draw a sound management plan ensuring port

development with minimal losses to the ecology and environment of

the region. This will set an example of development in harmony with

the nature for the socio-economic development not only for the region

but also for the whole Karnataka State and the Country.

Executive Summary

E-43

Annexure

Critical Ecological Issues related to the Proposed Tadadi Port Area Site

Development philosophy that needs to be followed is ‘Infrastructure-led

sustainable development’, which seeks to cut through the argument of whether industry

first or infrastructure/development first and proactively establishes that infrastructure is

the primary driver for demand and growth. Significant developments in the country have

happened with governments embracing this philosophy. Clearly, there is need for

development of port infrastructure that would act as enablers for the growth of industry/

business/employment opportunities in Karnataka.

The land use pattern of the 10 km radial study area (314 km2) around the

proposed port shows water bodies (such as wetland/ submerged area) of about 5.77%,

whereas sea area is 38.82%. The river and saltpan land cover 4.58% and 0.64%, while

agriculture and forest land cover 11.44% and 15.02% area, respectively. The creek land

covers 2.22% of the study area. The mangroves cover 0.87% area. The barren and fallow

lands are covered with 1.75% and 18.07% respectively, whereas the built-up land covers

0.70% of the study area.

The area identified for development of port was acquired by Karnataka

Industrial Areas Development Board way back in 1970s. It was a barren land at that time,

however, over the years, the area got submerged due to the proximity of the estuary and

due to damage to the bund, biological growth including mangroves took place.

Subsequently, fishing and shell mining activity started taking place, which became a

source of livelihood for the people of the nearby villages. The major issues related to the

site are:

Flora and fauna (biodiversity)

Oyster bed

Fishing activity

Saltpans

Impact on marine biota

Impacts on the above are briefly discussed along with the mitigation

measures/ management approach.

Executive Summary

E-44

1. Flora & Fauna

Mangrove, Insects, Invertebrates and Other Fauna

Insects and invertebrates that are associated with mangrove habitats for food and

shelter will be impacted by the direct loss of habitat. There may also be some direct

mortality of insects and invertebrates during the clearing of mangrove vegetation during

construction works and although important, this is considered a relatively minor impact

since the area to be cleared is small. Generally, it is expected that mobile species and

individuals will move away from the project area during construction, particularly in the

case of some species of mangrove crabs and mudskippers. For non- or less mobile

species, it is considered that any direct mortality will be localised and restricted to the

project area. Furthermore, surrounding mangrove habitat that will not be cleared is

expected to support sustainable populations of all species such that there will be no long-

term impacts on populations or species in the Tadadi Port region. It is unlikely that

implementation of the proposed development would result in regional or sub-regional

affects to the conservation status of any Schedule fauna species.

During construction as well operation of the port, deposition of dust on mangroves

and other vegetation can be expected, which may affect the faunal species. Accumulation

of dust on mangrove leaves adjacent to the proposed development may impact insects

inhabiting mangrove canopies. Dust impacts on mangrove canopy insects are not well

known, although it is expected that insects will avoid leaves with dust accumulation, if it

interferes with their foraging, breeding or habitat provision, and will utilise nearby areas

that are unaffected by dust accumulation. If insects do exhibit avoidance behaviour in

relation to dust, it is not known whether the absence of particular insects will affect the

ecology of the mangroves themselves, e.g. with respect to pollination, herbivory, etc. It is

also likely that different species will have different tolerance levels to dust on leaves,

which in turn may result in compositional changes to the assemblage of canopy insects in

mangroves adjacent to the proposed development. It is expected that accumulation of

dust will be transient and dust will tend to be washed away by rainfall, therefore any

impacts on insects due to dust deposition will be temporary.

Indirectly, the proposed development may also have impact on avifauna through

noise disturbance during construction and operational phases of the project. Construction

and traffic noise have been shown to reduce densities and feeding behaviour of wetland

birds and water birds (Hirvonen 2001; Burton et al. 2002), and similar effects may be

Executive Summary

E-45

expected, if the proposed project is implemented. Observations in Port Hedland Harbour

were that activities such as pile-driving appeared to result in no observable changes to

the behaviour of white-breasted whistlers, which continued foraging nearby despite high

noise levels. It is possible that local bird populations are acclimatized to high levels of

background noise and as such it is not considered necessary to manage potential noise

disturbance impacts. It should be noted, however, that there are no published estimates

of what level of cumulative noise may result in avoidance behaviour.

Management of Mangroves

India follows set of legal norms, based on the recommendations of NATCOM

(National Mangrove Committee) through MoEF (Ministry of Environment and Forest) for

effective management of mangroves. The CRZ rules prohibit any development activities

in mangrove having an area of 100 m2 or more, with a buffer zone of at least 50 m along

the coast, from the highest high tide line (HTL). Although Aghanashini estuary in Kumta

taluk, Uttara Kannada is proposed to be declared as biological heritage site, sound

management plan for sustaining the biodiversity of this region would help in the

development of new infrastructure in this region.

The primary mechanism for management of mangrove loss will be to confine

areas of direct loss due to the proposed infrastructure. Construction machinery will

remain within the infrastructure area only to minimise any unplanned loss or damage of

adjacent areas of mangrove. Direct impacts with respect to the removal of the mangroves

within the infrastructure area will be managed to avoid disturbance to areas outside the

project site. The provisions to minimize the disturbance include:

where practical, cleared material that is lost into the harbour should be

collected;

the disturbance area should be surveyed and delineated using

coloured flagging (where practical); and

clear briefings and instructions to relevant contractors regarding the

clearance procedures to minimise the disturbance in the area.

Executive Summary

E-46

Control of Dust Deposition on Mangroves

Management measures for minimising dust generation include:

watering of unsealed roads, exposed surfaces, active construction

areas and stockpiles;

use of environmentally safe dust suppressants;

restriction of vehicle movements and vehicle speeds to reduce dust

emissions;

general housekeeping practices to manage waste materials within the

construction site that may generate dust;

an awareness program to ensure that all persons onsite are made

aware of the need to minimise dust emissions; and

reporting of any community complaints regarding dust levels.

Impacts on insects, invertebrates and other fauna will primarily be managed by

restricting loss of habitat confined to the area meant for infrastructure development.

Mobile fauna are generally expected to move away from the disturbance area and no

local species extinctions are expected. Indirect impacts on fauna resulting from dust

accumulation on mangrove plants will be mitigated by the dust management measures

outlined above. Management of indirect impacts on mangrove avifauna will be by

restricting direct habitat loss to the defined project footprint.

Regeneration of Mangrove

The mangrove land cover of the study area is 0.87% only which could be

compensated by:

i. Creation of additional mangrove habitat to help counter development

disturbances.

ii. Mangrove propagation, creek creation and trial planting for mangrove

rehabilitation.

Regeneration of mangrove forest could be divided into natural and artificial

process. Natural regeneration involves natural process of establishment of seeds of

mangrove. This activity is cost effective and causes no disturbance to the habitat and

Executive Summary

E-47

develops the forest pattern, in the similar way to the original forest. Artificial regeneration

could be carried out by nursery development and transplanting seedlings or mangroves in

degraded or new areas. Some of the lands, which are presently abandoned, may be

utilized for the afforestation of mangrove. The technical know-how developed for nursery

development and afforestation on mangroves, by various organizations including National

Institute of Oceanography (NIO), could be implemented for the restoration of mangroves

by afforestation. The fallow land, which is being influenced by tides, and is not utilized for

any purpose, could also be utilized for afforestation of mangroves. Continuous monitoring

of newly established seedlings, either by natural or artificial means, is required as they

are subjected to major threats by domestic cattle and fishing activities. They are also

threatened by insects and fungal infestation, therefore, limited use of insecticides and

fungicides may be applied. The nursery development and transplantation operations are

economically quite feasible. Natural seedlings of Rhizophora spp., Avicennia spp.,

Sonneratia spp., Kandelia spp., Ceriops spp. and Bruguiera spp. could be practiced for

plantation. Vegetative propagation forms a useful technique to overcome the inadequate

supply of seedlings of some of species, as their propagates do not occur throughout the

year. Conservation and afforestation of species like Bruguiera gymnorhiza, Cariops tagal,

Kandelia candal and Aegiceras coruicnlatum may help preserving rich mangrove diversity

in the country.

The spacing between seedlings remains important factor during the plantation

process. Zonation also forms another important factor in afforestation operations,

naturally a particular specie prefer right kind of ecological and geomorphological setups.

The Rhizophoraceae may be planted in front line along the waterways. S. alba could also

be considered planting towards water fronts in polyhaline and mesohaline zones, while S.

caseolaris in oligohaline zones. Other species should be planted behind them. Spacing

can be maintained at 1x1 – 2x2 m (Chai, 1980). Suitable plots may be made depending

on area of availability. Distance of about 10 m should be maintained between each two

plots each measuring 100 m2 (Jagtap, 1985).

Utilisation of Dredged Material for Mangrove Habitat Development

Use of dredged material as the substrate for habitat development is one of the

most common and most important beneficial use. The use of dredged material for habitat

development offers a disposal technique that is an attractive and feasible alternative to

more conventional disposal options. Within various habitats, several distinct biological

Executive Summary

E-48

communities may occur. For example, the development of a dredged material, creation of

an island or nourishment sediment to eroded creeks banks may initiate a wide variety of

wetland, upland, island, and aquatic habitats. Potential developments include such

communities as tidal flats, oyster beds, clam flats, fishing reefs, and aquatic plant and

plantation of mangroves. The excavated dredged material can be used as the substrate

for mangrove habitat development. The development of a dredged material can reinforce

eroded banks by providing coastal nourishment.

2. Oyster bed

As per the topo sheet, the oyster bed area is covered with approximate 1.1 Km2,

at latitude 140 32’ 58.02” N and longitude 740 22’ 16.06” E. Since the area is proposed to

be used for the development of port, there is possibility of disturbance to the oyster bed

area on account of port activities. Therefore an ideal area/location will be identified for the

transplanting the existing oyster area. Mangrove ecosystems are considered to be a

suitable site for culturing oysters. The ecosystem provides protection against excessive

wind and wave actions; sufficient tidal and current flow to change the water of the oyster

farm; supply adequate amounts of nutrients for the production of phytoplankton for the

growth and fattening of oysters; suitable temperature and salinity; and adult oyster stock

are available in large numbers in the vicinity of culture site for ensuring continuous supply

of oyster seeds. All the above-mentioned factors are essential for establishing oyster farm

to make culture profitable (Santhanam et al., 1990).

Management of natural oyster beds is important to ensure the long-term

sustainable yield. Annual survey provides critical information on the abundance of oysters

in each bed. It also helps in providing continuous monitoring of these beds to investigate

the temporal changes of the population. Increasing public awareness of local people is

essential in controlling oyster overexploitation. Guiding fishermen about the time they

should halt collecting oysters allows small specimens to grow to the recommended

marketable sizes for better benefits. It is also necessary to teach them the suitable

techniques for culturing oysters in their respective areas. Several techniques have been

established centuries ago. The pole (stick) method, stake method, and rack and

tray/string cultural methods, are advisable techniques for mangrove’s shallow and muddy

areas. Factors that adversely influence the health of oysters should be monitored.

Abnormal temperature and salinity, food, predators (carnivorous flatworms and oyster

Executive Summary

E-49

drills), parasites, diseases, entrophication and pollution may be dangerous for the

oysters, and lead to their mass mortality (Santhanam et al., 1990).

Planting of clean shells revitalizes the natural oyster beds, expands and improves

habitat for dependant marine life and provides critical habitat for juvenile oyster (spat)

recruitment, ultimately increasing oyster abundance. Shell planting and regulated

harvesting practices, based on sound biological data, will enable the mangrove’s oyster

resources to continue contributing to the well being of the people that depend on this

resource for part of their livelihood.

3. Fishing Activities

There is no significant adverse impact on fishes and fisheries expected as a result

of dredging, however in case of high turbidity, fishes may asphyxiate and die and for this

proper control measures have been suggested. A fishing centre could also be planned

opposite to one or two jetties. During the rainy season, all the villagers, including those

who depend on the sea fishing, use the 1400 acres of land region, engage in land fishing

for Prawn, Crabs and other fish and get a good income. This will stop once the port

construction starts. A separate fishing harbour should be developed with more facilities

like cold storage, space for parking more boats ancillary facilities and marketing support.

4. Salt pans

There is about 600 acres of land used for salt production in Sanekatta using the

backwaters from the sea and more than 300 workers in the salt factory are engaged in

this activity. This 600 acre area is also covered with the boundaries of other villages

namely Mudangi, Gudkagal and Kimani all around the estuary and the Tadari harbour.

Due to the activities of port development, salt-manufacturing activities will also get

affected. This may result in reduced production of salt. If oil leakage occurs, the salinity of

the water will change and the production of salt will get affected. These families and

particularly the workers do not have any idea about other alternative livelihood activities.

They assume that they may get some job in the port, if it comes up. Provision will also be

made to provide sea water flows to these lands for salt production.

5. Impact on Marine Biota

Construction and operation of port activities will certainly impact the marine biota.

The following mitigatative measures will address the potential effects on the marine

environment and marine organisms from increased suspended sediments. Vessels during

Executive Summary

E-50

the construction phase should operate outside of biologically sensitive areas (close

proximity to mangrove vegetation) and outside of periods of critical fish, shrimps life

stages i.e. SW monsoon season (June-September). The construction should ideally be

during the winter monsoonal months (i.e. November, December, January) timing. This

period is best suited as it lies outside of biologically sensitive temperature ranges for fish

gonadal maturation. Implement acoustic restrictions during construction phase, in

biologically sensitive areas during breeding and spawning periods and critical fish life

stages. Timing of dredging to avoid key biological processes (migration, spawning, etc.),

and minimize sediment transport and mixing. Uprooted and dislocated mangrove trees

during the construction phase must be replanted in location best suited for their growth.

This should be done under the aegis of independent environmental monitoring

organisation. Minimize use of lights during night. There is a need to develop a

preparedness, prevention and hazardous materials spills protocol. An Environmental

Protection Plan and an Emergency Response Plan for oil spill. Treatment of the dredged

material may be considered if this would facilitate beneficial use of the material. A variety

of treatment processes are available to reduce contamination of the toxic components in

the dredged material solids or slurries. Low-cost treatment alternatives include

bioremediation. Bioremediation (use of bacteria, fungi, or enzymes to break down organic

contaminants), chemical treatment (e.g., oxidation, reduction, chelation, hydrolysis,

detoxification, thermal (e.g., incineration) can be utilized.

References:

Burton, N.H.K., Rehfisch, M.M. and Clark, N.A. 2002. Impacts of disturbance from

construction work on the densities and feeding behavior of water-birds using the intertidal

mudflats of Cardiff Bay, UK. Environmental Management 30: 865-871.

Chai, P. K. 1980. Mangrove Forests of Sarawak; [In: Workshop on Mangrove and

Estuarine Vegetation; (Ed.): Srivastava, B. P. L]; December, 1977; Faculty of Forestry,

University of Pertanian, Serdang, Malaysia; pp. 1-5.

Hirvonen, H. 2001. Impacts of highway construction and traffic on a wetland bird

community. In: CL Irwin, P Garrett and KP McDermott (eds.) Proceedings of the 2001

International Conference on Ecology and Transportation. Centre for Transportation and

the Environment, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC: 369-372.

Executive Summary

E-51

Jagtap, T. G. 1985. Ecological Studies in Relation to the Mangrove Environment along

the Goa Coast, India; a Ph. D. Thesis Submitted to Shivaji University, Kolhapur.

Santhanam, R.; Rmanathan, N. and Jegatheesan, G. 1990. Coastal Aquaculture in India;

CBS Publishers and Distributors, Delhi; 180 pp.

Kathiresan, K. and Qasim, S. Z. 2005. Biodiversity of Mangrove Ecosystem; Hindustan

Publishing Corporation (India), New Delhi; 251 pp.

Compliance to ToR Points

The EIA study has been conducted as per the proposed ToR and the

additional ToR suggested by MoEF Letter No. F.no. 11-28/2011-IA.III dated 26th

September, 2011 and details are presented in following chapters.

C1

Compliance to TOR Points

The Expert Appraisal Committee during 104th EAC meeting held on 17th /19th

August 2011 reviewed the documents of the proposed port project. The committee

approved the proposed ToR with additional terms of reference points vide MoEF Letter

No: F. No.11-28/2011-IA.III dated. 26th September, 2011.

Compliance to Additional ToR points is summarized in the following Table.

Sr. No.

Terms of Reference (ToR) Compliance Status

i. Submit the details of the site selection studies with justification pertaining to all the three alternate sites examined with particular focus on environmental issues

A Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the three alternative sites has been carried out, considering both the inner and the outer locations viz. (i) an inner harbour in the Aghanashini Estuary (ii) an outer habour on the northern side and (iii) an outer habour on the southern side. Eventually the outer harbour locations of the port on both the sides of the Aghanashini mouth have to be so aligned / located that the river and tidal flow is not affected. The study is summarized in Table 1.4 and layout is shown in Fig. 1.6. Based on the above ranking criteria, location number 1 is chosen as the most feasible alternative viz., inner harbour in the Aghanashini Estuary.

ii. Submit the details of the eco-sensitive areas, if any

As per the study carried out by CSIR-NIO, Goa, the proposed project site exists in CRZ I, II and III. The project area is being used for fishing and bi-valves collection. The site area presents rich biodiversity, sparse mangroves and oyster bed. Details of bi-valves are given in Chapter 9 and overall summary of eco-sensitive areas is given in Executive Summary, along with possible management plan.

iii. Examine and submit the details of water bodies including the seasonal ones within the corridor of impacts along with their status, volumetric capacity and quality, likely impacts on them due to the project

The water quality status of various water bodies including marine environment are given in Chapter 3, Section 3.4.3. Impacts on water environment are presented in Chapter 4, Section 4.4, along with mitigation measures. Detailed hydrodynamic study has been conducted by M/s Prointec, as Feasibility Study for the project.

iv. Submit the details of the fishing activity and likely impact due to the activity

Fishing is one of the major activity taking place within the proposed site belonging to the Govt. of Karnataka, and also in the nearby area. This will be directly affected

Compliance of ToR

C2

Sr. No.


by the development of the port, however, alternative plans shall be developed to compensate for the fishing activity at some other location, as suggested in Section 4.4.6 and 6.5.6).

v. Submit the details of the Hydrodynamic study with particular reference to the estuarine location and its stability due to natural processes

A detailed Report on Hydrodynamic studies has been presented in Appendix F-“Hydrodynamics and Coastal Processes” of the Feasibility Study report. The report has dealt at length the esturine location and its stability. The Report has established that there are no adverse effects due to the construction of the port.

vi. Submit the details of anticipated impact due to the growth scenario/ induced developments because of the green field Port. Impact due to influx of people due to port and all other associated activities or otherwise may be carefully projected and estimated. Commitments for environmental and ecological protection shall be made quantitatively and chronologically

Port induced developments in the region are expected during construction and operation phase of the project. Influx of people and all other associated activities are expected. Environmental concerns and ecological stress on the area shall be taken care with proper mitigation measures and management plans, delineated for each environmental component in Chapter 4 and 6.

vii. Submit details of Risk Assessment, Disaster Management Plan including emergency evacuation during natural and man-made disaster like floods, cyclone, tsunami and earth quakes etc

The emergency evacuation during the man made and natural disasters like floods, cyclone, tsunami and earth quakes etc., have been detailed in the following Chapters.

Chapter 4 -Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Chapter 6 -Environmental Management Plan

Chapter 8- Disaster Management Plan

Once the Port is commissioned, a Disaster Management Plan, covering both on site and off site emergencies will be drawn up and will be updated from time to time.

viii. Submit the details of Oil Spill Contingent Management Plan

No liquid Cargo is proposed to be handled in the port. However the oil spill contingency plan for minor spills is detailed in Chapter 8, Section 8.6.

Compliance of ToR

C3

Sr. No.


ix. The possibility of transplanting the existing oyster bed in case disturbance on account of port activity

The possibility of transplanting the existing oyster bed has been dealt in detail in Chapter 9, and also summarized in Executive Summary.

x. Submit the details of dredging sludge quantity quality in terms of its toxic metals (at least Cr+6, Arsenic, Mercury, and lead) and its disposal with quantity (reclamation/dredging disposal site) If disposal is in sea, location, the justification for selecting such location, the dispersal of dumping material, its effect on marine environment, effect of fishes

A total quantity of 500,00,000 m3 of soil will be dredged as capital dredging, out of which 180,00,000 m3 will be used for reclamation and the balance of 320,00,000 m3 will be disposed offshore.

A total quantity of 50,90,000 m3 will be dredged as maintenance dredging and the material will be disposed offshore.

The modeling of the sedimentation process of the material dumped from the trailing suction hopper dredger has been carried out by means of the program titled “DUMP” and the disposal ground have been located accordingly.

A detailed dredging management plan will be drawn up at the time of the actual execution of the work to have minimum impact on the environment.

Sediment samples were collected from River, Estuary and Sea, where dredging is to be carried out and analyzed for various heavy metals using TCLP method. The details are given in Section 3.5.3 (Page 3.47) and Table 3.5.6 (Page 3.51). Cr & Pb were not detected in the sediment samples, whereas other metals were found in small quantities.

xi. Submit the details of change in estuarine environment such as salinity intrusion, existence of saline wedge phenomenon etc

The change in the esturine environment viz, salinity intrusion, existence of salt wedge has been dealt in Chapter 4 - Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures and Appendix F-“Hydrodynamics and Coastal Processes” of the Feasibility Study report. There are no adverse impacts due to the construction of the port.

xii. Submit the details of study on connectivity and its carrying capacity (both road and railway)

The detailed study on connectivity of Road and Rail has been dealt in Chapter 10, Traffic and Demand Study.

xiii. Submit the details of existing port and proposed new ports in west coast on either side of Tadadi

The existing port at Tadadi is only a fisheries harbour. The details of existing ports in the Karnataka State has been furnished in Chapter 1, Section 1.6.

Compliance of ToR

C4

Sr. No.


with in a distance of 200 Km Some preliminary studies were carried out some time back for the development of a new port near Honnavar. However, due to the crisis in the mining industry in the Karnataka State, no further progress could be made. There are no other proposals for development of new ports on the west coast of India on either side of the Tadadi within a distance of 200 km.

xiv. Submit the details of impact on salt pan existing in the surrounding area.

Salt pans exist in the study area, close to the project site, which uses backwater from the sea for salt production in Sanekatta village. More than 300 workers are engaged in salt production. Due to port development, salt production may be affected, however proper care shall be taken to maintain the saltpans (Chapter 4, Section 4.4.6.1, Page 4.7).

xv. Confirm that the proposed development does not involve court cases

No court case is expected with respect to the development of this project.

xvi. The mangrove exists about 10 km from the project site. Because of the anthropogenic activities and human settlement, mangroves are likely to spread in the area. A study on possible, alteration of flora and fauna over long term may be taken up

Mangroves exist in about 2.73 sq km area of total study area of 314 sq km. At the project site, these are sparsely located, however, recognizing the importance of mangroves in maintain the ecological system, proper care shall be taken to enhance the mangrove vegetation in the study area through re-plantation. Details are given at Pages 3.80, 4.47, and also in Executive Summary.

xvii. Although it was mentioned that there is no forest land in the project area but the area is very green. No of trees to be cut may be estimated with photographic record

The project site does not involve any forest land. However, if any tree is required to be cut, it will be counted, and necessary compensatory afforestation shall be done, as per the guidelines.

xviii. Quantitative and chronological CSR plan shall be delineated in detail

Port authority is committed to take care of its Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). A detailed CSR plan shall be prepared in consultation with the local village Panchayats / Sarpanchs as also local administration to ensure its proper and effective utilization for the people of the region. Adequate funds will be allocated for the various activities under CSR.

CChhaapptteerr 11

IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn

1.0 Introduction

1.1 Port Function

Ports are the principal conduits through which the economic life of a maritime

nation flows. As maritime gateways, ports serve as interface between sea and land links

and have to handle enormous flow of goods, which are broken down into smaller flows for

distribution to the hinterland by road, rail and inland water ways. Thus the port is a crucial

sub-system of the total transport chain. Ports handle 82% of the world’s trade and hence

its capacity and efficiency will determine the growth and economic potential of the region

or the country.

Thus, the primary function of a port is to provide for efficient low cost transfer of

cargo from ship to shore and vice-versa, inspection, storage and transportation. Hence

the port should act as an integral part of a complete chain of transport link of moving the

cargo from origin to destination.

1.2 Indian Ports Scenario

India is fast becoming the global epicenter of economic growth and external

trade as well as the second fastest growing economy in the world after China. India has

an extensive coastline of more than 7500 km on the east and west coast and around 95%

Chapter 1: Introduction

1.2

of the country’s external merchandise trade by volume and 70% by value, is transported

through maritime transport.

In the Indian context the ports are classified as ;

Major and

Non major

At present there are 12 Major Ports and 176 notified Non Major Ports. Out of

the Non Major Ports, only around 60% are operational.

The major ports are administered by the Ministry of Shipping (MOS) of the

central government and are governed by the Major Port Trusts Act 1963, except the

Ennore Port which is run by the provisions of the Companies Act 1956.

The Non major ports are under the jurisdiction of the state governments.

1.3 Cargo handled by the Major and the Non Major Ports

The Commodity-wise traffic handled by the Major Ports during the first four

years of 11th plan period and the estimated for the year 2011-12 are presented in the

Table 1.1 .

The Commodity-wise traffic handled by the Non-Major Ports during the first

four years of 11th plan period and the estimated for the year 2011-12 are presented in

Table 1.2.

1.4 Maritime Agenda 2010 - 20

The Ministry of Shipping, Govt. of India had prepared a perspective plan for the

next ten years during January 2011, called as the “Maritime Agenda 2010-20”.

The main highlights of the agenda are:

To create a port capacity of around 3200 million tonnes to handle the

expected traffic of about 2500 million tonnes by 2020

To put India’s ports on par with the best international ports in terms of

performance and capacity.

To increase the tonnage under the Indian flag and Indian control and also

the share of Indian ships in India’s export trade.


1.3

To promote coastal shipping as it is economical and will help in

decongesting our roads and is environment friendly.

To increase India’s share in global shipbuilding to 5 % from the present

1 %.

To increase the percentage of Indian seafarers in the global shipping

industry from between 6 -7 % to at least 9 % by 2015.

It was also projected that two new major ports, one each on the east and west

coast and the development of two hub ports on each of the two coasts will be developed.

Further, it was contemplated that Mumbai (JNPT), Kochi, Chennai and Visakhapatnam

are to have drafts of not less than 14m and hub ports of 17m.

The projected traffic for the major and the non major ports as contemplated in

the Maritime Agenda 2010-20 are presented in Table 1.3.

1.5 Preamble

The Maritime Agenda 2010 -2020 contemplates two new major ports, one on

the West Coast of India and the other on the East Coast of India. The development of

Tadadi as a major port on the West Coast of India fits well into the development of major

port on the West Coast of India.

Karnataka State is targeting an industrial growth rate of 12% per annum and

there has been an increased emphasis on the expansion and growth of infrastructure

sectors. In this regard, the Infrastructure Development Department (IDD), Government of

Karnataka (GoK) has identified various projects in the State for development. One such

project identified is the development of a Sea Port at Tadadi in Uttar Kannada district in

Karnataka State. As a preliminary step in the project development activities, IDD has

undertaken a prefeasibility study to ascertain the project’s amenability for development

under PPP framework. As the project has been found to be feasible, a detailed feasibility

report including detailed technical studies have been taken up. The total project area is

approximately 566 hectares (1400 acres). The total land area is available for the

development of port with no requirement of Rehabilitation and Resettlement (R&R) plan.

The land identified for the project has been acquired for industrial / infrastructural

purposes, quite few decades ago and now vests with the Government of Karnataka. This

land is presently inundated, which can be utilized for development of Sea Port and related

facilities at Tadadi. The location of the port is shown in Fig. 1.1.


1.4

Karnataka vision 2020 document strategizes a 9% industrial growth per

annum. It also emphasizes on development in infrastructure sectors viz, ports, railways

and road. During the year 2007-08, the annual growth of industrial production and mining

activities was 6.36% and 18% respectively. A substantial portion of the iron-ore mined

and other products in the State is transported by rail to the ports at Goa, Mangalore,

Chennai, Krishnapatnam and Ennore in the neighbouring States.

Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited

(KSIIDCL) envisages setting up an all-weather Multi-Cargo Sea Port at Tadadi (Tadri), for

handling about 62.36 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of cargo in Taluk Kumta in Uttara

Kannada District, Karnataka. KSIIDCL has been designated as the nodal agency of the

State Government for development of port at Tadadi in Uttar Kannada district of

Karnataka on Public Private Partnership (PPP) framework. The port at Tadadi would form

a gateway for trade in the Bellery-Hospet region which is rich in iron ore mines with

number of power plants and steel mills requiring coal. The Tadadi port is located in the

backwaters of the Aghanashini River with a huge waterfront area, which makes the

location a natural choice for a Port / Harbour. The developer (private sector) will be

selected through a transparent international bidding process.

1.6 Details of Existing Ports in the State

An overview of the ports in the State and specifically the ports competing for the

off take from the hinterland are analyzed which presents rationale for developing the port

at Tadadi.

Karnataka is endowed with a vast coastline of around 300 km between Karwar

(at the North) and Mangalore (at the South) flanked by Uttara-Kannada, Udupi with

favorable and strategic port locations. The entire coastal belt as well as the adjacent

districts are rich with mineral and natural resources and hence offer good scope for

industrial investment. This belt is well connected by National Highways and the Konkan

Railway broad-gauge line, both running parallel to the coastline.

1.6.1 Major Ports

At present, in Karnataka there is only one Major Port viz., The New Mangalore

Port. This is located at the southern end of the coastline and hence is predominantly

being utilized by the southern districts of the State.


1.5

1.6.1.1 New Mangalore Port

This port is a modern all weather port and is the largest LPG handling port in the

country. The present total capacity of the port is 38 million tonnes with 14 berths. The

other facilities at the port include transit sheds, open stockyards and liquid storage areas.

The total traffic handled at the port in 2009-10 was 35.53 million tonnes of which iron ore

traffic handled at the port was about 6.71 million tonnes. The present road connectivity of

the Port is through NH-48 (Bangalore-Mangalore), NH-66(17) (Cochin-Goa-Mangalore)

and NH-13 (Sholapur-Mangalore). NHAI is implementing projects for four lane of NH-

66(17) (Suratkal-Nantur section), NH-48 (Padil-Bantwal section) and a bypass from

Nantur junction on NH-66(17) to Padil junction on NH-48.

The port is connected to the hinterland of the State via the Hassan Mangalore

Rail line. The line provides a shorter and more convenient outlet for the cargo from the

iron ore rich Hospet – Bellary and Chitradurga – Tumkur belts of Karnataka to the New

Mangalore Port. The improved connectivity to the gateway port of Mangalore through the

Hassan - Mangalore line has given a boost to the industrial activity in the hinterland

centers - Tumkur, Tiptur, Ammasandra, Tornagallu and Davanagere.

1.6.2 Minor Ports

The coastline of the State is lined with ten minor ports between Karwar in the

North and Mangalore in the south. The ten minor ports of the State are:

Karwar

Belekeri

Tadadi

Honnavar


1.6

Bhatkal

Kundapur

Hangarkatta

Malpe

Padubidri

Old Mangalore

The location of the ports is shown in Fig. 1.2. National highway from Karwar to

Mangalore is shown in Fig. 1.3. All these ports are under the administrative control of the

State Ports and Inland Water Transport (IWT) Department. These ports are broadly

classified into three categories:

a) One all-weather Intermediate Port having direct berthing facilities for

vessels of 9 m. draft and declared for handling all type of commodities for

export and import viz., Karwar.

b) One Intermediate Port (seasonal) having direct berthing facilities for

coastal vessels of 4.50 m. draft/ lighterage/ mechanized fishing vessels

viz., Mangalore Old Port.

c) Remaining seven Ports are seasonal functioning as fair weather lighter

age/ fisheries Ports, capable of handling sailing/ mechanical sailing

vessels. These Ports also possess lighterage wharves, transit sheds and

suitable stacking areas.

1.6.2.1 Karwar Port

The port at Karwar is an all-weather intermediate port with an available draft of

6.5-9.5 m. The prestigious SEABIRD Naval Project is located adjacent to this port. The

total traffic volume handled was 3.84 lakh tonnes, of which 2.64 lakh tonnes was import

and 1.2 lakh tonnes was export.

This port has been developed as an all weather port in the Karwar bay with 355

m long quay for accommodating simultaneous berthing of two ships with other matching

infrastructure facilities. At present it caters to vessels with draft of 8.5 m only due to under

water physical obstruction in front of the berths. The port is declared for handling of all

types of commodities including class ‘B’ and class ‘C’ petroleum products.


1.7

Presently Karwar port handles Import and export of about 24.88 lakhs million

tonnes of various commodities including class ‘B’ and class ‘C’ petroleum products. INS

Kadamba is a naval base at Arga village of Karwar which is used exclusively for berthing

of naval vessels. A naval ship repair yard (dry Docks) (Syncrolift) is also attached to it.

1.6.2.2 Belekeri Port

The Belekeri port is a fair season lighterage port with iron-ore being the main

cargo exported. Currently the following three private operators are operating at the port:

Adani Export Pvt. Ltd

Salgoankar Mining Industries

Mallikarjun shipping Pvt. Ltd

This port is located 26 km south of Karwar on the bank of Hattikeri river

and is a fair weather lighterage port and is open to traffic for about 8 fair weather

months. This port has got a vast stacking area, good network of roads and can be

developed to handle about 3 to 5 million tonnes of cargo.

A number of Shipping agencies have taken interest to upgrade the port

by developing their own infrastructure to handle export of iron ore cargo through the

port.

1.6.2.3 Tadri Port

This port is situated in the estuary of the Aghanashini River. The backwater of

the river forms a vast water front at this port, and there is an opportunity to develop this

port with modern infrastructure. The Konkan railway line and NH 66(17) passes close to

the port area. Also, NH 63 and the proposed Hubli-Ankola railway line and Honnavar

Tumkur NH 206 are infrastructure for all around development of Tadri port.

This port is projected for development under the BOOST (Built, Own, Operate,

Share and Tansfer) concept through private participation. Vast area is available for

development of the port with, negligible rehabilitation problems. Tadri port has an

effective hinterland of about 2.00 lakhs sq. m compared to central and northern port of

Karnataka, which are rich in minerals, forest, agriculture and marine resources. At

present Tadri port is a fishing port.


1.8

1.6.2.4 Honnavar Port

Honnavar port located at the place where Sharavati river joins Arabian sea. The

port is near the town of Honnavar in Uttara-Kannada District. Efforts to make this port for

handling of larger ships have not been successful. The National Highway 66(17),

Honnavar railway station on Konkan Railway route is nearby. Honnavar port is a fishing

port.

1.6.2.5 Bhatkal Port

This port is well-protected on the bank of Bhatkal river, presently fishing vessels

are utilizing the facilities of this port. This port could be developed as a modern fishing

harbor with full-fledged fish handling facilities. The port is surrounded by hills around.

1.6.2.6 Kundapura Port

The port is at the confluence of Pancha Gangoli River. The port is near the town

of Kundapura. Even though National Highway 66 (17) and Konkan railway pass near this

port, development of this port has not taken place.

1.6.2.7 Hangarakatta Port

Hangarakatta port is mainly used by fishing boats. This port is on the bank of

Swarna River and Sita River.

1.6.2.8 Malpe Port

Malpe port is situated near town of Udupi. The port is located on the confluence

of Udyavara River and Arabian Sea. The port mostly handles fishing activities and

sometimes cargo also. A shipbuilding yard is in operation in this port.

1.6.2.9 Padubidri Port

Padubidri is located in Udupi distract of Karnataka state. There was a proposal

to develop Padubidri port for handling coal required for thermal power generating station

Udupi Power Plant Company Ltd., (UPCL) being setup in nearby village at Nandikur.

1.6.2.10 Old Mangalore

This port is situated on the left bank of the Gurupur River and is approximately

10 km south of the New Mangalore Port. It is popularly known by the name of Bunder.

The minor port at Mangalore is an intermediate port with a draft availability of 4.5 m. It is

functional only during the fair weather season from September to May. It is well

connected by NH 66 (17), 48 & 63 and the Konkan Railway and Southern Railways.


1.9

1.7 Rationale for Development of the Proposed Port at Tadadi

Out of the ports of the State, NMPT, the major port currently caters to the cargo

requirements in the southern districts of the State and is operating at 89% capacity (in

2008 – 2009). Further petroleum products and import of coal form a significant part of the

cargo at the port. The northern districts of the State, especially the Bellary–Hospet region

is home to significant resources of iron-ore which is currently being exported. Part of this

iron ore is exported through the minor ports at Karwar and Belekeri. However, the draft

available at these ports is less and therefore bigger vessels cannot operate at these ports

and loading is normally done through barges.

Further the capacity at these ports is also not adequate to cater to the demand

of this region. Due to this, a significant amount of the iron ore is currently being

transported to Ennore (in Tamil Nadu), Mormugao and Krishnapatnam in Andhra Pradesh

for export. Thus, a port developed in the northern coastline of the state could cater to the

districts in North Karnataka especially export of iron-ore and import of coal for the belt in

Bellary-Hospet region, thereby significantly improving the industrial advantage of the

state. Due to these reasons, it is proposed to develop a port at Tadadi.

1.8 Purpose of the Report

All projects related to sea ports, harbour, jetties, marine terminals, break water

and dredging development have been identified as Category-A project in the EIA

notification issued by Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) in September 2006.

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) for ports and harbours is a mandatory

requirement as per the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) EIA September 14,

2006 and is also governed under CRZ Notification February 19, 1991 (As amended in

January 25, 2005) as these projects can cause potential environmental impacts. Public

hearing has been made mandatory for all the cases where the environmental clearance is

required. It is, however, not necessary to obtain site clearance or permission to conduct

surveys. The basic components of EIA study are presented in Fig. 1.4.

In the case of projects within the existing port limits except areas classified as

CRZ-I, the power to grant clearance under the Coastal Regulation Zone Notification has

been delegated to the Ministry of Shipping, Road Transport and Highways. The

mangroves, mud flats and uninhabited islands are classified as CRZ-1. The proposed

Tadadi port is classified as CRZ1 providing for operational constructions and operations

for port and harbours. A map of Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) is shown in Fig. 1.5.


1.10

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is the process of examining the

environmental, social and health effects of a proposed development. It assesses the

impacts of the proposed development on the environment and enables decision making

with respect to environmental clearance.

The process for obtaining environmental clearance for the proposed

development of port at Tadadi in Karnataka was initiated by submitting project related

information in prescribed Form-1 along with suggested Terms Of Reference (TOR) and

draft project feasibility report. The Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) on CRZ,

Infrastructure and Miscellaneous Projects and New Construction Projects of the Ministry

of Environment and Forest, accorded approval to the TOR, vide letter No/File No.11-

28/2011-1A III dated 26/9/2011 of MoEF and the meeting of the expert Appraisal

committee was held on 18th August, 2011. The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)

has been carried out as per the approved TOR.

The report provides description of baseline environmental and social conditions,

predicted impacts, mitigation measures for adverse impacts, management plan

considering good practices, environmental monitoring plan, assessed risks, emergency

management plan, conclusion and recommendations. The report has been structured in

the line of the EIA notification (Guidelines Manual, MoEF, 2009) on generic structure of

Environmental Impact Assessment and EIA Guidelines Manual for Port and Harbours –

February 2010.

1.9 Justification of the Project

Nearly 90% of cargo handled at this Port will be bulk cargo consisting of export

of iron ore and Import of coal. Almost the entire coal traffic will be is moved by rail.

Further, the port is installing a Wagon Handling System for unloading of iron ore from

Bellary-Hospet Region. To meet the demands of traffic to be generated in the coming

years, rail augmentation is proposed to be undertaken.

The port development in the northern coastline of the State would cater to the

districts in North Karnataka especially the iron-ore belt in the Bellary-Hospet, region

thereby significantly improving the industrial advantage of the state.

Tadri is located at a Latitude of 140 13.50' N and Longitude of 740 21.50' E. The

backwaters of the river have a huge water front area, which makes an ideal location for

the development of a natural harbour. The port will be situated on the estuary of the


1.11

Aghanashini River at a distance of about 50 km from Karwar, about 24 km from Belekeri

and approximately 35 km from Honnavar.

The Konkan Railway line and National Highway (NH) 66 pass very close to the

port. The nearest station on the Konkan Railway line from Tadri is Ankola at a distance of

about 25 km.

The port at Tadri appears to be viable on a stand-alone basis. However,

this is contingent upon the various connectivity options that need to be

pursued at government levels, and the concerns of land acquisition would

need to be suitably addressed.

The viability of the port at Tadri would not be affected by various

connectivity issues if an industrial facility is developed near the port which

uses the port for import or export of cargo. The port would then also be

viable on a stand-alone basis.

As a result of the port being developed in Tadri, the bulk cargo currently

being moved from Karwar and Belekeri is expected to be shifted to Tadri

reducing the cargo movement at these ports. Further, given the volume of

cargo which can be moved, it is unlikely that any other port in the northern

part of the coast of the state could be commercially viable after the port at

Tadri is developed.

1.10 Alternative Sites (Locations) for Tadadi Port

A preliminary Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the three alternative sites has

been carried out, considering both the inner and the outer locations viz. (i) an inner

harbour in the Aghanashini Estuary (ii) an outer habour on the northern side and (iii) an

outer habour on the southern side. Eventually the outer harbour locations of the port on

both the sides of the Aghanashini mouth have to be so aligned / located that the river and

tidal flow is not affected. A Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the three locations is

presented in Fig. 1.6.

The assessment numbers represent the evaluation of each aspect based on the

technical and environmental aspects (need of the breakwaters, need for dredging, road

connection, rail connection, possibilities of extension, impact on beaches, estuary

dynamics and impact on flora and fauna) according to the criteria based on the scores of

rankings (‘3’ for Positive, ‘2’ for Medium and ‘1’ for Negative).


1.12

Based on the above ranking criteria, location number 1 is chosen as the most

feasible alternative (with 18 points), than location 3 (16 points) and location 2 (13 points)

respectively as shown in Table 1.4. The Multi-Criteria Analysis of the three locations

confirm that alternative 1 is the most preferred alternative.

According to the available land for the onshore development and to optimize the

capital dredging, the port basin has been located at the northern side of Aghanashini

estuary. The river at this location flows from SSE to NNW and changes it course by 1350

so that its mouth has an alignment from NNE to SSW. In the northern part of this location,

an estuary has been developed where two creeks can be seen. The existing boundaries

of these creeks define the northern limit of the port basin. In this location, navigational

channel, turning circles and berthing area are proposed to be developed.

1.11 Objectives of Study

The objective of the study is to prepare Environmental Impact Assessment

Study report by incorporating baseline data for one season, identification, prediction and

evaluation of impacts due to the proposed all weather multi-purpose port at Tadadi,

Karnataka leading to delineation of environmental management plan to mitigate the

adverse impacts.

1.12 Scope of Work (Proposed ToR)

The Environmental Impact Assessment study report for the development of Port

facilities is to be prepared as per guidelines of Ministry of Environment and Forests

(MoEF), Government of India, and applicable regulations and standards of the state

Governments. The report would address relevant aspects including but not limited to the

following:

i. Collection of primary baseline data in the project areas as well as in the

area falling 5 km from the proposed project boundary and collection of

primary data within 10 km radial distance in support with secondary

data collection within 15 km aerial distance from the project boundary

ii. Collation of data from secondary sources and also collection of one

season (excluding monsoon) primary data in the study region for

assessment of the following baseline environmental quality

land based facility

Water front activities


1.13

Marine environment

iii. Collection of existing hydrography data in the creek and offshore region

of the proposed port

iv. Impact of the berths that are proposed to be constructed and the cargo

handling facilities

v. Impact taking into consideration the on-shore and off-shore facilities of

the proposed port

vi. Delineation of proposed activities in the CRZ area as well as between

the low tide line (LTL) and high tide line (HTL) and its superimposition

on the HTL and LTL map

vii. Impact of dredging and reclamation on the marine and terrestrial

ecology

viii. Impact on the marine / terrestrial ecology for the proposed disposal

sites for the dredged material

ix. Hydraulic Studies and the Dispersion Model for the disposed dredged

material at the disposal site

x. Study of existing and proposed drainage patterns including its impact

xi. Satellite Imagery indicating the oyster bed, mangroves, etc

xii. Land use plan in 10 km radius

xiii. Terrestrial and marine ecology to be studied

xiv. List of endangered and rare species if any, specific to the site

xv. The regional development plan if any, should be considered to study

the impact of the project on the existing habitation and infrastructure

xvi. Details of the traffic movement and impact of the project on the existing

transportation system including additional facilities as well as safety

measures required to be developed for catering to the same

xvii. Details of the sewage treatment and disposal and waste management

to be indicated

xviii. Detailed contingency plan for accident scenarios, natural disaster and

accidental oil spills

xix. Existing shore line changes and impact of the proposed project on the

shore line along with remedial measures for prevention of the same

xx. Clearance from Karnataka Coastal Zone Management Authority

(KCZMA)


1.14

xxi. Detailed bathymetry study to be conducted and the tranquility

conditions at the port

xxii. Estimate changes in quality of water, soil, air, noise, etc and suggest

suitable mitigation measures

xxiii. Construction activities on the shore and the impact of such construction

activities on the shoreline and terrestrial environment

xxiv. Details of socially beneficial activities that would be extended to the

local communities along with an implementation plan

xxv. Water requirement and source of water and approval of the competent

authority

xxvi. Details of the environmental quality monitoring programme laid down

xxvii. Details of dust suppression/separation measures

xxviii. Details of green belt development indicating the area along with an

implementation plan

xxix. Identification, prediction and evaluation of significant impacts due to

development activities

xxx. Evaluation and recommendation of appropriate measures/practices for

pollution control so as to minimize impacts on environment during

developmental activities

xxxi. Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for mitigation of adverse

impacts due to construction and operational phases of port

xxxii. Post project environmental quality monitoring programme

1.13 Additional ToR

In addition, the following aspects should be studied:

The above proposal was considered in the 104th EAC meeting held on 17th - 19th

August, 2011. The details were as presented by the project proponents and after

discussions, the following additional "Terms of Reference" were finalized by the EAC.

i. Submit the details of the site selection studies with justification pertaining

to all the three alternate sites examined with particular focus on

environmental issues

ii. Submit the details of the eco-sensitive areas, if any

iii. Examine and submit the details of water bodies including the seasonal

ones within the corridor of impacts along with their status, volumetric


1.15

capacity and quality, likely impacts on them due to the project

iv. Submit the details of the fishing activity and likely impact due to the

activity

v. Submit the details of the Hydrodynamic study with particular reference to

the estuarine location and its stability due to natural processes

vi. Submit the details of anticipated impact due to the growth scenario/

induced developments because of the green field Port. Impact due to

influx of people due to port and all other associated activities or otherwise

may be carefully projected and estimated. Commitments for

environmental and ecological protection shall be made quantitatively and

chronologically

vii. Submit details of Risk Assessment, Disaster Management Plan including

emergency evacuation during natural and man-made disaster like floods,

cyclone, tsunami and earth quakes etc.,

viii. Submit the details of Oil Spill Contingent Management Plan

ix. The possibility of transplanting the existing oyster bed in case disturbance

on account of port activity

x. Submit the details of dredging sludge quantity quality in terms of its toxic

metals (at least Cr+6, Arsenic, Mercury, and Lead) and its disposal with

quantity (reclamation/ dredging disposal site) If disposal is in sea,

location, the justification for selecting such location, the dispersal of

dumping material, its effect on marine environment, effect of fishes

xi. Submit the details of change in estuarine environment such as salinity

intrusion, existence of saline wedge phenomenon etc.,

xii. Submit the details of study on connectivity and its carrying capacity (both

road and railway)

xiii. Submit the details of existing port and proposed new ports in west coast

on either side of Tadadi with in a distance of 200 Km

xiv. Submit the details of impact on salt pan existing in the surrounding area.

xv. Confirm that the proposed development does not involve court cases

xvi. The mangrove exists about 10 km from the project site. Because of the

anthropogenic activities and human settlement, mangroves are likely to

spread in the area. A study on possible, alteration of flora and fauna over

long term may be taken up

xvii. Although it was mentioned that there is no forest land in the project area


1.16

but the area is very green. No of trees to be cut may be estimated with

photographic record

xviii. Quantitative and chronological CSR plan shall be delineated in detail

1.14 Detailed Work Plan

The details of work plan under individual components of environment are as

follows:

1.14.1 Air Environment

Assessment of prevailing ambient air quality status with reference to

primary air pollutants, as per the notification issued by CPCB in November

2009 based on one season data (excluding monsoon)

Collection of micro-meteorological data, viz. wind speed, wind direction,

relative humidity and temperature during ambient air quality survey periods

Delineation of air-shed based on topography of the area and identification

of micro-climatic zones

Inventory of point, line and area sources of air pollution, and quantification

of emissions (secondary data sources)

Evaluation of atmospheric emissions and predication of ground levels

concentrations of significant primary air pollutants through appropriate air

quality models incorporating the requirements specified in the publication

of Central Pollution Control Board “Assessment of Impact to Air

Environment: Guidelines for conducting Air quality modeling”

Evaluation of adequacy of the proposed air pollution control measures at

the proposed port development facilities

1.14.2 Noise Environment

Measurement of noise levels and Identification of major noisy areas (Land

use) in the study region

Identification of high level noise zones requiring mitigation measures

Identification of major noise sources at the proposed port development

facilities and predication of impacts


1.17

Prediction of impacts due to other major activities at the port, if any

Prediction of existing and proposed noise pollution control measures

Adequate mitigation measures to control the noise pollution

1.14.3 Water Environment

Assessment of existing status of water quality with respect to physico-

chemical, biological and bacteriological characteristics including surface

(estuary & coastal marine water) and groundwater resources within the

study area through field studies

Preparation of inventory of water polluting sources and quantification of

pollution loads

Assessment of water requirements for port development plans

Evaluation of feasibility of recycle and reuse of treated effluent

Recommendations on water conservation measures

Prediction of cumulative impacts on coastal marine water quality due to

additional discharges of treated effluent

1.14.4 Marine Environment

Study of coastal hydrology involving collection of oceanographic data

covering the following parameters:

Tides

Waves (wind waves and swells)

Storm surges

Currents

Salinity

Sea water temperature

Suspended load, and

Seabed bathymetry

Assessment of marine physical water quality and sea state condition


1.18

Assessment of water quality for biological parameters including plankton’s

and primary productivity

Collection and analysis of bottom sediments and the associated bottom

biota and other physical habitat, at the proposed project area

Assessment of sediment quality in terms of particle size distribution,

organic pollutants and heavy metals

Assessment of sediment quality for biotic parameters such as benthos,

micro and macro fauna

Assessment of mangrove ecosystem, oyster beds, corals in the vicinity of

the project site

Prediction of impacts due to capital and maintenance dredging, disposal of

dredged materials during construction phase and impact of liquid

emissions on biological life during operational phase

Prediction of impacts due to oil spill

Mitigation measures to minimize the impacts due to construction, dredging

and disposal of dredged material, accidental oil spill, operational oil spill,

etc

Environment Management Plan including post project monitoring

1.14.5 Land Environment

Studies on soil characteristics, land use, cropping patterns and vegetation

in the study area

Study the latest land use pattern in the study area through satellite image

analysis

Study the proposed development for its impact

Quantification of pollution loads due to disposal of municipal and industrial

solid wastes

Assessment of impacts on agriculture activities including flood situation

around proposed development activities

Evaluation of solid / hazardous wastes likely to be generated and to

suggest management options for environmentally compatible disposal


1.19

Identification of site and waste-compatible alternatives for solid wastes

management

Identification of sites for greenbelt development

1.14.6 Biological Environment

Inventory of the marine life in the study area

Identification of rare and endangered species in the study area

Collection of ecological information on aquatic ecosystems

Assessment of impacts on aquatic flora and fauna in the surface water

bodies including estuary and coastal water due to effluent discharges

Prediction of impacts on biological (aquatic) environment

Mitigation measures for abatement / reduction of biological stress and

regional management plan

1.14.7 Socio-economical Environment

Compilation of baseline status of the Socio-economic Profile in the impact

zone with reference to:

Demographic structure, viz. total households, total population and

population density, sex ratio, schedule caste and schedule tribe, literacy

and employment

Health status, viz. morbidity pattern with reference to prominent and

endemic diseases (e.g. malaria, filaria etc.) in the study area

Cultural and Aesthetic attributes in the study area including places of

historical / archaeological importance

Inventory of places of historical, cultural and religious importance in the

study region

Assessment of economic benefits to community and environment due to

existing and proposed development activities

Assessment of the prevalent conditions and projection of anticipated

changes due to the proposed port development activities along with

mitigation measures to minimize the adverse impacts


1.20

Assessment of occupational health management system

Assessment of socio-economic impacts on community arising out of the

proposed project

Anticipated changes with respect to Quality of Life (QoL) parameters in

proposed development scenario and delineation of guidelines to minimize

adverse impacts and maximize the beneficial impacts

Delineation of regional socio-economic environment management plan

1.15 Risk Assessment

Risk Assessment study covers the Mitigation Measures and Disaster

Management Plan (DMP). DMP will be delineated covering On-site and Off-site

scenarios. Roles and responsibilities of various key personnel will also be included. Steps

to be taken in case of natural disasters will be included.

1.16 Methodology for EIA

Any development project is expected to cause impact on surrounding

environment at and around the project site during its construction, commissioning and

operational phases. The nature and magnitude of impacts on different components of the

environment depend on the type of project activities and geographical conditions of the

study area. The impact of the project activities on environmental components can be

quantified through Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies within the impact

zone of the project activities. The results of the EIA studies form the basis for preparing a

viable Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for mitigating the potential adverse

impacts.

In view of this, KSIIDCL appointed National Environmental Engineering

Research Institute (NEERI), Nagpur to carry out the environmental impact assessment

studies for the proposed All-weather Multi-Cargo Sea Port at Tadadi (Tadri) setting up the

port for handling cargo about 62.4 million tonnes per annum (MTPA), in order to seek

environmental clearance from the MoEF in accordance with EIA Notification 2006.

This Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) encompasses detailed studies for

various environmental components viz. air, noise, water, land, biological and socio-

economic for post monsoon season. The baseline studies were carried out within the

10 km radial distance for all environmental components as per the directives given by the

appraisal committee during the ToR approval.


1.21

The location of the proposed port area with study area is depicted in Figs. 1.7

and 1.8. The environmental parameters and frequency of monitoring is summarized in

Table 1.5 and environmental component-wise data collection methodology is briefly

described here.


The topographical information of the project site as well as of the study area

including details about different activities pertaining to the port was collected. Different

pollution parameters like PM, (including PM10 and PM2.5), SO2, NOx, Ozone and CO were

identified as representative parameters of project activities for presenting baseline status

of ambient air quality of the study area. A temporary field centre cum laboratory was set

up at the project site for the purpose of calibration of equipment and chemical analysis

etc.

Data on micro-meteorological parameters viz. wind speed, wind direction and

ambient temperature humidity were collected for the nearest meteorological station of

India Meteorological Department (IMD).


Noise is defined as unwanted sound. It interferes with speech communication,

causes annoyance / distraction from work, and disturbs sleep, thus, deteriorating quality

of human environment. Noise pollution monitoring has therefore been carried out in and

around the proposed port to assess the impact of the project activities on the acoustic

environment.

Noise levels were measured (A-weighted) at several locations in the human

settlements around the port at different times of the day and night by using Bruel and

Kjaer make type 2230 Precision Integrating Sound Level Meter.


Information on water resources in the study area was collected. The water

resources in the study area are mainly rivers, estuary and groundwater. The parameters

of prime importance for water quality studies were selected under physical, chemical

inorganic, chemical organic, nutrient and heavy metal categories. Samples of surface as

well as ground water (well water) were collected at different locations. Aquatic biology

parameters were also analysed. Marine environment and the quality of sediment were


1.22

studied based on field data and observations, strategies were formulated for water

management.


Soil samples were collected from the study area and the surrounding villages.

Physico-chemical properties of the soils were determined. Information on land use pattern

in the study area was also collected. Information regarding existing cropping pattern, their

types and crop yield was collected from various sources.


Data was collected from various Government Departments such as forest,

agriculture, fisheries, animal husbandry and other sources to establish the baseline status

of biological environment in the study area.

The parameters of prime importance to both biotic and abiotic factors were

selected to estimate the structural and functional changes in the ecosystem. Information

regarding plantation and mangroves was collected for the proposed port area.

Water samples were also collected during the post monsoon season from rivers,

estuary, ground water sources for estimation of biological parameters viz., zooplankton

and phytoplankton through detailed microscopic examination. Computation of Diversity

Indices was also done for identifying the water quality status.

1.16.6 Socio-economic Environment

A field survey was conducted in the study area of the proposed port. The

parameters selected under socio-economic component were demographic structure of

the study area, provision for basic amenities, industries likely to come up, welfare facilities

provided by the project proponent, safety, training and management, community and

occupational health hazards. Relevant information was collected from randomly selected

villages in the study area and analysed. Information was also collected on Quality of Life

(QoL) parameters to establish QoL indices for the selected villages and also for the study

area as a whole. All the aforesaid environmental parameters have been used for

identification, prediction and evaluation of significant impacts. Modelling of environmental

quality has also been carried out to predict the impact of the project and for its

subsequent evaluation step.


1.23

1.17 Environment Management Plan (EMP)

Evaluation of adequacy of existing and proposed pollution control

measures and suggesting modifications.

To propose appropriate additional mitigation measures so as to reduce

adverse impacts of the activities on the marine environment.

Preparation of post development environment quality monitoring program.

1.18 Risk Assessment

A Risk Assessment Study was carried out comprising hazard identification

based on Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) analysis, hazard assessment and

evaluation employing techniques of consequence and vulnerability analysis and

delineation of Onsite Disaster Management Plan (DMP) and Offsite Emergency

Preparedness Plan (EPP) under worst case scenarios due to the proposed

developments.


1.24

Fig. 1.1: Location of Tadadi Port


1.25

Fig. 1.2: Minor Ports in Karnataka


1.26

Fig. 1.3: National Highway 66 (17) – Karwar to Mangalore


1.27

Identification of need for the proposed project

Consideration of alternatives

Description of the project

Description of environmental setting

SCREENING Determination of the type of EIA

SCOPING Identification of significant impacts

Preparation of TOR for the EIA study

Baseline evaluation

Prediction of impacts

Preparation of EMP and Mitigation

Preparation of EIA and Mitigation

Preparation of EIA /Risk Assessment Report

Decision - making

Approved

Safety & DMP

Risk Analysis

Hazardous Cargo

Project Rejected

Rejected

Source: EIA Guidelines for Ports and Harbours (Adapted and modified from United Nations

Environment Programme (UNEP) EIA Training Resource Manual 1997)

Fig. 1.4: Basic Components of EIA Study


1.28

Source: Coastal Zone Management Plan Map of Karnataka

1.5 : Map of Coastal Regulation Zone


1.29

Fig. 1.6: Multi- Criteria Analysis of the Alternatives

for the Location of the Tadadi Port


1.30

Source: Survey of India

Fig. 1.7: Location Map of Tadadi Port on Toposheet


1.31

Fig. 1.8: 10 km Study Area around the Proposed Port Site


1.32

Table 1.1

Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Major Ports

Year Traffic handled (Million Tonnes)

POL & its Products

Iron Ore

Fertilizer and FRM

Coal Container Other Cargo

Total

2007-08 168.75 91.80 16.63 64.93 92.27 84.94 519.32

2008-09 176.14 94.04 18.23 70.40 93.14 78.59 530.54

2009-10 175.09 100.33 17.72 71.71 101.24 95.00 561.09

2010-11 179.17 87.06 19.99 72.73 114.11 96.97 570.03

2011-12 (Estimated

182.28 86.83 20.60 86.06 122.77 102.06 600.60

Table 1.2

Commodity-wise Traffic Handled by Non-Major Ports

Year Traffic handled (Million Tonnes)

POL & its Products

Iron Ore

Fertilizer and FRM

Coal Container Other Cargo

Total

2007-08 91.04 34.22 7.11 15.44 11.05 47.52 206.38

2008-09 97.82 35.86 8.86 21.46 11.97 37.25 213.22

2009-10 145.15 49.06 6.33 41.37 14.85 32.56 289.32

2010-11 153.48 42.50 10.98 58.52 17.56 31.60 314.64

2011-12 (Estimated

188.00 51.00 11.00 77.00 19.00 24.00 370.00


1.33

Table 1.3

Traffic Projections of Major and Non Major Ports as per Maritime Agenda 2010-20

Ports Existing Level (million tonnes)

Projections (million tonnes)

CAGR (%) between 2009-10 and

2009-10 2011-12 2016.17 2019-20 2011-12 2016-17 2019-20

Major Ports 561.09 629.64 1031.50 1214.82 5.93 9.09 8.03

Non – Major Ports

288.80 402.50 987.81 1280.13 18.05 19.21 16.06

Overall 849.89 1032.14 2019.31 2494.95 10.20 13.16 11.37

Table 1.4

Multi-Criteria Ranking Analysis of the Locations of the Tadadi Port

Ranking Criteria Locations No.

I II III

Technical Aspects

Need of breakwater 3 1 1

Need of dredging 1 3 2

Road connection 3 1 2

Railway connection 3 1 2

Possibility of expansion 3 1 2

Environmental Aspects

Impact on beaches 3 1 1

Impact of estuary dynamic 1 3 3

Impact of flora and fauna 1 2 3

Total Score 18 13 16


1.34

Table 1.5

Summary of Environmental Parameters and Frequency of Monitoring

Sr. No.

Attribute Parameters No. of Sampling Locations

Frequency of Monitoring / Data

Collection

1. Ambient air quality

PM10,PM2.5,SO2, NOX, NH3, O3, CO, HC, Benzene, Pb, As, Ni, BaP

10 24 hourly samples during study period

2. Meteorology Wind speed and direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall.

Mixing Height

1 The meteorological data has been collected for planning the monitoring network

3. Surface water quality

Physical, chemical bacteriological and biological parameters

8 Once during study period

4. Ground water quality

Physical, chemical bacteriological and biological parameters

10 Once during study period

5. Ecology Existing flora and fauna 21 Through field visits during summer (2010) and substantiated through secondary sources data

6. Noise levels Noise levels in dBA 11 Hourly observation once during the day and night time

7. Soil characteristics

Physical and chemical parameters to assess agricultural and afforestation potential

9 Sub surface composite samples collected once during the study period

8. Land use / Land Cover

Land use for different land use classifications

Study area Land use / Land Cover Analysis using satellite imaging and GIS Technique

9. Socio-economic Environment

Socio-economic characteristics, labour force characteristics, population statistics existing amenities in the study area and quality of life

Study area and 29

stations for survey

Based on field surveys and data collected from secondary sources

CChhaapptteerr 22

PPrroojjeecctt DDeessccrriippttiioonn

2.1 Introduction

In the light of the economic reforms that the Central Government implemented in

the early nineties, and the Karnataka Government also has been making serious efforts

to improve its port infrastructure. In 1997, a port policy was formulated with a view to

develop all ports with private participation. The policy is to develop ports on the BOOST

(Build-Own-Operate-Share and Transfer) concept and primarily seeks to improve cargo

handling capacity. The Karnataka State Government has assigned the responsibility of

developing Port infrastructure under the Public Private Participation (PPP) mode to the

Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited (KSIIDCL).

Scope for further development is strengthened by the new State Infrastructure Policy

2007, which sets out development of infrastructure through the PPP framework.

The advantages attributed to minor ports are many, as they do not come under

any regulatory agency for fixing of tariff by Tarrif Authority for Major Ports (TAMP). Being

in private sector, they could go to any extent to convince a prospective customer by

adopting an aggressive marketing policy with a lot of flexibility. Moreover, the total

automation and 24x7 operations ensure efficient servicing for the minor ports. If the

growth rate persists, it is projected that within a span of few years, viz., by about 2020,

minor ports will overtake the major ports in total cargo handling.

Based on the above, the Government of Karnataka has undertaken the

development of the minor port called “Tadadi” situated in the estuary of Aghanashini

River. The backwaters of the river has got vast water front at the existing port which is

currently being utilized for fishing activities alone. The Government of Karnataka now

Chapter 2: Project Description

2.2

sees a great potential in developing this port with modern infrastructural facilities based

on the following:

A total land area of around 566 hectares (1400 acres) is available for the

development of the port with minimum rehabilitation problems.

Location of mines / industries (mainly steel production) in the hinterland

enable export of iron ore / import of coal and steel products, General Cargo,

Containers etc.,

Location of industries in the hinterland requiring the raw products viz., coal,

which can be imported.

Port requirement for entry of passengers as well as fisheries.

The area though classified as CRZ 1 by MoEF, permits construction of ports.

An effective large hinterland comprising of Central and Northern parts of

Karnataka which are rich in large deposits of minerals such as iron ore etc.,

The Government of Karnataka vide GO No. 100 178/1TSI 2009 Bangalore,

dated 09-02-2009 accorded approval to undertake the implementation of the

Tadadi Port project on a PPP mode and designated KSIIDCL as a nodal

agency.

The projected demand for export of iron ore from Tadadi Port will increase

from 2.87 million tonnes (2015-16) to 27 million tonnes (2040-41).

Also, import of coal will increase from 1.968 millon tonnes (2020-21) to 23.34

million tonnes (2040-41).

With view of the above, KSIIDCL proposes to develop a port at Tadadi initially to

handle cargo transport facilities of capacity of 50.51 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) of

bulk cargo consisting of coal and iron ore as well as, 11.98 million tonnes per annum

(MTPA) of steel products, general cargo and containers. To meet this requirement, seven

berths are proposed to be constructed in the PPP (Public Private Partnership) mode on

DBFT basis. Provision for one LNG import terminal has also been made in the master

plan for the proposed location of a thermal plant by National Thermal Power Corporation

Limited (NTPC).

The port will be located inside an estuary, which offers problem-free berthing

facility throughout the year, without the construction of the breakwaters. Construction of

the port involves berths, along with various cargo storage, handling facilities and utilities,

and other allied buildings.


2.3

2.2 Project Location

Uttar Kannada, one of the coastal district of Karnataka State has a coastline

length of about 300 km and is home to ten ports which are used for various marine

activities including sea trade as a Naval Base and fishing activities.

Uttar Kannada, also known as North Canara or North Kanara is bordered by the

State of Goa and Belgaum district to the north, Dharwad and Haveri districts to the east,

Shimoga and Udupi districts to the south and the Arabian Sea to the west. The town of

Karwar is the administrative headquarters of the district.

The port is connected by State Highway with Mangalore (240 km) and

Bangalore (450 km) on National Highway (NH-66) and about 50 km from Karwar, which is

the nearest town. Nearest railway station is Ankola (25 km) for movement of iron ore by

roadway / railway. Indian railways serve the port through a direct broad gauge link of

Konkan railway from Mumbai to Bangalore, the commercial hub of the State. Since the

area falls under CRZ, maps of the project area were prepared by Indian Naval

Hydrographic Department, Dehradun, one of the authorized agencies by MoEF. Markings

of the high tide line (HTL), low tide line (LTL) and delineated CRZ boundary is shown in

Figs. 2.1 a, b, c, d, e.

2.3 Topography and Port Layout

The Tadadi port serves a vast hinterland, which is rich in iron ore mineral,

industrial and agricultural resources and is connected through a network of roadways and

railways. The present estate of the Tadadi port stretches over an estuarine area of

Aghanashini River / creek measuring about 681 hectares (1684 acres), which is under the

possession of Karnataka Industrial Area Development Board (KIADB). Approximately 236

hectares of land area has been earmarked for commercial buildings and institutional

utilization. The dock area is restricted by a boundary wall and covers about 265 hectares

in the stage 1 development, which includes area for development of storage facilities and

associated buildings. 25% of the total area is kept for green belt development. The land

surface area to be occupied by the proposed Port at Tadadi is about 559 hectares

(1382.5 Acres) as shown in Fig. 2.2.

There are provisions for expansion of the dock area to meet futuredemand.


2.4

2.4 Existing Port

The existing Tadadi fishing harbour is located at Latitude 14º13.50' N and

Longitude 74 º21.50' E in the estuary of the Aghanashini River. The existing facilites

include a Light House structure on R.C.C jetty and a transit shed.

2.5 Proposed Facility

The existing Tadadi fishing harbour is located in the mouth of the Aghanashini

River and has a draft of about 2 m. The proposed facility is in the Aghanashini estuary

east of the existing fishing harbour. The proposed location is in Latitude 14032’40’’N

and Longitude 740 22’03’’ E.

2.6 Traffic Projections

The consultant who had prepared the detailed feasibility study had also carried

out a traffic analysis up to the year 2040-41. Based on the detailed traffic projection, the

proposed cargo to be handled in the port for the year 2040-41 in million tonnes per

annum (MTPA) is smmarised as under.

Export of iron ore - 27.17 MTPA

Import of Coal - 23.34 MTPA

Export of Steel - 8.78 MTPA

Export / Import of

General Cargo and Containers - 3.066 MTPA

Total - 62.360 MTPA

2.7 Hinterland Connectivity

The port has both road and rail connectivity as under.

2.7.1 Road Connectivity

For determining the adequate levels of cargo generation for the proposed port

at Tadadi, the Bellary-Hospet region, the largest producer of the iron ore, has been

considered an important source of cargo generation. The region produces almost 75% of

the mined ore from the State, which is transported primarily by road to the ports on the

Western Coast like Goa, Karwar, Belikere and New Mangalore . A certain volume of

cargo is also shipped through Chennai, Ennore, Krishapatanam and Kakinada. The fact

that a possible port at Tadadi could be much closer to the ore production area is

considered an advantage for considering this development.


2.5

The road connectivity link between Bellary – Hospet (B - H) and Tadadi will be

via Hubli on the National Highway (NH-63). At Hubli two options exist for connecting to

Tadadi.

Option 1: NH-63 (Hubli – Ankola) and NH-66 (Ankola - Tadadi)

Option 2: NH-4 (Hubli – Tadas), SH-69 (Tadas - Kumta) and NH-66 (Kumta –

Tadadi)

It is estimated that the traffic of iron ore/steel product is to be exported while coal

is imported as:

70% of the iron ore to be exported through the Tadadi port will arrive by road

10% of the traffic will be transported by road, once the coal terminal starts

operating

50% steel product has been considered by road for the export.

2.7.2 Rail Connectivity

The rail connectivity of the Tadadi port is proposed to be achieved by

construction of a line between Hubli and Ankola by 2019-20. Till then, no railway traffic is

considered for the Tadadi Port. Following is the traffic generated by Tadadi port by

railway:

30% iron ore traffic arrives from Bellary-Hospet to the port for export

90% of the import coal to be transported from Tadadi port to B-H

50% of the steel products traffic arrives from B-H for export

Regarding issue of hinterland connectivity, provision of rail (Hubli – Ankola) is

preferred & pursued as against widening of highways. If Rail line is approved, widening

of highways may have to be dropped.

2.7.3 Inland water connectivity

As analysed in the detailed traffic study, the coal, iron ore and steel products

will arrive and depart from the port through road or railways to the Bellary – Hospet

region. Hence, inland connectivity through the Aghanashini river has not been planned.

2.8 Design of Ship Sizes

An analysis of the shipping trends for the various cargoes proposed to be

handled at Tadadi was carried out and based on the National, International and


2.6

Permanent International Association Navigation Congress (PIANC) standards the design

ship sizes have been considered for the planning of the port facility as under.

2.9 Number of Berths

To handle the projected traffic 62.360 MTPA in 2040-41 as indicated above,

the following number of berths are required.

23.34 MTPA of Import of Coal - Berth Nos.1 & 2 - 2 nos.

27.17 MTPA of Export of Iron ore - Berth Nos. 3& 4 - 2 nos.

3.07 MTPA of General Cargo and Containers - Berth No.5 - 1 no.

8.78 MTPA of Export of Steel - Berth No.6 & 7 - 2 nos.

Total - 7 nos.

The Location of the Proposed Berths is shown in Fig. 2.3.

2.10 Details of Mechanized Iron Ore/Coal Berths

The proposed system for mechanized loading / unloading of iron ore and coal at

the proposed new deep draft berths has been planned keeping in view the probable berth

allocation, the area earmarked for stockyard development as per the Master Plan. The

alignments of the conveyors in the proposed facilities have been carried out, so as to

clear all the existing and proposed structures under the proposed development schemes

in the port area.

2.11 Cargo Handling Equipment at the Berths

The above noted seven berths are equipped with cargo handling equipments as

indicated below.

Berth No. 1 - 2 ship unloaders of average unitary capacity of 1,700 tph.

Berth No. 2 - 2 ship unloaders of average unitary capacity of 1,700 tph.

Berth No. 3 - 2 ship loaders of average unitary capacity of 2,000 tph

Berth No. 4 - 2 ship loaders of average unitary capacity of 2,000 tph

Berth No. 5 - 1 mobile crane with average unitary capacity of 800 tph.

Berth No. 6 - 2 mobile cranes with average unitary capacity of 800 tph

Berth No. 7 - 2 mobile cranes with average unitary capacity of 800 tph


2.7

2.12 Iron Ore Export Circuit

The iron ore to be exported through the Tadadi Port will enter to the Terminal by

means of road and railway.

The main areas to be considered are,

Area for unloading the trucks and railway wagons

Storage area

Operation area (at the berths)

2.13 Coal Import circuit

The operation of the imported coal circuit is very similar to the iron ore circuit

but is in the reverse direction viz.,

Ship Unloading

Transport to the storage area, dumping, collecting, transport to the loaders

and

Loading to trucks and railways

The main areas to be considered are

Operation area (at the berths)

Storage area

Area for loading on trucks and railway wagons

2.14 Iron ore Handling System on the Berth

The main characteristics of the ship loader for loading of iron ore installed in

the Berth are as under.

Number of ship loaders - 4 (2 at each berth)

Traveling gear - rail

Distance between rails - 30 meters

Average / effective capacity - 2,000 tph

Maximum or peak capacity - 4,000 tph

Out reach from berth line - 40 meters

The iron ore transported by 3 conveyor belts from the stackyard will arrive at the

3 transfer towers, from where it will lead to the 2 ship loaders through 2 independent


2.8

systems of conveyor belt and transfer towers. The belt will feed the pair of ship loaders.

The entire conveyor belts will have a capacity of 3700 tph. The average throughput of

each ship loader will be at least 2000 tph. A typical ship loader is shown in Fig. 2.4.

2.15 Coal Handling System on the Berth

The main characteristics of the ship unloader for unloading of coal installed in

the Berth are as under.

Number of ship unloaders - 4 (2 at each berth)

Traveling gear - rail

Distance between rails - 30 m

Average / effective capacity - 1,700 tph


Out reach from berth line - 40 m

The coal unloaded from the unloaders with an average capacity of 1700 tph.

Two unloaders will be provided in each berth. Two bulk carriers can be unloaded

simultaneously. The unloaded material will be transported through 2 conveyor belts until a

transfer tower, from where it will be transported to the 3 storage areas through a system

of conveyor belts and transfer tower. The conveyor belt must have unitary capacity of

3100 tph. A typical ship unloader is shown in Fig. 2.5.

2.16 Steel Product & General Cargo loading/unloading on the Berth

The main characteristics of the harbour mobile cranes for loading / unloading of

steel products are as under.

Number of harbour mobile cranes - 5

Travelling gear - tyres

Average / effective capacity - 800 tph


Out reach from berth line - 30 m

Lifting capacity - 75 tonnes (a cycle of 3 min

has been considered)

A typical harbour mobile crane is shown in Fig. 2.6.


2.9

2.17 Stacker / Reclaimers

The Stacker / reclaimers for stacking and reclaiming of coal and iron ore are as

under.

Travelling gear - rails

Travelling Speed - 0.2 to 15 m/min (approx)

Average capacity as stacker - 3,700 tph for iron ore and

- 3,100 tph for coal

Average capacity as reclaimer - 3,700 tph for iron ore and

- 3,100 tph for coal

Boom length

(from the bucket wheel to the rail line axle) - 50 m

Boom slewing angle - ± 100º

Boom slewing speed - 0.05 to 0.15 rad /min

(approx.)

2.18 Iron Ore unloading System

The iron ore transported by railway will be dumped at the unloading stations

located inside the port. It will have two lines with one module and can be extended

if necessary. The main characteristics of the wagon unloading station are as under.

Number of lines - 2

Number of modules per line - 1

Throughput - 3,000 tph per module

Total throughput per line - 3,000 tph

The main characteristics of the truck unloading station are the following.

Similarly, the iron ore transported by road will be dumped at the trucks unloading station,

which will have three lines.

Number of lines - 3

Throughput - 1,000 tph per line

Total throughput - 3,000 tph.


2.10

2.19 Coal Loading System at the Station

The coal will be loaded onto railway wagons at the loading station, which will

have two lines. The main characteristics of the wagons loading station are as under.

Number of lines - 2

Number of modules per line - 3

Throughput - 550 tph per module (1,650 tph per line)

Total throughput - 3,300 tph

Buffer capacity - 1000 m3 per module

Similarly, the coal will be loaded onto trucks at the truck loading stations.

Initially it will have two modules, but it can be extend to a total of four modules. The main

characteristics of the truck loading station are as under.

Number of modules – 2 (+2 in the future)

Throughput - 300 tph per module

Total throughput – 600 tph ( initially, expandable to 1,200 tph)

Buffer capacity – 1,000m3 per module

2.20 Storage Areas

The storage areas for various cargoes are as under:

Iron ore - To handle the projected traffic of 27.17 MTPA, 2 rows of 9 stacks

each of size, 118 m length, 65m width and 6.5m height of 2.25 MT will be

provided.

A parking area for the trucks with a capacity of 85 posts has been

planned, where they will be waiting to access to the TD’s.

Coal - To handle the projected traffic of 23.34 MTPA 3 rows of 7 stacks

each of size, 148 m length, 80m width, and 17m height of1.95 MT will be

provided.

A parking area for the trucks with a capacity of 85 posts has been

planned, where they will be waiting to access to the TL’s.

The bulk cargo will be transported from the unloading area (wagons and

trucks for the iron ore and ship unloaders for the coal) to the storage area

and from the storage area to the loading area (ship loaders for the iron ore

and wagons and trucks for the coal) by means of a system of conveyor belts.


2.11

Steel and General Cargo - A transit shed of size 50 m x 180 m (9000 m2) is

proposed to serve the new multipurpose berth. In addition, with the open

stockyard, warehouses outside the port area will also be provided.

2.21 Port Railway

Tadadi Port will have its own railway system with route length of 25 km from

Ankola to Tadadi Port. More than 20 railway sidings will be required for handling full rakes

of 59 BOXN Wagon.

2.22 Salient Features of Berths

The berth structures for iron ore and coal have been designed as open berth

structures with cast in situ bored piles of 1200 mm and 1500 dia. The berth structure will

be designed using STAAD PRO software using finite element analysis system.

The super structure consists of RCC deck slab supported on longitudinal and

transverse, cross beams. M40 grade concrete will be used for piling and for the super

structure. Reinforcement steel will be Corrosion Resistant Steel (CRS) conforming to IS

1786 -1979 with a specified characteristic strength Fy = 500 / 415 N/ mm2. 50mm thick

wearing coat will be provided on the top slab to take care of normal wear and tear during

the port operations. Service duct slabs are provided on the fender side as well as on the

rear side. CSS rubber fender, which is a hollow cylindrical body with fully rubber –

embedded mounting flanges, designed to deflect in an axial direction will be used. 100

tonne capacity bollards will be used for mooring of the ships.

Taking into consideration the hydraulic flow of the estuary, wave and wind

direction an L shaped berth alignment has been suggested as under.

Southern side longer arm of 1192 m to accommodate 2 iron ore and 2 coal

berths

Western side arm of 866 m at right angle to the southern side to handle steel

in 2 berths and general cargo and containers in 1 berth. This arm will also

provide for berthing facilities for auxiliary vessels/ harbour crafts.

The width of the berths is 50m.

The design vessel considered for the design of iron ore and coal berths is

1,00,000 DWT. The berths will be operated for 330 days / year, 20 hours / day, so that

the maximum theoretical operation time available per berth will be 330 x 20 = 6,600

hours/ year.


2.12

The design vessel considered for the western side arm for handling steel,

general cargo and containers is 40,000 DWT. However, the berth structures have been

designed to handle 100,000 DWT in future.

The berths will be operated for 330 days / year, 20 hours / day, so that the

maximum theoretical operation time available per berth will be 330 x 20 = 6,600 hours/

year. Taking into consideration the various standards the operational parameters for the

different types of vessels proposed to be handled are as under.

For General Cargo vessels : Hs = 0.65 m

For Bulk Cargo vessels : Hs= 0.80m (unloading; i.e. coal vessels)

Hs = 0.90 m (loading, i.e. iron ore vessels)

Where, Hs = Significant Wave Height

The depth at the southern berths will be the same as at the inner navigation

channel and the turning circle, which is (-)16mCD, whereas the depth at the western

berth will be (-)14.5 mCD.

A transit shed of size 50 m x 180m is proposed to serve the new multipurpose

berth. Reinforced concrete columns supporting steel trusses form the structural frame

work of the shed. The span of steel truss is 50m.

In some of the backup areas the top soil up to a depth of 10m consist of clayey

soil with SPT value varying from 1 to 4. The ground improvement technique using

Prefabricated Vertical Drains (PVD) will be used.

2.23 Dredging Requirement

2.23.1 Capital Dredging Requirement

The existing depths and the dimensional requirements of the proposed harbour

are detailed below. The Navigational Channel Turning Circles etc., are shown in Fig. 2.7.

The existing depths at the various locations of the port are as under.

Outer approach channel (-) 3.9 mCD to (-) 24.4 mCD.

Inner approach channel (-) 5mCD (varies).

First turning circle (-) 1.07mCD

Second turning circle (-) 0.8mCD

Front of Iron ore and Coal berths (-) 0.8mCD


2.13

Front of General Cargo berths (-) 0.4 to 1.2mCD

From the study of the bore holes taken in the outer sea it is noted that the

medium dense sand with clay having S.P.T value ranging from 6 to 50 was noted

extending up to (-) 6mCD. This is followed by very dense sand with S.P.T value of 40 to

greater than 100 extending up to (-)12mCD. Below this silty clay with SPT value of 2 to 6

was noted extending up to about (-)18mCD. This is followed by disintegrated rock and

then hard rock.

From the study of the bore holes taken in the inner channel of the sea it is noted

that the top soil comprise of very soft clayey sand with S.P.T value of 1 to 2 extending up

to a depth of about (-)8mCD. In certain pockets shell deposits and medium dense sand

pockets were noted. Below the soft layer, medium dense silty sand having S.P.T value of

6 to 26 was encountered extending up to (-)18mCD. This was followed by weathered

rock and then by the hard rock.

The final design dredging depths for the various locations are as under.

Outer approach channel (-) 18mCD

Inner approach channel (-) 16mCD

First & Second turning circle (-) 16mCD

Coal and Iron ore berth (-) 16mCD

General cargo berth (-) 14.5mCD

The width of the approach channel for the various zones are as under.

Outer approach channel 180m

Inner approach channel 200m

Curved portion of the inner channel 217.5m

Dia of the First turning circle 290m

Dia of the Second turning circle 210m

Width in-front of Coal and Iron ore berths 278m

Width in-front of General cargo berths 151m

Radius of the first bend in the channel 2947m

Radius of the second bend in the channel 555m


2.14

A side slope of 1:5 has been assumed.

The total quantity of dredging involved is 500,00,000 m3, out of which the hard

material to be dredged is 69,00,000 m3. Out of the above, 180,00,000 m3 of suitable

material will be used for reclamation and the balance of 320,00,000 m3 will be disposed

off shore, in the designated dumping areas based on the model studies.

The dredged material which is suitable for reclamation is proposed to be used

partly for filling or reclamation of the backup area of the port and unsuitable material will

be disposed off in the offshore disposal area as per the guidelines of MoEF.

The dredged material cut by the cutter suction dredger will be transported to the

reclamation area through a system of floating and shore pipelines.

The dredging alongside the berth and the corners is proposed to be carried out

by the grab and back hoe dredgers.

An efficient containment system for reclamation must

Confine the material within the dredged area

Prevent the damage to surrounding areas by inundation and

Have a sufficient area for maximum rate of drying of the spoil

The containment facility must be so designed that sufficient time is allowed for

the settlement of the solids. The degree of containment will depend upon the type of

material. For coarse granular material, which maintains a slope of 1:3 or 1:4, requires

containment only at the edges of the containment area. However, the fine cohesive

materials must be contained on all the sides. The excess water is drained, either through

an adjustable overflow weir or a drop inlet overflow. A typical reclamation area showing

the overflow weir is shown in Fig. 2.8.

The type of bunds / dikes to be provided for containment of the soil, will depend

upon the site conditions, such as type of soil, environmental conditions, type of foundation

etc. When the bund is under the attack of waves, rip rap or armoring has to be provided.

The types of dredgers proposed to be used are as under.

Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger (TSHD)

Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD)

Grab or Backhoe dredger


2.15

A typical trailing suction hopper dredger is shown in Fig. 2.9.

A typical cutter suction hopper dredger is shown in Fig. 2.10.

A typical Grab dredger is shown in Fig. 2.11.

A typical Backhoe dredger is shown in Fig. 2.12.

The modeling of the sedimentation process of the material dumped from the

trailing suction hopper dredger has been carried out by means of the program titled

“DUMP”.

2.23.2 Annual Maintenance of Dredging requirement

The annual maintenance dredging requirement of the port has been evaluated

based on the present maintenance dredging quantities in the adjacent major ports on the

west coast of India viz., Mormugao Port, New Mangalore Port and Cochin Port. The ratio

obtained by dividing the average annual maintenance dredging volumes at the outer

channel by the surface area of the navigation channel, represents the average height of

sediment dredged.

These ratios for the three adjacent ports indicated above are as under.

Mormugoa Port - 2.69

New Mangalore Port - 2.64

Cochin – 2.66

From the above, it may be seen that the ratios are quite similar.

At the proposed Tadadi port, the surface area of the outer channel is 9350 m x

180 m = 16, 83, 000 m2. By applying the obtained average ratio of 2.66 m3/m2, of the

channel of the adjacent ports on the west coast of India, the average annual maintenance

of dredging volume for the outer navigation channel would be 16,83,000 m3/m2 =

4,476,780 m3/year. Therefore, the total annual average maintenance dredging volume by

taking into consideration the contribution from the river, south, north and outer approach

channel will be 50,90,000 m3/year as under.

The dredged material obtained from maintenance dredging being mostly silt is

normally not suitable for reclamation will be disposed off in the offshore dumping areas.


2.16

2.24 Navigational Aids

For safe navigation of the ships from the fairway buoy through the approach

channel right up to the berth, navigational aids are to be provided.

The aids to navigation are also known as ATON. The important navigational aids are

Navigational Buoys on the sides of the Approach Channel and the Fairway

buoy

Leading lines (Range lines) and

Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS)

2.24.1 Navigational Buoys

Various systems for the location of navigational buoys are in use in different

parts of the world. In India IALA’s system is used.

In the case of Tadadi buoys demarcating the channel will have green colours on

the starboard side (right) and red colour buoys on the port side. The buoys will have

green colour day marks for identification during the day and red lights during the night.

These lights are normally solar powered. The marker and the lights are fixed to the buoy

which is normally made of light material such as a FRP. The buoys are moored to the

sea bed through a system of steel chains and anchors. The buoys can be laid 2 km a

part and staggered on either side of the channel.

The beginning of the channel and where the ships come and anchor, also have

a buoy which will have a day marker as well as a light. This buoy has known as the

Fairway buoy.

2.24.2 Leading Line

Leading line /Range lines are provided by the installation of two transit marks for

defining the central line, which will have both day marker and lights. Instead of providing

two transit marks for defining the central line of the channel, a modern system known as a

“Sector Light” can also be provided.

The buoys and the leading lights will have typical flashing characteristics to

identify their location which will be indicated in the National Hydrographic Chart as an

approach to the port.

A typical arrangement of leading lines is shown in Fig. 2.13.


2.17

2.24.3 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS)

The vessel traffic management system is covered in para 2.30.1

2.25 Mooring of Vessel

The vessels are to be properly tied to the berth structures for safety as well as

smooth operations. The tying operation is known as the mooring of the vessel.

The vessels are fastened to the berth through mooring lines known as hawsers

to a fixed object called Bollard. A 100 tonnes capacity bollard which can safely moor a

1,00,000 DWT vessel have been provided at regular intervals.

The bollards are normally made of cast steel.

A typical 100 tonnes bollard is shown in Fig. 2.14.

2.26 Tugs and other floating crafts required for berthing /un-berthing of Vessels

The assistance of tugs for the turning of the vessels will be utilized during the

approach, berthing and un- berthing vessel.

The main characteristics of the proposed tugs are as under.

Type : Tractor type tug

Power : 4,000 HP

Bollard pull : 40 tonnes

2.27 Utilities

Various utilities like water, power, control system, communication system,

workshop, gate complex, customers, administrative and dispensary buildings etc. will to

be provided at the Tadadi Port.

2.28 Water

Water requirement for various activities of port viz. drinking, sanitation, cleaning

and washing of vehicles and equipments etc. in initial phase will be of the order of 50-100

m3/day. The projected water requirement up to year 2020-21 for the port activities would

be about 150 m3/day. The nearest water source identified is from the river Gangavalli

which is within 8km from Tadadi port.


2.18

2.29 Power

Electrical system would be based on latest technology, system stability and

reliability, which could be obtained from the Karnataka Power Transmission Corporation

Limited (KPTCL). The total requirement of electricity will be about 22 MW, which can be

met from Kodasahalli (120- MW hydel power plant) or Khadra Hydel power project (150

MW power). Both of these are about 45 km from the port. The magnitude of connected

load and maximum demand would be 4500 kW and 3000 kW (3350 KVA at 0.9 power

factor), respectively.

Necessary approval for power to be obtained from KPTCL through overhead

single circuit transmission line laid upto main sub-station located within the port boundary.

It is presumed that the incoming supply voltage would be 33 KV, which is the common

practice with electricity authorities for the magnitude of load indicated above. The

overhead transmission lines installed by KPTCL shall be suitable to cater to the load

demand inclusive of projected future load to avoid reinstallation / upgradation of incoming

lines. However, the contractual load shall be initially 2500 KVA (for the present facility).

KPTCL, shall provide a double pole structure near the main substation to receive the

incoming supply.

2.30 Control System

A microprocessor based programmable controller system has been planned to

monitor and supervise the material flow and equipment operations from the control room.

2.31 Communication System

Comprehensive telephone system including EPABX and VHF handsets have

been envisaged for effective communication between control room and the various

sections/ equipment/locations of the port, like: Ship loader / Unloader/ Reclaimer/

Stacker, Main-substation, Control room, Workshop, Gate complex, Customs building,

Administrative complex, Dispensary etc.

Public address system comprising of desk/wall mounted handset stations with

built in amplifier and loudspeaker installation at various locations enroute the material

handling system covering, jetties and back up area has been envisaged.


2.19

2.32 Information Technology and Communication

2.32.1 Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS)

A Vessel Traffic Management Systems will be installed for safe navigation

efficient traffic flow and protection of the environment. The system has a radar for

monitoring and controlling of vessels on real time basis with a state of the art RISC based

Alpha Server. The VTMS will also be useful for dealing with incidents and emergency

situations. It will also assist Coastguard in search and rescue operations.

The system will be interfaced with the port management computer system to

maintain the database of vessel movements, vessel related information and aid in the

scheduling of arrival and departure of vessels at the Tadadi Port.

2.33 Fire Protection and Alarm System

A state of art fire detection system is connected to the pumping line controlled

by an electronic control panel. The fire pumps are designed based on the discharge rate

and throwing distance and alarm system for operational areas, main substation and

electrical / control room. The same will consist of heat / smoke detectors, manual call

points, hooters, sirens and central fire alarm panel located in the control room.

In addition to the above, a firefighting system comprising of external hydrants

lines with pumping line and booster line all around the area will be provided which will

meet the general firefighting standards.

2.34 Facilities for Treatment or Disposal of Solid Waste / Liquid Effluent

Based on the estimated quantity of waste production, the desired treatment and

disposal facilities would be provided at the site of the Tadadi port. The waste streams

generated by ships include bilge water (water that collects in the lowest part of the ship’s

hull and it may contain oil, grease, and other contaminants), sewage, gray water

(wastewater from showers, sinks, laundries and kitchens), ballast water (water taken

onboard or discharged from a vessel to maintain its stability), and solid waste (food waste

and garbage).

Present day wastewater treatment systems for use in marine vessels are similar

to land based applications, where wastewater is separated into two separate sources as

Grey-water and Raw Sewage (Black-water). For Black-water, the treatment system

incorporates five general phases (or zones): (1) screening, (2) clarifying, (3) filtering, (4)


2.20

advanced oxidation, and (5) sludge reducing. For Grey-water, the treatment system

incorporates three general phases (or zones): (1) screening (2) filtering, and (3) advanced

oxidation. Each train of the treatment system (black-water and gray-water) can operate

as a stand-alone system or can be assimilated into an integrated treatment train for both,

Grey-water and Black-water. This system is particularly useful in today’s restrictive

regulatory environment. The treated effluent (the quality strictly abiding by the norms and

notifications set by the regulatory bodies like CRZ and MARPOL would finally be

discharged into the sea.

In the case of solid waste, food waste is macerated and treated with grey water.

Paper and other combustible solids are incinerated on board many of the vessels.

2.35 Dust Control System

The handling of huge quantity of iron ore and coal at the port will generate

fugitive dust emissions from various transfer points.

Since the ship unloading cranes will be used for unloading of coal, and ship

loaders for loading of iron ore, onboard dust suppression system will be provided for

mitigation of dust, if any. Similarly all transfer towers connected to the coal / iron ore

handling will have provision for installing dust suppression system. At each location, bag

filter type dust extraction system will be provided. The emission level through the

installations will be limited to 150 mg/m3.

During the transportation of the coal and iron ore by means of conveyor belts

and transfer towers, a state- of- the- art equipment/facilities, which is fully covered and

equipped with air filters will capture the dust produced.

In the storage area too, the dust emission sprinkler system will be provided

around the coal heaps in order to maintain them in wet condition and avoid dust

generation.

2.36 Cost Estimates

The total cost of the project works out to Rs. 38,135 crores. The preliminary Bill

of quantities and cost estimates is presented in Table 2.3.

2.37 Clearances Required for the Project Implementation

The clearances required to be obtained from Government of India and

Karnataka before the implementation of the project are delineated in Table 2.4.


2.21

MAJAR E KAGAL A - T1

S AMMATU C HENDAVARA

N OR TH KANN ADA DIS TR ICT

K UMTA TALUK

Y EAR 1 871

KAR N ATAKA

V IL LAGE AGHANASHINI

Datum : W GS 84

P ro je c tion : T ra nsverse Mercator

Fig. 2.1 (a): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River.

Fig. 2.1 (b): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River


2.22

S AMMATU GOKARNA

N OR TH KANN ADA DISTR ICT

KUMTA TALUK

Y EAR 1870

ILAKA MY SORE

V ILLAGE GOKARNA

Datum : W GS 84

P roj e c tion : T ransverse Mercator

T IKKA - 2

(1 Ce ntimeter = 39. 6 Meters or 1 :3960)

SAMMATU MAJAKURA

NORTH K ANNADA DISTRICT

KUMTA TALUK

YEAR 1875

K ARNATAKA

KASABA GOKARNA

Datum : W GS 84

Projec t i on : Tran sverse Mercator

TIK KA - 3

1. Cad as tral Map s obtaine d from Govt. of Karnataka have been

Geore fe re nc ed and vec torise d at N HO.

2. HT L and LT L have bee n de te rmined in the field and incorporatedin the maps.

3 . The offs et l ines 100m, 150m as app licable from the riverine HTL andthe 200m, 500m from the s eaward H TL , have bee n plotted using

4. Position of pillars and GCPs have be en d etermine d on the groundand inc orporate d in the maps.

5 . Limits of CR zones have be en obtaine d from the KSR SAC maps andp lotted w ith ne ce ss ary ad ju stme nts for datums.

Catrograp hic note

DEL MAR process.

Fig. 2.1 (c): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River

Fig. 2.1 (d): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River


2.23

VI LLAGE TORKE

(1 Ce ntimeter = 39. 6 Meters or 1 :3960)

SAMMATU MAJAKURA

NOR TH KANNADA DISTRICT

K UMTA TALUK

Y EAR 1870

KAR NATAKA

KASABA GOKARNA

Datum : W GS 84

Pro jection : Tra nsverse Mercator

TIKKA - 4

Fig. 2.1 (e): Demarcation of HTL, LTL and Delineation of CRZ Boundary near the Tadadi Situated in the Estuary of Aghanashini River

Source: Feasibility Report, 2011

Fig. 2.2: Area Available for the Development of Tadadi Port


2.24

4 3 2

5

6

1

7

8

Fig. 2.3: Location of the Proposed Berths

Fig. 2.4 : Typical Ship Loader

Fig. 2.5 : Typical Ship Un Loader


2.25

Fig. 2.6 : Typical Harbour Mobile Crane

Fig. 2.7 : Navigational Channel Alignment and Turning Circles


2.26

Fig. 2.8 : Typical Reclamation Area with Overflow Weir

Fig. 2.9 : Typical Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger


2.27

Fig. 2.10 : Typical Cutter Suction Dredger

Fig. 2.11 : Typical Grab Dredger

Fig. 2.12 : Typical Back Hoe Dredger


2.28

Fig. 2.13 : Arrangement of leading lines for Tadadi Port

Fig. 2.14 : Typical 100 Tonne Bollard


2.29

Table 2.1

Design Vessels for the Tadadi Port

Type Ship Size (DWT)

LOA

(m)

Beam (m)

Draught (m)

Bulk Carriers 100,000 268.0 43.5 14.0

Multipurpose Carriers 80,000 240.0 36.5.0 14.0

Crude oil Carrier 85,000 260.0 40.0 14.0

Liquid Gas Carrier 60,000 265.0 42.2 13.5

Container Ships 80,000 260.0 42.5 14.0

Ro-Ro Vessels 50,000 287.0 32.2 12.4

General Cargo Vessels 40,000 209.0 30.0 12.5

Car Carriers 30,000 193.0 32.2 11.7

Ferriers 25,000 197.0 36.6 7.1

Passengers cruise Ship 80,000 272.0 35.0 8.0

Design Ship Size 100,000 290.0 43.5 14.0

Table 2.2

Total Quantity of Maintenance Dredging

Sr.No. Contribution from the sources Quantity (m3 / year)

1. River 3,35,000

2. Southern beach 1,85,000

3. Northern beach 95,000

4. Outer part of the channel 44,75,000

Total 50,90,000


2.30

Table 2.3

Preliminary Bill of Quantities and Cost Estimates

1. Maritime Infrastructure

1.1 Navigation Channel 11,626,270,000.00

1.2 Wharfs 5,916,000,000.00

2. Onshore Infrastructure

2.1 Dry Bulk Terminal 2,547,363,620.00

2.2 Multipurpose Terminal 736,343,950.00

2.3 Common areas 421,557,120.00

3. Facilities

3.1 Utilities 1,122,642,500.00

3.2 Pollution Control 50,000,000.00

3.3 Other Facilities 5,000,000.00

4. Equipments

4.1 Cargo Handling Equipments 9,377,978,098.16

4.2 Marine Equipments 1,450,000,000.00

4.3 Equipment foundation 30,000,000.00

5. Buildings 270,000,000.00

6. Other Expenses 1,115,000,000.00

7. Contingencies 3,466,815,528.82

Sum Total 38,134,970,816.98


2.31

Table 2.4

Clearances Required from Central / State Govt. Departments

Sr. No.

Clearance Required Agency who would

issue clearance

When required

Govt. of India Agencies

1. Company Registration Registrar of Companies Company

formation stage

2. Environmental Impact Assessment

and Environment Management plan

(EIA/EMP) in respect of the project

pursuant to section 3(1) and 3(2) (iv)

of the Environment (protection) act,

1986 and Rule 5 (3) (a) of the

Environment (protection) Rules, 1986.

Ministry of

Environmental &

Forests (MoEF),

New Delhi

Before project

implementation

3. Customs Notification of Area for

Landing and Loading Cargo

Central Board of Excise

and Customs, New

Delhi

Before start of

Port Operations

4. Customs Notification for berthing of

Foreign Ships

Central Board of Excise

and Customs, New

Delhi

Before start of

Port Operations

5. Scheme pursuant to the sec-29 of the

Electricity (Supply) Act 1948

Central Electricity

Authority (CEA)

Project Implementation

6. Fire fighting equipment Tariff Advisory

committee /PESO

Nagpur


7. Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) MoEF New Delhi Before Project

Implementation

8. Height of the chimney National Airports

Authority


9. Confirmation from DGTD / CCI&E that

there is automatic clearance for the

import of capital Goods and Raw

materials

Director General of

Technical

Development/ Director

General of Foreign

Trade


10. Confirmation from Department of

Economic affairs, Ministry of Finance

and Financing Agreements

Ministry of Finance Project implementation

11. Confirmation of permission from RBI Reserve Bank of India Project implementation


2.32

Sr. No.


issue clearance

When required

Govt. of Karnataka Agencies (GoK)

1.2. Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) GoK, Coastal Zone Management Authority

Initial stage

13. Land comprising the project site and the Green Belt relating to the site contains no land deemed to be ‘reserved forest’ land as per Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980.

Karnataka Forest Department & Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)

Before project implementation

14. Clearance under Section 18A of the Electricity Supply Act.

Government of Karnataka

Project Implementaion

15. For allocation of requisite amount of water and for abstraction of sea water

Department of Water Supply GoK / Relevant Authority

Project Implementaion

16. Permission for use of ground water Ground Water Dept. of Gok.


17. Confirmation for water supply of required quantity

Karnataka Urban Water Supply and Drainage Board

Pre-Project Implementation

18. Approval pursuant to the Air (Prevention & control of Pollution) Act, 1981 in connection with emissions

Karnataka State Pollution Control Board

Pre-Project Implementation

19. Electricity to be made available under

Section 44 of Electricity (Supply) Act,

1948

Karnataka Power

Transmission Co. Ltd.

Construction period

20. Confirmation relating to project and

green belt

Deputy

Conservator/Directorate

of Town planning, GoK

Before

Construction

21. Approval of proposed design and

construction of the project pursuant to

Section 6 of the Factories Act, 1948.

Chief Inspector of

Factories, Government

of Karnataka

Before

Construction

period

22. Consent relating to Fire fighting

capability under the Factories Act,

1948

Chief Inspector of

Factories, GoK

Before Project

Implementation

23. License required for construction

Labour pursuant to Section 7 of the

Contract Labour (Regulation and

Abolition) Act, 1970

Labour Commissioner Before

Commencement

of construction

24. Registration of workers pursuant to

section 2-A of the Employees state

insurance Act, 1948, to be claimed if

Labour Commissioner Before Commencement of construction


2.33

Sr. No.


issue clearance

When required

other group insurance is taken

25. Clearance for transportation of heavy

material / machinery by ships,

onroads/bridge

Relevant Authority Project Implementation

26. Clearance from Electrical inspector for

electrical installation

Chief Electrical

Inspectorate of GoK.

Construction period

CChhaapptteerr 33

BBaasseelliinnee

EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall SSttaattuuss

3.1 Background

This chapter describes the existing environmental settings in the study area and

includes the physical environment comprising air, noise, water and land, biological and

socioecological environmental components. The major objectives of the study are:

To understand the project need and environmental characteristics of the

area

To assess the existing environmental quality, as well as the environmental

impacts of the proposed developments

To identify environmentally significant factors or geographical areas that

could preclude any future development

3.1.1 Climate and Meteorology - Analysis of IMD Data

The seasonality along India’s Western coast experiences a typical monsoon

climate, with the yearly weather pattern split into four seasons.

North-east monsoon (winter) : December to February

Pre monsoon season : March to May

South-west monsoon : June to September

Post monsoon season : October and November

Chapter 3:

Baseline Environment Status

3.2

Long term meteorological data recoreded at IMD – Honavar (Karnataka) has

been analysed for various parameters viz. temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric

pressure, rainfall, cloud cover and wind speed. Monthly variation in chlimatological data

for the period 1951-1980 is presented in Table 3.1.1 and briefly described here.

Temperature

The winter season starts from January and continues till the end of February.

January is the coldest month with the annual mean maximum temperature at 31.0°C and

the mean minimum temperature at 20.00C. Both the day and night temperatures increase

rapidly during the onset of pre-monsoon season. During pre-monsoon the mean

maximum temperature (April) is observed at 32.9°C with the mean minimum temperature

at 20.0°C. The mean maximum temperature in the Monsoon season was observed to be

34.7°C whereas the mean minimum temperature was observed to be 17.5°C. By end of

September with the onset of Northeast monsoon (October), day temperatures decrease

slightly with the mean maximum temperature at 30.9°C and the mean minimum

temperature at 23.3°C. The highest temperature 37.8°C was recorded on March 17, 1948

and lowest 14.2°C on February 18, 1960.

Relative Humidity

The air is generally very humid in the region especially during monsoon when

the average annual relative humidity is observed around 81 % to 72% with a maximum

and minimum of 92% and 57% respectively. In the pre-monsoon period the relative

humidity is 63%. During the pre-monsoon season the mean maximum humidity is

observed at 78%, with the mean minimum humidity at 67% in the month of May and April

respectively. During winter season, the humidity is found to be in line with the values

recorded during the pre-monsoon season. The mean maximum humidity is recorded

during winter season, which is the driest part of year with an average of 75% relative

humidity.

Atmospheric Pressure

The station level maximum and minimum atmospheric pressure levels are

recorded during the winter and monsoon seasons. The annual maximum and minimum

pressure is observed in the range of 1007.8 to 1004.9 hPa, with the maximum pressure

(1010.7 hPa) occurring during the winter season in the month of January. The minimum

Chapter 3:


3.3

pressure is observed in the range of 1004.8 to 1002.9 hPa, with the minimum pressure

(1003.3 hPa) occurring during the pre-monsoon season in the month of June.

Rainfall

It is observed that the south-west monsoon is more predominant than the north-

east monsoon. The southwest monsoon generally sets in during the last week of May.

About 60% of the rainfall is received during the southwest monsoon. The rainfall gradually

decreases after September (minimum rainfall is recorded in the month of December).The

area experiences maximum rainfall (378.5 mm) in the month of June. The northeast

monsoon rains occured between October to December and contribute to 16% of the total

rainfall.

Cloud Cover

Generally light clouds are observed during winter mornings. During pre-

monsoon and the post-monsoon evenings the skies are either clear or lightly clouded. But

in post-monsoon mornings as well as in monsoon mornings, heavy clouds are commonly

observed, whereas in the evenings the skies are light to moderately cloudy. The clouds

are observed in the range of 3.7 - 4.7 oktas of sky. Generally fog does not occur in the

study area.

Special Weather Phenomenon

Thunderstorms are frequent in pre-monsoon, post monsoon and early North-

east monsoon seasons. Occasional squalls occur in association with thunderstorms in the

later pre-monsoon season.

Wind Speed / Direction

Generally, winds are light and moderate, particularly during the morning hours,

while during the afternoon hours the winds are stronger. Winds are stronger during pre-

monsoon and monsoon seasons. During the period January to May winds strengthens in

the afternoons. The minimum mean values of wind speed (5.7 kmph) are observed in the

month of October and maximum speed (9.4 kmph) during July with an annual mean

speed of 7.2 kmph. During the rest of the year, winds are north-easterly to easterly in the

mornings and blow from directions between southwest and northwest in the afternoons.

The winds are predominantly from western side.

Chapter 3:


3.4

3.1.2 Micrometerology of Port Site

The study of micro-meteorological conditions of a particular region is of utmost

importance to understand the variations in ambient air quality status in that region. The

prevailing micrometeorology at project site plays a crucial role in transport and dispersion

of air pollutants released from the pollution sources. The persistence of the predominant

wind direction and wind speed at the project site will decide the direction and extent of the

air pollution impact zone. The principal variables, which affect the micrometeorology, are

horizontal transport and dispersion (average wind speed and directions), convective

transport and vertical mixing (atmospheric stability) and also topography of the area.

The micro-meteorological data recorded at the project site as well as surface

meteorological data procured from IMD corresponding to nearest available observatory

(Honawar) are appropriately used in this study. The hourly record of wind speed and

wind direction during study period was used for computing the relative percentage

frequencies of wind occurrences in various directions. The windrose for post monsoon

season is presented in Fig. 3.1.1.

The 24 hourly windrose diagram for Post monsoon season indicate that the

predominant winds are from East and West directions with speed ranging between 1.0

and 3.5 m/s. Accordingly the impact zone will be spread over West and East directions

during Post monsoon season.

Fig. 3.1.1: Windrose during Post monsoon Season at Tadadi

Chapter 3:


3.5

Table 3.1.1

Climatological Data – IMD Honavar, Karnataka (1951-1980)

Month Mean Temp. (°C)

Relative Humidity (%)

Atmospheric Pressure (hPa)

Rainfall (mm)

Wind Speed

(kmph) Max Min 0830 1730 0830 1730

January 31.9 20.0 70 58 1010.7 1007.2 0.6 6.2

February 31.5 20.5 75 63 1010.0 1006.5 0.0 6.7

March 32.2 22.9 80 65 1009.1 1005.8 1.1 6.9

April 32.9 25.2 78 67 1007.5 1004.1 17.0 7.2

May 32.5 25.8 79 70 1005.8 1003.0 171.9 8.4

June 29.5 23.9 90 84 1004.8 1002.9 1016.1 9.2

July 28.2 23.4 92 88 1004.8 1003.3 1196.0 9.4

August 28.3 23.5 92 86 1005.7 1003.8 702.7 8.4

September 29.1 23.2 91 82 1007.0 1004.4 363.1 5.9

October 30.9 23.3 86 77 1008.0 1005.1 171.1 5.7

November 32.6 22.2 72 64 1009.3 1006.1 58.6 5.9

December 32.8 21.2 64 57 1010.5 1006.9 17.1 7.0

Annual (Avg.)

31.0 22.9 81 72 1007.8 1004.9 3753.3 7.2

Chapter 3:


3.6

3.2 Air Environment

3.2.1 Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

The existing quality of the air environment serves as an index for assessing the

pollution load and the assimilative capacity of any region and forms an important tool for

planning any project activity in the region and forms an important part of the project

activity. The micrometeorological data collected during air quality survey was used for

proper interpretation of existing ambient air quality status. The ambient air quality

monitoring was carried out through reconnaissance followed by air quality and

micrometeorological data collection.

The ambient air quality data are collected through a well-designed air quality

monitoring network. While designing ambient air quality monitoring (AAQM) network, the

following criteria were taken in to account.

Topography of the study area

Representation of regional background

Population and sensitive locations

Screening of maximum ground level concentrations and distance of their

likely occurrences as per climatological norms

Cross sectional distribution in downwind direction

Air quality monitoring was carried out in post monsoon (October- November,

2010). Parameters such as Particulate Matter less than 10 microns and 2.5 microns size

(i.e. PM10 and PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX), Ammonia (NH3),

Carbon Monoxide (CO), Hydrocarbon (HC), Benzene were identified as significant

parameters for air quality monitoring in the study area. Particulate associated pollutants

Ni, Pb, As, and BaP were determine in the samples collected.

The technique used for ambient air qualiry monitoring is given in Table 3.2.1.

3.2.2 Baseline Status

AAQM study was conducted at 10 select locations on 24 hourly averages for two

days in a week as per the guidelines of CPCB and NAAQS. AAQM was carried out at 10

locations to determine cross-sectional distribution of air pollution parameters. The

conventional parameters such as PM10 and PM2.5, Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), and Oxides of

Chapter 3:


3.7

Nitrogen (NOx), NH3, Ozone, Benzene, heavy metals, benzopyrene (BaP), CO as well as

Hydrocarbon were monitored at each location. The detailed of sampling locations are

depicted in Fig. 3.2.1 and described in Table 3.2.2.

A temporary laboratory was setup at project site for chemical analysis of

representative air samples. The micro-meteorological data on wind speed, wind direction,

temperature and relative humidity were collected during the study period.

The concentrations of various pollutants at all the monitoring locations were

processed for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean, standard deviation,

minimum concentration and maximum concentration and percentile values.

The existing baseline levels in post-monsoon season with respect to PM10 and

PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, NH3. Ozone, heavy metals, Benzopyrene (BaP), HC and Benzene

expressed in terms of various statistical parameters are presented in Tables 3.2.2-3.2.5.

The statistical interpretation of observed ambient air quality data around Tadadi,

Karwar is reported in Table 3.2.3.

Status of Major Pollutants

The arithmetic mean value of 24 hourly PM10 concentrations were found in the

range of 49-62 µg/m3, whereas PM2.5 concentrations varied in the range of 23-28 µg/m3.

This may be due to unpaved road, windblown dust, and vehicular activities in the region.

The PM2.5 concentrations were observed to be below the stipulated standards of CPCB.

The arithmetic mean concentrations of SO2 and NO2 were observed to vary in

the range of 6-7 µg/m3 and 12-16 µg/m3 respectively, which are much below the

stipulated standards of CPCB (80 µg/m3 each) .

Status of Other Pollutants

Ammonia (NH3): Atmospheric ammonia is a pollutant which is highly soluble in

water, its major sink in the atmosphere is by wet deposition. The residence time of

ammonia in the lower level of the atmosphere is few hours, though in the calm

environmental condition it may exist for weeks. Ammonia is the major base present in the

atmosphere and is therefore important in neutralizing acidic species such as SO2, H2SO4,

HNO3 and HCl. To assess the levels of ammonia in air, samples were collected by

passing air through absorbing media and analyzed by wet chemical method. The

observed average concentration at all locations ranged between 20-33 µg/m3, which may

Chapter 3:


3.8

be attributed to emissions from animal waste and soil. All these values are well within the

stipulated standards (400 µg/m3).

Ozone (O3): Ozone is a secondary air pollutant formed by photochemical

reactions involving oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and VOCs, mainly hydrocarbons. In the

presence of solar radiation, nitrogen dioxide (NO2) dissociates to form nitric oxide (NO)

and an oxygen atom (O). Ozone (O3) is then formed by molecular oxygen (O2) reacting

with the oxygen atom (O). However, when hydrocarbons are present, NO is converted to

NO2, thus leaving little NOx to react with O3. This reaction leads to a build-up of O3 in the

atmosphere. Sources of NO2 and VOCs are primarily anthropogenic, generally produced

during combustion processes from automobile emissions and industrial activities.

To assess the levels of ozone in air, samples were collected by passing air

through absorbing media during day time (1000-1800 h) assuming ozone production

occurs in the presence of solar radiation, NOx and VOCs. The samples were analyzed by

wet chemical method. The observed mean value at all the locations ranged between 24-

32 µg/m3 which were much below the stipulated standards (8 h =100 µg/m3).

Particulate Matter Associated Pollutants

Levels of Pb, As, Ni and BaP were determined in PM10 samples for each

location. The values are given in Table 3.2.4 and briefly described here.

Lead (Pb): Lead is a metal found naturally in the environment as well as in

manufactured products. The major sources of lead emissions are motor vehicles (such

as cars and trucks). The industrial sources include near lead smelters, waste incinerators,

utilities, and lead-acid battery manufacturers. Depending on the level of exposure, lead

can adversely affect the nervous system, kidney function, immune system, reproductive

and developmental systems and the cardiovascular system. Lead exposure also affects

the oxygen carrying capacity of the blood. Lead is persistent in the environment and

accumulates in soils and sediments through deposition from air sources, direct discharge

of waste streams to water bodies, mining, and erosion. Ecosystems near point sources

of lead demonstrate a wide range of adverse effects including losses in biodiversity,

changes in community composition, decreased growth and reproductive rates in plants

and animals, and neurological effects in vertebrates. The observed Pb concentration at all

the locations ranged from 0.02-0.09 μg/m3 which was much below the permissible

standards (1 µg/m3).

Chapter 3:


3.9

Arsenic (As): Arsenic is a naturally occurring element widely distributed in the

earth’s crust. Inorganic forms of arsenic are found throughout the environment; it is

released into the air by volcanoes, weathering of arsenic-containing minerals and ores,

and commercial or industrial processes. Metal smelters release elevated inorganic

arsenic into the air. Other air sources of inorganic arsenic exposure include burning of

plywood treated with an arsenic wood preservative. Acute (short-term) high-level

inhalation, exposure to arsenic dust or fumes can cause gastrointestinal effects (nausea,

diarrhea, abdominal pain) and nervous system disorders. Chronic (long-term) inhalation

exposure to inorganic arsenic can cause irritation of the skin and mucous membranes

and lung cancer. The arsenic concentrations were below detectable limit (BDL) at all the

locations.

Nickel (Ni) : Nickel is a naturally occurring element and can be combined with

other metals, such as iron, copper, chromium, and zinc, to form alloys. These alloys are

used to make coins, jewellery, and items such as valves and heat exchangers. Mostly

nickel is used to make stainless steel. Nickel can be released into ambient air from oil and

coal combustion, nickel metal refining, sewage sludge incineration, and other sources.

Respiratory effects are associated with chronic exposure to nickel in the air. Workers

who breathed very large amounts of nickel compounds developed chronic bronchitis and

lung and nasal sinus cancers. The observed Ni concentration at all the locations varied

between 4.1-10.5 ng/m3 and were within the permissible limits of National Ambient Air

Quality Standards (20 ng/m3).

Benzo-a-pyrene (BaP): BaP is the most well known polycyclic aromatic

hydrocarbon (PAH) in a large group of organic compounds with two or more fused

aromatic rings. PAHs are formed mainly as a result of incomplete combustion of organic

materials during industrial and other anthropogenic activities including processing of coal

and crude oil, combustion of natural gas, combustion of refuse, vehicles traffic, cooking

and tobacco smoking, as well as natural processes such as forest fires. Motor vehicle

exhaust and their re-suspension are major sources of PAHs, including benzo[a]pyrene.

BaP tends to be incorporated onto particulates during cooling and condensation in the

atmosphere and generally exists in the particle phase at normal ambient temperatures in

the atmosphere. Particle sizes will be mostly <2.5 μm in aerodynamic diameter.

Processes governing the fate of BaP in the atmosphere are the same processes that

govern transport and removal of these small particles from the atmosphere. The observed

Chapter 3:


3.10

BaP concentration at all the locations varied between BDL - 0.06 ng/m3. This may be

attributed to low vehicular activities with petrol/diesel as fuel in the region. The levels are

within the permissible limits of National Ambient Air Quality Standards (1ng/m3).

Levels of CO, HC and VOCs

Concentration levels of other important gases like CO, HC(CH4 & Non-CH4) and

Benzene (VOC) were also determined. The results are given in Table 3.2.5.

Carbon monoxide (CO): CO is a colorless and odorless gas. It is formed when

substances containing carbon are burnt with an insufficient supply of air. The combustion

of fuels such as petrol, gas, coal and wood generate emissions of carbon monoxide. Gas

and wood can be used for cooking and heating in appliances like stoves and barbecues

add to its contributions. Apart from it, motor vehicles are also the sources of carbon

monoxide pollution in urban and sub-urban environment. In order to assess the

concentration of carbon monoxide, samples were collected in Tedlar bags and analysed

within 24 hrs by carbon monoxide analyzer based on the principle of infrared radiation at

wavelengths near 4.7 microns. Infrared radiation is passed through a cell containing

ambient air. The degree of absorption is a measure of the amount of carbon monoxide. A

gas filter correlation technique incorporated in the instrument minimizes interference from

other gases that absorb infrared radiation, ensuring that the instrument responds

specifically to carbon monoxide. The observed carbon monoxide concentration at all the

locations varied between 0.35-0.57 mg/m3. The concentrations of carbon monoxide are

within the permissible limits of National Ambient Air Quality Standards (4 mg/m3).

Hydrocarbons (HCs): A large variety of hydrocarbons are found in the

atmosphere. The atmospheric abundance of these species is found at mixing ratio

ranging from parts per billion by volume (ppbv) to parts per trillion by volume (pptv).

These species are found in significant amount over remote oceans, rural areas as also in

urban environments. Nonmethane hydrocarbons (NMHCs) are introduced into

atmosphere by fossil fuel burning, emission from vegetation and sea, biomass burning,

transportation and geochemical processes. These compounds when oxidized produce a

wide variety of oxygenated products including aldehydes, ketones, alcohols, phenols, etc.

most of which have proven toxicity. Atmosphere acts as a sink for these hydrocarbons.

The total hydrocarbon concentration at all locations was observed in the range of 1.39-

1.71 ppm whereas non-methane hydrocarbon concentration varied from 0.12-0.16 ppm.

Chapter 3:


3.11

Benzene: The mono-aromatic hydrocarbon like Benzene is considered as

volatile organic compounds (VOCs). VOCs in ambient air originate from various biogenic

and anthropogenic sources. Many of these chemicals participate in photochemical

reactions and produce secondary air pollutants such as ozone, peroxyacethyl nitrate, free

radicals and nitrogen oxides. The samples were collected in Tedlar bags and analyzed by

BTEX analyzer within 24 hours. The observed concentration of VOCs reported as

benzene in the range of 0.48-0.73 ug/m3. Benzene is a carcinogenic chemical and comes

through combustion of organic matter such as wood, petroleum product etc.

National Ambient Air Quality Standards (2009) are presented in Annexure I.

Chapter 3:


3.12

Sampling locations

Fig. 3.2.1: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Chapter 3:


3.13

Table 3.2.1

Techniques Used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Sr. No.

Parameter Unit Monitoring Technique

1. Particulate Matter size < 10 microns or PM10

g/m³ Gravimetric

2. Particulate Matter size less than 2.5 microns or PM2.5

g/m³ Gravimetric

3. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) g/m³ EPA Improved West and Gaeke Method

4. Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) g/m³ Modified Jacobs-Hachheiser Method

5. Carbon Monoxide mg/m3 Non Dispersive infra red (NDIR) Spectroscopy

6. Ammonia (NH3) g/m³ Chemiluminescence

Indophenol blue method

7. Lead (Pb) g/m³ AAS/ICP method for sampling on EPM 2000

8. Benzene g/m³ Gas Chromatography based continuous analyzer

9. Benzo(a) Pyrene g/m³ Solvent Extraction Followed by HPLC/GC Analysis

10. Arsenic(As), ng/ m³ AAS/ICP method for sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

11. Nickel (Ni) ng/ m³ AAS/ICP method for sampling on EPM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

Chapter 3:


3.14

Table 3.2.2

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations at Study area

Sr. No.

Sampling Location Direction Approx. Aerial Distance (km)

with respect to Proposed Tadadi Sea Poart

1. Hiregutti NE 6.0

2. Hittalmakki NNE 5.0

3. Mithal Gazani NE 3.0

4. Burgi ENE 5.5

5. Gokarna NW 3.5

6. Mirjan ESE 9.0

7. Gangavali NNW 8.5

8. Gudkagat SE 2.5

9. Kenkon NE 9.5

10. Koli Gudda ENE 6.5

Chapter 3:


3.15

Table 3.2.3

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring at Study Area (Post monsoon 2010)

Averaging Time: 24 hours unit: g/m3

Sr. Sampling Avg. ± S.D.

No. Location (Min - Max)

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx NH3 O3*

1. Hiregutti 62±10 26±5 6±1 16±2 25±4 28±6 (46-79) (22-45) (5-8) (13-18) (16-31) (17-38)

2. Hittalmakki 62±13 27±6 6±1 14±3 28±6 28±5

(43-79) (23-44) (5-8) (10-20) (15-36) (19-34)

3. Mithal Gazani 52±8 23±4 6±1 15±3 33±5 32±6

(41-64) (17-29) (5-8) (11-20) (20-38) (20-38)

4. Burgi 56±8 26±4 6±1 15±3 31±4 24±8

(43-69) (21-36) (4-8) (10-20) (22-38) (12-38)

5. Gokarna 51±12 28±6 6±1 14±3 28±8 26±4

(31-64) (19-36) (4-8) (10-18) (12-36) (18-32)

6. Mirjan 51±8 25±3 6±1 12±2 20±6 28±4

(35-62) (21-31) (5-8) (10-16) (12-31) (21-35)

7. Gangavali 54±7 26±4 7±1 16±3 27±6 27±5

(43-69) (21-36) (5-9) (10-20) (18-36) (19-34)

8. Gudkagat 52±8 28±5 6±1 16±4 32±5 26±6

(35-65) (23-37) (5-8) (10-21) (21-38) (19-33)

9. Kenkon 49±8 26±5 6±1 16±3 29±6 28±6

(38-64) (19-35) (5-8) (10-21) (19-36) (16-35)

10. Koli Gudda 52±7 24±4 6±1 13±2 32±4 32±6

(41-60) (17-30) (5-8) (10-17) (20-37) (20-38)

NAAQS (2009) 24 hr 100 60 80 80 400 100*

* 8 hours ozone (O3) NAAQS = 100 µg/m3

Chapter 3:


3.16

Table 3.2.4

Levels of Particulate Associated (Pb, Ni, As and BaP) Toxic Pollutants (Post monsoon 2010)

Sr. No

Sampling location

Pb Ni As BaP

µg/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3 ng/m3

Particulate associated pollutants

1 Hiregutti 0.02 5.3 BDL BDL

2 Hittalmakki 0.06 10.5 BDL BDL

3 Mithal Gazani 0.03 7.9 BDL BDL

4 Burgi 0.09 8.1 BDL 0.03

5 Gokarna 0.07 5.4 BDL 0.04

6 Mirjan 0.04 6.2 BDL 0.03

7 Gangavali 0.02 4.5 BDL BDL

8 Gudkagat 0.03 6.3 BDL 0.02

9 Kenkon 0.05 4.8 BDL 0.06

10 Koli Gudda 0.08 4.1 BDL BDL

Minimum 0.02 4.1 BDL BDL

Maximum 0.09 10.5 BDL 0.06

Average 0.05 6.31 BDL 0.04

NAAQM (2009) 1.0 20.0 6.0 1.00

BDL: Below Detectable Limit

Chapter 3:


3.17

Table 3.2.5

Ambient Air Quality status of CO, Benzene and HC (Post monsoon 2010)

Spot concentration

Sr. No Sampling location

CO Benzene THC MHC NMHC

mg/m3 μg/m3 ppm ppm ppm

1. Hiregutti 0.57 0.66 1.40 1.25 0.15

2. Hittalmakki 0.41 0.63 1.48 1.32 0.16

3. Mithal Gazani 0.54 0.65 1.71 1.55 0.16

4. Burgi 0.35 0.62 1.60 1.44 0.15

5. Gokarna 0.50 0.73 1.40 1.25 0.16

6. Mirjan 0.45 0.58 1.47 1.35 0.12

7. Gangavali 0.53 0.62 1.39 1.25 0.14

8. Gudkagat 0.40 0.61 1.57 1.44 0.13

9. Kenkon 0.43 0.48 1.44 1.32 0.12

10. Koli Gudda 0.53 0.63 1.49 1.36 0.12

NAAQM (2009) 4.0 5.0 - - -

THC = Total Hydrocarbon;

MHC = Methane Hydrocarbon;

NMHC = Non Methane Hydrocarbon

Chapter 3:


3.18


The objective of noise pollution survey in the study area was to assess the

impact of noise generated by the existing noise sources in the region especially on the

human settlements. The noise levels of a region can be estimated from the cumulative

noise pressure levels considering all the noise pollution sources in the region and the

prevailing environmental conditions.

A reconnaissance survey was conducted with a view to establish the baseline

status of the environment with respect to the noise levels in the region particularly with

respect to port activity in the region, Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) were measured using

precision sound level meter (Bruel and Kjaer make).

Survey was carried out in the following steps:

Reconnaissance

Measurement of background noise levels in the study area

Identification and characterization of noise sources

Measurement of prevailing noise levels due to vehicular movements

The impact of noise on the health of an individual depends on physical dose of

noise viz. noise level, frequency spectrum, annoyance etc. and human factors viz. sex,

age, health status, type of activity, occupational exposure etc. The impact also depends

on psychological and physiological status of individuals. The impact due to noise do not

undergo seasonal variations except some directional changes depending upon the

environmental wind direction.

The baseline studies for noise environment have been carried out through

reconnaissance followed by field observations to identify the major activities contributing

to noise within the study area. A Reconnaissance was conducted with a view to establish

the baseline status of the environment with respect to noise levels of the plant area,

surrounding villages and other centers of human activities.

Ambient Noise Monitoring was carried out in residential, commercial, silence

zones and roadside in the study area. There is no major industry in the study area. The

noise level monitoring locations are depicted in Fig. 3.3.1 and listed in Table 3.3.1

alongwith their direction and distance with respect to port area. All the values of noise

levels are well below the standard limits, indicating that present activity level in the study

area is very low. The results are presented in Table 3.3.2. The ambient noise stadards

are given in Annexture II.

Chapter 3:


3.19

Fig. 3.3.1: Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring Locations

Chapter 3:


3.20

Table 3.3.1

Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Locations

Sr. No. Sampling Location Direction Approx. Aerial Distance (km)

with respect to Proposed Tadadi Sea Poart

1. Hiregutti NE 5.0

2. Hittalmakki NNE 5.0

3. Mithal Gazani NE 3.0

4. Burgi ENE 5.5

5. Gokarna NW 4.0

6. Mirjan ESE 9.0

7. Gangavali NNW 8.5

8. Gudkagat SE 2.5

9. Kenkon NE 9.5

10.

11.

Koli Gudda Tadadi

ENE

NW

6.0

0.2

Chapter 3:


3.21

Table 3.3.2

Ambient Noise Levels Monitoring at Study Area

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations

Day Time dB(A) Night Time dB(A)

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

Residential Area

1 Hiregutti 39 46 33 40

2 Hittalmakki 40 45 36 38

3 Mithal Gazani 39 42 35 38

4 Burgi 41 44 36 39

5 Gokarna 41 47 34 40

6 Mirjan 43 46 38 41

7 Gangavali 40 43 35 38

8 Gudkagat 44 48 38 41

9 Kenkon 42 47 35 38

10

11

Koli Gudda

Tadadi

41

44

43

46

37

38

40

41

Commertial Area

1 Tadadi 47 55 42 49

2 Gokarna 46 56 40 47

3 Burgi 44 54 40 48

Silence Zone

1 Gokarna (Temple) 35 40 30 35

2 Hiregutti (School) 32 36 25 29

Road Side (N.H. 66)

1 Mirjan 50 60 45 55

2 Hiregutti 48 60 42 53

CPCB Standards Day time, dB(A) Night time, dB(A)

Residential Area 55 45

Commercial Area 65 55

Industrial Area 75 70

Silence zone 50 40

Chapter 3:


3.22


3.4.1 Bathymetry and Geophysical Study

To carry out the sub-bottom profiling (viz. bathymetry, shallow seismic profiling)

of the area around the proposed port at Tadadi in the estuary of Aghanasini river, EGS

Survey Private Limited (EGS India) was assigned the task of doing the geophysical

survey.

From the geo physical investigation, accurate bathymetry, seabed morphology

and mapping of surfacial features from shore upto - 20 m CD depth contour in the sea

and estuary/creek was established. Soundings were taken at a grid of 100m x 100m in

deeper waters (deeper than 5 m). In shallow waters of less than 5 m depth, the soundings

were taken at 25m x 25m. Wherever rocky patches were observed, soundings were taken

at close intervals of 10m x 10m. Manual survey was also carried out at the inter-tidal

zone. Tides were also measured during the period of survey.

Two vessels M.F.B. Radhegopal II and a small boat F.B.Bhumika 2 were used

for conducting the survey within the proposed survey area. The Bathymetry and seismic

profiling work was carried out during the months of December through January 2011.

Seismic survey was done to obtain continuous profiles of the sub-seabed

around the proposed area in order to establish hard rock levels, sub-surface stratigraphy,

individual stratigraphic units and their thickness and mark the interfaces using echo-

sounding, high resolution shallow seismic profiling and side scan sonar surveys of the

area under investigation. The nature of the surfacial and sub-surface soils were also

found out from the survey which was carried out in depths upto 30 m below sea bed,

using high-resolution sub-bottom profiler. The total survey length was approximately 220

line km.

From the Bathymetric and Geophysical surveys it is noted that the offshore

area of the sea bottom is quite regular and flat with gentle slopes from 1:300 to 1:500: the

-10 mCD depth is located approximately 3,000 m from the coastline and the -20 mCD is

located at about 8,000 m from coast line. The depth of the sea bed gradually varies from

the 5m contour in the north eastern corner to 21 m on the south western boundary of the

offshore block. The maximum water depth of - 21.4 mCD is observed along the south

western boundary while the minimum water depth of - 3.9 mCD is noted in the north

eastern corner. Sea bed features include fine sediments, coarse to very coarse

Chapter 3:


3.23

sediments, boulders, cobbles and scar marks. A minor rocky patch is exposed on the sea

bed in the north east corner of the block.

The sea bed sediment grain size distribution patterns reflect the exposure of

the sea bed to winnowing process which are driven by the stress put on the sea bed by

sea, wind, tidal currents and by non – directional or oscillatory forms of winds and waves.

Soil Samples were collected along the central line of the block. The morphologic features

within the survey area indicate that there is constant reworking of sediments by the tidal

action. Fine grained clay sediments are observed on the sea floor throughout the offshore

survey blocks. The clay sediments also contain gravel fractions consisting of shell

fragments of variable sizes in some places.

At the river estuary there exist some shallow areas that emerge at the

maximum low tides. The bathymetric contours of the inner block reveal considerably

steep slope along the channel of the Tadadi port, oriented northwest- southeast within the

Tadadi creek. The sea bed exhibits a very gentle to negligible slope in the areas away

from the channel on both sides. The depth of water column varies from negative values to

5 m. The sediments vary from sand to cobbles and gravel with bioclasts.

3.4.2 Hydraulic Data

3.4.2.1 Tides

The tides at the site are semi-diurnal, which means that the tidal cycle is

approximately 12 hours, and is understood that throughout the day there are two high

tides and two low tides.

The semidiurnal range (the difference in height between high and low water

levels over about a half day) varies considerably in a two-week cycle. Thus, around new

moon and full moon, the tidal force due to the alignment of the Earth, Sun and Moon, the

tide range reaches its maximum (this is called the spring tide); on the contrary when the

Moon is at first quarter or third quarter, the solar gravitational force partially cancels the

Moon's effect and the tide range reaches its minimum (this is called the neap tide). Spring

tides result in high waters that are higher than average and low waters that are lower than

average, whereas neaps result in less extreme tidal conditions.

In the same way, the changing distance separating the Moon and Earth also

affects tide heights. When the Moon is at perigee, the range increases, and when it is at

apogee, the range shrinks. Every 7½ lunations (the full cycles from full moon to new to

Chapter 3:


3.24

full) the perigee coincides with either a new or full moon causing perigean spring tides

(known also as equinoctial spring tides) with the largest tidal range.

According to the information from the Navigation Chart Number 2024, the main

tide levels are as follows:

MHHW (Mean Highest High Water): + 1.8 m above CD (Chart Datum)

MLHW (Mean Lowest High Water) : + 1.7 m above CD

MSL (Mean Sea Level) : + 1.2 m above CD

MHLW (Mean Highest Low Water) : + 1.0 m above CD

MLLW (Mean Lowest Low Water) : + 0.4 m above CD

3.4.2.2 Currents

The general currents at the area have monsoon origin but tend to follow the

trend of the coast. In December and January, the currents are north-westerly with

velocities upto 1 kn (1 kn = 0.51 m/s). In July and August, when South-West monsoon is

well established, south-easterly currents with velocity upto 2 kn are experienced.

Exceptionally, onshore currents upto 1 kn are produced during the North-East monsoon

and upto 3 kn during the SW monsoon.

Besides this general current, the existing currents at the mouth of the

Aghanashini river (very close to the future Tadadi Port location) have a double

component or origin: the flow of the river itself and the tides.

The variations in the tidal range explained in the previous section affect not

only the height or tidal range but also the induced current velocities.

Moreover the speed of the current component due to the river depends directly

on the flow carried, getting its maximum during the rainy season.

3.4.2.3 Waves

The waves distribution along the year presents two clear periods: the calm/fair

(November-April) and the rough (corresponding to the South-West monsoon). The

significant wave height in the rough period exceeds 1 m for more than 90% of time and it

exceeds 2.5 m for 60-80% of time; during the fair period, the significant wave height

seldom exceeds 1.5 m and 80% of the time, the height is less than 1.2 m and the median

significant height is about 0.8 m.

Chapter 3:


3.25

During most months, except June and July, the peaks of the distributions are

around 200- 210°, which is from the south quadrant. The dominance of the peak varies

with the month. In the monsoon and roughest season the distribution of directions have

two prominent peaks in the ranges 200-210°N and 260-270°N.

3.4.2.4 Aghanashini River: Sedimentation

One of the most usual problems in an estuary is sedimentation due to human

interferences in the estuary’s hydraulic system. Typical interferences are: construction

and operation of ports and navigation channels and related activities.

Sedimentation problems generally occur at locations where the sediment

transport capacity by the hydraulic system is reduced due to the flow speed decrease

caused by variations of the original features (with artificial measures like dredging), dead

water zones, flow separation zones, lee zones created after groins or dikes construction.

It’s important to point out that sedimentation is a basic phenomenon of nature.

Natural sedimentation areas are known as shoals, flats, banks, bars etc. Artificial

interferences in this natural sedimentation always lead to relatively large maintenance

cost and will be avoided as much as possible.

Further hydrodynamic details of the estuary are given in Chapter 11 of this

report.

3.4.3 Water Quality Status

3.4.3.1 Methodology of Water Quality Assessment

Based on the reconnaissance, the type of waterbody, its relative importance as

resource and its proximity to industry; sampling locations were identified. Sampling

procedure involved sample collection using discrete sampler. Linear polyethylene

containers leached with 2 M reagent grade nitric acid for 48 hrs at room temperature and

rinsed with double distilled water were used. Samples for hydrocarbon estimation were

collected in glass bottles of one litre capacity, pre-washed and rinsed with n-hexane.

Samples for bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized bottles and stored in

icebox. Similarly samples for biological analysis were collected by using standard

plankton net. Finally all the samples were preserved as per standard preservation

technique prior to its transportation to the laboratory. Field parameters viz. temperature,

pH, dissolved oxygen (DO) were analyzed immediately after sample collection. Selected

Chapter 3:


3.26

physico-chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for assessing the

existing water quality status in the study area.

The raw water from the various sources in the study area has been analysed

for various physico chemical, bacterology and biological parameters and compared with

the respective water quality standards, as given in Annexure III.

In order to generate the baseline coastal and estuary water quality (physico-

chemical and biological) of the region, a study was undertaken using motor boat and 8

sampling locations were identified with a Grid pattern. Surface, Middle and Bottom

samples were taken from each location except location No. 8, as there was low depth.

The sampling locations are given in Table 3.4.1 and depicted in Fig. 3.4.11.

Analysis was carried out as per standard methods for examination of water and

wastewater, and data obtained on water column for various parameters are presented in

Table 3.4.2 - 3.4.22. The results of coastal water quality in study area are summarized as

follows:

3.4.3.2 Surface Water Quality (Sea and Estuary Water of River Aghanashini)

The pH, temperature and turbidity ranged between 6.5-7.4, 26-300 C, <1-9 NTU

respectively (Table 3.4.2). The total suspended solids varied from 15-104 mg/l, whereas

chlorides were found in the range of 10598-21769 mg/l. Salinity values have been found

to vary between 18‰ & 66‰ (Table 3.4.3).

Dissolved oxygen available in water at any given time is a result of amount

consumed by aquatic organisms and replenishment through natural processes. In the

coastal and estuarine area of study region, dissolved oxygen was found in the range of

2.9 to 6.8 mg/l. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) is defined as the amount of oxygen

required by microorganisms for stabilizing biodegradable organic matter present in

wastewater under aerobic conditions. The BOD values were less than 5 mg/l in the

samples collected from study area.

Nitrogen and phosphorus compounds form major source of nutrients for growth

of phytoplankton. Forms of nitrogen involved in the biogeochemical processes in aquatic

systems are dissolved inorganic species viz. ammonia, nitrite and nitrate. Nitrate is an

essential nutrient for the growth of many photosynthetic autotrophs and has been

identified as the growth limiting nutrient. Nitrate levels in the region were found in the

range of 0.014 - 0.032 mg/l. (Table 3.4.4).

Chapter 3:


3.27

3.4.3.3 Heavy Metals in Surface Water Samples

Inorganic elements such as metals even at trace levels invite attention due to

their persistence in waterbodies. Some of the heavy metals viz. cadmium, chromium,

copper, lead are toxic at very low concentrations and can affect the prey and predator

equilibrium in waterbody. The heavy metals, viz. cadmium, chromium, lead, copper, iron,

manganese and zinc were estimated in water column and results are presented in Table

3.4.5. The results indicate that there is no pollution due to heavy metals in the region.

The overall physico-chemical characteristics indicate homogeneity in terms of

salinity and dissolved oxygen. Slight variations in nutrient values in terms of phosphate

and nitrate may be attributed to the tidal currents and flow pattern in the region. The

overall water quality in the study area is good with respect to levels of organics and heavy

metals indicating that the area is relatively free of pollution.

3.4.3.4 Ground Water Quality

To assess the ground water quality, 3 Dug well and 7 Bore well samples were

collected within 10 km radius of study area. The sampling locations are given in

Table 3.4.14 and depicted in Fig. 3.4.1.

The pH, temperature and turbidity ranged between 5.7-7.8, 28-31°C and <1-3

NTU, respectively (Table 3.4.15).

The total suspended solid varied from 1-4 mg/l, while the total dissolved solids

varied from 55-180 mg/l. Inorganic parameters, i.e. chloride, sulphate, sodium and

potassium were in the range of 4-30, 8-19, 8-59 and phosphate 1-5 mg/l, respectively

(Table 3.4.16).

Nutrient load in terms of nitrate and phosphates was found to be in the range of

ND-0.08 mg/l and 0.01-0.52 mg/l respectively. Oil and grease was not detected

(Table 3.4.17).

Concentrations of heavy metals viz. nickel, cadmium, chromium, copper, lead,

iron, manganese, zinc and cobalt were found in the range of 0.38-6.05, ND, ND-0.02, ND,

0.03-0.13, ND-7.56, ND-0.07, ND-0.26 and ND-0.15 mg/l, respectively (Table 3.4.18).

3.4.3.5 Bacteriological Characteristics

Coliform group of organisms are indicators of faecal contamination in water.

Ground water samples were analyzed for total and faecal coliforms deploying membrane

filtration technique. Bacteriological quality of groundwater is presented in Table 3.4.19.

Chapter 3:


3.28

The total and faecal coliforms were found in the range of 65-145 and ND-54 CFU/100 ml

respectively.

3.4.3.6 Biological Characteristics

Biological species viz. phytoplankton and zooplankton species for a particular

environmental condition are the best indicators of environmental quality. Studies on

biological aspects of ecosystem are important in environmental impact assessment in

view of the conservation of environmental quality and safety of natural flora and fauna

including human-beings. Information about the impact (environmental stress) on the

community structure serves as inexpensive and efficient "early warning and control

system" to check the effectiveness of control measures to prevent damage to a particular

ecosystem (e.g. adjustments of emission norms, management of installations and

sanitation etc.).

The nature and quality of biological species in a water body is dependent on

various physico-chemical characteristics of water such as pH, conductivity, nutrients,

BOD, alkalinity etc. and also on the type of water body such as flowing waters (canals),

stagnant water (lakes) and saline water (sea). Thus the quality and quantity of plankton

obtained in any water body is an indicator of the physico-chemical quality of water as well

as the type of water body. The estimation of plankton community structure in water

bodies is thus helpful to assess the baseline status.

Total biomass

The total biomass (expressed as count or by weight) increases with the

increase in levels of nutrient and BOD in water and vice versa, and serves as a good

indicator of trophic status of water body.

Quality

Presence of different organisms has been listed in standard publications

according to increasing trophic levels in aquatic environment. Similarly, many organisms

have been listed to favour certain physico-chemical conditions, viz. silicates for diatoms

etc. Hence presence of certain groups is also indicative of trophic conditions.

Desmids and Diatoms indicate highly eutrophic conditions. Planktonic rotifers

are usually abundant in fresh water. It is believed that when crustacean (copepoda,

cirripedia, ostracoda etc.) and insects outnumber other groups, the situation reflects the

enriched organic condition of water. Thus presence of certain organisms helps in

classifying water body in trophic levels in knowing its physico-chemical characteristics.

Chapter 3:


3.29

Diversity

Diversity of planktons depends on physico-chemical characteristics of water

especially on trophic levels. In oligotrophic water diversity of plankton is high. While with

increasing levels of pollution such as mesotrophic and eutrophic condition diversity of

planktons decreases. Shannon Weaver Index is a measure of diversity of planktons

which takes into account the total count and individual species count in a water sample.

d = - (ni/n) log2 (ni/n)

Where,

d = Shannon Weaver Diversity Index

ni = number of individual of each individual species in a sample

n = total number of individual and of all species in the sample

It should also be noted that the diversity is also susceptible to other parameters

such as turbidity, colour and flow rate particularly in hilly rivers. Thus the results should be

interpreted with caution. A widely accepted ecological concept is that communities with

large number of species (i.e. with high diversity) will have high stability that can resist

adverse environmental factors. The maximum value of Shannon Weaver Index of

Phytoplankton for clean waters has been reported to be around 6, though it may differ

slightly in different locations. Decrease in the value of index may thus be taken as

indicator of pollution.

In the present study water samples were collected from various sources. 3

sampling locations from coastal water, 5 sampling locations from estuarine zone of river

Aghnashini and 3 Ground water sampling locations from dug wells were identified. In

case of surface water, for Phytoplankton analysis surface, middle and bottom samples

were collected and for Zooplankton analysis only surface water samples were collected,

to establish diversity index to assess biological quality.

Phytoplankton

The count as number of organism per ml of coastal and estuary water varied

between 864 to 2304. Chlorophyceae was found to be the dominant group followed by

Bacillariophyceae. SWD Index varied between 0.9-1.9 indicating moderate productivity

(Table 3.4.6). The phytoplankton species identified are given in Table 3.4.7.

In case of the dug wells also, out of different groups recorded for

phytoplankton, Chlorophyceae are the dominant species. The Shannon Weiver Diversity

Chapter 3:


3.30

Index (SWDI) for phytoplankton varied from 0.9-1.5 indicating moderate productivity. The

phytoplankton population ranged from 864-1152 No/ml (Table 3.4.20).

Zooplankton

The productivity is more in open sea, which is due to uplifting of nutrients from

the bottom to surface. This is called upwelling phenomena.

The zooplankton species/groups, its population dynamics and community

composition at each sampling location are shown in Table 3.4.8. The count as number of

organisms of coastal and estuary water varied between 142-635 No/m3. Copepoda was

found to be the dominant group followed by Rotifera (Table 3.4.8). The SWD index varied

between 0.9-1.5, which indicates moderate productivity.

The number of organism water samples of ground water was in the range of

Nil-214, whereas SWD Index was in the range of 0-1.5. The dominant zooplankton

groups were observed to be Copepoda (Table 3.4.22).

Benthos

Benthos is an organism found at the bottom of an aquatic body. Many of them

are sessile while some creep over a burrow in mud. The quality and quantity of organisms

found at the bottom are related to the nature of substrate and to the depth. Their number

and distribution depends upon physico-chemical and biological characteristic of water.

The sediment samples collected from different locations of the study area were passed

through 500 micron mesh sieve and again through 45 micron sieve for segregation of

macrobenthos and meiobenthos respectively.

The count of Meiobenthos ranged between 46875-78125 No/m2, whereas

SWD Index was in the range of 1.02-2.46 (Table 3.4.10). The meiobenthos species

recorded are presented in Table 3.4.11.. The count of Macrobenthos ranged between

348-1185 No/m2, whereas SWD Index was in the range of 1.32-1.95 as shown in Table

3.4.12. The Macrobenthos species recorded are presented in Table 3.4.13. The presence

of Meiobenthos and microbenthos composition reveals highest count for forminifera than

Ostracoda and Polychaeta and Sphaeridae than Viviparadae and Pleuoceridae

respectively.

Chapter 3:


3.31

Surface Water Ground Water

Fig. 3.4.1: Water Sampling Locations

SW1

SW2

SW3

EW1

EW2

EW3

EW4

EW5

Chapter 3:


3.32

Table 3.4.1

Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Sampling Locations (Summer 2010)

Sr. No. Sampling Locations Depth (m)

Surface Water

Sea Water (SW)

1. SW1 (N 14023.821’ E 740 15.047’)

Surface 0.5

Middle 9.0

Bottom 17.0

2. SW2 (N 14028.714’ E 740 17.371’)

Surface 0.5

Middle 12.0

Bottom 25.0

3. SW3 (N 14026’42.185” E 740 20’ 43.324”)

Surface 0.5

Middle 10.0

Bottom 20.0

Estuary Water of River Aghnashini (EW)

4. EW1 (N 14030.840’ E 740 21.444’)

Surface 0.5

Middle 4.5

Bottom 10.0

5. EW2 (N 14032’10.91” E 740 28.834”)

Surface 0.5

Middle 5.5

Bottom 10.5

6. EW3 (N 14030.770’ E 740 22.891’)

Surface 0.5

Middle 5.0

Bottom 10.0

7. EW4 (N 14029’28.941” E 740 24’4.658”)

Surface 0.5

Middle 4.0

Bottom 8.5

8. EW5 (N 14030.662’ E 740 24.122’)

Surface 0.5

Chapter 3:


3.33

Table 3.4.2

Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Physical Parameters (Summer 2010)

Sr. No. Sampling location

pH Temp

(0C)

Turbidity (NTU)

Total Suspended Solids (mg/l)

Surface Water

Sea Water

1. SW1

Surface 7.4 29 <1 25

Middle 7.1 27 <1 36

Bottom 7.4 26 2 31

2. SW2

Surface 7.1 30 1 76

Middle 7.3 29 1 72

Bottom 7.2 28 1 31

3. SW3

Surface 7.5 29 1 78

Middle 7.1 28 1 76

Bottom 7.4 27 1 69

Estuary Water of River Aghnashini

4. EW1

Surface 6.5 30 9 104

Middle 6.6 29 7 67

Bottom 7.2 28 8 63

5. EW2

Surface 7.1 30 2 36

Middle 6.8 29 1 25

Bottom 7.0 29 <1 15

6. EW3

Surface 6.7 30 1 44

Middle 7.1 29 2 54

Bottom 6.7 27 2 36

7. EW4

Surface 6.8 30 2 40

Middle 6.8 29 1 27

Bottom 7.0 27 <1 20

8. EW4

Surface 6.7 30 3 39

Chapter 3:


3.34

Table 3.4.3

Coastal & Estuary Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters

Sr. No.

Sampling locations

Total Alkalinity

as CaCO3

Chloride Sulphate Salinity

(%o) mg/l

Surface Water

Sea Water

1. SW1

Surface 114 21769 381 36

Middle 117 20665 386 36

Bottom 114 19653 384 37

2. SW2

Surface 121 19816 384 37

Middle 112 19688 384 38

Bottom 122 21334 385 39

3. SW3

Surface 118 19603 387 35

Middle 115 19517 385 35

Bottom 117 19790 382 36


4. EW1

Surface 105 19210 385 45

Middle 106 19101 388 66

Bottom 113 19005 385 36

5. EW2

Surface 115 17315 380 31

Middle 108 17628 387 32

Bottom 113 17150 379 31

6. EW3

Surface 118 15910 388 58

Middle 111 15434 390 37

Bottom 110 15873 382 43

7. EW4

Surface 110 12162 382 22

Middle 109 12325 365 22

Bottom 117 11987 369 21

8. EW5

Surface 108 10598 342 18

Chapter 3:


3.35

Table 3.4.4

Coastal & Estuary Water Quality -Nutrient and Demand Parameters

Sr. No.

Sampling location

Nitrate as N

Total Phos-phates

DO BOD Oil &

Grease

Hydro Carbons

µg/l

(mg/l)

Surface Water

Sea Water

1. SW1

Surface 0.023 0.10 6.3 <5 8.4 1.75

Middle 0.020 0.08 5.1 <5 6.4 2.46

Bottom 0.022 0.17 2.9 <5 8.0 1.92

2. SW2

Surface 0.023 0.05 5.4 <5 7.6 1.86

Middle 0.030 0.06 4.1 <5 4.8 2.18

Bottom 0.030 0.06 2.9 <5 8.4 1.92

3. SW3

Surface 0.021 0.10 5.9 <5 6.9 2.13

Middle 0.020 0.09 4.1 <5 8.1 1.92

Bottom 0.021 0.18 3.7 <5 8.0 1.86


4. EW1

Surface 0.023 0.14 6.3 <5 13.2 1.92

Middle 0.025 0.13 5.1 <5 12.0 1.52

Bottom 0.025 0.07 2.9 <5 8.4 0.12

5. EW2

Surface 0.015 0.08 6.8 <5 10.2 1.01

Middle 0.021 0.10 6.0 <5 8.0 1.10

Bottom 0.025 0.08 4.2 <5 9.2 0.21

6. EW3

Surface 0.022 0.06 5.9 <5 6.8 2.36

Middle 0.032 0.27 4.3 <5 9.6 1.83

Bottom 0.030 0.09 3.0 <5 9.6 1.89

7. EW4

Surface 0.025 0.09 6.2 <5 9.5 1.75

Middle 0.032 0.10 4.5 <5 8.0 1.29

Bottom 0.028 0.06 3.2 <5 8.2 0.78

8. EW5

Surface 0.014 0.16 6.2 <5 7.2 2.17

Chapter 3:


3.36

Table 3.4.5

Coastal & Estuary Water Quality - Heavy Metals

Sr. No.

Sampling Stations

Ni Cd Cr Cu Pb Fe Mn Zn Co

mg/l

Surface Water

Sea Water

1. SW1

Surface ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Middle ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Bottom 0.04 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

2. SW2

Surface ND ND 0.02 0.02 ND ND ND 0.08 ND

Middle ND ND ND 0.01 ND ND ND ND ND

Bottom ND ND 0.01 0.01 ND 0.11 ND ND ND

3. SW3

Surface ND ND 0.01 0.02 ND ND ND 0.07 ND

Middle ND ND 0.01 0.01 ND 0.09 ND ND ND

Bottom ND ND ND 0.02 ND ND ND ND ND


4. EW1

Surface 0.29 ND ND ND ND 0.78 0.01 ND ND

Middle 0.59 ND ND ND ND 0.91 0.01 ND ND

Bottom 0.40 ND ND ND ND 1.20 0.01 ND ND

5. EW2

Surface ND ND ND 0.01 ND 0.75 ND ND ND

Middle ND ND 0.01 ND ND 1.01 ND 0.01 ND

Bottom 0.05 ND 0.01 ND ND 1.21 0.01 0.01 0.01

6. EW3

Surface ND ND 0.03 ND ND 0.12 0.01 0.02 0.01

Middle ND ND 0.04 0.01 ND 0.08 0.01 ND 0.02

Bottom ND ND 0.05 ND ND 0.43 0.01 0.18 0.03

7. EW4

Surface ND 0.02 0.01 ND ND 1.15 0.01 0.01 ND

Middle 0.02 ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND

Bottom 0.10 ND 0.02 ND ND 1.01 0.01 ND 0.01

8. EW5

Surface 0.26 0.02 0.09 0.02 0.30 1.35 0.11 0.04 0.07

Chapter 3:


3.37

Table 3.4.6

Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations

Phyto-plankton

No/ml

Percentage Composition of Algal Group

Shannon Wiener Diversity Index

Chlorop-hyceae

Bacillari-Phyceae

Cyano-phyceae

Surface Water

Sea Water

1. SW1 864 33 34 33 1.5

2. SW2 1152 25 50 25 1.5

3. SW3 996 17 83 - 1.5


4. EW1 1728 50 20 30 1.4

5. EW2 1985 50 50 - 0.9

6. EW3 2304 63 12 25 1.3

7. EW4 1123 33 67 - 1.9

8. EW5 864 56 22 22 1.4

(IX) Ranges of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index

1: Indicate maximum impact of pollution

1-2: Indicate medium impact of pollution

>2: Indicate lowest or no impact of pollution

Table 3.4.7

Phytoplankton Species Observed in Water Samples

Bacillario- phyceae Chloro-phyceae Cyano-phyceae

Navicula sp Chlorella sp Osillatoria sp

Nitzschia sp Ulothria sp Anabena sp

Fragilaria sp

Diatoma sp

Chapter 3:


3.38

Table 3.4.8

Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations

Zooplankton No/m3

Percentage Composition of Zooplankton Group

Shannon Wiener

Diversity Index Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera

Sea Water

1. SW1 142 - 50 50 1.0

2. SW2 286 25 50 25 1.5

3. SW3 326 30 60 10 1.2


4. EW1 357 20 60 20 1.3

5. EW2 635 33 59 8 1.2

6. EW3 428 17 50 33 1.4

7. EW4 256 58 28 14 1.0

8. EW5 214 - 67 33 0.9

Ranges of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index




Table 3.4.9

Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples

Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera

Daphnia sp Cyclops sp Brachionus sp

Nauplius larva

Chapter 3:


3.39

Table 3.4.10

Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Meiobenthos

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations

Meio

Benthos No/m2

Percentage Composition of Benthos Group

Shannon Wiener

Diversity Index

Foram-

inifera

Ostra-

coda

Poly-

cheta

Sea Water

1. SW1 72917 50 50 - 2.46

2. SW2 52083 80 - 20 1.92

3. SW3 53265 70 27 3 1.51

Estuary water of River Aghnashini

4. EW1 46875 67 11 22 1.83

5. EW2 65986 69 20 11 1.11

6. EW3 78125 67 13 20 1.88

7. EW4 48245 64 31 5 1.02

8. EW5 54875 78 20 2 1.12

Table 3.4.11

List of Meiobenthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples

Foraminifera Ostracoda Polycheta

Rotalia sp Macrocyprina sp Nereis criisei sp

Bolivina sp Calcarina sp

Globigerinita sp Elphidium sp

Triloculina sp

Chapter 3:


3.40

Table 3.4.12

Surface Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Macrobenthos

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations

Macro

Benthos No/m2

Percentage Composition of Benthos Group

Shannon Wiener Diversity

Index Vivipa-

ridae

Sphae-

ridae

Pleuoc-

eridae

Sea Water

1. SW1 764 32 45 23 1.52

2. SW2 348 - 70 30 1.57

3. SW3 455 25 50 25 1.92

Estuary water of River Aghnashini

4. EW1 1285 32 43 25 1.54

5. EW2 865

6. EW3 768 36 64 - 1.32

7. EW4 1124 33 67 - 1.58

8. EW5 1245 25 50 25 1.95

Table 3.4.13

Macrobenthos Species Recorded in Sediment Samples

Viviparadae Sphaeridae Pleuoceridae

Viviparus sp Musculium sp Goniobasis sp

Hydrobia sp

Chapter 3:


3.41

Table 3.4.14

Ground Water Quality Sampling Locations

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations Direction

Approx. Airal Distance (Km)

w.r.t to Tadadi Sea Port

Dug Well

1. Village Morbaa ENE 4.5

2. Village Hiregutti NE 5.0

3. Village Korebait NE 8.0

Bore Well

4. Village Midthal Gazni NE 3.0

5. Village Madan Geri NNE 6.5

6. Village Hhittal Makki NNE 5.0

7. Village Baloli NNE 6.0

8. Village Yennamadi NE 7.0

9. Village Horskari NNW 6.0

10. Village Kimmani ESE 5.0

Table 3.4.15

Ground Water Quality - Physical Parameters

Sr. No.

Sampling Location

(Village)

pH Temp (0C)

Turbidity (NTU)

Total Suspended

Solids (mg/l)

Total Dissolved

Solids (mg/l)

Conductivity

(S/cm)

Dug Well

1. Morbaa 5.7 29 <1 2 80 142

2. Hiregutti 6.4 31 1 2 84 150

3. Korebait 6.3 31 <1 1 70 120

Bore Well

4. Midthal Gazni 6.9 29 1 2 150 260

5. Madan Geri 6.5 30 3 4 100 180

6. Hhittal Makki 6.3 29 <1 2 87 150

7. Baloli 5.8 28 2 2 55 100

8. Yennamadi 6.6 28 1 2 105 180

9. Horskari 7.8 30 <1 2 180 315

10. Kimmani 6.5 30 1 3 105 180

Chapter 3:


3.42

Table 3.4.16

Ground Water Quality- Inorganic Parameters

Sr. No.

Sampling locations (Village)

Total Alkalinity

Total Hardness

Calcium Hardness Chloride Sulphate Sodium Potassium

as CaCO3

mg/l

Dug Well

1. Morbaa 11 18 12 30 9 19 3

2. Hiregutti 45 26 17 8 10 18 2

3. Korebait 42 41 21 7 8 8 1

Bore Well

4. Midthal Gazni 90 92 52 21 14 17 2

5. Madan Geri 48 42 22 18 12 19 1

6. Hhittal Makki 42 44 27 12 14 11 4

7. Baloli 22 24 13 11 8 10 1

8. Yennamadi 64 30 24 8 8 26 2

9. Horskari 90 16 12 27 19 59 5

10. Kimmani 78 34 22 4 8 25 2

Table 3.4.17

Ground Water Quality - Nutrient and Demand Parameters

Sr. No.


Nitrate as N

Total Phos-phates

D.O. Chemical Oxygen Demand

Oil & Grease

(mg/l)

Dug Well

1. Morbaa 0.03 0.04 6.2 48 ND

2. Hiregutti 0.01 0.01 5.8 48 ND

3. Korebait ND 0.02 5.6 56 ND

Bore Well

4. Midthal Gazni ND 0.02 4.8 28 ND

5. Madan Geri ND 0.05 2.8 12 ND

6. Hhittal Makki 0.01 0.04 6.0 48 ND

7. Baloli 0.08 0.33 5.0 64 ND

8. Yennamadi 0.02 0.52 5.2 64 ND

9. Horskari 0.01 0.11 4.0 44 ND

10. Kimmani ND 0.23 3.8 16 ND

ND: Not Detectable

Chapter 3:


3.43

Table 3.4.18

Ground Water Quality-Heavy Metals

Sr. No

Sampling Stations (Village)


mg/l

Dug Well

1. Morbaa 1.86 ND 0.01 ND 0.05 0.12 0.03 0.03 ND

2. Hiregutti 0.38 ND ND ND 0.04 0.03 0.02 ND ND

3. Korebait 1.98 ND 0.01 ND 0.09 0.17 0.02 0.02 ND

Bore Well

4. Midthal Gazni 4.30 ND ND ND 0.03 ND 0.04 0.03 ND

5. Madan Geri 4.30 ND ND ND 0.13 1.30 0.05 0.09 0.01

6. Hhittal Makki 0.93 ND ND ND 0.09 ND ND 0.01 ND

7. Baloli 0.55 ND ND ND 0.07 ND ND 0.04 ND

8. Yennamadi 3.53 ND ND ND 0.10 1.05 0.07 0.26 0.01

9. Horskari 4.09 ND 0.02 ND 0.10 ND 0.02 0.15 0.01

10. Kimmani 6.05 ND 0.01 ND 0.10 7.56 0.03 0.25 0.15

Table 3.4.19

Ground Water Quality - Bacteriological Parameters

Sr. No. Sampling location (Villages)

Total Coliform Faecal Coliform

CFU/100 ml

Dug Well

1. Morba 85 38

2. Hiregutti 80 29

3. Karebait 115 38

Bore Well

4. Mithal Gazni 65 06

5. Madan Geri 145 54

6. Hhittal Nakki 70 16

7. Baloli 65 ND

8. Yennamadi 80 06

9. Horskari 120 17

10. Kimmani 75 18

Chapter 3:


3.44

Table 3.4.20

Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Phytoplankton

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations (Village)

Phyto-plankton No./ml

Percentage Composition of Algal Group

Shannon Wiener

Diversity Index

Chloro-phyceae

Bacillario-phyceae

Cyano-phyceae

Dug Well

1. Morba 864 67 - 33 0.9

2. Hiregutti 1152 50 25 25 1.5

3. Korebait 1440 40 40 20 1.5

Bore Well

4. Midthal Gazni Nil - - - -

5. Madan Geri Nil - - - -

6. Hhittal makki Nil - - - -

7. Baloli Nil - - - -

8. Yennamadi Nil - - - -

9. Horskari Nil - - - -

10. Kimmani Nil - - - -

Table 3.4.21

Phytoplankton Species Observed in Water Samples

Bacillario- phyceae Chloro-phyceae Cyano-phyceae

Navicula sp Chlorella sp Osillatoria sp

Nitzschia sp Ulothria sp Anabena sp

Fragilaria sp

Diatoma sp

Chapter 3:


3.45

Table 3.4.22

Ground Water Quality: Biological Parameters – Zooplankton

Sr. No.


Zooplankton No./m3

Percentage Composition of Zooplankton Group

Shannon Wiener

Diversity Index Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera

Dug Well

1. Morba 71 - 100 - 0

2. Hiregutti 142 - 580 50 1.0

3. Korebait 214 33 34 33 1.5

Bore Well

4. Midthal Gazni Nil - - - -

5. Madan Geri Nil - - - -

6. Hhittal makki Nil - - - -

7. Baloli Nil - - - -

8. Yennamadi Nil - - - -

9. Horskari Nil - - - -

10. Kimmani Nil - - - -

Ranges of Shannon Wiener Diversity Index




Table 3.4.23

Zooplankton Species Recorded in Water Samples

Cladocera Copepoda Rotifera

Daphnia sp Cyclops sp Brachionus sp

Nauplius larva

Chapter 3:


3.46

3.5 Sediment Quality Assessment

3.5.1 Sediment Characterization – Baseline Status

Sediment samples were collected as per the standard procedure from six

locations to evaluate the existing status of sediment quality, as listed in Table 3.5.1 and

shown in Fig. 3.5.1.

Representative sediment samples were collected from the project site for

evaluation of the physico-chemical characteristics of sediment. Standard methods have

been followed for the analysis of sediment samples. The international pipette method

(Black, 1965) was adopted for determination of particle size analysis based on the United

States Department of Agriculture (USDA).The chemical characteristics of sediments were

determined by preparing saturated sediment paste by adding distilled water (Agri. Hand

book 60 USDA) and determine sediment reaction and salinity level. Organic carbon

content was also determined by Walkley and Black method (1973), Total nitrogen was

determined by Kjeldhal method and total phosphorus was determined by Vandomolybdo

phosphoric yellow Colour method (spectrophotometic) (Jackson ML 1967). Potassium

was determined by flame photometer (Jackson ML 1967).

Heavy metals in sediment samples were determined by extracting sediment

through Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure (TCLP) and analysed on ICP or AAS

(APHA, 1995). Oil and grease and hydrocarbon content in sediment was determined by

GSE method USEPA 1991.

3.5.2 Physical and Chemical Characteristics of Sediment

Physical characteristics of sediment samples were delineated through specific

parameters, viz particle size distribution. The data indicated that the particle size with the

respective to size of <0.00.2 mm and 0.02 -0.002mm are prominent. The particle size

distributions in terms of percentage of different size of particles are furnished in Table

3.5.2. The collected sediment samples were analysed for various chemical parameters,

viz. pH, electrical conductivity, total dissolved salt, total nutrients content, organic carbon

content, heavy metals, oil and grease and hydrocarbon in the sediments are presented in

Tables 3.5.3 - 3.5.6.

pH is an important parameter to determine the acidity or alkalinity and neutral

scale. It greatly affects the microbial population as well as the solubility of metal ions and

regulates nutrient availability. The pH of sediment was observed to be neutral to slightly

Chapter 3:


3.47

alkaline (7.10-7.83) in reaction. The soluble salts were determined from sediment extract.

The soluble salts are expressed in terms of electrical conductivity (EC). The electrical

conductivity of the sediment extract is in the range of 7.30-9.20 dS/m. The sediment

samples are strongly saline in nature. The dissolved salt in the sediment was in between

4672-5760 mg/l (Table 3.5.3).

Organic matter present in sediment influences its physical and chemical

properties. Sediment analysis shows lower to higher values of organic carbon in the

sediment which is in the range of 0.24 to 1.60 %. The total nitrogen phosphorus and total

potash varied from 0.12 to 0.34, 0.097 to 0.169 and 0.018 to 0.058 %, respectively

(Table 3.5.4).

3.5.3 Heavy Metals

The heavy metals occur in the sediment as cations and are adsorbed by the

negatively charged sediment particles. They are held strongly as complexes on the

surface of clay alumino silicates hydrated oxide and humus. In general, adsorption

increases with pH. Heavy metals pollution is a serious issue because it can persist for

many decades. The heavy metals also create problems in the nutrient utilization of

aquatic life. The total heavy metal contents in the sediments are presented in the

Table 3.5.5.

Sediment samples were also analyzed for heavy metals such as Chromium

(Cr), Zinc (Zn), Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Cadmium (Cd), Manganese (Mn), Iron (Fe) and

Copper (Cu) and Cobalt (Co). Their concentrations in mg/ml are presented in Table

3.5.6.The concentration in heavy metal was determined using Toxicity Characteristics

Leaching Procedure (TCLP method).

3.5.4 Oil and Grease and Hydrocarbon

Oil and Grease were also present in the sediment samples. They were in the

range of 0.22 to 0.83 gm/kg. The hydrocarbons were also present in all the sediment

samples. The contents of the hydrocarbon were in the range of 0.14 to 0.53 mg/kg

(Table 3.5.7).

Chapter 3:


3.48

A : River; B : Estuary; C-F : Sea

Fig. 3.5.1: Sediment Sampling Locations

C

B A

D

E

F

Chapter 3:


3.49

Table 3.5.1

Sediment Sampling Locations

Sr. No.

Sampling Location Latitude Longitude

1. A River N14O 30’ 49.308” E74 O 23’ 3.048”

2. B Estuary N14O 30’ 50.895” E74 O 21’ 26.465”

3. C Sea N14O 33 29’.082” E74 O 16’ 2.266”

4. D Sea N14O 30’ 53.155” E74 O 17’ 0.610”

5. E Sea N14O 28’ 14.146” E74 O 18’ 11.691”

6. F Sea N14O 26’ 14.613” E74 O 20’ 43.479”

Table 3.5.2

Particle Size Distribution of Sediment Samples

Sr.No Sampling Location

Particle Size Distribution (%)

2-0.2 mm

0.2-0.02 mm

0.02-0.002 mm

<0.002 mm

1. A River 0.52 0.84 22.44 76.2

2. B Estuary 1.32 0.84 36.64 61.2

3. C Sea 0.44 1.72 29.04 68.8

4. D Sea 39.16 39.2 11.44 10.2

5. E Sea 0.40 0.72 26.48 72.4

6. F Sea 1.00 2.84 17.76 78.4

Table 3.5.3

Chemical Characteristics of Sediment Samples

Sr.No. Sampling Location pH EC

Total Dissolved Solids

dS/m mg/l

1. A River 7.19 9.20 5760

2. B Estuary 7.11 8.70 5568

3. C Sea 7.10 8.70 5568

4. D Sea 7.83 7.30 4672

5. E Sea 7.26 8.50 5440

6. F Sea 7.14 8.90 5696

Chapter 3:


3.50

Table 3.5.4

Organic Carbon and Nutrient Contents in Sediment Samples

Sr. No.

Sampling Location Organic Carbon

(%)

Total N

Total P2O5

Total

K2O

(%)

1. A River 0.24 0.30 0.117 0.018

2. B Estuary 0.72 0.18 0.147 0.021

3. C Sea 1.20 0.22 0.139 0.041

4. D Sea 1.60 0.12 0.097 0.058

5. E Sea 0.84 0.20 0.169 0.042

6. F Sea 0.81 0.34 0.126 0.028

Table 3.5.5

Heavy Metal content in the Sediment Samples

Sr. No.

Sampling Hg Cr As Ni Cd Pb Cu Zn

(mg/kg)

1. A River ND 96 ND 22 6.44 104 58 82

2. B Estuary ND 362 ND 38 0.82 108 66 76

3. C Sea 0.18 278 ND 48 0.82 152 84 170

4. D Sea 0.21 198 ND 56 0.66 172 68 292

5. E Sea ND 288 ND 55 1.2 168 72 281

6. F Sea 0.16 178 ND 46 0.88 144 78 278

Chapter 3:


3.51

Table 3.5.6

Heavy Metals Content in the Sediment Samples (using TCLP Method)

Sr. No.

Sampling Location


(mg/kg)

1. A River 0.114 0.014 ND 0.007 ND 13.59 4.361 0.095 0.06

2. B Estuary 0.101 0.011 ND 0.025 ND 7.231 3.781 0.102 0.054

3. C Sea 0.096 0.013 ND 0.008 ND 6.66 4.216 0.077 0.056

4. D Sea 0.103 0.014 ND 0.007 ND 14.67 3.975 0.085 0.056

5. E Sea 0.105 0.011 ND 0.011 ND 18.13 4.302 0.114 0.064

6. F Sea 0.115 0.017 ND 0.011 ND 11.80 4.138 0.095 0.059

ND-Not Detected; TCLP- Toxic Characteristics Leachate Procedure

Table 3.5.7

Hydrocarbons and Oil & Grease Content in Sediment Samples

Sr. No.

Sampling Location Hydrocarbons

(mg/kg) Oil and Grease

(g/kg)

1. A River 0.14 0.22

2. B Estuary 0.28 0.45

3. C Sea 0.25 0.40

4. D Sea 0.25 0.40

5. E Sea 0.53 0.83

6. F Sea 0.31 0.50

Chapter 3:


3.52


The impacts of any major developmental projects on land environment generally

depend on type/category of proposed development. For example, the grass root /green

field development requires land acquisition/procurement, site grading/ construction and

operation. In such cases the impacts on land environment would be in the form of

permanent change in landuse pattern as well as direct and indirect impacts on

surrounding land due to pollution discharge in the form of flue gases, fugitive emission,

liquid and solid wastes as well as subsequent urbanization. Whereas, if the proposed

project relates to expansion / modernization / diversification / debottlenecking at already

existing project, the impacts on land environment would be limited to mainly pollution

impacts due to envisaged changes in discharges from proposed development. Apart from

the above, the importance of impacts on land environment also depends on several

factors like the project location, landuse / land cover in surrounding area, ecological or

otherwise sensitivity of the surrounding regions etc. The project under study is related to

Grass Root Development of all whether Multi-Cargo Sea Port Project. Accordingly, for

assessment of impacts, it is pertinent to study the current landuse / landcover of identified

project site as well as surrounding area and the resulting changes in landuse pattern and

the corresponding impacts and also the pollution impacts during normal operation of

proposed project depending on requirement.

The baseline (pre-project) status of land environment has been assessed

through reconnaissance in the project area and characterization of soils (physical,

chemical and microbiological properties) through field studies. The study of land use

pattern has been done through census record and also using remote sensing data.

3.6.1 Reconnaissance

The location identified for proposed development of all weather multi-cargo sea

port projects is situated near Aghnashini and Arabian Sea at Tadadi (Tadari), Taluka

Kumta, in Uttara Kannada district.

The study area lies between the latitudinal parallels of 14025’ N and 14040’N and

the longitudinal parallels of 74015’E and 74025’E. Topographyhically the study area

comes under the coastal belt which is nothing but a succession of estuarine plains

connected by narrow coastal strips, the central belt consisting of the hills and valley of the

sahyadri range and eastern table land. Broadly speaking the study area can be

categorized as essentially an upland that is a hilly malenadu. The eastern belt consists of

Chapter 3:


3.53

a narrow transition zone of undulating lands and stretches of plains as one moves further

east wards. By and large the study area is hilly in terrain and is covered by thick

vegetation including some of the most magnificient forests.

Aghanashini is also known as Tadri River and it flows in to the Arabian Sea,

near the estuarine mouth there is a narrow creek blocked by a rocky reef.

Geologically, the rock formation of the study area belongs to the most ancient

period of earth’s history and consists of Archean complex the oldest rock of the earth’s

crust. The rock formation is characterized by a system of ridges and a plateau on the

west descending rapidly into a narrow strip of low land covered by alluvial rocks. The

estern sector is hilly and consists of the Dharwars and the peninsular gneisses. The

Dharwars are represented by Chloritc Schist’s which are younger to hornblend types.

Pegmatitcs and quartz, veins also are known to occur in parts of the study area. The

Archean granites and gneisses are capped by laterite at several places. The study area is

quite rich in wealth like fish, clay, shell, sand, building materials of granite and laterite.

Study area is also rich in forest.

The forest of the study area can be categorized into evergreen and the semi-

evergreen which are rich in soft wood and packing timber yielding trees, the moist

deciduous which are rich in teak, rose wood and other timber, the scrub Jungle containing

sandle wood trees among other species of the tree growth and lastly the unwooded or

sparsely wooded forest. The fauna of the study area is also rich and varied.

The Western Ghats which lie across the path of the south west monsoons cause

heavy to very heavy rainfall over the coastal areas and moderate to heavy rains in the

hilly malenadu tracks. The elevation varies as one moves east and north and as a result

the climate also varies as one move westwards from the eastern plains through the hilly

malnad (area) and reaches the coast line. All along the year, the humidity is high

especially in the western sector. The summer season lasts from March to May and is

marked by the rising temperature. May happens to be the hottest month and at time the

maximum temperature reaches 380C.

In the coastal area however the cool sea breeze provides some relief during the

latter half of the day and early evening hours. From June to September, which marks the

monsoon or the wet season, the sky remains overcast and the day temperatures move

down to tolerable limits. During this period there would be incessant rains in most parts of

the area. This monotony is however broken by a few brief dry spells, which provide some

relief to the people. The months of October and November mark the retreating monsoon

Chapter 3:


3.54

and during this period the day temperature registers a slight increase while the night

temperature gradually moves down. Since this period is free from incessant rainfall and

the oppressive heat of the summer, one can regard these two months as most pleasant

months of the year. Winter season sets in during December and lasts till the end of

February. During this period the weather is dry with a clear bright sky and an agreeably

low temperature as well as humidity. Generally the rainfall is heavier in the coastal belt

than in the uplands towards the east and the north. July is the month which records the

heaviest rainfall. Average days of rainfall are 103, which result in 2742 mm to 3854 mm

rainfall.

The topographical and climatic features of the study area are quite suitable for

the production of agriculture crops especially rice and also horticulture crops like areca

and coconut. The soils on the study area may be divided in to clear cut zone based on

topography.

3.6.1.1 Land Form:

West coast Karnataka, Laterite of Cainozoic occurs in the study area. Soils are

also called Laterite-Pala ecoence to recent.

3.6.1.2 Agro Climate Zone:

Coastal Zone

3.6.1.3 Agro-Ecological Sub region:

West coast plain, hot humid with 240- 170 day LGP (Length of Growth Period).

3.6.1.4 Natural Vegetation:

Natural Vegetation in the study area is controlled by physiography and climate.

The evergreen, semi-evergreen and moist deciduous forest is restricted to the coastal

region. The evergreen and semi-evergreen forests include the dominant species of

Dipterocarpus indica, Calophyllum tomentomus conarium strictum, Arto carpus species,

Vateria indica and Mansifera indica, Diospuros ebemum Dysoxylum Malabarium.

Most deciduous forest includes dominant species of Tactona grandis, Dalbergia

latifalia, Terminalia tomestosa, Pterocarpus marsupium and Bombusa arundinacea.

The dry deciduous and thorn types include the dominant species of Albizia

amara chloroxylan swieteria and acacia.

3.6.2 Physiography

The study area falls in coastal plain physiography.

Chapter 3:


3.55

3.6.2.1 West Coast Plain

West coast plain of the study area lies between the Western Ghat and Arabain

sea, west coast study area has been divided into a high level largely lateritized, hinterland

which is dissected by west flowing stream and a low level coastal plain with recent fluvio-

littoral formations. The hinterland near the coast consists of table lands forming iron stone

crust. Away from the coast, it is made up of dissected hills without ironstone crust. The

area is drained to the Arabian Sea by Haladi, Ganagavali, Kali and Aghanashini rivers.

3.6.2.2 Soils of Coastal Plain

The coastal plain includes valleys, beaches, marshes and back water area. Soils

of the marshes and back water area are very deep imperfectly to poor drained, clays with

stratified textures. The soils are classified as Aquic Ustifluvents; Tropaquents soils of the

beaches are very deep sandy, well drained to imperfectly drained. These soils are

classified as Aquic Ustipsamments; soils of the valleys are very deep, imperfectly drained

and sandy over loamy satisfied textures. The major crops grown in the area are rice and

groundnut. The principal plantation crop is coconut.

3.6.3 Geology

Laterites of cainoic occur in the study area, recent alluvial deposits are found in

river and stream valleys and in coastal area. In the south Deccan plateau parent material

has played a major role in the soil formation. The acidic rocks of granites, gneisses, sand-

stone and quartzite’s are the parent for red soil and basic rock like basalt, Dharwars-

Archaean to lower proterozoic, Peninsular gneiss Archaean.

3.6.4 Climate

The climate varies widely from arid and semiarid and humid tropical monsoonic

type in the west coast plain 3000 mm to 3600 mm in the west coast plain. The mean

annual temperature ranges from 20.30C to 27.60C with summer temperature ranging from

350C to 420C and winter temperature between 130C and 230C. The soil moisture regime

is Ustic in most part of the study area.

In west coast plain aquatic moisture regime is encountered in local patches. The

soil temperature regime is isohyperthermic climate plays a major role in the soil formation

irrespective of parent materials.

Chapter 3:


3.56

3.6.5 Soil Type of the Study Area

1) Deep imperfectly drained sandy soils on beaches, associated with deep

imperfectly drained sandy soils with shallow water table (Mixed Typic

Ustipsamment)

2) Deep imperfectly drained sandy over loamy soils of valley with shallow water

table associated with deep, imperfectly drained, clayey over sandy soils.

3) Moderately shallow somewhat excessively drained gravelly clay soils with

hard iron stone on coastal plateau summits with moderate erosion,

associated with Iron stone crust (Clayey-Skeletal, Kaolinitic Petro ferric

Haplustuits).

4) Moderately deep, well drained gravelly clay soil with low AWC and surface

crusting on undulating upland with moderate erosion, associated with

moderately deep well drained gravely clay soil.


Baseline data was collected to assess landuse/landcover of different villages

within 10 km radial distance from project site.

3.6.6.1 Soil Characteristics

Soil samples were collected from 13 villages, as shown in Fig. 3.6.1 and

summarized in Table 3.6.1. Representative soil samples were collected from 0-15 cm

depth and analysed for physico-chemical characteristics of soil. Standard methods have

been followed for the analysis of soil samples.

The International Pipette Method (Black, 1964) was adopted for determination of

particle size analysis. The textural diagram was generated using “SEE Soil Class 2.0

version based on United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) classification of soils.

Physical parameters such as bulk density, porosity and water holding capacity were

determined by following KR Box Method (Keen and Raczkowski, 1921).

The chemical characteristics of soil were determined by preparing soil extract in

distilled water in ratio 1:2 (as per Jackson procedure, 1967). Organic carbon was

determined by Walkley and Black method (1972). Fertility status of soil in terms of

available nitrogen was determined by Kjeldhal method and available phosphorus was

determined by Chloro slanus Reduced Molybdo Phosphorus Blue colour, Olsen’s method

Chapter 3:


3.57

(1954) and available potassium was determined by flame photometer method (Jackson

M.L. 1967).

Heavy metals in the soil were determined by digesting the soil with conc. H2SO4

and conc. HNO3 on hot plate and extracting the digested soil, followed by analysis on ICP

or AAS (APHA, 1995).

3.6.6.2 Physical Properties of Soil

Air-dried and sieved samples have been used for determination of physical

properties of soil. Particle size distribution of soil samples in terms of percentage of sand,

silt and clay are presented in Table 3.6.2. Sandy loam is the prominent textural class

followed by clay, sandy clay loam in the study area (Fig. 3.6.2). Clay content in the soil

varies from 6.20 to 45.2%.

The physical characteristics of soils viz. bulk density; porosity and water holding

capacity are presented in Table 3.6.3. The soil being of friable consistency, the bulk

density of the soil is in the range of 1.20 to 1.43 g/cm3, whereas the porosity and water

holding capacity are in the range of 38.8-48.84 % and 18.2-55.43 % respectively.

3.6.6.3 Chemical Properties of Soil

The soil samples were analysed for various chemical properties, such as pH,

electrical conductivity, soluble anions and cations, cation exchange capacity (CEC),

exchangeable cations, exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP), organic carbon content,

nutrient status and heavy metals content. The results presented in Tables 3.6.4 to 3.6.9

are briefly summarized here.

pH is an important parameter which is indicative of the alkaline and acidic nature

of soil. It severally affects the microbial population as well as the solubility of metal ions

and regulates nutrient availability. The pH of the soil samples ranges between 4.9-6.1

indicate acidic nature of soil (Table 3.6.4).

The soluble salts were determined from soil extract (1:2). The soluble salts are

expressed in terms of electrical conductivity (EC). The Electrical Conductivity of the soil

extract in the study area is in the range of 0.05 to 0.21 dS/m (Table 3.6.4). The soluble

salt content in all the soils are low (<1 dS/m). Chemical analysis shows that the soils are

normal (EC <1dS/m).

The most important cations present in soluble state are calcium and

magnesium. Calcium and magnesium were observed in the range of 0.11 - 0.36 meq/l

Chapter 3:


3.58

and 0.015 - 0.158 meq/l, whereas sodium and potassium were in the range of 0.001 -

0.007 meq/l and 0.011 - 0.196 meq/l, respectively (Table 3.6.4).

In general, the soil samples in the study area have low to high adsorption

capacity as evident from the cation exchange capacity which is found to be in the range

of 3.8 -22.2 Cmol (P+) kg-1 soil. Amongst the different exchangeable cations, calcium is

prominently present followed by magnesium. The concentrations of calcium and

magnesium varied from 2.2-3.6 cmol (P+) kg-1 and 1.2-1.8 cmol (P+) kg-1 of soil

respectively. Sodium and potassium were in the range of 0.020 - 0.18 cmol (P+) kg-1 and

0.08 - 0.70 cmol (P+) kg-1 of soil respectively (Table 3.6.5).

Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP) of the soil samples varied from 0.17-

1.96. The presence of sodium in exchangeable form may have deterious effect on the

chemical and physical properties of soil. ESP range b/w 4 to 10 can be considered as

satisfactory. Soils from all the villages are normal with respect to alkalinity as

exchangeable sodium percentage of soil is below 15. The classification of soil and their

relationship with productivity and adsorption based on cation exchange capacity is

presented in Tables 3.6.6 - 3.6.7.

3.6.6.4 Fertility/Nutrient Status of Soil

Organic matter present in the soil influences its physical and chemical

properties. It commonly accounts for one third or more of the cation exchange capacity of

surface soil and is also responsible for stability of soil aggregates.

Organic carbon and available nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium of the soil

samples are found to be in the range of 0.18 - 0.75 % and 200 - 297, 10.3 - 16.5 and 113

- 118 kg/ha respectively. Soil samples are poor to medium level in organic carbon

content. Nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium content indicate that fertility of soil is poor

and need nutients supplementation for agriculture. The fertility state of soil is presented in

Table 3.6.8.

3.6.6.5 Heavy Metal Contents in the Soil

The heavy metals occur in the solution as cations and are absorbed by the

negatively charged soil particles. They are held strongly as complexes form on the

surface of clay, alumino silicates, hydrated oxide and humus. In general, adsorption

increases with pH. Heavy metals pollution is serious because it can persist for many

decades. The heavy metals also create problems in the nutrient utilization in plant and

also result in reduction in chlorophyll content.

Chapter 3:


3.59

Soil samples were analysed for heavy metals such as Chromium (Cr), Zinc (Zn),

Lead (Pb), Nickel (Ni), Cadmium (Cd), Cobalt (Co), Manganese (Mn), Iron (Fe) and

Copper (Cu) and their concentrations are presented in Table 3.6.9. The presence of

heavy metals at proper pH enhances the microbial activity in soil. The concentration of

heavy metals found in the study area is normal.

3.6.6.6 Soil Microbiology

Soil organisms play a key role in nutrient transformation. Organic form is

transformed into their respective inorganic forms and plants are able to absorb them for

their growth. Physical, chemical and physico-chemical characteristics of soil and its

nutrient status influence the microbial population. Microbial population present in samples

of soil is presented in Table 3.6.10.

Various ecological cycles in the Rhizosphere zone of the plant depend upon

microbiological population. The population of bacteria, fungi and actinomycetes are the

vital components of soils and they help in maintaining their stability. Azotobactor are non-

symbiotic nitrogen fixing micro-organisms and improve soil fertility by fixing nitrogen in

soil. Fungi also constitute an important part of the microflora of normal soil. They are

active in initial stages of decomposition of plant residues and actively participate in the

process of soil aggregation. Total viable microbial population per gram of soil varied from

6x106 CFU/g to 60x106 CFU/g. Different microflora observed per gram of soil samples

were Fungi (4x104 CFU/g to 53x104 CFU/g), Actinomycetes (1x104 CFU/g to 20x104

CFU/g), Rhizobium (1 to 10x104 CFU/g) and Azotobacter (1x104 CFU/g to 12x104 CFU/g)

respectively.

3.6.6.7 Landuse Pattern

The Landuse pattern in different villages falling within 10 km radial distance from

the project site of the study area is given in Table 3.6.11. As per 2001 census, major part

of the study area is dominated by unirrigated waste land (31.89 %) followed by 27.44 %

of forest land. Area not available for cultivation is confined to 14.89 %, whereas 7.46 %

land is available for irrigation. The percentwise distribution of landuse pattern in the study

area is depicted in Fig. 3.6.3.

3.6.6.8 Cropping Pattern

Paddy is the main crop grown and other crops are grown are raggi, sugarcane,

green vegetables. The plantation of horticultural crops is also observed and they are

Chapter 3:


3.60

mangoes, banana, guava, arecanut and coconut. Maximum crops and horticulture are

observed in most of the villages.

3.6.7 Landuse/Land Cover using Remote Sensing Studies

Landuse refers to man’s activities on land, utilitarian in land whereas Landcover

denotes the Agricultural, Built-up area, Mangroves, Water bodies, River, Saltpan, Sand,

Sea, Wetland / Submerged area.

Remote Sensing technology has emerged as a powerful tool in providing reliable

information on various natural resources at different levels of spatial details. It has played

an important role in effective mapping and periodic monitoring of natural resources

including environment. With the availability of high resolution remote sensing data, newer

areas of remote sensing applications have been identified, techniques of data processing

have improved and computer based image processing systems have become more

effective.

3.6.7.1 Remote Sensing Data Used

In order to strengthen the baseline information on existing landuse pattern the

following data covering approx. 14025’-14040’N latitude and 74015’- 74025’ E longitude are

used.

Tadri (Tadadi) Karnataka

Imagery Details

IRS P6 LISS III

Path: 097, Row: 063

Date of Pass: 3 May, 2010

The steps involved in procurement and analysis of remote sensing data are:

Acquisition of Satellite data

Data loading

Data processing

Geo-referencing image

Rectification

Supervised Classification of Landuse / Landcover

Ground Truth / field checks using Global Positioning System

Masking

Chapter 3:


3.61

For mapping different agro-climatic zones, the landuse/ landcover classification

system has been standardized by Department of Space as :

1) Agriculture

2) Barren land

3) Built-up area

4) Creek

5) Fallow land

6) Forest

7) Mangroves

8) River

9) Saltpan

10) Sand

11) Sea

12) Wetland/Submerged area

Landuse / Landcover distribution in the study area has been estimated using the

above classification system and digital analysis techniques.

3.6.7.2 Landuse / Landcover Classification

Fig.3.5.4 is the LISS-III image of the proposed Development of Tadadi (Tadri)

Sea Port at Tadri Karnataka. In the image, agriculture, forest appears red, water-bodies

like sea, river, creek appear in blue color. Attributes such as color, tone, texture, shape

and size are used to interpret the image visually. The FCC image shows River

Aghnashini or Tadri flowing along the study area. The built-up area appears in light white

blue colour.

Fig. 3.5.5 represents the Pseudo-color coding of the FCC of the study area,

which has been assigned 12 different classes. The classification identifies water bodies in

blue color with changing tones (for eg. Dark blue for Sea water and light blue for rivers).

The vegetations are identified as green color with changing tones. Built-up land is

identified with magenta tone. Significant patches of mangroves have been identified in the

image. The image also highlights patches of sand and wetland/submerged area along the

coast and bank of the river. The landuse / landcover classification is given in Table

3.6.12.

Chapter 3:


3.62

The land-use/ land-cover classification of the 10 km radius study area revels that

as much as 38.82% area is occupied by sea. On landside, the land-use classification is:

Agriculture: 11.44%, Forests: 15.02%, Barren land: 1.75%, Fallow land: 18.07%, Built-up

land: 0.70%, river: 4.58%, saltpans: 0.64%, creek land: 2.22%, mangrove: 0.87% and

5.77% other water bodies such as wetland/ submerged area: 5.77%.

Chapter 3:


3.63

Fig: 3.6.1 : Soil Sampling Locations

Chapter 3:


3.64

Fig 3.6.2: Soil Textural Class

Fig 3.6.3: Land Use Pattern (as per Census records)

Chapter 3:


3.65

Fig. 3.6.4: False colour composite of Study Area around proposed Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka

Chapter 3:


3.66

Fig. 3.6.5 : Landuse/Landcover Classification of Study Area around proposed Development of Tadadi (tadri) Sea port at Tadri, Karnataka

Chapter 3:


3.67

Table 3.6.1

Soil Sampling Locations

Sr. No.

Sampling Location

(Village)

Direction Approx. Aerial Distence (Km)

With respect to proposed Tadadi Port

1 Morba ENE 4.5

2 Mithal Gazni NE 3.0

3 Hiregutti NE 5.0

4 Madangeri NNE 6.5

5 Bargi Gazal E 3.5

6 Hittal Makki NNE 5.0

7 Baloli NNE 6.0

8 Yennamadi NE 7.0

9 Korebail NE 8.0

10 Khuragadde ENE 6.4

11 Hoskeri NNW 6.4

12 Kimmani ESE 5.0

13 Yettinabaij ESE 6.5

Table 3.6.2

Textural Class of Soil in the Study Area

Sr. No


Particle size distribution (%)

Textural

Class

Coarse Sand

Fine sand

Silt Clay

1. Morba 25 35 16 24 Sandy Clay Loam

2. Mithal Gazni 29 44 19 8 Sandy Loam

3. Hiregutti 35 37 21 6 Sandy Loam

4. Madangeri 30 33 19 18 Sandy Loam

5. Bargi Gazal 33 25 19 24 Sandy Clay Loam

6. Hittal Makki 22 29 24 24 Sandy Clay Loam

7. Baloli 44 21 23 17 Sandy Loam

8. Yennamadi 29 33 26 13 Sandy Loam

9. Korebail 35 31 22 12 Sandy Loam

10. Khuragadde 37 33 17 13 Sandy Loam

11. Hoskeri 17 40 19 25 Sandy Clay Loam

12. Kimmani 9 9 38 45 Clay

13. Yettinabaij 11 22.2 25 41 Clay

Chapter 3:


3.68

Table 3.6.3

Physical Characteristics of Soil in the Study Area

Sr. No.


Bulk Density (gm/cm3)

Porosity

(%)

Water holding capacity (%)

1. Morba 1.38 49 40

2. Mithal Gazni 1.38 41 25

3. Hiregutti 1.37 39 18

4. Madangeri 1.31 46 36

5. Bargi Gazal 1.33 42 40

6. Hittal Makki 1.43 45 41

7. Baloli 1.45 45 39

8. Yennamadi 1.40 39 25

9. Korebail 1.39 41 28

10. Khuragadde 1.43 41 26

11. Hoskeri 1.30 44 45

12. Kimmani 1.23 45 55

13. Yettinabaij 1.20 45 50

Table 3.6.4

Chemical Characteristics of Soil Extract in the Study Area

Sr. No.


pH

1:2

EC

dS/m

Calcium Magnesium Sodium Potassium

meq/l

1. Morba 5.9 0.10 0.11 0.018 0.007 0.170

2. Mithal Gazni 6.1 0.21 0.39 0.041 0.006 0.196

3. Hiregutti 5.8 0.18 0.30 0.015 0.001 0.156

4. Madangeri 5.7 0.15 0.28 0.041 0.004 0.020

5. Bargi Gazal 5.2 0.21 0.33 0.018 0.002 0.026

6. Hittal Makki 5.8 0.1 0.11 0.040 0.006 0.011

7. Baloli 6.1 0.14 0.22 0.036 0.006 0.012

8. Yennamadi 5.2 0.08 0.36 0.023 0.006 0.020

9. Korebail 5.9 0.11 0.13 0.021 0.006 0.143

10. Khuragadde 5.7 0.08 0.12 0.041 0.007 0.020

11. Hoskeri 4.9 0.17 0.8 0.042 0.006 0.019

12. Kimmani 5.1 0.05 0.12 0.158 0.005 0.017

13. Yettinabaij 5.7 0.11 0.13 0.036 0.004 0.017

Chapter 3:


3.69

Table 3.6.5

Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC), Exchangeable Cations Content and Exchangeable Sodium Percentage (ESP) of Soils in Study Area

Sr. No.


Ca++ Mg++ Na+ K+ CEC ESP (%) cmol (p+) kg-1

1. Morba 2.2 1.8 0.02 0.40 11.8 0.17

2. Mithal Gazni 2.2 1.2 0.09 0.70 4.6 1.95

3. Hiregutti 3.6 1.4 0.03 0.12 3.8 0.79

4. Madangeri 2.8 1.2 0.06 0.15 7.8 0.76

5. Bargi Gazal 3.2 1.4 0.08 0.11 11.2 0.71

6. Hittal Makki 2.6 1.2 0.09 0.29 11.8 0.76

7. Baloli 3.2 1.4 0.16 0.11 8.4 1.96

8. Yennamadi 2.2 1.6 0.06 0.18 6.8 0.88

9. Korebail 2.4 1.8 0.09 0.10 5.4 1.66

10. Khuragadde 2.8 1.4 0.06 0.08 6.4 0.94

11. Hoskeri 2.2 1.2 0.09 0.14 12.2 0.73

12. Kimmani 2.8 1.4 0.18 0.19 22.2 0.82

13. Yettinabaij 2.4 1.6 0.18 0.20 20.6 0.87

Table 3.6.6

Relationship of CEC with Productivity

CEC Range (cmol (p+) kg-1)

Productivity Location Sr. Nos.

Very low < 10 Very low 2,3,4,7,8,9,10

Low 10 - 20 Low 1,5,6

Moderate 20 - 50 Moderate 12,13

High > 50 High -

Table 3.6.7

Relationship of CEC with Adsorptivity

CEC Range (cmol (p+) kg-1)

Adsorptivity Location Sr. Nos.

Limited or low <10 Limited or low 2,3,4,7,8,9,10

Moderate 10-20 Moderate 1,5,6,11

High 20-30 High 12,13

Very High > 30 Very high -

Chapter 3:


3.70

Table 3.6.8

Fertility Status of Soils in Study Area

Sr. No.

Sampling Locations

(Village)

Organic Carbon

(%)

N P2O5 K2O

Kg/ha

1. Morba 0.37 286 13.8 116

2. Mithal Gazni 0.31 256 14.5 116

3. Hiregutti 0.75 268 15.7 118

4. Madangeri 0.64 297 12.14 115

5. Bargi Gazal 0.68 213 15.0 114

6. Hittal Makki 0.69 284 13.0 113

7. Baloli 0.69 212 14.5 116

8. Yennamadi 0.65 254 16.5 116

9. Korebail 0.61 200 16.0 113

10. Khuragadde 0.63 296 14.2 113

11. Hoskeri 0.64 271 10.4 116

12. Kimmani 0.18 202 12.3 113

13. Yettinabaij 0.66 256 14.4 114

Level in poor soil <0.5 <280 <10 <110

Level in medium soil 0.5-0.75 280-560 10-25 110-280

Level in fertile soil >0.75 >560 >25 >280

Chapter 3:


3.71

Table 3.6.9

Heavy Metals Content of Soil in Study Area

Sr. No.

Sampling Location (Village)

Cd Cr Co Cu Fe Mn Ni Pb Zn

(mg/kg)

1. Morba 0.40 178 35 99 3420 644 122 32 78

2. Mithal Gazni 0.4 159 25 85 3314 592 110 36 93

3. Hiregutti 0.8 130 20 46 3353 289 54 56 173

4. Madangeri 0.1 80 31 116 3386 446 55 29 95

5. Bargi Gazal ND 115 27 89 3352 512 78 32 78

6. Hittal Makki ND 119 20 38 3356 102 66 28 33

7. Baloli ND 102 22 76 3363 302 92 23 42

8. Yennamadi ND 69 12 77 3051 184 36 10 40

9. Korebail ND 289 16 30 3217 465 45 15 37

10. Khuragadde ND 108 20 83 3239 519 48 20 70

11. Hoskeri ND 139 24 79 3384 202 44 17 55

12. Kimmani ND 128 25 96 3380 213 62 26 60

13. Yettinabaij 0.6 54 30 74 3290 50 62 27 80

Table 3.6.10

Microbiological Characteristics of Soil in Study Area

Sr. No

Sampling Location (Village)

TVC Fungl Actinomycetes Rhizobium Azotobacter

CFU/g of soil

1. Morba 15x106 13x104 4x104 3x104 1x104

2. Mithal Gazni 20x106 18x104 3x104 6x104 2x104

3. Hiregutti 60x106 22x104 3x104 2x104 3x104

4. Madangeri 10x106 8x104 8x104 4x104 1x104

5. Bargi Gazal 56x106 30x104 4x104 3x104 2x104

6. Hittal Makki 38x106 53x104 20x104 10x104 12x104

7. Baloli 11x106 10x104 3x104 6x104 1x104

8. Yennamadi 6x106 4x104 1x104 1x104 1x104

9. Korebail 9x106 7x104 5x104 2x104 2x104

10. Khuragadde 6x106 5x104 4x104 2x104 1x104

11. Hoskeri 43x106 22x104 10x104 7x104 5x104

12. Kimmani 23x106 15x104 1x104 3x104 2x104

13. Yettinabaij 8x106 7x104 4x104 2x104 1x104

TVC : Total Viable Count; CFU : Colony Forming Unit

Chapter 3:


3.72

Table 3.6.11

Land Use Pattern (as per Census Records) (in Ha)

Sr. No.

Village

Name

Total Area

Forest Area

Irrigated Area

Non-Irrigated

Area

Culturable waste land

Area not available for

cultivation

1. Hihalmakki 259 65.27 1.46 41.56 122.76 27.95

2. Hiregutt 682 149.44 18 157.76 289.22 67.58

3. Madangeri 306 87.65 2.24 60.89 116.57 38.65

4. Morba 227 36.25 3.31 21.99 132.18 33.27

5. Yennemadi 84 0 1.65 11.32 58.52 12.51

6. Aghanashini 251 90.22 31.27 55.94 16.71 56.86

7. Mugvekanvada 551 417.19 15.53 106.02 4.14 8.12

8. Kagal 530 128.51 45.68 159.95 133.5 62.36

9. Hubhangeri 132 0 13.49 77.7 28.52 12.29

10. Bargigazani 176 0 0.27 140.74 32.54 2.45

11. Betkuli 485 72.33 6.21 108.38 250.81 47.27

12. Bargi 302 101.32 15.5 116.45 30.33 38.4

13. Kodkani 253 49.03 27.58 139.88 28.32 8.19

14. Poduvani 328 93.6 3.8 67.58 126.06 36.96

15. Gokarn 1700 478.22 168.15 318.35 19.98 715.3

16. Bidrageri 84 21.08 3.67 58.61 0.59 0.05

17. Naranapur 67 0 0 0 0 67

18. Toregazani 27 4.23 4.62 17.34 0.81 0

19. Torke 248 57.54 49.45 134.6 0 6.41

20. Gonehalli 128 42.59 6.57 77.18 1.21 0.45

21. Bhavikoola 211 0 7 193.33 0 10.67

22. Nadumaskeri 381 0 59.24 177.42 143.02 1.32

23. Harumaskeri 141 0 27.61 112.75 0 0.64

24. Bankikodla 52 1.81 21.35 27.6 0 1.24

25. Hoskeri 134 34.52 25.98 72.03 0.13 1.34

26. Kadime 169 63.19 4.65 97.73 2.14 1.29

27. Hanehalli 237 19.57 83 131.45 0 2.98

28. Kolimanjagurni 386 292.76 1.61 37.1 39.56 14.97

29. Balale 217 93.8 3.9 68.65 25.2 25.72

Chapter 3:


3.73

Table 3.6.12

Land use / Land cover : Remote Sensing Data (3 May 2010)

Category Area (Ha)

Area (Sq. Km.)

Area (%)

Agriculture 3598.59 35.98 11.44

Barren Land 551.17 5.51 1.75

Built-up area 221.63 2.21 0.70

Creek 698.04 6.98 2.22

Fallow land 5685.42 56.85 18.07

Forest 4724.03 47.24 15.02

Mangrooves 273.48 2.73 0.87

River 1440.2 14.4 4.58

Salt-pan 202.02 2.02 0.64

Sand 38.69 0.38 0.12

Sea 12210.73 122.1 38.82

Wetland/Submerged Area 1816.44 18.16 5.77

Total 31460.44 314 100

Chapter 3:

Baseline Environmental Status

3.74

3.7 Biological Environmental

The study area is located on shore line of Arabian Sea. Around half part of the

study area is occupied by the water. Therefore, out of 314 km2 area of study area only

about 191.91 km2 areas is having terrestrial habitat. The biological environment with

respect to flora and fauna is rich in this area. Fisheries and agriculture are major

occupation and source of livelihood of local inhabitants.

The state of Karnataka is one of the biodiversity hotspots of India. The state is

endowed with great diversity of climate, topography and soils. It spans the seacoast with

rich aquatic biodiversity and mangrove swamps at the mouths of estuaries. It harbours

verdant tropical evergreen forests, paddy fields, coconut and arecanut orchards on the

narrow coast flanked by the hills of Western Ghats.

Study area has deciduous woods, scrub jungles, fields of sugarcane, cotton,

groundnut, ragi and jowar in the Deccan Plateau. The different environmental regimes

support their own characteristic set of vegetation and animals. Karnataka supports 10%

of total tiger population and 25% of elephant population of the country.

3.7.1 Study Area

The study area comes under the Uttar Kannada district. The Western Ghats of

Uttara Kannada district is known for their dense forests which cover about 80% of the

area of the district. The total forest of Uttara Kannada is about 8, 29,151 ha and the per

capita forest is about 0.77 ha.

The forests of Uttara Kannada can be classified into 3 categories based on

density as partially open forest (20 40% density), medium density forest (40 80% density)

and closed forest (above 80% density). Based on this classification Uttara Kannada

district has about 1388.89 km2 of partially open forest, 1646.16 km2 of medium density

forest and 714.55 km2 of closed forest. Depending on phenological conditions and other

ecological factors, the forests of Uttara Kannada are broadly divided into two type’s

namely moist and dry types.

The moist type may be sub divided into evergreen, semi evergreen and moist

deciduous. The dry type can be divided into dry deciduous and thorny forest. In the moist

deciduous forest, tree species remain deciduous only for a short time. These forests have

semi evergreen species in the upper canopy and evergreen in the lower storey. In these

forests, some moist places have predominance of bamboo and on red soil Xylia is

present.

Chapter 3:


3.75

3.7.2 Sampling Locations

Total 14 sampling locations were identified with reference to topography,

landuse vegetation pattern etc. The observations were made on forest and non-forest

area which includes agriculture field, catchment area, village wasteland etc. During

investigation the study area was explored for biological component.

The biological sampling locations are depicted in Fig. 3.7.1 and presented in

Table 3.7.1. Flora of the study area including common trees near Kumta is depicted in

Table 3.7.2. There are 145 Trees categorising in different families, present in Table and

actual number of observed Trees are 34. The list of common shrubs and climbers near

Kumta in the study area are depicted in Table 3.7.3.

Diverse number of climbers is present and densly populated. The list of commen

Bomboos and Canes near Kumta are depicted in Table 3.7.4. Dendrocalamus strictus

and Bambusa arundinacea are commonly observerd bomboos in study area.

3.7.2.1 Vegitation - Holistic Site

Gokarna

Gokarna also known as Dakshina Kashi is very popular with pilgrims as well as

tourists. Mythology says, Ravana kept the Athmalinga down on the ground against the

instructions and could not lift it again. Hence, the belief that Gokarna is Lord Shiva’s

permanent abode. Kotitheertha is the holy pond near the temple. Devotees usually take

bath in the pond before they enter the temple for pooja.

Om beach got its name because it resembles the shape of OM (a Hindu

religious symbol). Located around 11 km from Gokarna, Om beach is a clean and serene

beach. Foreign tourists are a regular here because of the privacy it offers. Adjacent to this

beach are Half Moon beach and Paradise beach. Kudle beach is another beach nearby

which is popular with foreigners. Vegetation of Gokarna beach is depicted in Fig. 3.7.2.

Cocao plantation

Cacao plantation is mostly observed near kumta and healthy plantation is

depicted in Fig. 3.7.3. Theobroma cacao (Mayan: kakaw, Nahuatl: Cacahuatl), also

cacao tree or cocoa tree, is a small (4 – 8 m or 15 – 26 ft tall) evergreen tree in the family

Sterculiaceae (alternatively Malvaceae), native to the tropical region of the America and

southern part of India Uttar kannada. Seeds of the plant are used to make cocoa powder

and chocolate.

Chapter 3:


3.76

The tree is today found growing wild in the low foothills of the Andes at

elevations of around 200–400m (650–1300 ft) in the Amazon and Orinoco river basins. It

requires a humid climate with regular rainfall and good soil. It is an understory tree,

growing best with some overhead shade. The leaves are alternate, entire, unlobed, 10–

40 cm (4–16 in) long and 5–20 cm (2–8 in) broad. Poisonous and non-edible, they are

filled with a creamy, milky liquid and taste spicy and unpleasant.

The flowers are produced in clusters directly on the trunk and older branches;

they are small, 1–2 cm (1/2–1 in) diameter, with pink calyx. Cacao flowers are pollinated

by tiny flies, Forcipomyia midges in the order Diptera. The fruit, called a cacao pod, is

ovoid, 15–30 cm (6–12 in) long and 8–10 cm (3–4 in) wide, ripening yellow to orange, and

weighs about 500 g (1 lb) when ripe. The pod contains 20 to 60 seeds, usually called

"beans", embedded in a white pulp. Each seed contains a significant amount of fat (40–

50%) as cocoa butter. Their most noted active constituent is theobromine, a compound

similar to caffeine.

3.7.3 Survey Methodology

The structure and composition of vegetation was studied by quadrate method

Phyto-sociological association of vegetation in a community was studied. The quadrate

method includes laying down of a square sample of suitable size for detailed analysis of

vegetation. It may be a single sample spot or may be divided into several subspots. While

studying forest community quadrates, equivalent to one tenth ha (10 m x 10 m) were

used for studying Trees. The quadrates of smaller size (5m x 5m) were used and for

Shrubs and for low herbaceous community, the quadrates of still smaller size (1m x 1m)

were used (Rau and Wooten Environmental Impact Assessment Handbook, 1988 pp 7-

44). Diversity of the study area is rich but some patches of scrub vegetation are also

observed near Agnashini and Tadadi esturian coast and is shown in Fig. 3.7.4 and Fig.

3.7.5.

To characterize vegetation of the study area, the primary data was collected and

analyzed for describing the properties of vegetation with reference to species composition

and structural attributes expressed.

The density measurements indicate number of individuals of a species in a

sample spot. Species diversity is the best measure of community structure and it is

sensitive to various environmental stresses. Smaller value of Simpsons Diversity Index

(SDI) indicates healthy ecosystem and the higher value shows that an ecosystem is

under environmental stress. As we observe density is maximum in all 14 plots; which was

Chapter 3:


3.77

ploted in all 14 locations in all four directions. Simpson’s Diversity Index (SDI) ranges

from (0.09-0.2) which indicates good to medium diversity. The densities and IVI are

depicted in Table 3.7.5- 3.7.18 and SDI shown in Table 3.7.19.

3.7.4 Quadrate Study in the Study Area

The observations recorded at each quadrate helps to find the density, frequency

and dominace of the tree species in the proposed area (Fig 3.7.6 and Fig. 3.7.7).

The proposed study area is demarcated into hills and hillocks. The dominant

spcies observed are Terminalia tomentosa, Terminalia paniculata, Bombax malabarica,

Wrightia tomentosa, Anacardium occidentale, Garcinia sp, Mangifera indica and Ananas

comosus. Carissa carandas was the major shrub observed while Cassia tora, Pongamia

pinnata and Celosia argentia was the dominant herbs observed. Various grasses of

family Gramineae were also observed on the road side and in patches in the villages.

Secondary data on various aspects of biological environment was collected from various

sources to fortify the primary data.

3.7.5 Biodiversity in the Study Area

In the study area most of the land is agriculture land along with some private

forest land. Study area has been studied on the basis of its topography and distinct

biological features.

This flora comprises of several species of medicinal plants. However, there is no

commercial utilization of these plants. The chief reasons behind this is lack of awareness

about the medicinal value of these plants and accessibilty to market. The daily fuelwood

requirement of locals is satisfied from their orchards or nearby forests. Although pruning

and lopping are practiced yet very little felling is carried out. The people have a mindset of

raising plants rather than felling them. Almost every household is having a small to large

homestead garden comprising of vegetables, fruit trees and medicinal plants are depicted

in Fig. 3.7.7 - 3.7.10.

The evergreen plant species found in the study area are presented in Fig. 3.7.8

and Fig. 3.7.9 and are described below:

Evergreen species: Dipterocarpus indicus, Diospyros candolleana, Artocarpus

hirsutum, Vateria indica, Hoppea intergrifolia, Memecylon umbellatum, Mangifera indica,

Actinodaphne agustifolia, Holigarna grahmie, Calamus rotang

Chapter 3:


3.78

Semi evergreen species: Cinnamomum malabaricum, Holigarna arnottiana,

Dalbergia latifolia, Ficus spp., Pterocarpus marsupium, Aglaia roxbhurgiana.

Moist deciduous species: Terminalia paniculata, Terminalia tomentosa, Xylia

xylocarpa Careya arborea, Spondias spp., Tectona grandis, Lagerstroemia parviflora,

Dillenia pentagyna, Strychnos nuxvomica, Bambusa arundinaceae.

Dry deciduous species: Acacia catechu, Sepium insigne, Anoegissus

spp.,Bauhinia racemosa, Bombax ceiba.

Plantations: Tectona grandis, Areca catechu, Cocos nucifera, Casuarina

equisetifolia, Acacia auriculiformis, Acacia nilotica, Eucalyptus sp.

3.7.6 Medicinal Plant in the Study Area

Ayurveda says “There is no plant on the earth, which does not posses medicinal

property”, this means that each and every plant is equally important for its biological

activities, ecology and environment. The conservation of medicinal plants means every

species of plants in its actual habitat should be protected and preserved. Because of

continuous exploitation of medicinal plants from their natural habitats, it is required to

replant and rejuvenate them in other areas having similar habitat or environment. The

study area shows presence of medicinal plants. Out of 98 medicinal plants studied, 15

plant species are of medicinal value.

Forest floor of the study area is covered by herbaceous vegetation, which has

many Ayurvedic medicinal plants. In addition the area abounds in production of many

kinds of fruits, flowers, seeds and leaves.

The local people collect the medicinal plants from forest area, but they are not

dependent economically on collection and generation of economy from medicinal plants.

The list of medicinal plants is given in Table 3.7.20.

Typha Sp.

It is a monocotyledonous plant, growing exclusively in wetland areas. It is

commonly called Cat-tail in English. It is a tall reed and provides shelter for various faunal

species (Fig. 3.7.10).

Entada Sp.

Commonly known as Elephant Pods.These are the largest pods seen in India. It

is a woody climber (Liana) that grows in massive proportions. The seeds are commonly

called Sea beans or Sea hearts since they are found “riding the ocean currents of the

Chapter 3:


3.79

world” and their heart-shape. The seeds are tied to the neck of the cattle since they make

a sound when they hit each other – a substitute to cattle bells! This woody climber is fairly

common at the reserve and can be easily seen due to the obvious pods. The pods are

seen lying on forest floor (Fig. 3.7.11).

3.7.7 Wetland Flora

Schoenoplectus lateriflorus was the most widely occurring species followed by

Cyperus halpan, Geissaspis cristata. Cyperus halpan has 2 sub species C. halpan and C.

halpan subsp. juncoidesI. Species of Schoenoplectus and C. halpan are found in shallow

temporary waters, fringes of permanent water bodies and in slow running streams. G.

cristata occurred mostly in wet soils along the marshes, ponds and river banks and hence

it is common in many localities. These were associated with species of Lindernia,

Fimbristylis, Eriocaulon, etc. Deeper water was mostly harboured by species of

Nymphea, Nymphoides and other rooted floating species.

Cyperaceae had the highest number of species while other species are least

observed. They can also be observed in the total species count of all species in different

localities. Scrophulariaceae, Poaceae, and Eriocaulaceae also have a higher species

diversity and density. However, many of these species are not restricted only to wetlands,

but also to nearby moist soils.

In some of the permanent wetlands lot of perennial species were seen. Many fall

in either of two categories (annual/perennial) according to the wetland systems. Some of

the annuals may also show tendencies towards perenniality if the wetland is permanent.

Eriocaulaceae had the highest number of endemics. Weisneria triandra is an endangered

species found mostly in lateritic bogs of coastal areas. Many of the species such as

Cyperus rotundus, Spilanthes paniculata, Ammannia baccifera, etc., have high medicinal

value. They are regularly collected by the village healers for local use. Plants such as

Alternanthera sessilis, tubers of Colocasia esculenta, Eleocharis dulcis are eaten as

vegetables, Cyperus iria, C. pangorie, Fimbristylis dichotoma are used in making mats.

Wetlands have a large diversity of plants needing wetness of varying degrees. These

plants are accordingly adapted to the local availability of water and many show transition

between annual and perennial ness and also their type of growth forms. Large wetlands

are found in the district catering for the needs of both plants and humans. With rapid

urbanization and other land use, wetlands are rapidly dwindling in number and size.

Hence, wetlands such as lakes, streams, ponds (small or big), bogs, marshy grasslands,

Chapter 3:


3.80

etc. have to be conserved and managed suitably for the welfare of both wetland plants

and man.

3.7.8 Coastal Vegetation: Mangroove Vegetation

From Karwar Bay in the north to Gangolli in the south, fast-flowing rivers

descending from the Western Ghats to the Arabian Sea slow down as they reach the

coast and spread out into wide estuaries, lagoons and backwaters with extensive

mudflats and many small patches of mangrove forest. The mouths of most of these

estuaries and creeks are narrow and permanently open to the sea. In some cases, the

width of the mouth has been reduced by sand accretion. Many fish and prawn farms are

located in the vicinity of the mangrove areas.

Estuarine mangrove forest has 14 species of mangroves belonging to seven

families. Mangrove vegitation at Kumta are depicted in Fig. 3.7.12. Two main zones are

recognized: a moderately saline zone near the coast with sandy clay substrate,

dominated by Avicennia officinalis, A. marina, Kandelia candel, Rhizophora mucronata

and Sonneratia alba and a mesohaline zone further upstream, dominated by Aegiceras

corniculatum, Excoecaria agallocha, K. candel and Sonneratia caseolaris. Other common

mangrove species include Acanthus ilicifolius, Clerodendrum inerme and Rhizophora

conjugata. The backwaters support a variety of algae including Enteromorpha intestinalis,

Chaetomorpha lineum, Monostroma sp, Porphyra vietnamensis and Gracilaria verrucosa.

The coastal sand dune vegetation is dominated by Ipomoea pescaprae, Asparagus

dumosus, Spinifex littoreus, Cyperus aristatus, Sporobolus tremulus, Leucas aspera and

Casuarina equisetifolia on the foreshore and Vitex negundo, Pandanus sp, Duranta

repens Anacardium occidentale and Cocos nucifera on the backshore.

Mangroves shed and drop about seven and a half tons of leaf litter per acre per

year. The constantly-shed leaves are quickly broken down by bacteria and fungi and

released into the water, providing food for sea-life. Mangroves are the nesting grounds for

mammals, amphibians, reptiles, countless unique plants, juvenile fish and invertebrates,

sponges, barnacles, oysters, mussels, crabs, shrimps, oysters and many water birds

such as the great white heron, reddish egrets, roseate spoonbills, etc. Mangroves also

recharge underground water supplies by collecting rainwater and slowly releasing it.

Mangroves trap debris and silt, stabilizing the near shore environment and

clarifying adjacent open water, which facilitates photosynthesis in marine plants. The

fringing network on mangrove buffers natural forces such as hurricanes, wave action,

tidal change and run-off, preventing soil loss with its firm, flexible barrier. Beyond serving

Chapter 3:


3.81

as a refuge for juvenile marine organisms, mangroves filter sediment and buffer

coastlines against erosion and storm surge.

The major ecological role of mangroves is the stabilization of the shoreline and

prevention of shore erosion. The dense network of prop roots, pneumatophores and stilt

roots not only give mechanical support to the plant, but also trap the sediments. The

important ecological role of the mangroves is the detritus, which help in feeding and

provides breeding and nursery grounds for the juveniles of many commercially important

shrimps and fishes.

Mangrove swamps and other low-lying areas along the estuaries are generally

preferred for brackish water fish farming. The species cultivated are Liza parsia, L. tade,

Mugil cephalus, Chanos chanos, Penaeus monodon and Fenneropenaeus indicus. The

fishes lay their eggs in tangled roots of mangrove trees and later hatch and grow with

needed nutrients available.

Thus mangroves act as natural nursery grounds. Mangroves offer shelter to the

juveniles of a wide variety of marine organisms, notable among them being certain

species of penaeid shrimps. A linear relationship exists between shrimp production and

the size of the mangrove forest area. Mangroves give recreation to hunters, fishermen,

bird-watchers, photographers and others who treasure natural areas. Mangrove

vegetation showing pnematophores at Kumta and Gokarna site are depicted in

Fig. 3.7.13.

Mangroves serve as a critical nursery for young marine life and therefore play an

important role in the health of fisheries and the economic well-being of fishermen. The

ecosystem is also considered as most productive and biodiversity providing significant

functions in the coastal zones as buffer against erosion, storm surge and tsunamis.

Afforestation of mangrove areas on a large scale is the most urgent need of today, if the

coastal environment is to be brought back again to its earlier pristine glory.

3.7.9 Economic and Social Forestry

The estuarine systems support fisheries of great regional importance and the

mangrove forests provide a wide range of useful forest products. These resources are,

however, in imminent danger of being destroyed. The process of destruction can be

reversed only with an extensive programme of afforestation with appropriate mangrove

seedlings. Protection of the mangrove forest will not only lead to enhanced food

production, but would also create shelter belts to reduce the impact of cyclonic storms

Chapter 3:


3.82

and would help to stabilize the shore. Casurina equisetifolia have been planted by the

department of social forestry on the site of coast. Acacia auriculoformis plantation through

social forestry program is depicted in Fig. 3.7.14 (a, b, c, d).

3.7.10 Faunal Biodiversity

In the study area, around half of the part is terrestrial habitate. In this part, there

are chances of presence of wild life in the dense vegetation area, which provides good

residing sites for the insects, birds, reptiles and mammals.

3.7.10.1 Mammals

List of wild animals of Honnavar division, Kumata is presented in Table 3.7.21,

and some of the species are described here.

Langur

Classification of Semnopithecus sp. is given below: Gray langurs are large and

fairly terrestrial, inhabiting open wooded habitats and urban areas on the Indian

subcontinent. The name Hanuman langur is widely used in India and refers to the group

which was until recently considered a single species, Semnopithecus entellus. Now

seven distinct species are recognized though this is the matter of some debate. While the

species re-classification is well accepted, the common name of "Gray Langur" is not used

widely Indian naturalist circles. The animal is called hanuman langur in Hindi and Marathi.

Gray langurs are commonly observed in the study area and shown in Fig. 3.7.15.

Scientific Classification

Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Mammalia

Order: Primates

Family: Cercopithecidae

Subfamily: Colobinae

Genus: Semnopithecus sp.

Species Simian entellus

Spotted Deer (Chital)

The chital or cheetal (axis axis), also known as chital deer, spotted deer or axis

deer is a deer which commonly inhabits wooded regions of India. They are found in small

numbers in Pakistan as well. It is the most common deer species in Indian forests. Its

coat is reddish fawn, marked with white spots, and its underparts are white. Its antlers,

which it sheds annually, are usually three-pronged and curve in a lyre shape and may

extend to 75 cm (2.5 ft). It stands about 90 cm (3 ft) tall at the shoulder and masses about

Chapter 3:


3.83

85 kg (187 lb). Its lifespan is around 20–30 years. On the way to Sirsi in the study area,

spoted deer (Chital) as shown in Fig. 3.7.16 was observed. Classification of spotted dear

is given below:


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Mammalia

Order: Artiodactyla

Family: Cervidae

Subfamily: Cervinae

Genus: Axis

Species: A. axis

Binomial name Axis axis

3.7.10.2 Avifauna (Birds)

List of common birds of Honnavar division, Kumata is presented in Table 3.5.21.

Hornbill (Bucerotidae)

Due to prevailing extreme climatic condition, sighting and recording the

presence of birds was restricted to only 55 species that included birds of prey and

common passarine species. On several occasions, instead of direct sighting, identification

of species through calls came as a more handy option. Although, presence of migratory

birds was not expected in pre-monsoon summer months, few riverine areas, particularly

close to Agnashini River showed signs of the presence of Cormorant that were not seen

in other places within the study area. Dominant birds at remaining sites are spotted Dove

and jungle Crow. Most common birds observed at various places are Cattle egret, Indian

parakeet, Nightjar and common Babbler. Most of these birds recorded in the study area

are omnivorous in habit preferring grains, insects and worms etc. as their principal food

items (Fig 3.7.17, a).

Common Swift (Apus apus)

It is a small bird, superficially similar to the Barn Swallow or House Martin. It is,

however, completely unrelated to those passerine species, since swifts are in the

separate order Apodiformes. The resemblances between the groups are due to

convergent evolution reflecting similar life styles. The scientific name comes from the

Greek απους, apous, meaning "without feet". These birds have very short legs which they

use only for clinging to vertical surfaces (hence the German name Mauersegler, literally

Chapter 3:


3.84

meaning "wall-glider"). They never settle voluntarily on the ground (Fig 3.7.17 b).

Classification is given below:


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Aves

Order: Apodiformes

Family: Apodidae

Genus: Apus

Species: A. apus

Binomial Name Apus apus

Large Egret

The Great Egret (Ardea alba), also known as the Great White Egret or Common

Egret or (now not in use) Great White Heron is a large, widely-distributed egret.

Distributed across most of the tropical and warmer temperate regions of the world, in

southern Europe it is rather localized. In North America it is more widely distributed, and it

is ubiquitous across the Sun Belt of the United States and in the rainforests of South

America. It is sometimes confused with the Great White Heron in Florida, which is a white

morph of the closely related Great Blue Heron (A. herodias). The name Great White

Heron has occasionally been used to refer to the Great Egret (Fig 3.7.17 c).


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Aves

Order: Coraciiformes

Family: Ardeidae

Genus: Ardea

Species: A. alba

Binomial name Ardea alba

Little cormorant

The Little Cormorant (Microcarbo niger) (Fig 3.7.17 d) is a member of the

cormorant family of seabirds. It breeds in tropical South Asia from Southern Pakistan

through India and Sri Lanka. It is resident but undertakes some limited seasonal

movements. Originally described by French ornithologist Louis Jean Pierre Vieillot in

Chapter 3:


3.85

1817, this is a common and widespread bird species. It breeds in freshwater wetlands

and on coasts. 3–5 eggs are laid in a nest in a tree or long grass.

This is a small cormorant, 55 cm in length. Its rectangular head profile and short

bill are distinct from the somewhat larger Indian Cormorant. Little Cormorant is mainly

glossy black in the breeding season, with white head plumes and a whitish throat. The

wing coverts are silvery, and it has a longish tail. The sexes are similar, but non-breeding

adults and juveniles are browner and lack the head plumes. The Little Cormorant can

dive to considerable depths, but usually feeds in shallow water. It frequently brings prey

to the surface.


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Aves

Order: Pelecaniformes

Family: Phalacrocoracidae

Genus: Microcarbo

Species: M. niger

Binomial name Microcarbo niger

Black Headed Ibis

The Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus) is a species of wading

bird of the ibis family Threskiornithidae which breeds in South Asia and Southeast Asia

from Pakistan to India. It builds a stick nest in a tree and lays 2-4 eggs. It occurs in

marshy wetlands inland and on the coast, where it feeds on various fish, frogs and other

water creatures, as well as on insects.

Adults are typically 75 cm long and white-plumaged, with some greyer areas on

the wings. The bald head, the neck and legs are black. The thick curved bill is dusky

yellow. Sexes are similar, but juveniles have whiter necks and a black bill (Fig 3.7.17, e).


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Aves

Order: Pelecaniformes

Family: Threskiornithidae

Genus: Threskiornis

Species: T. melanocephalus

Binomial name Threskiornis melanocephalus

Chapter 3:


3.86

Cattle Egret

The Cattle Egret (Bubulcus ibis) (Fig 3.7.17 f). is a cosmopolitan species of

heron (family Ardeidae) found in the tropics, subtropics and warm temperate zones. It is

the only member of the monotypic genus Bubulcus, although some authorities regard its

two subspecies as full species. Despite the similarities in plumage to the egrets of the

genus Egretta, it is more closely related to the herons of Ardea. Originally native to parts

of Asia, it has undergone a rapid expansion in its distribution and successfully colonised

much of the rest of the world.

It is a stocky white bird adorned with buff plumes in the breeding season which

nests in colonies, usually near bodies of water and often with other wading birds. The

nest is a platform of sticks in trees or shrubs. Unlike most other herons, it feeds in

relatively dry grassy habitats, often accompanying cattle or other large mammals, since it

catches insect and small vertebrate prey disturbed by these animals. Some populations

of the Cattle Egret are migratory and others show post-breeding dispersal. The adult

Cattle Egret has few predators, but birds or mammals may raid its nests, and chicks may

be lost to starvation, calcium deficiency or disturbance from other large birds. This

species removes ticks and flies from cattle, but it can be a safety hazard at airfields, and

has been implicated in the spread of tick-borne animal diseases.


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Chordata

Class: Aves

Order: Ciconiiformes

Family: Ardeidae

Genus: Bubulcus

Species: B. ibis

Binomial name Bubulcus ibis

Based on the information obtained from the forest department the wildlife like

Bos gaurus, Canis aureus, Cervus unicolor, Felis bengalensis, Felis chaus and Herpestes

auropunctuatus have been recorded. Mangrove vegetation provides shelter for the

nesting of bird and the hiding sites for shrimps and aquatic insects.

3.7.10.3 Insect

Large diversity of insect observed in North Kannada district of Karnataka and

some of them are readily available in the study area including Kumta and Near by Tadadi.

Chapter 3:


3.87

Termite species


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Arthropoda

Class: Insecta

Subclass : Pterygota

Infraclass : Neoptera

Superorder : Dictyoptera

Order Isoptera

The termites are a group of eusocial insects usually classified at the taxonomic

rank of order Isoptera (but see also taxonomy below). Along with ants and some bees

and wasps which are all placed in the separate order Hymenoptera, termites divide labour

among gender lines, produce overlapping generations and take care of young

collectively. Termites mostly feed on dead plant material, generally in the form of wood,

leaf litter, soil, or animal dung, and about 10% of the estimated 4,000 species (about

2,600 taxonomically known) are economically significant as pests that can cause serious

structural damage to buildings, crops or plantation forests. Termites are major

detritivores, particularly in the subtropical and tropical regions, and their recycling of wood

and other plant matter is of considerable ecological importance.

As eusocial insects, termites live in colonies that, at maturity, number from

several hundred to several million individuals. Colonies use decentralised, self-organised

systems of activity guided by swarm intelligence to exploit food sources and

environments that could not be available to any single insect acting alone. A typical

colony contains nymphs (semi-mature young), workers, soldiers, and reproductive

individuals of both genders, sometimes containing several egg-laying queens. Termites

Hills are observed on the way to Kumta are depicted in a Fig. 3.7.18 (a, b).

Camponotus compressus

A big ant, seen throughout Uran, several colonies were located in tree holes.

These workers were seen feeding on Prosopis sp. inflorescence. It is a species that

indicates a disturbed habitat. It is depicted in a Fig. 3.7.19.

Tramea limbata (Black Marsh Trotter)

A dragonfly hard to miss, prefers perching high over a water body to get a better

view, scanning for prey. It is known to be active throughout the day. Only one individual

was seen far off in the marshes (Fig. 3.7.20).

Chapter 3:


3.88

Bark Mantis

Although visible on a leaf, is difficult to spot when resting on a bark. The Mantids

have not only mastered the art of hiding, they are the Jack of all trades. Mantids not only

camouflage and remain still; they also mimic the movements of leaves or branches

swinging in air. They rock and roll as per the leaves to match that exact shape and action.

This has given them a heightened chance of finding prey (Fig. 3.7.21).

Mantis Nymph

A Mantis Nymph rests on Calotropis gigantia flower. The nymphs are imago of

the adults, but lack wings and reproductive glands, some nymphs also mimic ants. They

feed on a variety of insects such as butterflies (even the unpalatable ones!), beetles, bugs

and ones that are considered pests too! It is depicted in a Fig. 3.7.22.

3.7.10.4 Butterfly

Butterflies are good bioindicators of pollution. They sence air pollution and noise

pollution with a particular range and indicates some behavioral changes. Some of the

observed butterflies during field survey in the study area are mentioned below:

Vanessa cardui (Painted Lady)

It is a nymphalid that has global distribution. Only one individual was seen sitting

on the ground and had a weak flight. It is commonly seen during pre-monsoon and

monsoon period (Fig. 3.7.23).

Colotis amata (Small Salmon Arab)

It is a pieridae butterfly, associated with the mangroves. Many individuals were

seen near mangrove swamps. This individual was seen laying eggs on a mangrove

sapling. It is depicted in a Fig. 3.7.24. The hotspots of plants and animal of Uttar

Kannada district is given in Table 3.7.23.

3.7.11 Agriculture

The chief agricultural crops in the order of importance are Paddy (Oryza sativa),

Coconut (Cocos nucifera), Ragi (Elesusine corocana), and in the interior gardens,

Betelnut (Areca catechu), Black pepper (Piper nigrum) and Cardamoms (Eleteria

cardamum). Paddy is the preinciple crop in the study area. Sandalwood carving is a

famous craft for which this tract is well known. These workers are known as Gudigars and

they carve sandalwood ivory, abony, Heddi etc., with exquisite skill. The sandalwood

Chapter 3:


3.89

carving has received international recognition in exhibitions held abroad. Forest

department supplies sandalwood at concessional rates to these artisans.

The requirement of the population consists of small timber for house

construction and other agricultural purposes. They need large quantities of brushwood,

thorns, creepers and green leaves (Soppu) for manuring their gardens and dry leaves

(darku) for rice lands. The grazing requirement of the cattle population is adequately met

by the existing minor forests and unclosed forests organized under the Plan.

3.7.11.1 Marketable Produce

The marketable produce consists of timber, firewood, bamboos and minor forest

produce such as catechu (Katha), honey and wax, shigekai pods, Hulgal Seeds, Tumri

leaves, Wild pepper, Dalchinni bark and canes, halamaddi and cashew nut etc. The most

common species of timber extracted are teak, sissum, honne, matti, nandi, kalam, kindal,

heddi, bharangi, surhonne, dhaman, neral, tare, bilakambi, and sagadi. Minor Forest

Produce is sold either annually or biannually. The system of standing sale is done away

and is replaced by departmental logging where in all the material is brought to depot and

sold in the auction sale.

3.7.11.2 Agricultural Customs

The whole track dealt with is interspersed with rice cultivation and beautiful

gardens of areca in which cardamom and pepper vine are also grown. Alush green rice

field is shown in Fig. 3.7.25. The rice is cultivated both under dry and wet types, the latter

being raised mainly in the valleys where there is perennial supply of water. Sugar cane is

also grown to some extent. The fertile valleys with ever flowing streamlets have been

converted into pretty areca gardens where in banana; cardamom and pepper are also

cultivated. The chief agricultural produce of the tract is rice, areca nut, pepper and

cardamom. This tract is the home of garden lands of North Karnataka District. The

Garcinia vegetation was observed at Morba village. At Hinegutti village the pine apple

garden were observed by NEERI team and riped jackfruit tree were observed at

Yennomodi village.

The richer class in villages builds houses using timber rather lavishly. The chief

species used are Lagerstroemia lanceolata. Terminalia tomentosa, Artocarpus hirsuta

and Artocarpus heterophyllus. Other wants of the people are small quantities of round

timber for huts, cow-sheds and other materials for agricultural implements, fire-wood for

domestic use, bamboos, thorns and fencing posts for fencing purposes and grass for

thatching and feeding the cattle. Another important requirement of the gardeners is soppu

Chapter 3:


3.90

for leaf manure. Minor forest produce like stones, earth, honey, myrobalans etc. are also

needed to a limited extent.

3.7.12 Fisheries Resources

Uttara Kannada District has a coastal line of 144 Km endowed with rich marine

resources. The fish are landed through Purse-seiners, trawlers and other mechanized

boats. The fish production plays a very important role in the district economy. There are

14-minor ports in the district. There are main 16 - fishing centers 5 fishing harbors in the

district. Mackerels, Sardines, Prawns and other export potential fishes are found in

abundance in sea. Shrimp culture has become a very good activity in the coastal area.

The fishes are marketed both inside and outside district. About 10% are utilised

for manure purposes, for coconut and other crops. The number of schemes for the

development of fishing industry is in operation in the district. The annual average fish

catching in the district is 47800 Tonnes and inland fishing is about 79 Tonnes. The details

fish catching, fishing centres and fisheries related industry.

Loligo species


Kingdom: Animalia

Phylum: Mollusca

Class: Cephalopoda

Subclass : Coleoidea

Order : Teuthida

Superorder : Dictyoptera

Family : Loliginidae

Genus : Loligo

Is a genus of squids and one of the most representative and widely distributed

group of myopsid squids.The genus was first described by Jean Baptiste Lamarck in

1798. However, the name had been used earlier than Lamarck (Schneider, 1784;

Linnaeus, 1758) and might even have been used by Pliny.

In the early nineteenth century, this generic name was often used as a grouping

for all true squids.Several species are commercially exploited, such as Loligo vulgaris and

Loligo plei. Several species, for example Loligo vulgaris, are noted for being attracted to

night light; they are therefore fished using different light attraction methods. Loligo

species are observed near Gokarna beach is depicted in a (Fig. 3.7.26 a, b).

Tadadi and Kumta are the major fish landing centres in the study area

(Fig. 3.7.27 a, b). The fish production at both the landing centres is given in the

Chapter 3:


3.91

Table 3.7.24 and Table 3.7.25. Trash fishes are used for making poultry food and

manure Fig. 3.7.28. The dominant fish species observed at market place of Kumata are

Oil Sardines, Mackerels, Carrangids, Pomfrets and Seer fishes Fig. 3.7.29.

At Kumta landing centre, the fisheries production was 3265 tonnes in the year

2006-2007, while at Tadadi landing centre the fisheries production was 389.25 tonnes

respectively.

3.7.13 Gaonkar Mines

As observed in the field survey, nearly 500 m from the tadadi jetty; sea shell

mining is presently operated by M/s Gaonkar. The basic principle behind this mining is to

drain sea shells and molluscan species found near seashore as raw material.

Crushers are placed near seashore; once shells are put in the crushers; by

mechanism of crushing, it separates dead shells on one side and dead bulbus excreata

on other side. Dead shelll are used to prepare sweet lime used in pan, panmasala,

gutakha and bulbus excreta used as poultry food, fish food. These mine players did that

voraciously; it will deplate marine biota. Therefore, these practices which damage the

environment should be stopped to protect coastal area at and around the study area.

Near the jetty at Kumta the Gaonkar mine is located (Fig. 3.7.30 a, b) which

drains the sea shells and crush them taking out the flesh and shells separated. The flesh

is used for making fish and poultry food and the shells were used for making of sweet

lime.

Chapter 3:


3.92

Indicates Sampling locations.

Blue Line- Indiactes Mangroove Patch

Fig. 3.7.1: Biological Sampling Locations in the Study Area

TADADI JETTY

Chapter 3:


3.93

Fig. 3.7.2: Vegetation near the Om Beach at Gokarna

Fig. 3.7.3: Cocao Plantation (Kumta)

Fig.3.7.4: Scrub Vegetation near

Agnashini River

Fig.3.7.5: Scrub Vegetation near

Tadadi Sea Coast

Fig. 3.7.6: Quadrate Study at Kumta

Chapter 3:


3.94

Fig. 3.7.7: Quadrate Study at Tadadi

Fig. 3.7.8: Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Kumta Road

Fig. 3.7.9: Dense Evergreen Vegetation at Sirsi site

Fig. 3.7.10: Medicinal Plant

(Typha sp.)

Fig. 3.7.11: Medicinal Plant

(Entada Sp.)

Chapter 3:


3.95

(1)Acanthus ilicifolius (2) Avicennia alba (3) Aavicennia

marina (4) Aavicennia

officinalis

(5) Aegiceras corniculatum

(6)Bruguiera cylindrica

(7)Bruguiera gymnorrhiza

(8) Ceriops decandra

(9)Ceriops tagal (10 Excoecaria Agallocha

(11) Kandelia candel

(12) Rhizophora apiculata

(13) Rhizophora mucronata

(14)Salicornia brachiata 15)Dorries trifolia (16)Sesuvium

portulacastrum

(17)Sonneratia alba (18)Sonneratia apetala

(19)Suaeda maritima

(20)Suaeda nudiflora

Fig. 3.5.12(a): Mangroves Plant Species at Tadadi

Chapter 3:


3.96

Fig. 3.7.12(b): Mangrooves Vegetation Fig .3.7.13 : Mangrooves Vegetation Gokarna

(a) Acacia auriculoformis (b) Pineapple Vegetation

(C) Jack-fruit Vegetation (d) Areca Nut and Pepper

Fig. 3.7.14: Social Forestry Programme (a, b, c, d)

Chapter 3:


3.97

Fig. 3.7.15: Semnopithecus sp. (Langur)

Fig. 3.7.16: Spotted Deer

Chapter 3:


3.98

(a) Hornbill sp. (b) Common Swift

(c) Large Egret sp. (d) Little Cormorant

(e) Black Headed Ibis (f) Cattle Egret

Fig. 3.7.17: Common Birds observed in the Study Area (a, b, c, d, e, f)

Chapter 3:


3.99

Fig. 3.7.18 (a): Termite Hills Fig. 3.7.18 (b) Termite sp.

Fig. 3.7.2.19: Camponotus Compressus Fig. 3.7.20: Tramea Limbata

Fig. 3.7.21: Bark Mantis Fig. 3.7.22: Mantis Nymph

Chapter 3:


3.100

Fig. 3.7.23: Vanessa Cardui (Butter fly) Fig. 3.7.24: Colotis Amata (Butter fly)

Fig 3.7.25: Paddy Field

(a) (b)

Fig.3.7.26: Loligo sp. (Gokarna beach)

Chapter 3:


3.101

(a) (b)

Fig.3.7.27: Fishes Collection at Tadadi Jetty

Fig.3.7.28: Trash Fishes used for

Manure

Fig.3.7.29: Species of Fishes

Observed at Kumta Market

Fig. 3.7.30 (a): Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine

Fig. 3.7.30 (b): Sea Shell Crushing at Gaonkar Mine

Chapter 3:


3.102

Table 3.7.1

Details of Bological Sampling Locations with Agricultrural Crop

Sr. No.

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

(In Feet)

Sampling Location

Agricultural Description

1. N 140 32.8’ 33”

E 740 23.5’ 04” 23 Morba

Coconut, Areca nut, Mango Field

2. N 140 33.1’ 01”

E 740 22.6’ 39” 242 Mithal Gazani Coconut, Areca nut

3. N 140 33.4’ 32”

E 740 23.2’ 63” 401 Hiregutti Rice

4. N 140 31.2’ 63”

E 740 20.7’ 35” 9 Gokarna Rice, Areca nut,

5. N 140 31.4’ 87”

E 740 24.1’ 94” 205 Bargi Gazal Rice Field

6. N 140 33.7’ 26”

E 740 21.4’ 00” 411 Hittal Makki Rice Field

7 N 140 30.2’ 02”

E 740 23.8’ 79” 4 Kimmani

Arecanut, Coconut, Mango, Gauua banana etc.

8 N 140 34.2’ 25”

E 740 23.3’ 04” 13 Yennamati

Rice

Coconut, Mango

9 N 140 34.8’ 11”

E 740 24.2’ 26” 273 Korebail Areca nut, Coconut, Banana

10 N 140 32.5’ 90”

E 740 24.2’ 03” 46 Khurigadda Rice, Suger cane, Grin, Ragi

11 N 140 34.7’ 72”

E 740 19.9’ 77” 8 Haskari Rice, Mango

12 N 140 34.5’ 55”

E 740 22.6’ 03” 48 Balole

Rice, Coconut, Arecanut, Mango, Banana etc.

13 N 140 30.6’ 51”

E 740 25.1’ 67” 45 Yettinbail

Rice, Coconut, Jatropha gossipifolia, Ricinus Comunis,

14 N 140 34.5’ 69”

E 740 22.4’ 69” 27 Madangeri

Rice, Vegetable, Cabbage, Ragi

Chapter 3:


3.103

Table 3.7.2

List of Forest Flora - Common Trees of Honnavar Division (Kumta)

Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name

1 *Acacia catechu Mimosaceae Kachu

2 Actinodaphne angustifolia (Actinodaphne hookeri)

Lauraceae Haggodgimara, Tudgensu

3 Adenanthera pavonina Mimosaceae Manjuti

4 Ailanthus malabarica Simaroubaceae Guggaldhup

5 Albizzia lebbeck Mimosaceae Sirsul

6 Albizzia odoratissima Mimosaceae Bilkambi, Godhunse

7 *Albizzia procera Mimosaceae Bellati, Bili-bage

8 Albizzia stipulata (Albizzia chinensis)

Mimosaceae Bagana, Kal-bage

9 Alseodaphne semecarpifolia Lauraceae Mashe, Neltare

10 *Alstonia scholaris Apocyanaceae Satwin,Maddale

11 Amoora canarana Meliaceae Pushikmara

12 *Anacardium occidentale Anacardiaceae Godambi, Kaju

13 Anthocephalus cadamba Rubiaceae Kadwal, Kadamba

14 Antiaris toxicaria Moraceae Ajjanpatte

15 Antidesma bunius Euphorbiaceae Jondhri

16 Aporosa lendleyana Euphorbiaceae Challe,Bidchella,Sali

17 Ardisia humilis Myrsinaceae Chitmitle-munegida, Havalad

18 Arenga wightii Arecaceae Dadasal

19 Artocarpus gomezianus (Artocarpus lakoocha)

Moraceae Wate

20 Artocarpus heterophyllus (Artocarpus integrifolius)

Moraceae Halasu

21 *Artocarpus hirsutus Moraceae Hebbalasu

22 Barringtonia acutangula Barringtoniaceae Mavinakubia, Hole-kauva

23 *Bauhinia racemosa Caesalpiniaceae Banni, Apta

24 *Bauhinia variegate Caesalpiniaceae Kanchan, Kanraj

25 Bischofia javanica Euphorbiaceae Hoka

26 *Bombax ceiba (Salmalia malabaricum)

Bombacaceae Bural

27 *Bridelia retusa Euphorbiaceae Mul-honne

28 Buchanania lanzan Anacardiaceae Char

29 Butea monosperma (Butea frondosa)

Fabaceae Muttal, Palas

30 Calophyllum apetalum (Calophyllum wightianum)

Clusiaceae Bobbi

31 Calophyllum elatum (Calophyllum tomentosum)

Clusiaceae Surhonne

32 Canarium strictum Burseraceae Rala-dhupa, Guggala-dhupa

Chapter 3:


3.104


33 Caralllia brachiata (Caralllia integerrima)

Rhizophoraceae Andmurugal

34 Careya arborea Lecythidaceae Kumba, Kaval

35 Caryota urens Arecaceae Baini

36 Casaeria elliptica (Casaeria tomentosa)

Flacourtiaceae Tordal, Bili-oobina

37 *Cassia fistula Caesalpiniaceae Kakke

38 *Casuarina equisetifolia Casuarinaceae Gali-mara

39 Chionanthus malabarica (Linociera malabarica)

Oleaceae Akkarkal, Maniki-mara

40 Chukrasia tabularis Meliaceae Lal-deodar

41 Cinnamomum verum (Cinnamomum zeylanicum)

Lauraceae Dalchinni

42 *Cordia dichotoma (Cordia myxa)

Cordiaceae Bheku,Chella

43 Cordia macleodii Cordiaceae Hadang

44 Cordia wallichii Cordiaceae Bhurgund, Dhiwar

45 Corypha unbraculifera Arecaceae Tali-palm

46 *Dalbergia latifolia Fabaceae Sisum,Beete

47 *Dillenia pentagyna Dilleniaceae Kanagal

48 Dimocarpus longan (Nephelium longana)

Sapindaceae Kankindali,Kendale

49 Diospyros assimilis (Diospyros ebanum)

Ebenaceae Karimara, Ebony

50 Diospyros buxifolia (Diospyros microphylla)

Ebenaceae Dhula, Kuri-kunchal

51 Diospyros candolleana Ebenaceae Karigida

52 *Diospyros Montana Ebenaceae Tendu,Tupra

53 Diospyros paniculata Ebenaceae Kari-kumar

54 Dysoxylum malabaricum Meliaceae Bilideodar

55 *Ervatamia heyneana (Tabernaemontana heyneana)

Apocyanaceae Nagarkuda

56 *Erythrina variegata (Erythrina indica)

Fabaceae Pangara

57 Evodia lunu-ankenda (Evodia roxburghiana)

Rutaceae Kobale

58 Ficus arnottiana Moraceae Pair, Patharpod

59 *Ficus benghalensis Moraceae Aladamara

60 Ficus drupacea var.pubescens (Ficus mysorensis)

Moraceae Goli, Chungal

61 Ficus exasperata (Ficus asperrima)

Moraceae Khargas, Kharwal

62 *Ficus racemosa (Ficus glomerata)

Moraceae Atti

63 *Ficus religiosa Moraceae Arale,Pipal

64 Ficus tsjahela (tjakala') Moraceae Kal, Kelva

Chapter 3:


3.105


65 Firmiana colorata (Sterculia colorata)

Sterculiaceae Bharikoi, Khavas, Khanshi

66 Flacourtia indica (Flacourtia romantchi)

Flacourtiaceae Hanumanki

67 Flacourtia Montana Flacourtiaceae Hansampige, Gudda

68 *Garcinia indica Clusiaceae Bhirand,Murgal

69 *Gardenia resinifera (Gardenia lucida)

Rubiaceae Decamali

70 Glochidion hohenackeri (Glochidion ellipticum)

Euphorbiaceae Hirachelli, Sullai

71 Glochidion velutinum Euphorbiaceae Salaimara, Showra

72 Gmelina arborea Verbenaceae Shivani

73 *Grewia tiliifolia Tiliaceae Dhaman

74 *Haldina cordifolia (Adina cordifolia)

Rubiaceae Heddi

75 Heterophyragma quadrilocularis (Heterophyragma roxburghii)

Bignoniaceae Adavi-nugge

76 Holigarna caustica Anacardiaceae Holigeru

77 Holoptelia integrifolia Ulmaceae Tapasi

78 Hopea wightiana Dipterocarpaceae Haiga

79 Hydnocarpus laurifolia (Hydnocarpus wightiana)

Flacourtiaceae Surti,Toratti

80 Hymenodictyon obovatum Rubiaceae Bogi, Hiremara

81 Knema attenuata (Myristica attenuata)

Myristicaceae Raktamara

82 *Kydia calycina Malvaceae Bhendi

83 *Lagerstroemia microcarpa (Lagerstroemia lanceolata)

Lythraceae Nandi,Nana

84 Lagerstroemia reginae (Lagerstroemia flos-reginae)

Lythraceae Hole-dasal

85 Lannea coromandelica (Odina wodier)

Anacardiaceae Gojjal

86 Lophopetalum wightianum Celastraceae Banate

87 Macaranga tomentosa (Macaranga peltata)

Euphorbiaceae Chandkal

88 Madhuca longifolia var, latifolia (Bassia latifolia)

Sapotaceae Mahua, Ippe

89 Mallotus philippensis Euphorbiaceae Kum-kum

90 Mammea nagassarium (Mesua ferrea)

Clusiaceae Nagasampige

91 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Mavu

92 Meyna laxiflora (Vangueria spinosa)

Rubiaceae Mulkare,Gobargalli, Gund-kare

93 Miliusa tomentosa (Saccopetalum tomentosum)

Annonaceae Womb, Niranji

Chapter 3:


3.106


94 Mimusops elengii Sapotaceae Bakul

95 *Mitragyna parvifolia Rubiaceae Kalam

96 Myristica malabarica Myristicaceae Rampatre

97 Neolitsea zeylanica (Litsea zeylanica)

Lauraceae Bili-nisangi

98 Nyctanthes arbor-tristis Oleaceae Parijata

99 *Pandanus furcatus Pandanaceae Ran-keura

100 Persea macrantha (Machilus macrantha)

Lauraceae Gulmav

101 *Phyllanthus emblica (Emblica officinalis)

Euphorbiaceae Nelli

102 Piliostigma foveolatum (Bauhinia foveolata)

Caesalpiniaceae Basavanapad

103 Piliostigma malabaricum (Bauhinia malabarica)

Caesalpiniaceae Sadloo

104 *Polyalthia coffeiodes Annonaceae Maragowri

105 *Pongamia pinnata (Pongamia glabra)

Fabaceae Hulgal

106 Pterocarpus marsupium Fabaceae Honne

107 Pterospermum acerifolium Sterculiaceae Kanakchampa,

Karmkara

108 Pterospermum heyneanum Sterculiaceae Kesali, Oopin

109 Radermachera xylocarpa Bignoniaceae Genasinga

110 Salix tetrasperma Salicaceae Wallunj

111 Saraca asoka (Saraca indica) Caesalpiniaceae Ashoka

112 *Schleichera oleasa (Schleichera trijuga)

Sapindaceae Sagadi

113 Semecarpus anacardium Anacardiaceae Geru

114 Spondias acuminate Anacardiaceae Kadamba

115 Spondias pinnata (Spondias mangifera)

Anacardiaceae Amte

116 Sterculia guttata Sterculiaceae Happu-savaga

117 *Sterculia urens Sterculiaceae Kandol,Bhutale

118 Sterculia villosa Sterculiaceae Savage,Chauri

119 Stereospermum personatum (Stereospermum chelanoides)

Bignoniaceae Karasing, Mukarti

120 Streblus asper Moraceae Mitli, Punje

121 Strychnos nux – vomica Loganiaceae Kasarka,Kajra,Kasaga

122 Syzigium caryophyllatum Myrtaceae Kunt-neral

123 Syzigium hemisphericum (Jambosa hemispherica)

Myrtaceae Panneral

124 Syzigium zeylanicum (Eugenia spicata)

Myrtaceae Nurkal

125 Tectona grandis Verbenaceae Sagwani, Tegu, Saga

Chapter 3:


3.107


126 Terminalia alata (Terminalia tomentosa)

Combretaceae Matti

127 Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae Hole-matti

128 Terminalia bellirica (Terminalia bellerica)

Combretaceae Tare, Ghoting

129 Terminalia chebula Combretaceae Harda

130 Terminalia paniculata Combretaceae Kindal

131 Tetrameles nudiflora Datiscaceae Jarmal, Bondale

132 Toona ciliata (Cedrela toona) Meliaceae Deodari

133 Trema orientalis Ulmaceae Ranmbada, Kaposhi, Kargol

134 Trewia polycarpa (Trewia nudiflora)

Euphorbiaceae Katkumbla, Tumri, Shillowri

135 Vateria indica Dipterocarpaceae Dhupa

136 Vitex altissima Verbenaceae Bharanagi

137 Vitex leuocoxylon Verbenaceae Hole-lakki

138 Wrightia tomentosa Apocyanaceae Bilekudegida

139 Xantolis tomentosa (Sideroxylon tomentosum)

Sapotaceae Kumpoli,Gomale, Suma-hale

140 Xeromphis uliginosa (Randia uliginosa)

Rubiaceae Pendari, Kare

141 Xerompis spinosa (Randia dumetorum)

Rubiaceae Kat-mangri

142 Xylia xylocarpa (Xylia dolabriformis)

Mimosaceae Jamba

143 Zanthoxylum rhetsa (Fagara badrunga)

Rutaceae Jummana-mara,Triphal

144 Zizyphus mauritiana (Zizyphus jujuba)

Rhamnaceae Bore

145 Zizyphus xylopyrus Rhamnaceae Godachi, Gorwi, Mullu-kare

Note: Botanical names in parentheses are old botanical names.

Source: Department of Forest, Honnavar Division, 2010

Chapter 3:


3.108

Table 3.7.3

List of Common Shrubs and Climbers of Honnavar division (Kumta)

Sr.No. Botanical name Family Local name Habit

1 Acacia pennata Mimosaceae Shambi Climber

2 Acacia sinuata (Acacia concinna)

Mimosaceae Shigekai Climber

3 Adhatoda zeylanica (Adhatoda vasica)

Acanthaceae Adsal, Adsoge Shrub

4 Allophyllus cobbe (Allophyllus rheedii)

Sapindaceae Titwi Shrub

5 Apama siliquosa (Bragantia wallichii)

Aristolochiaceae Mirsagni Shrub

6 Ardisia humilis Myrsinceae Havalad Shrub

7 Atalantia racemosa Rutaceae Adavi-nimba, Kan-limbu

Shrub

8 Butea parviflora (Spatholobus roxburghii)

Fabaceae Phulsun Climber

9 Callicarpa tomentosa (Callicarpa lanata)

Verbenaceae Towdatti,Mardi,Togdatta

Shrub

10 Calycopteris floribunda Combretaceae Upsi,Bilivadi Climber

11 Carissa carandas Apocyanaceae Caranda, Kawali Shrub

12 Carvia callosa (Strobilanthus callosus)

Acanthaceae Karvi Shrub

13

Clerodendrum viscosum (Clerodendron infortunatum)

Verbenaceae Bhandira, Kari Shrub

14 Colebrookea oppositifolia

Lamiaceae Tuggigida Shrub

15 Combretum latifolium (Combretum extensum)

Combretaceae Piloka Shrub

16 Crotalaria berteroana (Crotalaria fulva)

Fabaceae Shrub

17 Croton gibsonianus Euphorbiaceae Shrub

18 Cryptolepis buchananii Periplocaceae Kurubuntanballi Climber

19 Dalbergia volubilis Fabaceae Kebbali Shrub

20 Dendrophthoe falcata (Loranthus longiflorus)

Loranthaceae Banda Shrub

21 Desmodium triquetrum Fabaceae Antbarlu Shrub

22 Diploclisia glauscens (Cocculus macrocarpus)

Menispereaceae Vetyal Climber

23 Entada pursaetha (Entada scandens)

Mimosaceae Dodda-ganapi, Gardul

Climber

Chapter 3:


3.109


24 Flemingia macrophylla (Flemingia congesta)

Fabaceae Dowpowla Shrub

25 Flemingia strobilifera (Flemingia bracteata)

Fabaceae Kankuli Shrub

26 Glycosmis mauritiana Rutaceae Manikyan Shrub

27 Gnetum ula (Gnetum scandens)

Gnetaceae Kadakana-balli Climber

28 Helecteres isora Sterculiaceae Kempu-kowri Shrub

29 Holarrhena antidysenterica

Apocyanaceae Kuda,Koodsalu, Korchu

Shrub

30 Ichnocarpus frutescens Apocyanaceae Gorviballi Climber

31 Indegofera cassioides (Indegofera pulchella)

Fabaceae Chimnati Shrub

32 Indegofera constricta Fabaceae Shrub

33 Ipomoea illustris (Ipomoea companulata)

Convolvulaceae Kuginiballi Climber

34 Ixora coccinea Rubiaceae Gudde - dasal Shrub

35 Ixora elongata Rubiaceae Shrub

36 Ixora lanceolaria Rubiaceae Shrub

37 Ixora nigricans Rubiaceae Lokhandi Shrub

38 Ixora polyantha Rubiaceae Climber

39 Jasminum malabaricum Oleaceae Tirgal Shrub

40 Jasminum sambac Oleaceae Mallige Shrub

41

Lantana camara var.aculeata

(Lantana camara)

Verbenaceae Chadurangi Shrub

42 Leea indica (Leea sambucina)

Leeaceae Jini, Midichi Shrub

43 Melastoma malabathricum

Melastomaceae Ankerki, Nankeri Shrub

44 Memecylon umbellatum (Memecylon edule)

Melastomaceae Harchart, Archeti, Lakonde

Shrub

45 Mucuna pruriens (Mucuna prurita)

Fabaceae Hosagunigida, Turachigida

Shrub

46 Murraya koenigii Rutaceae Karibevu, Karhepah

Shrub

47 Murraya paniculata (Murraya exotica)

Rutaceae Pandri,Kauli Shrub

48 Musseanda glabrata (Musseanda frondosa)

Rubiaceae Pathri, Hashy-gida Shrub

49 Phanera vahlii Caesalpiniaceae Chambuli,Chambu Climber

50 Piper nigrum Piperaceae Kari-menasu Climber

51 Psychotria dalzelli Rubiaceae Dutiyl, Yalakki, Shrub

Chapter 3:


3.110


Shivan

52 Smilax zeylanica (Smilax macrophylla)

Smilacaceae Ghotaval Climber

53 Solanum gigantium Solanaceae Kutri Shrub

54 Thespesia lampas (Hibiscus lampas)

Malvaceae Ronbhandy Shrub

55 Ventilago denticulata (Ventilago calyculata)

Rhamnaceae Gapsandiballi, Kuriyadi

Climber

56

Vitex negundo var.negundo

(Vitex negundo)

Verbenaceae Lakki Shrub

57 Vitis indica Vitaceae Huttigeballi Climber

58 Wagatea spicata Caesalpiniaceae Wagati, Huliganji Shrub

59 Woodfordia fruticosa (Woodfordia floribunda)

Lythraceae Dhauri,Neru,Dhaiphal

Shrub

60 Zizyphus oenoplia Rhamnaceae Paragi Shrub

61 Zizyphus rugosa Rhamnaceae Sunburli Shrub

Note: Botanical names in the parentheses refer to old names

Table 3.7.4

List of Common Bamboos and Canes - Honnavar Division near Kumta

Sr.

No. Botanical Name Family Local name

Canes

1 Calamus brandisii (Calamus pseudo-tenuis) Arecaceae Halbetta

2 Calamus thwietesii var. thwietesii(Calamus thwietesii)

Arecaceae Handibetta

Bamboos

1 Bambusa arundinacea Poaceae Dowga,Bidregala

2 Dendrocalamus strictus Poaceae Shib, Medar

3 Oxytenanthera monostigma Poaceae Chiva

4 Ochlandra scriptoria (Ochlandra rheedii) Poaceae Wate


Chapter 3:


3.111

Table 3.7.5

Characteristics of Trees - Morba Forest

Sr. No.

Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI

1 Mangifera indica 300 4.3 0.6 11.5 0.015 7.0 23

2 Samanea saman 1200 17.4 0.8 15.4 0.033 15.8 49

3 Acacia auriculoformis 600 8.7 0.6 11.5 0.011 5.5 26

4 Terminalia paniculata 2400 34. 8 1.0 19.2 0.059 27.6 82

5 Randia dumatorium 800 11.6 0.6 11.5 0.014 6.7 30

6 Schleichera oleosa 1260 18.3 0.8 15.4 0.069 32.5 66

7 Garcinia sp. 180 2.6 0.4 7.7 0.006 3.2 14

8 Terminalia tomentosa 160 2.3 0.4 7.7 0.003 1.6 12

Total 6900 100 5.2 100 0.214 100 300

Table 3.7.6

Characteristics of Trees - Mithal Gazani Forest

Sr. No.



2 Randia dumatorum 380 8.3 1.0 9.1 0.01 10.0 27


4 Chloroxylon swietania 580 12.6 1.0 9.1 0.02 14.5 36

5 Anacardium occidentale

80 1.7 0.6 5.4 0.002 1.7 9

6 Terminalia paniculata 420 9.1 0.8 7.3 0.011 6.4 23

7 Syzygium cuminii 380 8.3 0.8 7.3 0.01 5.4 23


9 Bombax malabarica 120 2.6 0.8 7.3 0.004 2.4 12

10 Grevia tiliaefolia 740 16.1 1.0 9.1 0.035 20.5 46

11 Albizza odoratissima 240 5.2 0.4 3.6 0.004 2.5 11

12 Diospyros melanoxylon

380 8.3 1.0 9.1 0.015 8.9 26

13 Embalica officinalis 220 4.8 1.0 9.1 0.007 4.1 18

Total 4600 100 11 100 0.172 100 300

*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;

*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index.

Chapter 3:


3.112

Table 3.7.7

Characteristics of Trees - Hiregutti Forest

Sr. No.





4 Diospyros melanoxylon 500 11.4 1.0 12.8 0.023 13.9 38

5 Wrightia tomentosa 300 6.8 1.0 12.8 0.009 5.6 25

6 Mitragyna parvifolia 300 6.8 1.0 12.8 0.010 6.0 26


8 Anogeissus latifolia 700 16.0 1.0 12.8 0.030 17.5 46


Total 4380 100 7.8 100 0.171 100 300

Table 3.7.8

Characteristics of Trees - Gokarna Forest

Sr. No.



2 Terminalia paniculata 780 16.9 1.0 13.2 0.035

3 21.8 52

3 Terminalia chebula 40 0.9 0.2 2.6 0.001

3 0.8 4


5 Zizyphus xylopyra 140 3.0 0.4 5.3 0.004 2.3 11

6 Stereospermum xylocarpum

260 5.6 1.0 13.2 0.005 2.9 22


8 Terminalia tomentosa

780 16.9 1.0 13.2 0.018 11.0 41

9 Tectona grandis 680 14.7 1.0 13.2 0.018 11.0 39

10 Albizza chinensis 100 2.2 0.8 10.5 0.001 0.6 13

Total 4620 100 7.6 100 0.162 100 300

*D/ha - Density per hectare *RD – Relative Density * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency;

*Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index

Chapter 3:


3.113

Table 3.7.9

Characteristics of Trees - Bargi Gazal Forest

Sr. No.

Name of Species

Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI

1 Terminalia tonentosa

1440 43.6 1.0 7.9 0.052 48.8 100


3 Anacardium occidentale

780 23.6 1.0 7.9 0.022 20.6 52

4 Bauhinia purpurea

480 14.5 8.8 69.8 0.014 13.5 98

5 Garcinia sp 300 9.1 0.8 6.4 0.005 5.1 21

Total 3300 100 12.6 100 0.107 100 300

Table 3.7.10

Characteristics of Trees - Hittal Makki Forest

Sr. No.







Total 2740 100 3.8 100 0.123 100 300

Table 3.7.11

Characteristics of Trees - Kimmani Forest

Sr. No

Name of Species

Density

R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI




4 Garcinia sp 100 3.1 0.80 21.1 0.0034 3.1 27


6 Bombax malabarica 340 10.7 0.80 21.1 0.0061 5.6 37

Total 3180 100 3.8 100 0.109 100 294.39


*Dm – Dominance, *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index

Chapter 3:


3.114

Table 3.7.12

Characteristics of Trees - Yennamadi Forest

Sr. No.

Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm. R. Dm. IVI


2 Ancardium occidentale 100 6.2 0.40 18.2 0.004 5.8 30

3 Acacia ariculoformis 80 4.9 0.20 9.1 0.002 3.4 17


Total 1620 100 2.2 100 0.0624 100 300



Table 3.7.13

Characteristics of Trees - Korebail Forest

Sr. No.






Total 2220 100 3.4 100 0.0893 100 300



Table 3.7.14

Characteristics of Trees - Khurigadda Forest

Sr. No.





Total 4180 100 3 100 0.138 100 300

*D/ha - Density per hectare, *RD – Relative Density, * F – Frequency, *RF – Relative Frequency; *Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index

Chapter 3:


3.115

Table 3.7.15

Characteristics of Trees - Haskari Forest

Sr. No.






Total 2720 100 3.2 100 0.114 100 300


*Dm – Dominance *RDm – Relative dominance, * IVI – Importance value index.

Table 3.7.16

Characteristics of Trees - Balole Forest

Sr. No.





4 Bombex malabarica 220 17.2 1.4 38.9 0.007 14.5 71

Total 1280 100 3.6 100 0.048 100 300



Table 3.7.17

Characteristics of Trees -Yettinbail Forest

Sr.No. Name of Species Density R. D. Fr. R. F. Dm R. Dm. IVI



3 Cassia Cyamia 100 4.1 0.2 7.1 0.003 4.2 15


5 Bombax Malabarica 700 28.5 0.6 21.4 0.027 40.4 90

Total 2460 100 2.8 100 0.066 100 300



Chapter 3:


3.116

Table 3.7.18

Characteristics of Trees - Madangeri Forest

Sr. No.





4 Wrghtia tomentosa 240 7.9 0.4 11.1 0.006 5.6 25

5 Bombax Malabarica 140 4.6 0.2 5.6 0.003 3.0 13

Total 3040 100 3.6 100 0.113 100 300



Table 3.7.19

Simpson’s Diversity Index

Sr. No.

Distance of the Location from project site Trees

Tadadi near kumta Range

1. Within 5 km from the project site 0.09-0.2

2. Within 5-10 km from the project site

Ranges of SDI:

< 0.060 Very good biodiversity

0.060 –0.100 Good biodiversity

0.100 – 0.200 Medium biodiversity

> 0.200 – 1.0 Low biodiversity

Chapter 3:


3.117

Table 3.7.20

List of Medicinal Plants recorded in Conservation Area (MPCA) at Devimane - Honnavar division

Sr.No. Botanical Name Family Habit

1 Acacia auriculiformis Mimosaceae Tree

2 Acacia concinna Mimosaceae Tree

3 Acacia spp. Mimosaceae Shrub

4 Actinodaphne hookeri (Actinodaphne angustifolia)

Lauraceae Tree

5 Adina cordifolia (Aaldina cordifolia ) Rubiaceae Tree

6 Albizia procera Mimosaceae Tree

7 Allophylus cobbe Sapindaceae Tree

8 Anacardium occidentale Anacardiaceae Tree

9 Anamirta cocculus Menispermaceae Climber

10 Ancistrocladus heyneanus Ancistrocladacea Climber

11 Antidesma menasu Euphorbiaceae Tree

12 Apama siliquosa Aristolochiaceae Tree

13 Aporosa lindleyana Euphorbiaceae Tree

14 Apsargus racemosus Asparagaceae Climber

15 Artocarpus hirsutus Moraceae Tree

16 Arundinella tenella (Arundinella pumila)

Poaceae Herb

17 Asparagus gonoclados Asparagaceae Climber

18 Atalantia wightii Rutaceae Shrub

19 Barleria spp. Acanthaceae Herb

20 Bauhinia purpurea Caesalpiniaceae Tree

21 Blepharis asperrima Acanthaceae Herb

22 Bougainvillaea glabra Nyctaginaceae Tree

23 Breynia rhamnoides

(breynia vitis-idaea)

Euphorbiaceae Shrub

24 Bridelia crenulata Euphorbiaceae Tree

25 Bridelia scandens Euphorbiaceae Shrub

26 Caesalpinia pulcherrima Caesalpiniaceae Tree

27 Calamus spp. Arecaceae Tree

28 Callicarpa tomentosa Verbenaceae Tree

29 Calophyllum apetalum (calophyllum wightianum)

Clusiaceae Tree

30 Calycopteris floribunda Combretaceae Tree

31 Caryota urens Arecaceae Tree

Chapter 3:


3.118


32 Casearia esculenta (casearia ovata) Flacourtiaceae Tree

33 Cassia occidentalis Caesalpiniaceae Shrub

34 Cinnamomum malabatrum Lauraceae Tree

35 Cinnamomum zeylanicum (cinnamomum verum)

Lauraceae Tree

36 Cissus discolor Vitaceae Climber

37 Clerodendrum viscosum Verbenaceae Shrub

38 Colebrookea oppositifolia Lamiaceae Shrub

39 Connarus wightii Connaraceae Climber

40 Crotalaria pallid Fabaceae Shrub

41 Crotalaria pulcherrima

(Crotalaria pulchra)

Fabaceae Shrub

42 Crotalaria umbellate Fabaceae Shrub

43 Croton klotzschianus Euphorbiaceae Tree

44 Cyclea peltata Menispermaceae Climber

45 Cynoglossum zeylanicum Boraginaceae Shrub

46 Cyperus cyperoides (Mariscus summatrensis)

Cyperaceae Herb

47 Cyperus iria Cyperaceae Herb

48 Dalbergia spp. Fabaceae Tree

49 Derris scandens Fabaceae Tree

50 Dichapetalum gelonioides Dichapetalaceae Tree

51 Dillenia pentagyna Dilleniaceae Tree

52 Dimocarpus longan

(Nephalium longana)

Sapindaceae Tree

53 Diospyros buxifolia Ebenaceae Tree

54 Diospyros cordifolia Ebenaceae Tree

55 Diospyros ebenum Ebenaceae Tree

56 Dolichandrone crispa (Dolichandrone atrovirens)

Bignoniaceae Tree

57 Dracaena terniflora Agavaceae Shrub

58 Elaeagnus conferta Elaeagnanace Tree

59 Embelia ribes Myrsinaceae Climber

60 Emblica officinalis Euphorbiaceae Tree

61 Emilia sonchifolia Asteraceae Shrub

62 Ervatamia heyneana Apocynaceae Herb

63 Eupatorium spp. Asteraceae Herb

64 Euphorbia thymifolia Euphorbiaceae Shrub

Chapter 3:


3.119


65 Ficus religiosa Moraceae Tree

66 Ficus sp. Moraceae Tree

67 Flacourtia Montana Flacourtiaceae Tree

68 Flemingia strobilifera Fabaceae Herb

69 Garcinia Morella Clusiaceae Tree

70 Glycosmis arborea Rutaceae Tree

71 Gmelina arborea Verbenaceae Tree

72 Gnidia glauca Thymelaeaceae Shrub

73 Grewia lawsoniana Tiliaceae Shrub

74 Grewia orientalis Tiliaceae Tree

75 Grewia spp. Tiliaceae Tree

76 Grewia tiliaefolia (Grewia tiliifolia) Tiliaceae Tree

77 Helicteres isora Sterculiaceae Shrub

78 Hibiscus aculeatus Malvaceae Herb

79 Hibiscus spp. Malvaceae Herb

80 Holigarna arnottiana Anacardiaceae Tree

81 Holigarna grahamii Anacardiaceae Tree

82 Hopea parviflora Dipterocarpaceae Tree

83 Hydnocarpus laurifolia Flacourtiaceae Tree

84 Indigofera cassioides Fabaceae Shrub

85 Isonandra stocksii Sapotaceae Tree

86 Ixora brachiata Rubiaceae Tree

87 Ixora coccinea Rubiaceae Shrub

88 Jasminum malabaricum Oleaceae Climber

89 Justicia micrantha (Justicia neesii) Acanthaceae Herb

90 Knema attenuate Myristiaceae Tree

91 Kyllinga monocephala

(Kyllinga memoralis)

Cyperaceae Herb

92 Lagerstroemia lanceolata (Lagerstroemia microcarpa )

Lythraceae Tree

93 Lantana camara Verbenaceae Shrub

94 Leea crispa Leeaceae Shrub

95 Leea indica Leeaceae Shrub

96 Linociera malabarica

(Chionanthus malabarica)

Oleaceae Tree

97 Litsea deccanensis Lauraceae Tree

98 Litsea floribunda Lauraceae Tree

99 Ludwigia perennis Onagraceae Herb

Chapter 3:


3.120


100 Macaranga indica Euphorbiaceae Tree

101 Macaranga peltata Euphorbiaceae Tree

102 Maesa indica Myrsinaceae Shrub

103 Mallotus philippinensis (Mallotus philippensis)

Euphorbiaceae Tree

104 Malvastrum coromandelianu Malvaceae Herb

105 Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Tree

106 Melastoma malabathricum Melastomataceae Shrub

107 Memecylon talbotianum Melastomataceae Tree

108 Memecylon terminale Melastomataceae Tree

109 Mimosa pudica Fabaceae Herb

110 Mitracarpus verticillatus Rubiaceae Herb

111 Murraya paniculata Rutaceae Shrub

112 Mussaenda laxa Rubiaceae Shrub

113 Naravelia zeylnica Ranunculaceae Climber

114 Neolitsea scrobiculata Lauraceae Tree

115 Nothapodytes foetida Icacinaceae Shrub

116 Olea dioica Oleaceae Tree

117 Persea macrantha) Lauraceae Tree

118 Piper nigrum Piperaceae Climber

119 Pittosporum floribundum

(Pittosporum nepaulense)

Pittosporaceae Tree

120 Polyalthia fragrans Annonaceae Tree

121 Pothos scandens Araceae Climber

122 Psychotria dalzellii Rubiaceae Shrub

123 Pterocarpus marsupium Fabaceae Tree

124 Pterospermum diversifolium Sterculiaceae Tree

125 Pterospermum reticulatum Sterculiaceae Tree

126 Rotala rotundifolia Lythraceae Herb

127 Sapindus emarginatus Sapindaceae Tree

128 Scurrula cordifolia Loranthaceae Shrub

129 Scutia myrtina (Scutia circumcissa) Rhamnaceae Shrub

130 Smilax zeylanica Smilacaceae Climber

131 Solanum torvum Solanaceae Shrub

132 Sonchus oleraceus Asteraceae Herb

133 Sterculia spp. Sterculiaceae Tree

134 Strychnos nux-vomica Loganiaceae Tree

135 Symplocos racemosa Symplocaceae Tree

Chapter 3:


3.121


136 Syzygium caryophyllatum Myrtaceae Tree

137 Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae Tree

138 Syzygium jambos Myrtaceae Tree

139 Syzygium zeylanicum Myrtaceae Tree

140 Terminalia bellirica Combretaceae Tree

141 Terminalia paniculata Combretaceae Tree

142 Thevetia peruviana Apocynaceae Tree

143 Trema orientalis Ulmaceae Tree

144 Trichilia connaroides Meliaceae Tree

145 Triumfetta rhomboidea Tiliaceae Herb

146 Urena lobata Malvaceae Shrub

147 Vateria indica Dipterocarpaceae Tree

148 Vernonia cinerea Asteraceae Herb

149 Vernonia indica Asteraceae Herb

150 Vinca rosea Apocynaceae Herb

151 Wagatea spicata Caesalpiniaceae Shrub

152 Xantolis tomentosa Sapotaceae Tree

153 Zingiber neesanum Zingiberaceae Herb

154 Gleichinia sp. Gleichiniaceae Herb

155 Lygodium sp. Thelypteridaceae Herb

156 Selaginella kashmiriana Selaginellaceae Herb


Chapter 3:


3.122

Table 3.7.21

List of Common Wild Animals of Honnavar Division (Kumta)

Sr.No. Common Name Scientific Name

1 Chital Axix axis

2 Gaur Bos gaurus

3 Jackal Canis aureus

4 Sambar Cervus unicolor

5 Leopard cat Felis bengalensis

6 Golden cat Felis chaus

7 Jungle cat Felis chaus

8 Small Indian Mangoose Herpestes auropunctuatus

9 Indian porcupine Hystrix indica

10 Hare Lepus nigricollis

11 Bonnet Macaque Macaca radiata

12 Indian panagolin Manis grassicaudate

13 Sloth Bear Melursus ursinus

14 Slow Loris Nycticebus coucang

15 Leopard Panthera pardus

16 Tiger Panthera tigris

17 Toddy cat Paradoxyrus hermaphroditus

18 Common Gaint Flying Squirrel Petanurista petaurista

19 *Common Langur Presbytis entellus

20 Malayan Gaint Squirrel Ratufa bicolor

21 Indian Gaint Squirrel Ratufa indica

22 Indian wild Boar Sus scrofa

23 Indian chevrotain(Mouse deer) Tragukus meminna

24 Small indian civet Viverriculla indica

25 Indian Fox Vulpes bengalensis

26 *Spoted deer or axis axis Cervus axis


Chapter 3:


3.123

Table 3.7.22

List of Common Birds of Honnavar Division (Kumta)


1 Shikra Accipiter badius

2 Jangle Myna Acridotheres fuscus

3 Common Myna Acridotheres tristis

4 Blyth's Reed warbler Acrocephalus dumentorum

5 Common lora Aegithina tiphia

6 Yellow backed Sumbird Aethopyga siparaja

7 Small blue Kingfisher Alcedo atthis

8 Quaker Babbler Alcippe poioicephala

9 Whitebreasted waterhen Amaurornis pheonicurus

10 Pintail Anas acuta

11 Common Teal Anas crecca

12 Darter Anhinga rufa

13 Malabar pied Hornbill Anthracoceros coronatus

14 Tree pipit Anthus spp.

15 House Swift Appus affinis

16 Towny Eagle Aquila rapax

17 Little spinderhunter Arachnothera longirostris

18 Purple Heron Ardea purpurea

19 Pond Heron Ardeola grayii

20 Ashy swallow shrike Artomus fuscus

21 Spotted Owlet Athene brama

22 Ceyon Frogmouth Batrachostomus moniliger

23 Forest Eagle Owl Bubo nipalensis

24 Cattle Egre Bubulcus ibis

25 Great pied Horubill Buceros bicornis

26 Plaintive Cuckoo Cacomantis passerimus

27 Bay handed Cuckoo Cacomantis sonneratii

28 Jungle Nightjar Caprimulgus indicus

29 Longtailed Nightjar Caprimulgus macrurus

30 Coucal Centropus sinensis

31 Pied Kingfisher Ceryle rudis

32 Whiterumped Spinetail Swift Chaetura sylvatica

33 Wmerald Dove Chalcophas indica

34 Goldfronted Chloropsis Chloropsis auriforms

35 Goldmantled Choloropsis Chloropsis cochinchinensis

36 Large Goldenbacked woodpecker Chrysocolaptes lucidus

37 White necked stork Ciconia episcopus

Chapter 3:


3.124


38 Streaked Fantail Warbler Cicticola juncidis

39 Marsh Harrier Circus macrorus

40 Niligiri wood Pigeon Columba elphinstonii

41 Blue rock pigeon Columba livai

42 Shama Copsychus malabaricum

43 Magpie Robin Copsychus saularis

44 Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis

45 Balckheaded Cuckoo Shrike Coracina melanoptera

46 Large Cuckoo Shrike Coracina novaehollandiae

47 Jungle Crow Corvus macrorhynnchos

48 House Crow Corvus splenders

49 Indian Cuckon Cuculus micropterus

50 Common Hawk-Cuckoo Cuculus varius

51 Common Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda

52 Lesser whistling Teal Dendrocygna javanica

53 Thickbilled Flowpacker Dicaeum agile

54 Nilgiri Flowerpacker Dicaeum concolor

55 Tickell's Flowerpacker Dicaeum erythrorhynchos

56 Black Drongo Dicrurus adsimilis

57 Bronzed Drongo Dicrurus aenus

58 Whitebellied Drongo Dicrurus caerulescens

59 Haircrested Drongo Dicrurus hottentottus

60 Grey Drongo Dicrurus leucophaeus

61 Racket tailed Drongo Dicrurus paradiseus

62 Lesser Golden backed Woodkeepar Dinopium banghalense

63 Great Blackwoodkeepar Drycopus javansis

64 Jerdon's Imperial pigeon Ducula badia

65 Large Egret Egretta alba

66 Little Egret Egretta garzetta

67 Smaller Erget Egretta intermedia

68 Ashycrowned Finch Lark Erwmopterix grisea

69 Koel Eudynamys Scolopacea

70 Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus japonensis

71 Hibby Falco Subbuteo

72 Coot Fulica atra

73 Grey Jungle fowl Gallus sonneratti

74 Whitebreated laughing Thrush Garrulax jerdoni

75 Barred Jungle Owlet Glauccidium radiatum

76 Hill Myna Gracula religiosa

77 White backed vulture Gyps bengalensis

Chapter 3:


3.125


78 whitebreasted Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis

79 Brahmini Kite Haliastur Indus

80 Heartspotted Woodkeepar Hemicirus canante

81 Crested Tree Swift Hemiprocne longipennis

82 Pied Flycatcher Shrike Hemipus picatus

83 Black winged Stilt Himantopus humantopus

84 Dusky, Crag Martin Hirundo concolor

85 Redrumped Swallow Hirundo daurica

86 Common Swallow Hirundo rustica

87 Wiretailed Swallow Hirundo smithii

88 Pheasant Tailed Jacana Hydrophasianus chirurgus

89 Monoarch Flycatcher Hypothymis azurea

90 Yellow beowed Bulbul Hypsispetes indicus

91 black Bulbul Hyspipetes Madagascarensis

92 Greyheaded Fishing Eagle Ichthyophaga icthvaetus

93 Black Eagle Ictineatus malayensis

94 Fairy Bluebird Irena puella

95 Brown shrike Lanius cristatus

96 Grey Shrike Lanius excubitor

97 Rufousbacked shrike Lanius schach

98 Smaller Adjutant Lepotoptlilos javanicus

99 Adjutant stork Lepotoptolos dubius

100 Spotted Munia Lonchura punctulata

101 Whitebacked Munia Lonchura striata

102 Indian Lorikeet Loriculus vernalis

103 Bluethroated Barbet Megalaima asiatica

104 Crimsonbreasted Barbet Megalaima haemacephala

105 Crimsonthroated Barbet Megalaima rubricapilla

106 Small Green Barbet Megalaima viridis

107 Large Green Barbet Megalaima zelyanica

108 Chestnutheaded Bee-eater Merops leschenaultia

109 Green Bee-eater Merops orientalis

110 Bronze Winged Jacana Metopidius indicus

111 Rufous woodpecker Micropternus brachyurus

112 Pariah Kite Milvus migrans

113 Blueheaded Rock Thrush Monticola cinclorhynchus

114 Blue Rock Thrush Monticola solitarium

115 White Wagtail Motacilla alba

116 Grey wagtail Motacilla caspica

117 Forest Wagtail Motacilla indica

Chapter 3:


3.126


118 large Pied Wagtail Motacilla maderaspatensis

119 Brown Flycatcher Muscicapa latirostris

120 Redbreasted Flycatcher Muscicapa parya

121 Verditer Flycatcher Muscicapa thalassina

122 Tickell's Blue Flycatcher Muscicapa tickelliae

123 Malabar Whistling Thrush Myiophonus horsfieldii

124 Loten's sunbird Necarinia lotenia

125 Small sunbird Nectarinia minima

126 Purple rumped Sunbird Nectarinia zeylonica

127 Purple Sunbird Nectorinia asiatica

128 White Scavenger Valture Neophorn perenopterus

129 Bluebearded Bee Oeater Nyctyornis athertoni

130 Blacknapped oriole Oriolus chinensis siffusus

131 Golden Oriole Oriolus oriolus

132 Black Headed oriole Oriolus xanthormus

133 Tailor bird Orthomotus sutorius

134 Collared Scops Owl Otus bakkamoena

135 Indian scops owl Otus scops

136 Grey Tit Parus Major

137 Yellowcheeked Tit Parus xanthogenys

138 House Sparrow Passer domesticus

139 Common Peafowl Pavo cristatus

140 Stork billed Kingfisher Pelargopsis capensis

141 Spotted Babbler Pellorneum ruficeps

142 Small minivat Pericrocotus cinnamomeus

143 Scarlet Minivet Pericrocotus flammeus

144 Crested Honey Buzzard Pernis ptilorhynchus

145 Yellowthroated Sparrow Petronia xanthocollis

146 Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger

147 Greenish leaf Warbler Phylloscopus trachilodies

148 Pigmy woodkeepar Picoides nanus

149 Mahratta Woodkeepar Picoises mahrattensis

150 Small yellownaped Woodkeepar Picus Chlorophus

151 Indian pitta Pitta brachyura

152 Baya Ploceus philippinus

153 Little Grebe Podiceps ruficollis

154 Slatyheaded Scimitar Babbler Pomatorhinus horsfieldii

155 Purple moorhen Porphyrio porphyrio

156 Franklin's Wren warbler Prinia hodgsonii

157 Jungle wren warbler Prinia sylvatica

Chapter 3:


3.127


158 Bluewinged Parakeet Psittacula columbodies

159 Blossomhheaded Parakeet Psittacula cyanocephala

160 rose ringed parakeet Psittacula krameri

161 Red whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus

162 White cheeked Bulbul Pycnonotus leucogenys

163 Rubythroated yellow Bulbul Pycnonotus melanicterus gularis

164 Redvented Bulbul Pyconotus cafer

165 Whitespotted Fantail Flycatcher Rhipidura aibicollis

166 Small Greenbilled Malkoha Rhopodytes viridirostris

167 Blackheded Babbler Rhopoichla atriceps

168 Whitebrowed Fantail Flycatcher Riphidura aureola

169 Spotted Grey Creepar Salapornis spilonotus

170 Pied Bush Chat Saxicola caprata

171 Indian Robin Saxicolodies fulicata

172 Velvet Fronted Nuthatch Sitta frontalis

173 Crested serpent Eagle Spilornis cheela

174 Crested Kawk-Eagle Spizeatus cirrhatus

175 River Tern Sterna aurantia

176 Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis

177 Blyth's Myna Sturnus malabaricus blythii

178 Blackheaded Myna Sturnus pagadarum

179 Sirkeer Cuckoo Taccocua leschenaultii

180 Common wood Shrike Tephrodornis pondicerianus

181 Large wood shrike Tephrodornis vigratus

182 White Ibis Threskiornis aethiopica

183 Common Grey Hornbill Tockus birostris

184 Malabar Grey Hornbill *Tockus griseus

185 Common green pieon Treron phoenicoptera

186 Yellow legged green pigeon Treron phoenicoptera

187 Greyfronted Green Pigeon Treron pompadora

188 Common Sand Piper Tringa hypoleucos

189 Green Sand Piper Tringa ochropus

190 Paradise Flycatcher Trpsiphone paradisi

191 Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus

192 Rufous Babbler Turdoides subrufus

193 Hoopoe Upupa epops

194 Redwalted lapwing Vanellus indicus

195 Whitethroated Griund Thrush Zoothera citrina cyanotus

196 White-eye Zosterops palaperbrosa


Chapter 3:


3.128

Table 3.7.23

Hotspots of Uttar Kannada District (Kumta)

Sr.No. Taluka Habitat Ecosystem Plants Animals

1 Sirsi, Siddapur, Kumta

All Evergreen Forest

Dipterocarpus indicus, Myristica malabarica, Garcinia gummi-gutta

Amphibians

2 Honavar Dipterocarpus indicus forest

Evergreen Forest

Dipterocarpus indicus Lion-tailed Macaque

3 Karwar, Honnavar, Kumta

Estuary Estuary - Fishes, Estuarine invertebrates

4 Honnavar Evergreen Forest Evergreen Forest

Dipterocarpus indicus, Myristica malabarica, Mesua ferrea

Lion tailed Macaque

5 Sorab Evergreen forest Sacred Groves - -

6 Honnavar Mangrove Mangrove Mangrove vegetation -

7 Haliyal Moist Deciduous forest

Moist Deciduous forest

- -

8 Siddapur, Honnavar, Sirsi

Myristica Swamps Evergreen forest

Myristica fatua, Gymnacranthera canarica, Semecarpus travancorica

Phylloneura westermanii (Monotypic damselfly)

9 Siddapur Relic Evergreen forest

Evergreen forest


-

10 Siddapur, Sirsi, Yellapur

Relic Evergreen forest

Evergreen forest


-

11 Siddapur, Kumta, Honnavar, Koida

Raparian Forest Evergreen forest

Evergreen flora -

12 Bhatkal, Kumta, Ankola

Rocky and sandy beach

Beach

Marine algae, spinefex, Ipomoea biloba, Canavalia, Hydrophylax maritima

Marine invertebrates

13 Kumta Rocky mountain Rocks - -

14 Kumta Sandy Beach Beach - Olive Ridley Turtle

15 Kumta Umbrella palm forest

Evergreen forest

Corypha umbraculifera -

Chapter 3:


3.129

Table 3.7.24

Fishes Production by Different Types of Boats at Tadadi Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007) – Kumta

Sr. No.

Type of Fishes Type of Boats Total Qty.

(MT) Value

(Lakh Rs) P T G OM ONM

Total No. of Boats 167 613 196 0 1111 - -

1. Oil sardine 1246 21 21.5 0 15 1303.5 155.84

2. Other sardine 54 0 16.5 0 10 80.5 15.155

3. White sardine 0 0 4 0 4 8 1.16

4. Other clupedis 0 25 24.5 0 15 64.5 6.27

5. Anchovilla 0 2 0 0 7.5 9.5 1.2

6. Silver Bar 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7. Mackerel 292 0 5 0 1 298 76.45

8. Seer fish 7 0 0 0 0 7 1.65

9. Tuna 45 0 0 0 0 45 14.4

10. Lactarius 25 16 11.5 0 3 55.5 9.43

11. Carrangids 172 7 16 1 8.5 204.5 42.325

Pomfrets

12. Black Pomfrets 33 3 0 0 0 36 12.72

13. Silver Pomfrents 0 2 0 0 0 2 2

14. Silver Bellie 21 42 17 0 13 93 7.88

15. Gerrus species 0 2 1 0 1 4 0

16. Sciaenids 4 23 19.5 0 11 57.5 9.685

17. Ribbonfish 10 32.5 7 0 4 53.5 6.94

18. Flat fish 0 106 0 0 1 107 10.93

19. Soles 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.8

20. Cat fish 9 2 1 0 16.5 28.5 4.46

21. Lady fish 0 0 0 0 8 8 4.8

Mullets 0 0 0 0 18.5 18.5 5.15

22. White Prawns 0 2 0 0 0 2 3

23. Brown prawns 0 43 0 0 0 43 26

24. Kari Kadi Prawns 0 40 0 0 0 40 20.48

25. Red Prawns 0 50 0 0 0 50 27.06

26. Crabs 0 19 4 0 14.5 37.5 3.46

27. Squilla 0 181 0 0 2 183 5.81

Molluscs

28. Squids 0 154 0 0 0 154 6.75

29. Shell fish 0 0 0 0 103 103 5.89

30. Miscellaneous 82.5 38 24.5 0 23.5 168.5 18.325

Total 2001 810.5 173 1 280 3265 506.02

Source: Fisheries Department, Kumta, 2010

P : Purse seiners

T : Trawlers

G : Gillnetters

ONM : Other non-mechanized

OM : Other mechanized

Chapter 3:


3.130

Table 3.7.25

Fishes Production at Kumta Landing Centre (Year 2006-2007)

Sr.

No.

Boat type G OM ONM Total

Total no.s of boat 638 10 378 Qty.

(MT)

Value

(Lakh Rs.)

1 Sharks 2.5 0 0 2.5 0.7

2 Rays & skates 0.5 0 0.5 1 0.3

3 Oil sardine 42.4 0 19.8 62.2 8.455

4 Other sardine 4 0 1.5 5.5 0.65

6 Other clupedis 6 0 2.3 8.3 0.85

7 Anchovilla 3 0 0.3 3.3 0.33

8 Silver Bar 7.6 0 1.8 9.4 2.035

9 Mackerel 42.6 0.5 11.6 54.7 9.78

10 Seer fish 35.4 0 8.8 44.2 22.635

11 Tuna 5.9 0 0.1 6 2

12 Lactarius 8.5 0 2.9 11.4 2.91

13 Carrangids 5.3 0.5 1 6.8 3.11

14 Pomfrets

a. Black Pomfrets 1 0 0 1 0.6

b. Silver Pomfrents 1.5 0 0 1.5 1.1

15 Silver Bellie 0 0 0 0 0

17 Sciaenids 0 0 2 2 0.1

18 Ribbonfish 6.7 0 0 6.7 1.86

19 Flat fish 4 0 0 4 0.24

21 Cat fish 5 0 0 5 1.5

29 Lady fish 1.5 0 4 5.5 3.95

30 Mullets 3 0 8.8 11.8 3.16

a. Tiger Prawns 0.5 0 0 0.5 0.8

b. White Prawns 3.75 0 1 4.75 5.9

c. Brown prawns 2.75 0 1 3.75 3.8

d. Kari Kadi Prawns 2.5 0 0.5 3 1.55

e. Red Prawns 1 0 0.5 1.5 0.4

33 Lobsters 0 0 0.25 0.25 0.9

34 Crabs 12.8 0.5 11.2 24.5 3.65

35 Squilla 0 4 5.8 9.8 0.68

Molluscs

a. Squids 1.9 0 2 3.9 0.79

d. Shell fish 2 0 11.5 13.5 2.09

36 Miscellaneous 41.5 2.2 27.3 71 17.22

Total 255.1 7.7 126.45 389.25 104.045

Source: Fisheries Department, Kumta, 2010

G : Gillnetters

ONM : Other Non-mechanized

OM : Other Mechanized

Chapter 3:


3.131



The study of socio-economic component incorporating various facets related to

prevailing social and cultural conditions, and economic status of the study region. The

socio-economic study includes analysis of demographic structure, population dynamics,

infrastructure resources, status of human health and economic attributes like

employment, per-capita income, agriculture, trade, industrial development etc. in the

study region.

The aesthetic component of environmental study refers to the scenic value if

any in the study area, tourist attraction and wildlife, historic and cultural monuments. The

study of these parameters helps in identification, prediction and evaluation of likely

impacts on socio-economics and parameters of human interest due to proposed project.

To assess impact on socio-economic environment latest available data has

been compiled to delineate the baseline socio- economic profile in study area. The

database thus generated in this study includes:

Demographic structure

Infrastructure base in project area

Economic attributes

Health status

Cultural attributes

Awareness and opinion of people about the proposed project

Socio economic status with reference to Quality of Life (QoL)

Out of total 40 villages falling in the study area, socio-economic survey was

conducted in 21 villages as listed in Table 3.8.1 and depicted in Fig. 3.8.1.

3.8.2 Demographic Structure

The details regarding the demographic structure of the study area were

collected from Primary Census Abstract CD-2001 of Uttar Kanada district. Study area

covers Kumta Block and Ankola of Uttar Kanada district.

Demographic details such as number of persons per household, total area,

population density, sex ratio, percentage of SC and ST population and employment

Chapter 3:


3.132

pattern are summarized in Table 3.8.2 and detailed information is given in Table 3.8.3.

The salient observations are as follows:

As per 2001 census, total population of the region is 68,390, out of which

34,539 are male and 33,851 are female.

Total number of households in the region are 13,140

Sex ratio (number of female per thousand male) in the region is 980

Out of the total population, SC and ST populations are 6.41 % and 0.06%

respectively

Total main workers are about 30.25 %, whereas 10.88 % come under

marginal worker category and 58.86 % belong to non workers category

Literacy rate in the study area is about 68.85%

3.8.2.1 Infrastructure Resource Base

The infrastructure resources base of the study area with reference to

education, medical facility, water supply, post and telegraph, transportation and

communication facility and power supply etc is presented in Table 3.8.4. The

infrastructure resources details have been abstracted from Village Directory CD 2001 of

Karnataka State and are described below:

Education

Educational facilities are available in most of the villages in the study area.

Literacy rate of the study area is quite good, that is about 68.85%. Primary, Middle and

Higher schools are available in some of the villages. College facility is available only at

Gokarna village.

Medical / Primary Health Care

Medical facility is available in the form of Primary health Center. Allopathic

Dispensary, Maternity and child welfare, Primary sub-center, Family Welfare Center, T.B

Center, Nursing Home and registered private Medical Practitioner are available in

Gokarna village. Village Nadumaskeri has health facility like Primary Health Sub- center

(PHS), Maternal & Child Welfare (MCW), Registerd Medical Practitioner (RMP). Hirgutti

village has medical facility like MCW, Primary Health Center (PHC), Family Welfare

Chapter 3:


3.133

Center (FWC) and TB Clinic. Village Kagal also has medical facility like MCW, PHC,

FWP, RMP. Number of villages are having primary medical facilities.

Drinking Water

All the villages are having adequatre drinking water facility. Mode of drinking

water supply is mainly through tap, well, tube well, tank water and hand pump.

Communication and Transportation

Transportation in the area is satisfactory. Bus service is available in most of

the villages. Some of the villages are connected through navigation route. Most of the

villages in the study area are availing the communication facility i.e. post office as well as

Telephone connections.

Power Supply

Electricity is available in the region. All villagers are using electricity for different

proposes.

Banking and Credit Societies

Most of villages are having Agricultural Credit Society, Non agricultural society,

other credit society and also Commercial banks and co-operative society for savings are

available in the region.

3.8.2.2 Economic Attributes

Economic resource base of any region mainly depends upon its economically

active group i.e. the working population involved in productive work.

Work may be defined as participation in any economically productive activity.

Such participation may be physical or mental in nature. Work involves not actual work but

also effective supervision and direction of work. It also includes unpaid work on farm or in

family enterprise.

There are different types of workers which may be classified as:

Main Workers

Those persons who had worked for at least six months or 183 days are treated

to be Main Workers.

Chapter 3:


3.134

Marginal Workers

Those persons who had participated in any economic or productive activity for

less than six months or 183 days during the last one year are treated as Marginal

Workers.

Non – Workers

Those who have not worked any time at all in the year preceding the

enumeration and it includes persons engaged in household duties, dependents, retired

persons, renters, beggars etc.

The workers coming under the main and marginal workers category are;

cultivators, agricultural labors, live stock, forestry, fishing, hunting, plantations, and allied

activities, mining and quarrying, manufacturing, processing, servicing and repairs in

household industry, construction trade and commerce, transport, storage and

communication, other services etc.

The employment pattern (mian workers, marginal workers and non-workers) as

well as (cultivators, agriculturers, households and other workers) of the study area is

presented in Table 3.8.5 and depicted in Fig. 3.8.2 a, b.

Main workers in the study area are 20,689 (30.25 %)

Marginal workers are only 7,444 (10.88%)) from the total working force

People in the region are mostly engaged in other activities such as 12,847

(62.09%) persons are engaged in construction, trade and commerce,

transport, storage and communications, business and service.

Cultivators 4,731(22.86%) agricultural laborers 2,682 (12.96%) together

constitute 35.82% and the house hold is 429 (2.07 %) in the region.

Non-worker population share is more than half of the total population in the

region i.e. 40,257 (58.86%) Non-worker population includes student,

household duties, dependent, pensioner, beggar and others.

3.8.2.3 Health Status

Health of the people is not only a desirable goal, but it is also an essential

investment in human resources. As per the National Health Policy (1983), Primary Health

Chapter 3:


3.135

Care has been accepted as main instrument for achieving this goal of development and

strengthening rural health infrastructure through a three-tier system, viz., Primary Health

Center (PHCs), Sub-Centers and Community Health Center, which have been

established.

Lack of building, shortage of manpower and inadequate provision of drug

supplies are hampering the operationalization of these units. The standards to be met

according to National Health Policy are given below:

Rural Health Care System in India

Health Facility

Population Villages Covered

Average Rural area

(km2)

Infrastructure Personnel

Hilly Areas

Plain Areas

Sub-Center 3000 5000 4 21.35 1 Sub centre 1 ANM, 1 MHW

Primary Health Center

20,000 30,000 27 134.20 4 - 6 beds 1 Medical officer,

14 Para Medical Staff

Community Health Center

80,000 1,20,000 191 931.95 30 beds 4 Medical officer,

21 Para Medical Staff,

14 Other Staff

Source: National Rural Health Mission Report, Year 2005-06

Data regarding health status has been collected from taluka health office,

Kumta and PHC for Gokarna village. Vital Health Statistics of Gokarna village are

presented in Table 3.8.6 a, b.

3.8.2.4 Cultural and Aesthetic Attributes

There are various culturally and aesthetically important places in the study

area.

Gokarna

Uttar Kannada is a much sought-after pilgrimage center also, with ancient

temples revered by thousands of devotees. The famous pilgrimage center of the district

‘Gokarna’ means cow’s ear and is named so because the landscape here is formed in

that shape by the two rivers, the Agnashhini and the Gangavali on either side of the town

and the Arabian Sea at the west. It is renowned for the ‘atmalinga’ in the ancient temple

of Mahabaleshwara here. Gokarna is a great center of Sanskrit learning too.

Chapter 3:


3.136

Om Beach

Shaped like the Hindu spiritual symbol of Om, this is the most famous beach in

Gokarna and has got the best waves and beach side shacks. The stay in any of these

sea side shacks can be a singular experience. Apart from OM beach, Gokarna is also

home to kudle, Hall- moon and Paradise beaches which are counted among the most

beautiful beaches in India.

Mirjan

Constructed by Diwan Mirjan Ismail and presently protected by the

Archeaology department, it is a very unique place to watch the beautiful city rivers from

this Fort.

Yana

Located amongst the evergreen forest of the Sahyadri Mountains, Yana Caves

are paradise of limestone rocks. It is a heaven for rock climbers. The area is known for its

majestic mountains, a variety of rock formations, trickling waterfalls and a holy temple.

One can also go hiking to Vibhuti Falls and camp overnight there.

Holegadde

Dhareshvar, a hamlet of this village has a temple of Mahadeva or Shiva. The

walls of this temple are well ornamented with sculptures and there are a few inscription

stones also in its precincts.

Aghanashini

The village has the temples dedicated to Kameshvara, Mahadeva and

Ganapati. Thus at this spot the river is considered to be very sacred.

Bilehoingi

Gangavali is a small port and has a temple dedicated (eighth day of Kartika) a

large number of devotees congregate at this place because the darshan of the goddess

of this day is regarded as highly rewarding.

Aversa

The village has a shipshaped shrine of Katradevi, the tutelary deity of the

Kharvis (a fishermen community of the coast). It is believed that the idol of the goddess

Chapter 3:


3.137

was recovered from the sea and then installed in the shrine. During Dasara, the goddess

is worshipped with great solemnity by the Kharvis and other Konkani speaking people of

the neighborhood.

3.8.3 Socio-Economic Survey

Sampling Method

A judgmental and purposive sampling method was used for choosing

respondents of various sections of the society i.e. Sarpanch, adult males and females,

teachers, medical practitioners, businessmen, agriculture laborers, fishermen,

unemployed group etc. Judgmental and purposive sampling method includes the right

cases from the total population that helps to fulfill the purpose of research needs.

Observations are restricted to this group and conclusions from these observations are

generalized to the total population. Judgment or purposive sampling is very precarious,

because most stronger assumption can be made about the population and sampling

procedure than required while employing probability sampling.

Data Collection Method

In order to assess and evaluate the likely impacts arising out of any

developmental projects on socio-economic environment, it is necessary to gauge the

apprehensions of the people in the project area. For the process of data collection

through primary and secondary sources certain methods are used among that are:

Field Survey and Observations

Field survey and observations are made at each sampling village and the

quality of life of that region is estimated. Visits are made at hospitals, primary health

centers and sub-centers to know the health status of the region. Various government

organizations such as statistical department, department of census operations are visited

to collect the population details of that region.

Interview Method

Structured interview method is used to collect data regarding the awareness

and opinion from the sample selected of the various socio- economic sections of the

community. Structured interviews involve the use of a set of predetermined questions that

includes fixed and alternative questions. The questionnaire mainly highlights the

parameters such as income, employment and working conditions, housing, food, clothing,

water supply, sanitation, health, energy, transportation and communication, education,

Chapter 3:


3.138

environment and pollution to assess the quality of life of that particular region and general

awareness and opinion of the respondents about the project.

Socio-economic survey was conducted in 21 villages within the study area

located in all directions with reference to the project site.

The respondents were asked for their awareness/opinion about the project and

also their opinion about the impacts of the project on job opportunities, education, health-

care, housing, transportation facility and economic status etc.

The salient observations recorded during survey in the study area are:

For better functioning of the villages, two – three villages gathered together

and formed a local administrative structure called as group gram

panchayat (Fig. 3.8.3 a, b)

People are mainly engaged in fish catching (Fig. 3.8.4 a, b). Fishing is also

a major earning source in the region. Major species of fisheries in the

region are surmai, pamphlet, prawns / zinga (kolim).

Detailed information on fisherman populations, households and co-

oprative societies is presented in Tables 3.8.7 a, b, c respectively.

Agricultural and its allied activities are based on monsoon season. Major

crop is rice and other crops grown are coconut and groundnuts.

Agricultural labor work is also another important income generating

economic activity in the region, for that remuneration is being given in two

ways. Firstly in the form of per day wages based on gender differences as

male worker get Rs. 100 which is high as compared to their female counter

part i.e. getting per day wages between Rs. 60-80. Secondly the profit is

divided into 2 parts i.e. half-half taken by farm owner and agricultural

laborers

Marketing is held at the taluka places and other nearest local area i.e.

Gokarna, kumta etc.

More than 50-75 % people migrate towards Mumbai, Ratnagiri and Goa,

for getting job

Power supply facility is available in almost all villages in the study area

mostly for domestic purpose

Chapter 3:


3.139

Almost all the people use wood as a main source of fuel and very few

people use kerosene and LPG for cooking purpose

Tap water and open well water are the main source of drinking water (Fig.

3.8.5). Qulity of water is salty and scarcity of water is also experienced by

some villages.

Hundred percent villages are electrified

Educational facilities (Fig. 3.8.6) are available in the form of primary and

middle schools. In some villages, it is extended up to high school. For

higher studies, people avail the facility from the nearly towns like Kumta,

Karwar

Medical facilities (Fig. 3.8.7) in terms of primary health center and primary

health sub centers in the rural areas are very less. Most of the people are

going to the nearest village which is 5 to 6 km away. The hospitals

available in Kumta taluka provide good facility to people. Doctors and

nurses visit the villages for providing medical treatment.

Bus services and water way are the main mode of transportation

Unsatisfied transportation facility is seen in the study area because the

muddy roads cover maximum portion and the roads condition are not

satisfactory (Fig. 3.8.8).

Keeping in view the working population of the villages, the co-operative

societies for cultivators and fisherman are functioning in the region ie.

Gokarna and Tadadi.

The kuccha roads covers maximum portion of the study area and the

condition of roads are not satisfactory

Sanitation facilities are unsatisfactory in the study area. There are open

drains from where the domestic waste water is disposed off.

3.8.3.1 Public Awareness and Opinion

Awareness among the people regarding the proposed Sea Port project at

Tadadi is lacking but when asked about their opinion regarding the project,

people generally gave both positive and negative responses.

Chapter 3:


3.140

People believe that the project would pollute the water and air in the

environment and radiation hazards would increase the cancer prevalence

in the area. These conditions are also responsible for an unfavorable

opinion in the rural area surveyed

However, respondents have expressed favorable opinion about the

project. This favorable opinion can also be attributed to proposed

improvement in transportation and communication as well as the welfare

activities in the study area

The fishermen population involved in fish catch activities in Agnashani

River and Arabian sea gives negative opinion regarding the port because

they are the victim of losing their income source. Fish catching activity will

be disturbed due to development of port.

Employment facilities for local youth may be increased

Majority of respondents are not aware about the proposed project activity.

Negative Response

Some of the villager’s land had already been acquired between the years

1965 – 1975 but land losers are not satisfied with the compensation they

got and they registered their case in court which is under process.

Some villagers heard about acquisition of land for the proposed project but

they are not willing to confirm till date, if land has been acquired they are

not willing to give their land as they don’t want to loose their native place

and their earning source i.e. fishing activity.

Increase in traffic flow and congestion in and around the project location.

Positive Response

Development of proposed port at Tadadi will bring employment opportunity

and people think that preference shall be given to local community

because presently this region is lacking employment for educated youth.

Chapter 3:


3.141

3.8.4 Quality of Life

Quality of Life (QoL) is a term, which indicates overall status of socio-economic

environment in a given area. Quality of Life (QoL) is defined as a function between

“Objective Conditions” and “Subjective Attitudes” involving a defined “area” of concern.

The “Objective Conditions” are defined as numerically measurable artifacts of a

physical, sociological event or economic event. Objective conditions may be defined as

any number, which stands for a given quantity of a variable of interest so long as it is

independent of subjective opinion.

“Subjective Attitude” is primarily concerned with affective and cognitive

dimensions. It is specifically concerned with ‘how aspects of cognition vary as objective

conditions vary’.

Once objective measures are obtained for each factor they are transformed to

a normal scale varying from 0 to 1 (value function curve) in which 0 corresponds to the

lowest or least satisfactory measure, and 1 corresponds to the highest. The weights are

assigned to each factor by ranked-pair wise technique (by the expert group) based on the

secondary data and general observations.

For each objective measure, a corresponding subjective measure is developed

for each individual of the sample population by asking him to rate his satisfaction scale

(value function curve). And, it is used such that 0 corresponds to the lowest level of

attitudinal satisfaction and 1 corresponds to the highest level of satisfaction. Weights are

assigned to each factor using ranked - pair wise comparison techniques.

The Socio-economic Indicators for QoL Assessment are:

1) Income

2) Employment and Working Condition

3) Housing

4) Food

5) Clothing

6) Water Supply

7) Sanitation

8) Health

9) Energy

10) Transportation

Chapter 3:


3.142

11) Communication

12) Education

13) Environment and Pollution

14) Recreation

15) Social Security

16) Human Rights

Subjective Quality of Life Index

QoLs = 1/p

p

j

m

i 11

QIij x Wi

Where,

QoLs = Subjective quality of life index

p = No. of respondents, j = 1, ......, p

m = No. of factors, i = 1, ......, m

QIij = Subjective quality index for ith factor assigned by jth respondent

Qiij = Subjective quality index for ith factor assigned by all respondents in an

area

Wi = Relative weightage of the ith factor

Objective Quality of Life

QoLo =

m

1i QIij x Wi

Where,

QoLo = Objective quality of life index

n = No. of QoL Factors

i = 1, ......, n

QIi = Satisfaction level (assigned by the expert group) for the ith

objective indicator

Wi = Normalized weight for ith factor

Chapter 3:


3.143

Cumulative Quality of Life Index

QoLc = 2

QoLsQoLo

The subjective and objective QoL indices prior to commissioning of the project

are presented in Table 3.8.8.

The average QoL index values are estimated as:

QoL (S) = 0.47

QoL (O) = 0.49

QoL (C) = 0.48

The average QoL index value for the study area is leaning towards low level of

satisfactory level due to adequate economic status like income, basic facilities, medical

facility, education, water and transportation.

Chapter 3:


3.144

Sampling Locations

Fig. 3.8.1: Survey Village for Socio-economic Study

Chapter 3:


3.145

Fig. 3.8.2 (a): Employment Pattern

Fig. 3.8.2 (b): Employment Pattern

Chapter 3:


3.146

Fig. 3.8.3a: Representative of Gram Panchayat Office at Gokarna

Fig. 3.8.3 b: Data Collection in Agarvayangani Gram Panchayat Office

Fig. 3.8.4 a: Fish Caching in Study Area

Fig. 3.8.4 b: Fish Caching in Study Area

Fig. 3.8.5: Source of Drinking Water Fig. 3.8.6: Educational Institution

Fig. 3.8.7: PHC Primary Health Center at Ankola Taluka

Fig. 3.8.8: Road Condition of the Villages

Chapter 3:


3.147

Table 3.8.1

Village Location: Socioeconomic Survey

Sr.

No. Village

Direction Approx. Arial Distance (km)

w.r.t. proposed Tadadi Port

1. Hittal Makki NNE 5.0

2. Madangeri NNE 6.5

3. Baloli NNE 6.0

4. Yennamadi NE 7.0

5. Hiregutti NE 5.0

6. Morba ENE 4.5

7. Mithal Gazni NE 3.0

8. Agnnashini SSE 2.5

9. Kagal SSE 3.5

10. Bad SSE 4.5

11. Gudeangadi SSE 6.0

12. Hegde SE 9.5

13. Mirjan SE 9.0

14. Tadari N 0.5

15. Gokarn NW 3.5

16. Belehin NW 6.0

17. Horumageri NNW 8.0

18. Gangavali NW 8.5

19. Bonsire N 7.5

20. Hoskeri NNW 6.0

21. Torke N 4.0

Chapter 3:


3.148

Table 3.8.2

Summary of Demographic Structure of the Study Area

Demographic parameters Details

Number of District 1

Number of Tehsil 2

Total Number of Villages 40

Total Servyed Villages 21

Total area in hectare 13,633

Total No. of households 13,140

Total population 68,390

Density of population (persons per km2) 503

Sex ratio (No. of females per 1000 males) 980

Scheduled Castes (%) 4,383 (6.41%)

Scheduled Tribe (%) 44 (0.06%)

Literate (%) 47,089 (68.85%)

Main workers (%) 20,689 (30.25%)

Marginal workers (%) 7,444 (10.88%)

Non workers (%) 40,257 (58.86%)

Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka

Ch

ap

ter 3

: B

aselin

e E

nviro

nm

en

tal S

tatu

s

3.149

Table 3.8.3

Demographic Structure of Study Area

Sr. No.

Village Area in Hector

No. of Househol

d

Population Scheduled Castes

Scheduled Tribal

Literates Main

Workers Marginal Workers

Non Workers

TP M F

Ankola Taluka

1 Agragon 275 201 987 509 478 118 0 733 263 162 562

2 Hegre 47 144 723 335 388 25 0 402 239 113 371

3 Adigon 282 148 644 316 328 5 0 398 161 225 258

4 Shirur 895 319 1657 846 811 67 0 961 778 350 529

5 Sagadgeri 271 90 437 235 202 112 0 266 150 37 250

6 Andle 261 63 312 153 159 0 0 206 127 26 159

7 Takatgeri 189 6 25 14 11 0 0 19 11 0 14

8 Balale 217 213 1068 547 521 153 4 756 346 199 523

Total 2,437 1,184 5,853 2,955 2,898 480 4 3,741 2,075 1,112 2,666

9 Nadumaskeri 381 621 3373 1744 1629 116 0 2366 826 328 2219

10 Harumaskeri 141 144 723 363 360 8 0 425 210 40 473

11 Bhavikodla 211 373 2072 1030 1042 4 0 1186 732 352 988

12 Hanehalli 237 408 1796 880 916 289 0 1255 564 77 1155

13 Hoskeri 134 135 653 317 336 7 0 467 148 152 353

14 Kadime 169 164 782 390 392 6 0 372 181 117 484

15 Gonehalli 128 70 315 148 167 0 0 164 51 95 169

16 Gokarn 1,700 2532 12955 6572 6383 723 10 8773 4223 903 7829

17 Toregazani 27 38 228 110 118 0 0 136 94 11 123

18 Torke 248 261 1309 669 640 0 0 935 413 211 685

Ch

ap

ter 3

: B

aselin

e E

nviro

nm

en

tal S

tatu

s

3.150

Sr. No.


No. of Househol

d


Scheduled Tribal

Literates Main


Non Workers

TP M F

Ankola Taluka

19 Hittalmakki 259 73 319 155 164 0 0 238 35 88 196

20 Madangeri 306 279 1496 763 733 125 0 984 434 222 840

21 Madangeri 84 27 127 59 68 31 0 58 55 10 62

22 Hiregutti 682 596 2783 1386 1397 463 0 1972 995 218 1570

23 Morba 227 180 882 453 429 274 0 593 321 144 417

24 Aghanashini 251 579 3270 1664 1606 30 0 2246 984 479 1807

25 Kagal 530 711 4143 2091 2052 84 1 3146 1192 527 2424

26 Hubbangeri 132 354 2066 1062 1004 18 0 1683 428 158 1480

27 Baad 219 297 1493 756 737 213 0 1121 360 314 819

28 Gudeangadi 164 304 1485 722 763 0 0 1136 422 195 868

29 Holanagadde 451 673 3659 1838 1821 102 0 2674 1212 230 2217

30 Manikatta 191 13 87 49 38 0 0 54 16 23 48

31 Halkar 199 208 1090 567 523 137 0 789 243 172 675

32 Betkuli 485 316 1875 944 931 0 0 1293 494 64 1317

33 Kurigadde 446 66 291 150 141 19 0 206 66 22 203

34 Bargi 302 359 1782 895 887 29 0 1290 550 59 1173

35 Bargigzani 176 14 75 41 34 0 0 56 23 2 50

36 Hegde 1,094 1311 6913 3457 3456 932 0 4596 2156 792 3965

37 Chatrakurv 37 46 253 142 111 0 0 191 49 51 153

38 Mugvekanvadi 551 56 296 150 146 0 0 211 160 2 134

38 Yattinabail 411 118 531 279 252 0 10 425 121 21 389

Ch

ap

ter 3

: B

aselin

e E

nviro

nm

en

tal S

tatu

s

3.151

Sr. No.


No. of Househol

d


Scheduled Tribal

Literates Main


Non Workers

TP M F

Ankola Taluka

40 Mirjan 623 630 3415 1738 1677 293 19 2307 856 253 2306

Total 11,196 11,956 62,537 31,584 30,953 3,903 40 43,348 18,614 6,332 37,591

Grand Total 13,633 13,140 68,390 34,539 33,851 4,383 44 47,089 20,689 7,444 40,257

Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka State

Ch

ap

ter 3

: B

aselin

e E

nviro

nm

en

tal S

tatu

s

3.152

Table 3.8.4

Infrastructure Resource Base of the Study Area

Sr. No.

Villages Educational Institutions

Medical Facilities

Drinking Water Supply

Communication Transportation Approach

Road Bank POWER

Kannada District ,Ankola Taluka Uthar

1. Agragon S ….. W, HP, PO, TO, PTO, PH(23)

BS PR, FP ……. EA

2. Hegre P,M ….. W, HP, PH(5) BS PR, FP ACS, OCS

EA

3. Adigon P ….. W, HP, PO,PH(6) ….. MR, FP ….. EA

4. Shirur P(3) ….. W PO, PH(20) BS, NW PR, MR, FP

CP, ACS

EA

5. Sagadgeri P, ….. W PO, PH(10) BS, NW PR, MR, FP

….. EA

6. Andle P,M PHS T, W PO, TO, PTO, PH(28)

BS, NW PR, MR, FP

CP, ACS

EA

7. Takatgeri ….. ….. W ….. BS PR, MR, FP

….. EA

8. Balale P,M ….. W PO, PH(42) BS PR, MR, FP

CM, CP, ACS

EA

Kannnda District, Kumta Taluka

9. Nadumaskeri P(5),M(4), S PHS, MCW, RMP

W, TK, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(200)

BS, NW PR, MR, FP, NR

….. EA

10. Harumaskeri P,M ….. W, , HP, TW PH(10) BS, PR, MR, FP, NR

….. EA

11. Bhavikodla P,M ….. W, TK, HP PO, PH BS, NW PR, MR, FP, NR

….. EA

12. Hanehalli P,M ….. T, W, TK, HP PO, PH(51) BS PR ….. EA

13. Hoskeri P,M ….. T, W, TK, HP TO, PTO, PH(4) ….. PR ….. EA

14. Kadime P,M ….. T, W, TK, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(4)

BS PR ….. EA

Ch

ap

ter 3

: B

aselin

e E

nviro

nm

en

tal S

tatu

s

3.153

Sr. No.


Medical Facilities



Road Bank POWER

15. Gonehalli P, ….. T, W, TK, HP PH(7) BS PR ….. EA

16. Gokarn P(15),M(7), SS, C

D(3), MCW, PHC, PHS, FWC, TB,

NH(3), RMP(2)

T, W, TK, HP PO(3), PH(685) BS, NW PR,MR, FP

CM, ACS, NCS, OCS

EA

17. Toregazani P ….. T, W, TK, HP PH(5) BS PR ….. EA

18. Torke M ….. T, W, TK, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(50)

BS PR ….. EA

19. Hittalmakki P,M ….. T, W, HP BS PR, MR, ….. EA

20. Madangeri P(3), ….. T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(15)

BS, RS PR, MR, FP

CM, ACS, NCS

EA

21. Yennemadi P ….. T, W, HP ….. ….. MR EA

22. Hiregutti P(3), S MCW, PHC, FWC, TB

T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(34)

BS PR, MR, FP

CP, ACS, NCS, OCS

EA

23. Morba P ….. T, W, HP PH(9) BS PR, MR, FP

….. EA

24. Aghanashini P(4),M(3) RMP W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(30)

BS, NW PR ACS, NCS

EA

25. Kagal P(5),M(3), S(3)

MCW, PHC, FWC,RMP

W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(60)

BS, NW ….. ACS, NCS

EA

26. Hubbangeri P(3), RMP W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(70)

BS, NW PR, ….. EA

27. Baad P, SS ….. W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(60)

BS PR CP, ACS

EA

28. Gudeangadi P,M ….. W, HP PO, TO, PTO, BS PR CM, EA

29. Holanagadde P(4), ….. T, W, TW, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(25)

BS PR, MR NCS EA

30. Manikatta ….. ….. W, PH ….. PR, MR ….. EA

31. Halkar ….. ….. T, W, TK, TW PO, PH(12) ….. PR, MR ….. EA

Ch

ap

ter 3

: B

aselin

e E

nviro

nm

en

tal S

tatu

s

3.154

Sr. No.


Medical Facilities



Road Bank POWER

32. Betkuli P(3), ….. T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(20)

BS MR ….. EA

33. Kurigadde P ….. T, W, HP PH(3) ….. PR, MR ACS EA

34. Bargi M, S ….. T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(25)

BS PR, MR ….. EA

35. Bargigazani M ….. T ….. NW MR ….. EA

36. Hegde P(11), M(4) ….. T, W, TW, HP TO, PTO, PH(150)

BS, NW PR, MR, FP

CM, CP,

ACS, NCM,

EA

37. Chatrakurve P ….. T, W PH ….. PR, MR, NR

….. EA

38. Mugvekanvadi

P ….. W, HP ….. BS PR, MR ….. EA

39. Yattinabail P ….. W, HP PO, PH(8) BS PR, MR ….. EA

40. Mirjan P(3), NH T, W, HP PO, TO, PTO, PH(18)

BS PR, MR, NW

CP, ACS

EA

Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka State

Chapter 3:


3.155

Table 3.8.5

Employment Pattern in the Study Area

Sr. No.

Villages Main

Workers Cultivators

Agricultural Laborers

Household Laborers

Other Workers

Uttar Kannada, Ankola taluka

1 Agragon 263 106 28 1 128

2 Hegre 239 99 95 5 40

3 Adigon 161 102 15 12 32

4 Shirur 778 529 61 12 176

5 Sagadgeri 150 45 21 0 84

6 Andle 127 52 39 6 30

7 Takatgeri 11 11 0 0 0

8 Balale 346 63 89 8 186

Uttar Kannada , Kumta taluka

9 Nadumaskeri 826 67 259 42 458

10 Harumaskeri 210 71 64 0 75

11 Bhavikodla 732 282 48 0 402

12 Hanehalli 564 117 124 22 301

13 Hoskeri 148 86 32 0 30

14 Kadime 181 83 24 9 65

15 Gonehalli 51 23 0 0 28

16 Gokarn 4223 509 583 71 3060

17 Toregazani 94 2 0 0 92

18 Torke 413 39 108 1 265

19 Hittalmakki 35 4 0 1 30

20 Madangeri 434 115 49 27 243

21 Yennemadi 55 20 22 0 13

22 Hiregutti 995 270 76 35 614

23 Morba 321 39 57 5 220

24 Aghanashini 984 197 110 15 662

25 Kagal 1192 278 57 5 852

26 Hubbangeri 428 53 53 0 322

27 Baad 360 71 79 8 202

28 Gudeangadi 422 53 78 3 288

29 Holanagadde 1212 344 27 33 808

30 Manikatta 16 13 0 0 3

31 Halkar 243 49 5 12 177

32 Betkuli 494 83 40 0 371

33 Kurigadde 66 22 3 0 41

34 Bargi 550 245 123 0 182

35 Bargigazani 23 8 0 0 15

36 Hegde 2156 394 225 38 1499

37 Chatrakurve 49 27 0 0 22

38 Mugvekanvadi 160 90 54 0 16

39 Yattinabail 121 15 7 0 99

40 Mirjan 856 55 27 58 716

Source: Primary Census Abstract CD– 2001, Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka

Chapter 3:


3.156

Table 3.8.6 (a)

Health Statistics - Gokarna (2009-2010)

Sr.

No.

Disesess Kumta Taluka

1 Birth Rate 13

2 Others Death 1003

3 Total Maternal Death 1

4 Total Infant Death 0-7 Day IMR 4

5 Total Infant Death 7 to 28 Day IMR 6

6 Total Infant Death 28 day 1 Years 3

7 Still Birth 12

8 0.5 Years Children 9814

9 Maternal Mortality Rate 1

Source: Community Health Center (CHC), at Kumta taluka ,

Uttar Kannada dist. Karnataka State

Table 3.8.6 (b)

Health Statistics - Gokarna (From Jan 2010 to June 2010)

Sr.

No.

Diseases Gokarna Village

1 Birth Rate 12.5

2 Death Rate 7.8

3 Infant Mortality Rate IMR 29.5

4 Still Birth Rate 24.5

5 Child Mortality Rate (0- 4) 1.5

6 Maternal Mortality Rate 0

Source: Primary Health Center (PHC), Gokarna Village at Kumta taluka.

Uttar Kannada dist. Karnataka State

Chapter 3:


3.157

Table 3.8.7(a)

Information on Fisherman

Sr. No

Taluka Name

Village Hous-

ehold

Population Total

Active Fisherman Total

Co- operative society M F C M F

1 Ankola Taluka

16 2560 4572 5795 7013 17380 5048 1860 11222 5

2 Kumta Taluka

51 3999 7271 7684 11925 26880 5864 5358 6908 10

Source: Fisheries Department of MFRI (Marian Fish Research Institute) in Karwar District, Karnataka State

Table 3.8.7 (b)

Fisherman Household Census – 2010 (Ankola Taluk)

Sl. No.

Name of the grame panchayat

Village Habitation Name Total No. of Household

1 Aversa Harawad Harwad Sea Bird Colony 330

Gabithwada 105

2 Belekery Belekery Belekery 345

3 Bavikery Keni Harikantra Keni 337

Total 1117

Source: Fisheries Department of MFRI (Marian Fish Research Institute) in Karwar District, Karnataka State

Table 3.8.7(c)

Fisheries Co-operative Society

Sr.

No Co – operative society Place

1 Mahila Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Ltd. Tadari

2 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Tadari

3 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Dubanasesi

4 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Gangavadi

5 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Betkuri

6 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Mirjan

7 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Kumta

8 Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Limited Kagal

9 Mahila Meenugarara Sahakari Sangha Lid Kumata Source: Fishery office in Kumta Taluka , Uttar Kannada District, Karnataka.

Chapter 3:


3.158

Table 3.8.8

Quality of Life Existing in the Villages surveyed

Sr. No.

Villages QoL(S) QoL(O) QoL(C)

1. Hittal Makki 0.56 0.53 0.53

2. Madangeri 0.53 0.55 0.54

3. Baloli 0.57 0.54 0.55

4. Yennamadi 0.52 0.52 0.52

5. Hiregutti 0.55 0.51 0.53

6. Morba 0.51 0.52 0.51

7. Mithal Gazni 0 0 0

8. Agnnashini 0.54 0.57 0.56

9. Kagal 0.48 0.49 0.49

10. Bad 0.44 0.51 0.43

11. Gudeangadi 0.53 0.51 0.52

12. Hegde 0.54 0.54 0.54

13. Mirjan 0.55 0.53 0.54

14. Tadari 0.38 0.48 0.43

15. Gokarn 0.52 0.53 0.53

16. Belehin 0.49 0.5 0.49

17. Horumageri 0.53 0.50 0.51

18. Gangavali 0.37 0.46 0.42

19. Bonsire 0.58 0.51 0.54

20. Hoskeri 0.49 0.51 0.50

21. Torke 0.36 0.48 0.42

Average 0.47 0.49 0.48

CChhaapptteerr 44

AAnnttiicciippaatteedd EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall

IImmppaaccttss aanndd MMiittiiggaattiioonn

MMeeaassuurreess 4.1 Introduction

An impact on environment is an alteration of the environmental conditions or

creation of new set of environmental conditions, adverse or beneficial, caused or induced

by the action or a set of actions under consideration.

Identification of Impacts leads to quantification and evaluation of impacts and

suggest mitigation measures. Environmental impacts are categorised as either primary or

secondary. Primary impacts are those which are attributed directly by the project.

Secondary impacts are those that are induced indirectly and typically include the

associated investment and changed patterns of social and economic activities by the

proposed action.

Although, in general, number of impacts have been identified while describing

existing environmental status, it is necessary at this stage to identify the critical impacts that

are likely to occur due to the proposed sea port for various components of the environment.

The detailed list of activities and action described have been taken into

consideration for generation of cause condition effect networks (i.e chains of events) in

recognizing the series of impacts that would be triggered by the proposed activity.

Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental

Impacts and Mitigation Measures

4.2

The method accounts for the project activity and identifies the types of impacts,

which would initially occur. The next step related to analysis of each impact and identifies

the secondary and tertiary impacts which are induced as a result. This process is repeated

unit all possible impacts are identified. The identified impacts for various components of

environment viz. air, noise, surface and groundwater, land, biological and socio-economic

environment are presented here.

4.2 Air Environment

In order to predict the impacts on ambient air quality due to construction activities

and operational activities proposed at Tadadi port, data on emission scenario and

micrometeorology collected by NEERI within the impact zone and along with historical data

collected from Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) were used to predict Ground Level

Concentrations (GLCs) of SO2, NOX and PM10 for different temporal variations. Fugitive

Dust Model (FDM), SCREEN-3 and CALINE-4 models were used to predict GLCs.

Ships are possible sources of airborne emissions such as gases, smoke, soot and

fume. SO2 and NO2 are typical pollutants generated by ships while both manoeuvring and

berthing and may affect air pollution in the hinterland.

Air quality consists of two main elements: (a) soot and dust, measured by

particulate matter (PM10), which originate from dry bulk cargo handling and storage,

construction work on land, and road traffic; and (b) concentration of sulfur dioxide (SO2),

nitrogen dioxide (NO2), carbon monoxide (CO), and hydrocarbons (HC) emitted from ships,

vehicles and various equipments used for Port activities. The meteorological data during

Post-monsoon season of 2010 have been used for the predictions.

4.2.1 Micrometeorology

The hourly wind speed, solar insulation and cloudiness during the day and in the

night, were used to determine the hourly atmospheric stability Class A to F (Pasquill and

Gifford).

The hourly stabilities were determined based on the technique suggested by

Turner. Turner’s system used for determining the stability classes is as follows:

For day or night: If total cloud cover (TC) = 10/10 and ceiling <7000 ft NR = 0

For night-time (defined as period from one hour before sunset to one hour after

sunrise):

a) If TC<4/10, use NR = -2



4.3

b) If TC>4/10, use NR = -1

For day time: Determine insulation class number (IN)

a) If TC<5/10, use NR = IN

b) If TC>5/10, modify IN by the sum of the following applicable criteria

If ceiling <7000 ft (2134 m), modification = -2

If ceiling >7000 ft but <16000 ft (4877 m), modification = -1

If TC = 10/10 and ceiling >7000 ft, modification = -1, and let modified value of

IN=NR, except for day-time NR cannot be <+1

The 24 hourly wind rose diagram for Post monsoon season indicates that the

predominant winds are from East and West directions with speed ranging between 1.0 m/s

and 3.5 m/s. Accordingly, the impact zone will be spread over W-SE-NE-E sectors during

Post monsoon season.

4.2.2 Air Quality Models Description

The impact on air quality due to emissions from single source or group of sources

is evaluated by using of mathematical models. When air pollutants are emitted into the

atmosphere, they are immediately diffused into surrounding atmosphere, transported and

diluted due to winds. The air quality models are designed to simulate these processes

mathematically and to relate emissions of primary pollutants to the resulting downwind air.

The inputs needed for model development are emission load, meteorology and topographic

features, to predict the GLCs.

4.2.2.1 Fugitive Dust Model (FDM)

Fugitive Dust Model (FDM) is used for computing the particulate concentration

from the expected construction activities at project site due to construction activities. FDM is

a computerized air quality model specifically designed for computing concentration and

deposition impacts from fugitive dust sources. The sources may be point, line or area

sources. The model is generally based on the well-known Gaussian Plume formulation for

computing concentrations, but the model has been specifically adapted to incorporate an

improved gradient-transfer deposition algorithm. Emissions for each source are apportioned

by the user into a series of particle size classes. A gravitational settling velocity and a

deposition velocity are calculated by FDM for each class. Concentration and deposition are

computed at all user-selectable receptor locations. The model is designed to work with pre-



4.4

processed meteorological data. FDM is an analytical air quality model specifically designed

for the analysis of the dispersion of fugitive dust.

4.2.2.2 SCREEN-3 Model

The SCREEN model was developed to provide an easy-to-use method of

obtaining pollutant concentration estimates based on the screening procedures

documented by US EPA. SCREEN3 - a graphical user interface for the US EPA SCREEN3

model to obtain ground-level pollutant concentration estimates for a single source and

analyze the worst case scenarios for air pollutant concentrations. It predicts the pollutant

concentrations from various sources such as point, flare, area and volume sources. It uses

the buoyancy induced dispersion and urban or rural dispersion parameters in calculations.

It uses full meteorology option (matrix of different wind speed and stability classes), single

stability class and single wind speed and stability class for worst case meteorological

applications. The model predicts concentrations in the downwind direction at user defined

receptor locations.

4.2.2.3 CALINE-4 for Mobile Sources

The pollutants emitted due to vehicular activities are PM, SO2, CO and NOX. The

data available for estimated number of vehicles and fuel consumption in the plant premises

are used for estimation of emission of pollutants along with the emission factors as

mentioned in the CPCB guidelines for vehicles.

The impacts due to proposed Line sources i.e. vehicular emission are predicted

by using CL4 model. CL4 (Caltrans, 1989) is a dispersion model that predicts

concentrations of pollutants emitted by vehicles near roadways. CL4 is a simple line source

Gaussian plume dispersion model and predicts air pollutant concentrations for averaging

periods of 1 hour and 8 hour. The user defines the proposed roadway geometry, worst-

case meteorological parameters, anticipated, traffic volumes, and receptor positions. The

user must also define emission factors for each roadways link. CL4 divides individual

highway links into a series of elements from which incremental concentration are computed

and then summed to form a total concentration estimate for a particular receptor location.

The receptor distance is measured along a perpendicular from the receptor to the roadway

centreline. The first element is formed at this point as a square with sides equal to the line

source width. Thus, as element resolution becomes less important with distance from the

receptor, elements become larger to permit efficiency in computation. The choice of the

element growth factor as a function of roadway-wind angle (PHI) range represents a good

compromise between accuracy and computational efficiency. Finer initial element resolution



4.5

is unwarranted because the vertical dispersion curves used by CL4 have been calibrated

for the link half – width (W2) distance from the element centre point.

Each element is modelled as an “equivalent” finite line source (EFLS) positioned

normal to the wind direction and centred at the element midpoint. A local x-y coordinate

system aligned with the wind direction and originating at the element midpoint is defined for

each element. The emissions occurring within an element are assumed to be released

along the EFLS representing the element. The emissions are then assumed to disperse in

a Gaussian manner downwind from the element. The length and orientation of the EFLS

are functions of the element size and the angle (PHI, ) between the average wind direction

and highway alignment. Values of PHI = 0 or PHI = 90 degrees are altered within the

program an insignificant amount to avoid division by zero during the FELS trigonometric

computations.

CL4 treats the region directly over the highway as a zone of uniform emissions

and turbulence. This is designated as the mixing zone, and is defined as the region over

the traveled way (traffic lanes – not including shoulders) plus three meters on either side.

The additional width accounts for the initial horizontal dispersion imparted to pollutants by

the vehicle wake effect. Within the mixing zone, the mechanical turbulence created by

moving vehicles and the thermal turbulence created by hot vehicle exhaust is assumed to

predominate near the ground.

4.2.3 Air Emissions

The emissions due to various sources during the construction activity and

operational activities are discussed here. The flow chart of impact network of Air

environment is shown in the Fig. 4.2.1. The impact can be divided into three types, i.e.

primary impact, secondary impact and tertiary impact. All the three types are interlinked to

each other.

4.2.3.1 Air Emissions during Construction Phase

In the pre-construction phase the activities like site clearance, site levelling,

movement of workers and materials, construction work (i.e., labour colonies, offices,

material storage and maintenance yards etc.) and construction of haul roads for movement

of vehicles will generate dust. In the pre- construction stage dust would be the predominant

pollutant due to these activities. The important activities during the construction phase that

produce gaseous pollutants and particulate matter and affect the air quality. Emissions from

construction equipment, work vessels, trucks and other vehicles used in construction work



4.6

could be a source of air pollution. Dust from construction activities is also a possible source

of air pollution.

During the site preparation, mechanical shovels and earthmovers will be used for

site clearance, cut and fill, and other site levelling activities and trenching. The major

construction activities will involve earth work, excavation, and embankment formation,

transport of construction materials, handling, and storage terminal. These activities would

generate dust particles, which will be mobilized by wind and affect the ambient air quality.

Cranes, booms etc will be deployed for transportation. These activities would cause a

general increase in levels of suspended particulate matter in the ambient air. However, this

increase in concentration would be temporary in nature and localized. A marginal increase

in the levels of oxides of nitrogen, carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons is envisaged due to

the movement of vehicles for transportation of construction material and diesel generators

required during construction phase. Wind erosion can cause and dislodge fine soil particles

due to removal of vegetative cover. Transport of fine coarse gravel in uncovered trucks on

unpaved roads and fuel combustion, during vehicle operations, concrete mixing and

cement handling, diesel operated constructed machinery, welding activities, Asphalt

heating, mixing & laying. All these activities contribute to air pollutants like particulate

matter, Sulphur oxides, Nitrogen oxides, lead hydrocarbon, and photochemical oxidants. All

these effects are short - term effects. The particulate emissions from construction

equipments are estimated to be about 0.83 TPD (9.6 g/s) over the port construction area.

4.2.3.2 Air Emissions during Operation Phase

During the operation phase, there will be an increase in the movement of traffic

and hence, emissions from the moving vehicles will also increase. The exhaust from the

launches, diesel operated small boats, tugs, dredgers, cranes, loaders etc will enhance a

pollution load during operational phase.

Particulate matter dust generated due to spillage of dry cargo during loading /

unloading operations. Release of gases from the cargo as a result of gas leakage, dust

generated from storage yard storing uncovered dry cargo.

Ships are a possible source of airborne emissions such as gases, smoke, soot

and fume. SO2 and NO2 are typical pollutants generated by ships while both manoeuvring

and berthing and may affect air pollution in the hinterland.

The emissions of SO2, NOX and PM10 from 07 ships operating at 07 berths

simultaneously in continuous manner are estimated to be 1.76 TPD, 8.32 TPD and 0.08



4.7

TPD respectively. The emissions of SO2, NOX and PM10 from different dock/port operations

are estimated to be 0.057 TPD, 0.055 TPD and 0.1 TPD respectively. Similarly the exhaust

emissions of pollutants from the vehicles are estimated.

4.2.3.3 Impacts of Air Emissions during Construction Phase

The particulate emissions and meteorological data given in Table 4.2.1 are used

for predicting the particulate matter using the FDM during construction phase. The 24

hourly average maximum GLCs of PM10 are found to be 72.4 µg/m3. The isopleths of PM

concentrations during the construction phase are shown in Fig. 4.2.2. The maximum GLC

are less than the NAAQS for PM10 (100 µg/m3). However as construction is temporary

activity the impacts will be temporary in nature.

4.2.3.4 Impacts of Air Emissions during Operation Phase

(a) Ships /Vessels and Dock/Port Operations

The air pollution impact due to ships movement and berthing at the 07 proposed

berths in the Tadadi port on air environment is studied. The berths are designed for

operating ships with capacity ranging from 40,000 DWT to 100,000 DWT. It is assumed

that all 07 berths occupied with one ship each. Marine diesel oil (MDO) is taken as the fuel

used by ships. The pollutant emissions from the ships are estimated based on the

emission factors for the pollutants SO2, NOX and PM10 with ships having four main (> 2000

KW) and four auxiliary (600 KW) engines in operation moving with medium speed (SKM,

2007: Air quality impact assessment; DEH, 2001; National pollutant inventory emission

estimation technique manual for marine operations v1.1). The estimated emissions of SO2,

NOX and PM10 from 07 ships simultaneously berthed along with the standard stack

characteristics of ship for main and auxiliary engines are considered as given in Table 4.2.2

(SKM, 2004: Port botany upgrade EIS-Air quality impact assessment commission of

inquiry) for computing the incremental ground level concentrations of pollutants.

The maximum ground level concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 due to

simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each berth using ISCST model (24 hrly average

considering continuous emissions from two auxiliary engines of the ship/vessel under

operation) and different dock/port operations using hourly meteorological data during post-

monsoon season, which were on 24 hourly basis in an area of 10 km x 10 km with a grid

size of 500 m.

The 24 hrly maximum GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8 µg/m3

and 3.0 g/m3 respectively due to simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each berth



4.8

along with dock/port operations during post-monsoon season. The isopleths showing GLCs

of SO2, NOx and PM10 are presented in Fig. 4.2.3 - 4.2.5 respectively during post-monsoon

season. The predicted 24 hourly GLCs of SO2, NOx and PM10 are found to be less than the

24 hourly concentrations of 228 µg/m3 for SO2 and 50 µg/m3 as given in ground level

impact assessment criteria (DECC, 2005; Approved methods for the modeling and

assessment of air pollutants in new South Wales, ISBN 1 74137 488 X). However, the 24

hourly concentrations of NOx are found to be higher than the ground level impact

assessment criteria of 98 µg/m3.

(b) Vehicles Movement on SH

Apart from the Ship and dock emissions the pollutants may also emit by mobile

sources such as vehicles or truck movement and fugitive emissions. Around 4000 truck

trips will be in operation per day to material transport from the proposed port on SH-63 with

existing lane (2 lanes) and the truck movement will be increased to about 12000 truck trips

per day from the proposed port on SH-63 with existing lane (with 2+2 lanes or 4 lane road).

CALINE-4, a line source model developed by California Transport Department is used to

predict the pollutant concentrations from mobile sources that transport materials, etc. It is

found that the 1-hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10 and CO are 74

µg/m3, 46 µg/m3 and 76 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities on SH-63 with

existing 2-lane road. However, the 1-hourly averaged pollutant concentrations of NOx, PM10

and CO are 185 µg/m3, 115 µg/m3 and 192 µg/m3 respectively due to the transport activities

on SH-63 with 2+2-lanes or 4-lane road. The pollutant concentrations on 24-hourly basis

will be less than the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS).

The baseline maximum concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 were monitored to

be 8 µg/m3, 18 µg/m3 and 65 µg/m3 respectively near the proposed site. The incremental

concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at berths and dock/port

operations would be 28.4 µg/m3, 126.8 µg/m3 and 3.0 µg/m3 on 24- hourly basis. The

cumulative concentrations of SO2, NOx and PM10 from ship operations at berths and

dock/port operations superimposed over the baseline values would be 36.4 µg/m3, 144.8

µg/m3 and 68.0 µg/m3 on 24 hourly basis.

4.2.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase

The environmental pollution during construction phase is purely temporary and

localized except permanent change in local land-use and landscape at the proposed berth.

Environmental pollution in construction phase will be mainly due to site preparation, civil

works, transportation storage and handling of different kinds of materials including



4.9

flammable / hazardous materials, construction workers sanitation etc. The environmental

impacts during construction period are of shorter duration.

To control fugitive emissions following measures are recommended:

Methods for controlling dust emission are water sprinkling at the construction

site, use of proper transport methods, such as a conveyor belt for excavated

material and screens around the construction site

A plantation zone or open space between the construction site and the local

community could be an effective buffer

Temporary pavement of roads at the construction site could considerably

reduce dust emission

Trucks hauling dirt, rock or other granular or particulate material to

construction site should have their loads limited, trimmed, or wetted and

covered to prevent material from being spilled / scattered or wind blown over

public streets

Nose masks or earmuff should be provided to construction workers, while

carrying out operations that may entail potential for dust inhalation

There will be no on-site burning of any waste arising from any construction

activities

Engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipments will be

maintained so that exhaust emissions do not reach statutory limits (set for

that vehicle / equipment type and mode of operation by CPCB), and that all

vehicles and equipment are maintained in accordance with manufacturers

guidelines

The air pollution impacts during construction phase would be temporary and

contained within the project boundary

The storage and handling of soil, sub-soils, top-soils and materials will be

carefully managed to minimize the risk of windblown material and dust, e.g.,

by the use of cover sheets like tarpaulin sheets

Fugitive dust emissions shall be controlled by application of water sprinkling

on unpaved roads and right of way.



4.10

4.2.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase

Routine operational activities at berth would be associated with the following

potentially significant environmental impacts.

The air quality surveillance program should be undertaken for proposed

multipurpose sea port and iron ore and coal handling systems. However, the

air quality surveillance program may be strengthened properly keeping in

view the combined maximum impacts from post-project activities particularly

in critical downwind directions. Moreover, in view of the industrialization in

the region, the possibility of an integrated ambient air quality-monitoring

program together with surrounding industries may be explored in

consultation with SPCB

The estimated NOX emissions for the proposed iron ore and coal handling

trucks, dumpers would result marginal increase in PM, NOX and SO2

concentration in ambient air quality. However, the post-project ground level

concentrations would be well within the prescribed air quality standards

Natural gas will preferably be used as fuel in power generating sources.

However, standby DG sets of equivalent capacity will be made available to

meet the emergency power requirements. Engines should operate with

minimum excess air so that fuel consumption is optimized and emission of

NOX is minimized. Low NOX Burners will be utilized, wherever feasible

Engines should operate with minimum excess air so that fuel consumption is

optimized and emission of NOX is minimized. The following options shall be

considered during detailed engineering to mitigate NOX emissions from fuel

combustion:

Low NOX / tangential burners

Multistage combustion engines

Regular inspection of tank roof seals

Preventive maintenance of valves and other equipment.

Plantation development shall be implemented to mitigate impacts from

fugitive emissions. About 33% of the total area of port will be developed for

plantation

Preventive maintenance of valves and other equipments be done on regular

basis

Ambient air quality monitoring stations should be installed at four sampling



4.11

locations within the proposed project area. PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, methane

and non-methane hydrocarbons considering the proximity of the port and

other industries should be continuously monitored to establish ambient air

quality data base

Fugitive emissions should be controlled through proper maintenance

Spraying of water or some suitable chemical over the bulk material should

be done to minimize windblown dust

Bulk material should be transported in closed trucks to avoid wind

entrainment

Proper bag filters in conveyor belts must be used for collection of dust and

use of open conveyor belts should be minimized

No vehicle should be allowed without proper pollution under control

certification in the port area and highly polluting vehicles (especially heavy

trucks) should be avoided



4.12

Onshore

Development

Project

construction

Phase

Operation

Phase

Release of Air

Pollutants

Change in Air

Quality

Release of

Heat

Impact on

Visibility

Particulates

Deposition on

Soil, Water, Land

Climatic

Changes

Aesthetic

Impact

Impact on

Agricultural

Produce

Impact on Flora

& Fauna

Impact on Human

Health

Impact on

Economic Output

Impact on

Socio-Cultural

Environment

Acitvity

Primary

Impacts

Secondary

Impacts

Tertiary

Impacts

Fig. 4.2.1: Impact Network for Air Environment



4.13

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000

Distance in West East Direction (m)

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

Dis

atn

ce

in

So

uth

Nort

h D

ire

ctio

n (

m)

Fig. 4.2.2: Incremental GLCs of PM10 during the Construction Phase

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000

Distance in West-East Direction (m)

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

Dis

tance

in S

outh

-Nort

h D

ire

ction

(m

)

Fig. 4.2.3: Incremental GLCs of SO2 due to simultaneous operation of ships/ vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations



4.14

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000


0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

Dis

tance

in S

outh

-Nort

h D

ire

ction

(m

)

Fig. 4.2.4: Incremental GLCs of NOx due to simultaneous operation of ships/ vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000


0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

Dis

tance

in S

outh

-Nort

h D

ire

ction

(m

)

Fig. 4.2.5: Incremental GLCs of PM10 due to simultaneous operation of ships/vessels at each berth along with dock/port operations



4.15

Table 4.2.1

Meteorological Data Used for Air Quality Predictions

Hours Wind Direction

(deg)

Wind Speed (m/s)

Temperature

(K)

Atmospheric Stability

Class

Mixing Height

(m)

0100 45 1.2 295.3 5 250

0200 315 1.1 294.4 5 250

0300 270 1.3 293.5 5 250

0400 315 1.1 292.8 5 250

0500 270 1.4 292.4 5 250

0600 90 1.8 291.1 5 250

0700 90 2.8 294.8 3 500

0800 270 2.5 295.6 2 700

0900 225 2.6 299.2 2 850

1000 45 3.2 302.2 2 1000

1100 90 3 304.5 2 1100

1200 90 2.8 307.8 2 1100

1300 90 3 309.2 2 1150

1400 90 3.2 310.6 2 1200

1500 45 2.6 308.8 2 1000

1600 270 2.4 306.6 3 850

1700 270 2.2 304.8 3 650

1800 90 2.8 303.3 3 600

1900 90 1.8 302.2 5 500

2000 45 2.1 300.2 5 350

2100 225 1.9 299.4 5 300

2200 270 1.8 298.8 5 250

2300 270 1.1 297.5 5 250

2400 315 1.6 296.2 5 250



4.16

Table 4.2.2

Stack Details with Pollutant Emission rates

Sr. No.

Stack Attached to Auxiliary Engine

Stack height

(m)

Internal Diameter of Stack

(Top)

(m)

Temperature of Exhaust

Gas

(K)

Exit Velocity

(m/s)

Emission$ (g/s)

SO2 NOx SPM

1 Ship/ Vessel# 30.0 0.6 643 8

2.54 12.0 0.12

$Values for two auxiliary engines through combined stack for each vessel/ship

#The stack details and emission rates are given for one ship/vessel operating with two auxiliary engines at one berth. Same data is used for each ship/vessel at each berth (for all total 7 berths).



4.17


Noise is defined as unwanted sound. Port and Harbour projects can involve short-

term impacts during construction and long-term impacts during operation due to increased

noise levels. The impacts however range from hearing damage to interference on human

activities such as sleep, communication and concentration. Construction activities may

create a problem of noise and vibration generated by construction equipment, truck traffic,

work vessels and other similar sources.

4.3.1 Noise Sources

a) Noise Due to Stationary Sources

The equipment and diesel generators at construction site can be considered as

stationary sources though they may be stationed at a particular site for few weeks. Ships

are the permanent noise-generating source (at the port) during operational phase of the

project. The flow chart of impact network for noise environment is shown in the Fig. 4.3.1.

The cumulative noise levels from the above temporary and permanent sources

during construction and operation phases have been estimated at various distances using

Wave Divergence Model, as described below:

LP = LS – 20 Log (r) + DI – 8 – Ae

Where,

LP : sound pressure level at a receptor located at radial distance ‘r’ dB (A)

LS : sound pressure level at the source, dB (A)

r : radial distance of the receptor from the source, m

DI : directivity index of the source (for hemispherical radiation DI = 3)

A6 : excess attenuation caused by environmental conditions

The cumulative impact of multiple stationary noise sources at particular project

site can be calculated by. LP (Total) is the sound pressure level due to N number of

sources.

4.3.1.1 Prediction of Noise Levels during Construction Phase

Noise level during construction phase will increase due to the activities like

movement of levelling and construction machinery and vehicles, clearing of obstructions

and trees from proposed area of acquisition, construction activities i.e., construction of

labour camp, onsite office, construction material plants etc. However these activities are not



4.18

likely to generate high noise levels. On the whole, the impact of generated noise on the

environment will not be significant, reversible and local in nature but if the construction work

continues round the clock, then continuous noise will be generated.

The major noise generating sources are DG sets, crusher, excavators, crane,

blasting, dredgers, concrete mixer etc. Typical noise levels generated by various

construction equipment are given in Table 4.3.1.2. These activities at the site are likely to

increase the background noise levels by 2-3 dB(A) at a distance of 0.5 km. The major

human settlements are more than 2.5 km away from the site. Hence there will not be any

excessive noise impact on the community.

4.3.1.2 Prediction of Noise Levels during Operational Phase

During the operation phase, noise will be generated due to the operation of the

generators, pumps, engines of boats, ships, dredgers cranes for handling of goods, cargo

and shipment vehicles.

The cumulative noise levels due to the combined operation of booster pumps and

power generating units, Ships loading / unloading, Generators (at the port) are predicted to

be 50 dB(A) at a distance of 250 m and 44 dB(A) at a distance of 500 m from the centre of

sources. Thus there will be an incremental noise level of 1-2 dB(A) over the baseline at

distance of 500 m from the proposed onshore terminals. As no major settlement is located

within 2.5 km from the port area, noise impact on the community is not envisaged.

4.3.2 Noise due to Transportation

The noise impact will occur during the construction phase due to transporting of

construction phase material and machinery to construction site. In operation phase there

will be significant number of vehicles coming to the site carrying iron ore, coal, steel and

other materials. There will be mostly light vehicles run for the transportation of men.

The equivalent noise level due to traffic is estimated using FHWA (Federal

Highway Administration) Traffic noise model, as:

Leq (h) i = Loe + 10 Log (Ni/ Si Ti) + 10 Log (15/D) (1+a) + So-13

Where,

Leq (h) i = Leq at hour h for ith vehicle type

Loe = Reference mean energy level for ith vehicle type

Ni = Number of ith type vehicle passing during time T

Si = Average speed for the ith vehicles type in km/hr



4.19

T = Duration for which Leq is desired

D = Perpendicular distance in meters from center line of the traffic

lane to the location.

a = Factor relating to absorption characteristics of ground cover

between the roadway and the observer

So = Shielding factor

Noise levels for light, medium and heavy vehicles on the roads are calculated

using the above model and cumulative effect is computed using the following model:

Leq (Total) = 10 Log (10 Leq L/10 + 10 Leq M/10 + 10 Leq H/10)

Where LeqL, LeqM, LeqH are equivalent noise levels for light, medium and heavy

vehicles respectively.

Prediction of Impact due to Transportation

It is predicted that maximum contribution of vehicles during construction period at

10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road will be about 60 dB(A) and 56 dB(A) respectively.

Considering the back ground noise levels of 60 dB(A) along the roads, the incremental

increase in noise level will be 1-2 dB(A). There will be an increase in noise levels in

residential areas situated close to the road due to movement of trucks. However the impact

of truck movements on noise levels in residential areas situated at 100 m and beyond will

be insignificant and will be below the stipulated standard of CPCB i.e. 55 dB(A) during day

time.

4.3.3 Impact of Noise on Occupational and Community Health

Equivalent sound pressure level (Leq) averaged over 8 hours is used to describe

noise exposure in work place environment. The damage risk criteria for hearing as enforced

by CPCB and OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) stipulate that the

noise levels up to 90 dB(A) are acceptable for 8 hour exposure per day. The operational

phase of the berths will have noise generation due to the loading / unloading of cargo.

Ambient Standards in respect of Noise are given in Annexure II.

4.3.4 Mitigation Measures: Construction Phase

From the noise modeling, it has been predicted that the peak noise levels

from construction activities will be as high as 65 dB (A) at distance of 500 m

from the construction site. Since, the populated areas are located at more

than 2.5 km away from the project areas, the noise levels are considered to



4.20

have insignificant impact on community. However, the following noise

mitigation measures shall be followed:

Noise could be considerably reduced by adoption of low noise equipment or

installation of sound insulation fences

Plantation can be a good barrier

Limitation of working hours (particularly during night hours) may be a

possible means to mitigate the nuisances of construction activities

Earth movers and construction machinery with low noise levels should be

used

Transport of construction material to the site should be restricted in daytime

Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc. should

be enforced, wherever necessary

Periodic maintenance of construction machinery and transportation vehicles

should be undertaken to reduce the noise impact

Overall, the impact of generated noise on the environment is likely to be

insignificant, reversible and localized in nature and mainly confined to the

day hours as sufficient noise control measures would be undertaken

4.3.5 Mitigation Measures: Operation Phase

Either Acoustic barriers/ shelters shall be developed in noisy work places or

acoustic enclosures shall be provided for the high noise generating

equipment

Use of personal protective devices such as ear-muffs, ear-plugs etc. should

be enforced wherever necessary

Implementation of green belt development is expected to reduce noise

impacts within the project premises and all along the port boundary.



4.21

Onshore

Development

Project

Construction

Phase Operation

Phase

Noise Levels

Change in

Ambient Noise

Level

Impact on Work

Output and Efficiency

Mitigation of Birds,

Reptiles & PoputationHealth Risks

Impact on

Economic Output

Impact on

Socio-Cultural

Environment

Acitvity

Primary

Impacts

Secondary

Impacts

Tertiary

Impacts

Fig. 4.3.1: Impact Network for Noise Environment



4.22

Table 4.3.1

Typical Noise Generation from Construction Equipment & Machinery

Description Noise Levels dB(A) at 1 m

from Source

Earth Movers

Excavator 90-95

Crane 90-95

Trucks (10t and 16t) 84-88

Dozer 85-90

Dumpers 87-91

Wheel loader 89-94

Tractors 76-96

Scrapers, Graders 80-93

Pavers 86-88

Trucks 82-94

Material Handlers

Concrete mixers 75-88

Cranes (movable) 75-86

Impact Based Equipment

Pneumatic Wrenches 83-88

Cranes (derrick) 86-88

Stationary Equipment at Storage Terminals

Pumps 69-71

Generators 71-82

Compressors 74-86



4.23


The impacts on water environment typical to a port and Harbor project can be

divided into two broad areas: sediment transport and water quality. Both are influenced by

the oceanographic parameters like waves, tides, current and bathymetry. The sediment

transport is related to the physical alterations of the coastline such as presence of

breakwater, sea wall or reclamation, the water quality issues are related to the pollutants

generated from dredging activities, oil spills, wastewater discharges and run-off from land

areas.

4.4.1 Water Requirement for Port

The per capita consumption of water is taken as 200 liters per day. The

occupancy is taken as around 750 persons. Total consumption will be 1.5 lakh liters per

day. A reservoir of capacity 2 lakhs liters need to be provided at location of highest contour.

All the utility buildings shall be provided with individual overhead tanks in order to achieve

water supply system. The pump room will be located under the over head tank connected

with a water treatment plant (WTP) of capacity not less than 5000 liters/minute. If required,

otherwise the raw water will be directly fed to the Over Head Tank (OHT).

The pumps are so selected to fill the tank once in a day. Two (one as standby) 25

HP water supply pump with suitable pump panel is proposed. Pipe lines are spread over

the area underground/ in buildup trench and provided with outlet points wherever

necessary.

4.4.2 Source of Water

The nearest water source identified is from the river Gangavalli which is within 8

km from Tadadi port.

4.4.3 Marine Ecology

Adverse effect on marine ecology usually result from deterioration of water and air

quality, current pattern changes bottom contamination, physical loss of water area and

changes in natural land habitat. The location of port affects aquatic fauna and flora through

changes of water quality, coastal hydrology and bottom contamination. Diminution of

bottom biota is usually linked to a reduction of fishery resources and occasionally to an

increase in the No. of undesirable species.

Deterioration of water quality usually gives rise to changes in aquatic biota: a

decrease in the number of species; and an increase in the quantity of one or two species,

further deterioration may lead to the destruction of all kinds of aquatic biota. Diminution of



4.24

plants in a shore zone within enclosed water may degrade its aeration capability and

worsen water pollution. The proposed construction of berth is mainly on landward side

where the land is under water. The aquatic animal present in the inundated land may get

affected.

The impacts on water environment due to the proposed construction of berths can

be divided into two phases: construction phase and operation phase. Fig. 4.4.1 and 4.4.2

show impact network for surface water and groundwater environment. The impacts are at

three levels in each case as shown in flow chart. The issues related to construction phase

and operational phase of Tadadi port are discussed here.

4.4.4 Estuarine Environment

Estuary is a form of transition zone between river environment and ocean

environment and is subject to both marine influences such as tides, waves and influx of

saline water and riverine influences such as flows of fresh water sediment. The inflow of

both seawater and fresh water provides high levels of nutrients in both the productive

natural habitats.

Estuaries are typically classified by their geomorphological features or by water

circulation patterns and can be referred to by many different names such as bay, harbours

lagoons, inless or sounds, although sometimes these water bodies do not necessarily meet

the above criteria at an estuary and may be fully saline.

Aghanashini estuary is the populated area where more than 40% population lives

along the estuary and the coast. The estuary mouth is 180 m wide. The average annual

flow of Aghanashini is 2556 Mm3 having length of 54 Km.

As a result, estuary is suffering degradation by many factors including the

sedimentation from soil erosion due to deforestation and other poor farming practices, over

fishing, collection of Bivalve drainage and filling of wetlands, eutrophication due to

excessive nutrient, human waste, animal wastes, drinking or damming for flood control or

water diversion. A semi enclosed body of water connected to the sea as far as the tidal limit

or the salt intrusion limit and receiving freshwater runoff, however the fresh water inflow

may not be perennial, the connection to the sea may be closed for part of the year and tidal

influence may be negligible. Estuaries are a dynamic ecosystem with their connection with

the open sea through which the seawater enters accordingly to the rhythm of the tides. The

seawater entering the estuary is diluted by the freshwater flowing form river and streams.



4.25

The pattern of dilution of estuary is dependent on the volume of freshwater tidal amplitude

range and the extent of evaporation from the water within the estuary.

4.4.4.1 Vertically homogenous

Tidal mixing forces exceed river output, resulting in well mixed water column and

the disappearance of the vertical salinity gradient. The freshwater, seawater boundary is

eliminated due to the intense turbulent mixing and eddy effect.

4.4.4.2 Physicochemical variation

The most important variable characteristics of the estuary water are the

concentration of dissolved oxygen, salinity and sediment load. There is extreme spatial

variability in salinity, with near zero at the tidal limit of the tributary river to 3.4% at the

estuary mouth. Sediment can also clog feeding and respiratory structure of species, and

within mudflat species. Deficiency in D.O can cause problems for life forms. Nutrient rich

sediment from manmade sources can promote production life cycles, perhaps leading to

eventual decay removing the dissolved oxygen from the water, thus hypoxic or anoxic

zones can develop.

The salinity of seawater is approximately 35‰, tending to be lower (33‰) in

coastal seas and higher (37‰) in tropical waters. The salinity of freshwater is always less

than 0.5%, thus the salinity of the estuarine water is between 0.5 and 3.5.

4.4.4.3 Implications for marine life

Estuaries provide habitats for a large number of organisms and support very high

productivity. Estuaries provide habitats for many fish nurseries, depending upon their

locations in the world, such as salmon and sea trout. Also, migratory bird populations, such

as the black-tailed godwit, Limosa limosa islandica make essential use of estuaries.

Two of the main challenges of estuarine life are the variability in salinity and

sedimentation. Many species of fish and invertebrates have various methods to control or

conform to the shifts in salt concentrations and are termed osmoconformers and

osmoregulators. Many animals also burrow to avoid predation and to live in the more stable

sedimental environment. However, large numbers of bacteria are found within the sediment

which has a very high oxygen demand. This reduces the levels of oxygen within the

sediment often resulting in partially anoxic conditions, which can be further exacerbated by

limited water flux.

Phytoplanktons are key primary producers in estuaries. They move with the water

bodies and can be flushed in and out with the tides. Their productivity is largely dependent

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sea_trout

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bird_migration

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Limosa_limosa_islandica&action=edit&redlink=1

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Salinity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sedimentation

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fish

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Invertebrate

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Osmoconformer

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Osmoregulator

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burrowing

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Predation

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Anoxic_waters

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tide



4.26

upon the turbidity of the water. The main phytoplankton present is diatoms and

dinoflagellates which are abundant in the sediment.

It is important to remember that a primary source of food for many organisms on

estuaries, including bacteria, is detritus from the settlement of the sedimentation.

4.4.5 Impact on Water Body

Aghanashini River flowing through Tadadi is one of the sources for fishing since

time immemorial. The existing Tadadi port site is on the estuary of the Aghanashini River.

The Aghanashini or Tadadi River with a total length of 121 km originating from Sirsi taluka

of Uttar Kannada district in the central western ghat of Karnataka. Winding its way through

deep gorges and valleys, the river meets the tides of the Arabian Sea and forms a large

estuarine expanse 13 km long and 2 to 6 km wide in the coastal taluka of Kumta. The

estuary has its outlet into the sea between the village of Aghanashini in the South and

Tadadi in the north. An area of about 18000 hectares of estuary is created at the point

where river Aghanashini empties itself into the Arabian Sea.

Problem of sedimentation generally occurs at location where transport capacity of

the sediments by the hydraulic system is reduced due to the decrease in flow speed

caused by artificial measures like dredging etc. formation of dead water zones, flow

separation zones lee zone created due to the construction of groins or dikes. The main

water bodies are Aghanashini and Gangavalli River. Average annual flow of Aghanashini

and Gangavalli is 2556 and 4737 Mm3 and their length is 84 Km and 154 Km respectively.

These rivers are perennial. Dredging and other infrastructure may change the movement of

water but the change is temporary. The project area is covered with 14.40 Sq.km of water

bodies. Channel and port dredging can alter bottom topography, increased water depth and

change circulation pattern in the dredged area, which may increase stratification in the

water column and reduce vertical mixing. This thermal layering of water may create anoxic

or hypoxic conditions for benthic habitats. Dependent on new navigation channels may

create deep and flushed area that experience reduced light penetration and water

temperatures. Temperature influences biochemical processes and deep channels may

create zones of poor productivity that can serve as barriers to migration for benthic and

demersal species and effective fragment estuarine habitats.

Construction activities which could cause water quality impacts are dredging &

reclamation, and spill & runoff from work sites. The reclamations and the berthing

structures will cause changes in water circulation patterns and this could also have an

impact on water quality.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turbidity

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diatoms

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dinoflagellates

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bacteria

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Detritus



4.27

Dredging to deeper navigational channels involves a number of environmental

effects to fishery habitats including the direct removal of burial of demurral and benthic

organism and aquatic vegetation, alteration of physical habitat, disturbance of bottom

sediment (resulting in increased turbidity) contaminant release in water column, light

attenuation, release of oxygen consuming substances and alteration in the number of living

organisms, hydrologic and temperature regimes. Dredging can degrade water quality

through re-suspension of sediments and the release of nutrient and other contaminants into

the water. Dredging may also modify long shore current patterns by altering the direction or

velocity of water flow from adjacent estuaries. These changes in water circulation are often

accompanied by changes in the transport of sediments and siltation rate resulting in

alteration of local habitats used for spawning and feeding channel. Dredging can alter the

estuarine hydrology and the mixing zone between fresh and salt water leading to

accelerated upland run-off, lowered fresh water aquifers and greater saltwater intrusion into

aquifers as well as reduction in the buffering capabilities of wetland and shallow water

habitats.

Navigational channels that are substantially deeper than surrounding area can

become anoxic or hypoxic as natural mixing is decreased and detrital material settles out of

the water column and accumulates in the channels. The concentration of anoxic or hypoxic

water can stress near shore biota when mixing occurs from a storm event. The potential for

anoxic conditions can be reduced in areas that experience strong currents or wave energy

and sediment are more mobile.

4.4.6 Water Quality

A water quality impact assessment has been carried out to identify and evaluate

the potential hydrodynamic and water quality impacts arising from the construction and

operation of the proposed Port development. Hydro geological investigations will be

undertaken to ensure groundwater abstraction. Dewatering is undertaken at lakes to

sustain local aquifers. Infrastructure will be designed to minimize impacts on ground water

flows.

4.4.6.1 Impacts on Fishing and Salt Pan

In and around the port location, there are 15 villages which are engaged in fishing

and related activities (for their livelihoods) in the Aghanashini River and in the 566 hectares

acquired for the port. It is estimated that the people in these villages would be affected

economically during the port construction and also during the port operation.



4.28

People from villages like Aghanashini, Kosakote that is very close to the

Sangama region where the port will come up fear that they would lose their house. Villagers

are concerned that the relocation of their residential areas would be away from the sea and

that would make it difficult for them to continue their occupation as fishermen. More than

1000 families are from Aghanashini and Hosakote. Thoregasini, Masakal and Mudangi

villages depend solely on the Sangama region for their livelihood. As of now, a couple from

a family manages to earn a minimum of Rs. 1500/- per day by spending about 3-4 hours of

fishing and shell fishing activities. This income would stop once the construction of the port

starts at this place. The people of this area feel that they cannot engage in deep sea fishing

activity as it is an investment intensive activity. The development of the sea fishing activity

at the port will not help them to look after their livelihood.

Fishermen from villages like Madangere who depend mainly on fishing in the 566

hectares of land acquired for port feel that those land areas are like ‘Ganji Kendra’ for the

fisher men as any time throughout the year they do fishing and can get income for the

family. If the port comes up, they have no choice as they do not have other skills or have

agriculture land to get income.

During the rainy season, all the villagers, including those who depend on the sea

fishing, use the 566 hectares of land region, engage in land fishing for Prawn, Crabs and

other fish and get a good income. This will stop once the port construction starts. A

separate fishing harbour should be developed with more facilities like cold storage, space

for parking more boats, ancillary facilities and market support.

There are about 242 hectares of land used for salt production in Sanekatta (Plate

4.1 and 4.2) using the backwaters from the sea. About 350 families and more than 300

workers in the salt factory are engaged in this activity. This 242 hectares area is also

covered with the boundaries of other villages namely Mudangi, Gudkagal and Kimani all

around the estuary and the Tadari harbour. Due to the activities of port development salt

manufacturing activities will also get affected. This may result into reducing the production

of salt. If oil leakage occurs, the salinity of the water will change and the production of salt

will get affected. These families and particularly the workers do not have any idea about

other alternative livelihood activities. They assume that they may get some job in the port if

it comes up. Provision will also be made to provide sea water flows to these lands for salt

production.



4.29

4.4.6.2 Mitigation Measures for Impacts of Maintenance Dredging

Maintenance dredging refers to the routine removal of accumulated sediment

from channel beds to maintain the design depths of navigation channels, harbors marinas,

boat launching vessels and port facilities. Maintenance dredging occurs mainly in artificially

dependent navigation areas.

It is estimated that the total annual average maintenance dredging volume will be

335000 m3/year (Coming from river) + 185000 m3/year (coming from the south beach) +

95000 m3/year (coming from the North) + 4475000 m3/year (accumulated at the outer part

of the channel) = 5090000 m3/year.

The main potential for environmental impact is from the disposal of the dredged

material and by the increasing quantities of suspended sediments during the dredging

process (possibly inducing dispersion of contaminants) suspended sediment problems can

however be readily controlled by careful choice of dredging equipment and procedures.

Short term increase in the level of suspended sediment can given rise to changes in water

quality which can effect marine flora and fauna. The impact of dredged material disposal

largely depends on the nature of the material viz. inorganic, organically enriched

contaminated. These problems are compounded by the need to repeat maintenance

dredging regularly, since siltation is an annual phenomena.

Alteration in the coastal or estuarine morphology, alteration in sediment path-

ways and changes in siltation patterns may affect coastal habitats and species. Many of

these channels have later required maintenance dredging i.e. the removal of sediment

which has accumulated in the bottom of the dredged channel, to ensure that they continue

to provide adequate dimensions for the movement of large vessels engaged in domestic

and international trade.

4.4.6.3 Measures for Fish and Fish Habitat Protection

Minimize the riparian area disturbed by project-related activities along the

adjacent upland

Improve the plantation activities, use existing trails roads or cut lines

wherever possible as access routes to avoid disturbance to the riparian

vegetation.

Routine maintenance dredging to protect spawning fish and incubating eggs

by adhering to specific fisheries timing windows.

If necessary, install effective sediment control measures before starting work



4.30

to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water body.

Apply sediment control measures regularly to ensure they are functioning

properly, make all necessary repairs if any damage occurs.

Restrict the amount of dredging required to ensure proper navigation.

Prevent fish from being trapped within the dredging area.

Minimize the suspension on fine sediment particles into the water column.

Avoid bottom stock piling or side casting during dredging.

4.4.6.4 Measures for Ship Operations

Ports are requested to provide sufficient reception facilities to receive

residues and oily mixtures generated from ship operations according to

provisions of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution

from Ships, 1973 (MARPOL, 1978) as amended by the 1978 Protocol

(MARPOL, 1973/78). Besides oily residues, reception of sewage and

garbage is also required in accordance with the needs of ships.

Appropriate connection to sanitary treatment facilities or a municipal waste

treatment system.

Provision of these facilities, promulgation of regulations on discharge of oily

residues, and proper detection are keys to successful control of ship

discharges.

Detection of spills is also important for regulating ship discharges since

accidental spills are unavoidable, recovery vessels, oil fences, and treatment

chemicals should be used with a view to minimizing dispersal.

Proper contingency plans and a prompt reporting system are keys to

prevention of oil dispersal. Periodical clean-up of floating wastes is also

necessary for preservation of port water quality.

The proposed project should have provision for recycling / reuse of

wastewater and modification of equipment for water conservation.

Biodiversity improvement programmes should be undertaken.

Treated effluent should be used for floor washings and plantation/ green belt

development etc.

4.4.6.5 Other Mitigation Measure

Monitoring of salinity concentration will be undertaken as part of the regular

water quality and biodiversity monitoring programs.

Geotechnical studies, including coring of sediments to design depth will be



4.31

undertaken as part of detailed dredging design studies, samples of cored

sediments will be sent for chemical analysis to confirm suitability for deep

sea disposal.

Suspended solid load and turbidity levels will be monitored during dredging

and disposal operations.

A sewage treatment unit will be provided on all vessels to treat sewage to

the sewage discharge standards of the Government SPCB or CPCB prior to

discharge.

Bilge water from the floating transfer vessel will not be directly released into

the surrounding environment. Instead, a holding tank will be installed to

retain any “bilge” water on board unit. It can be pumped into a waste barge

and be taken for treatment in wastewater treatment plant.

Solid and or hazardous waste will be segregated and stored in appropriate

containers on board each vessel before transfer to an appropriate landfill

site.

An awareness programme will be carried out and implemented to educate

crew about the need for water conservation and pollution control.

Regular monitoring of discharged effluent will be undertaken to ensure

compliance with CPCB standard.

4.4.7 Construction Phase

It is anticipated that during construction phase, if waste water is not properly

managed or treated then it will lead to the impact on nearby surface water body and ground

water body. Pile driving deposition of rubble, dredging, sand compactions and other

construction work in water cause re-suspension of sediment and turbid water. Re-

suspension of sediment in water leads to an increase in the level of Suspended Solids (SS)

and the concentration of organic matter, possibly to toxic or harmful levels. It also reduces

sunlight penetration. Work vessels are a possible cause of oil spills, garbage discharge and

leakage of other substances into water. Diffusion from concrete work in water and

overflows from landfills may be possible sources of water pollution.

Dredging many cause changes in current pattern and flows as well as salt wedge

intrusion into river mouth or littoral drifts in the shore zone, changes in littoral drifts lead to

beach erosion or accretion. Disposal of dredged materials on land, sea may possibly cause

leakage of harmful substances into ground water or changes in water front drainage

construction work and dredging, disturb bottom sediments and induce re-suspension,



4.32

dispersal and settlement of such sediments. Dumping of dredged material directly alters

bottom configuration and biota and may disperse toxic or harmful chemicals around the

disposal site. Dredging removes bottom habitat and may lead to a loss. But reclamation will

not cause any environmental impact by provision of suitable mitigation measures.

Two construction options have been reviewed and the associated construction

works have been investigated. One option requires extensive piling activities (fully piled). If

bored piling is adopted, this may involve discharging untreated piling water into the

surrounding marine water, and adequate mitigation measures are required in controlling the

discharge to avoid adverse environmental impacts. The other option which requires

reduced piling coupled with dredging and backfilling along the seawall would result in the

re-suspension of sediments and associated water quality impacts. For both options,

dredging will be required at the proposed approach channel and container berth which

extends into mainland waters. This would elevate the SS levels in marine waters.

As the proposed dredging sites are to be located into water and ecologically

sensitive areas, i.e. the Aghanashini River Estuary, a mixing zone will unavoidably occur.

Based on the model predictions (Mixing Zone Model), the mixing zone will be approximately

4.2 km2 (near the seabed) in size, assuming that silt curtains are not used for mitigation.

With the installation of silt curtains to reduce the extent of SS dispersion, there would still be

residual impacts over a sizeable area (approximately 3.8 km2, assuming that deployment of

silt curtains around the grab dredgers gives a maximum 75% SS reduction). Residual water

quality impacts to sensitive areas have been examined. The magnitude of the adverse

water quality impacts was considered low since predicted SS elevations would not be

expected to have direct biologically significant impacts. These water quality impacts would

occur during the dredging and backfilling works in the construction phase, and would cease

once works are completed.

Port development may result in significant change in the hydrodynamic regime of

the estuary river system. From the mathematical modeling results, it is predicted that there

will be significant changes in flow patterns and water quality in close proximity to the Port.

These changes would mainly be found in an area within approximately 5 km of the Port,

and would diminish with distance. Of the two construction options, the reclamation option

would result in more significant changes to hydrodynamics and water quality than the fully

piled option.



4.33

4.4.8 Operation Phase

Possible discharges from ships that could be sources of water pollution are bilge

water, ballast water, oily wastes, sewage, garbage and other residues in a ship, spills of oil

lubricants, fuel and other oily liquid may be other sources of water pollution. Once an oil or

oily component is discharged into water, it spreads on the surface by winds and currents,

forming a thin layer. On the surface of seas in tropical or temperate zones, oil can be

polymerized gradually by biodegradation and eventually form desired particles which sink in

water.

Leakage of oils, oily wastes and mixtures may directly cause damage to fisheries

resources, aquatic biota and coastal habitat. Biodegradation of oil also generates

polymerized oil particles and toxic aromatic fraction using dissolved oxygen in the water,

which directly cause damage to bottom biota and habitat. This may seriously damage

marine and coastal ecology. Fishery resources including shell fish may be spoiled by oil

and toxic substances generated by biodegradation. Run off from raw material storage, spills

from bulk cargo handling and wind-blown dust are possible sources of contamination of port

water.

General standards for discharge of environment pollutants, Part A-Effluents

(marine coastal area standard) are given in Annexure-IV. Water Quality Standards (Natural

Coastal and Beach Water) are given in Annexure-IV (a). Tolerance limit of water quality of

Harbour region are given in Annexure IV (b). Indian Standard of Specification for Drinking

Water 15:10500-1991 are given in Annexure III.

4.4.9 Potential Impact on Surface Water

Erosion and sedimentation, freshwater flooding due to impediment of

surface water flow or increased surface water runoff.

Deterioration in water quality in nearby streams and creeks.

Increase in sediment loads due to runoff.

Wetlands and riparian vegetation will be left undisturbed.

Storm water management measures will capture and filter runoff without

significant compromising overland flows. This includes the creation of :

Erosion and Sediment Control Management Plan

Waste Management Plan

Erosion and Scouring



4.34

Detailed scour analysis and design will be executed to minimise and

erosion and scouring in the vicinity of the intersections between

waterways and Project.

All erosion and sediment control structures will be regularly inspected and

maintained when necessary.

All drainage structures will be regularly inspected and maintained when

necessary.



4.35

Fig. 4.4.1: Impact Network for Surface Water Environment

Onshore Development Project

Pre-Construction Phase Operation Phase

Impact on socio-cultural Environment

Activity

Tertiary Impacts

Abstraction of Water

Secondary Impacts

Primary

Impacts

Impact on Economic Output

Release of Wastewater

Change in Surface Morphology

Impact on

Runoff/Seepage

Impact on Hydraulics of Water Course

Impact on Hydraulics of Water Course

Impact on Water Quality

Environmental Health and Aesthetic Risk

Cost of Water Treatment

Impact on Amenity/ Recreation

Impact on Aquatic Life



4.36

Fig. 4.4.2: Impact Network for Ground Water Environment



4.37


A Port and Harbour project usually involves acquiring significant area of land. The

monitoring of the area is under water clearing the site, soil excavation and other activities,

which affect land directly. Secondary impacts are those of induced development related to

the project, which would place a stress on the land use. Port and Harbour projects, attract

industries and could lead to rapid growth of the region.

The impact of land environment can be divided into two phases i.e. Construction

phase and Operation phase. Waste from construction activities are mainly spoils generated

by dredging, disposal of dredged materials on land may cause destruction of plants, loss of

vegetation, leakage of contaminated materials and salt, odour, an unsightly vies and other

nuisances to the local community. Fig. 4.5.1 shows impact network for land environment.

The impacts are of three types, i.e. primary impact, secondary impact and tertiary impact

which are interlinked with each other. The impacts on land environment due to construction

of berth are summarized below.

4.5.1 Littoral Drift and Impact on the Shoreline

Long shore drift (sometimes known as Littoral Drift) is a geological process by

which sediment such as sand or other material move along a beach shore. Long shore drift

is the net movement of sand and other fine particles like shell, silt, sand etc, along the coast

line. The process occurs naturally and constantly on any shoreline where waves approach

the shore obliquely. That is to say, at an angle other than 900 (because the backwash

leaves the shore at 900). This has the net effect of gradual movement of the particles along

the shore by the use of swash and backwash. Erosion on the beach works concurrently

with long shore drift to straighten the overall shape of the beach.

The littoral drift is of the major problem encountered by the shoreline harbours.

Along shore current parallel to the coast induced by oblique wave approach, is popularly

known as the ‘Littoral Currents’ and the sediment transport along shore is commonly known

as the littoral drift. However, the littoral drift along the west coast is very negligible

compared to the east coast of India and the net direction is form north to south.


Physico-chemical changes in soil quality may occur during construction mainly

due to clearing of the site thereby causing soil erosion resulting in turbidity in surface runoff

and changes in the gradient of existing slopes. Geologic structure, soil and bed rock

properties can be affected by soil excavation, removal of vegetative covers, and root



4.38

structures can cause soil erosion. The excavation during construction removal and storage

of topsoil may lead to minor, localized and temporary changes in the top soil structure. The

movement of vehicles and heavy construction material may also result in minor

compression of top soil and subsoil. Soil contamination may take place due to movement of

vehicles or solid wastes generated from the labour camp set-up during pre-construction

stage. This impact is significant at locations of construction phase, stockyard and other

allied activities of construction. The preventive measure must be taken to avoid land

contamination. The sea bed, from where dredging is to be done, can hold heavy metals

(like zinc, cadmium, copper, mercury lead) polyaromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) hydrophobic

organics, pesticides, oil, grease and other organic matters. Once tested, one can find out a

way of proper handling and disposal of the dredged material. The solid and hazardous

wastes, if generated from ships and from port operations may contaminate land and water

bodies, if not disposed properly.


Operational activities would comprise construction of utility buildings, laying roads,

electricity and water line and other such structures that are normally associated with port

development project. Therefore, any change in land use due to such activities will be limited

to the project site area. The impacts on soil can be due to land disposal of solid wastes

such as construction rubble, composite garbage and discarded topsoil. Adequate measures

will be taken to ensure that all waste generated at the construction site is collected and

disposed off at a government approved dump site.

Hazardous waste likely to be generated from proposed facilities are sludge from

waste water treatment facilities and wastes (like oil and grease from machinery) which will

be disposed off after proper treatment as per hazardous waste (management and handling)

Amendment rule 2000. Hence, no adverse impact on land environment is envisaged.

The labour camps will be constructed near the proposed site and the construction

labour will be provided water, fuel for cooking, electricity and sanitation facility. Disposal of

sewage and other wastes generated from these settlements will be done through a

package treatment plant/septic tank to avoid direct discharge into estuary/ sea.

Impacts on Land use pattern of the area

The construction and operation of the project will provide facilities for loading

and unloading of construction material and iron ore, coal, steel etc. The

project would stimulate lot of ancillary developments like shops, restaurant,



4.39

repair shops, temporary houses etc. in and around the proposed activity.

This will lead to use of land to meaningful commercial and residential

purposes. The quality of top soil shows moderate productivity which should

be protected and preserved for better use in agriculture / greenbelt

development.

Impact on Baseline Quality

The (base) soil in this region is sandy loam. Greenbelt development near the

proposed site on the bank along the route will help in improving the ecology

and aesthetic value of the site. The trees planted will absorb specific air

pollutants, reduce noise pollution, control soil temperature, help in holding

moisture and attract more birds and will thus help in maintaining the overall

environmental quality. This can be further developed as a tourist place in

future. The proposed development will not result in significant changes in the

land use and land cover pattern.

Impact due to Road and Rail Traffic

During the construction activities, there will be considerable increase in rail

and road traffic to and from the Tadadi port for transportation of manpower,

material, machinery and equipment. These would inevitably lead to

congestion in traffic and increased air and noise pollution level with

associated impacts on public life. This scenario may continue during the

operation phase also.

4.5.4 Mitigation Measures due to Dredging and Dust Emission during Iron Ore/Coal Handling

The removal of sediment from the seabed by dredging is a necessary activity in

ports, harbors and water ways either to ensure sufficient depth of water for the passage of

vessels or for the construction of new facilities (Capital dredging), and the dredge material

removed has to be properly disposed off.

The effect of a dredged or reclamation operation on the ecosystem is divided into:

Direct effect caused by the construction activities and indirect effect caused

by the release of chemical substances from the dredged or disposed

sediment.

Changes in hydraulic regime



4.40

A review of dredging in coastal area worldwide has confirmed that dredging

mostly has a short term localized impact on marine water qualities. The study on biotic

communities suggests that dredging impacts are relatively short term in regions of high

sediment mobility. In soft sediment environments, recovery of animal communities

generally occurs (relatively) quickly and a more rapid recovery of the communities has been

observed in areas.

The planning and execution of dredging works should be carried out by

drawing up a Dredging Management Plan (DMP) so as to minimize both the

direct and indirect effects.

Effective planning and execution of dredging work require knowledge about

the material to be dredged and the environmental conditions in which the

dredging plants will operate.

1. The two types of dredger are proposed namely Tailing suction dredger

and cutter suction dredger.

2. The quantity of dredged materials is estimated to be about

5,00,00,000 m3

3. The dredged material should be disposed off in low-lying areas and

barren land. If the material is not suitable for reclamation, the same is

disposed off in offshore disposal area after carrying out model studies.

During the dredging process, effect may arises due to the excavation of sediment

at the bed, loss of material during transport to the surface over flow from the dredger while

loading from the dredger or pipelines during transport.

While carrying out the dredging, effective sediment control measures are

necessary to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment in the water

body. Inspect sediment control measures regularly to ensure proper

functioning of dredging operation.

Avoid bottom stockpiling or side casting during dredging. Operate machinery

on land or on water (i.e. from a barge or vessel) in a manner that minimizes

disturbance to the banks or bed of the water body.

Machinery is to arrive on site in a clean, washed condition and is to be

maintained free of fluid leaks. Wash, refuel and service machinery and store

fuel and other materials for the machinery away from the water to prevent

any deleterious substance from entering the water.



4.41

Keep an emergency spill kit on site in case of fluid leaks or spills from

machinery.

Restore bank to original condition if any disturbances occur.

Dredge spoil should be disposed off on-site in accordance with appropriate

site for the disposal.

The planning and execution of dredging works should be carried out by

drawing up a Dredging Management Plan (DMP) so as to minimize both the

direct and indirect effects.

The proposed mitigation measures such as timing of construction, dredging

methods, selection of equipment and continuous monitoring will be effective

in containing the turbid levels and related impacts.

Coal and iron ore are the major natural resources to be used for the import and

export through Tadadi port. As the predominant wind directions are NW, W, NE and E,

there is potential for uncontrolled dust emission to be blown while handling the Iron ore and

coal. Neighboring residence towards the East side may be affected, if it is not properly

controlled. There may be the possibility of deposition of air borne dust on surface water

also. The potential impact identified can be mitigated through appropriate dust emission

control system, which will involve all material handling facilities to be under cover/enclosed,

including the Iron Ore stock pile, tipper station and conveyors. In operation area, ship

loading/unloading, the dust mitigation shall be carried out by means of hoppers with air

filters at the port cranes.

Bulk material such as iron ore and coal should be transported in closed truck to

avoid wind entrainment, conveyor belts be used for transportation of iron ore and coal from

ship to coal handling place. In the trucks/wagon loading/unloading stations area dust

mitigation is ensured as all stations will be covered and equipped with air filters to capture

dust during the fall of materials into the wagon or truck as the case may be. In case of

wagon tippers and truck unload system, an air filter system must be used. Sprinkling of

water should be done to arrest or control dust emissions.

A community liaison programme will be developed to provide information to

resident and received feedback or complaints about dust emission. Appropriate protective

respiratory equipment will be supplied to workers potentially exposed to emission

exceeding acceptable levels. A real-time environmental monitoring and management

system will be implemented that includes monitoring of meteorological parameter,

particulate matter concentrations. Wherever possible conveyors will be fitted with



4.42

removable dust covers and transfer points will be enclosed and fitted with dust

suppressions sprays.

Operational activities would comprise construction of utility buildings, laying of

road, electricity and water line and other such structures that are normally associated with

port development project.


Following measures are recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on activities

during construction phase:

The adverse effects of disposal of contaminated dredged material or other

wastes from construction activities could be offset by including them in land

reclamation. Appropriate design (according to the characteristics of the

wastes) is a basic requisite for retaining walls, settling ponds, capping of

landfills, and land use after completion

Temporary drainage channels should be provided to minimize soil erosion of

solid / hazardous waste

A record with respect to quantity, quality and treatment / management of

solid / hazardous waste shall be maintained

Centralized waste management facility is recommended to collect all wastes

during construction phase

The stockpiles, construction camps etc. during construction period will be

located to the extent possible on land, which are devoid of vegetation

Any kind of material resulting from clearing and grading should not be

deposited on temporary or permanent basis in the approach roads, streams,

ditches and any other position which may hinder the passage

On completion of construction works, all temporary structures, surplus

materials and wastes will be completely removed to avoid future land use

incompatibility

Soil quality of the project site area may be changed due to disposal of

construction debris, composite garbage and discarded top soil. However, the

impact is likely to be insignificant as the project authorities will take adequate

measures to ensure that all wastes generated at the construction site and at

the labour camp are collected and disposed off in an appropriate manner in

a dump site or recycled or reused wherever feasible. Standard construction

procedures will be followed to ensure that the impact on surface drainage



4.43

pattern and soil erosion is kept minimal. This will necessarily include

avoiding blockage of natural surface drainage and developing appropriate

drainage system in areas where it is unavoidable

Disposal of Dredged Material on Land

The material dredged will be partly used for filling or reclamation of the backup

area of port. The dredged material contains clay, silt and fine sand (soil). Hence, it can be

used for nourishment of degraded land, for reclaiming it and promoting life and vegetative

growth. The dredged material should be analyzed from the agricultural point of view when it

is used in the agricultural field.



4.44

Fig. 4.5.1: Impact Network for Land Environment



4.45


The ecosystem comprises of the abiotic (non-living) and the biotic (living)

assemblages. Coastal zones are considered to be the most productive ecosystems on the

earth. In rural areas or industrially undeveloped areas, the primary economic activities such

as agriculture, forestry and fisheries are based upon the living natural resources or the

biological environment. From ecological point of view, coastal area are of great importance

as they contain sensitive aquatic ecosystems.

The flow chart of impact network for biological environment for both construction

and operation phase is shown in Fig. 4.6.1 which shows that primary, secondary and

tertiary impacts are interlinked with each other.

The resilient mangroves serve the protective functions. With a great extent, it

protects the hinter land against cyclonic storms during cyclones, cyclones tidal surges and

other natural catastrophes acting as an effective shelter belt. In the unprecedented super

cyclone of October 1999, the mangroves had withstood the onslaught of cyclonic wind and

saved the life and properties of millions of people.


The project site area does not cover any reserved or protected forest in Tadadi

Port. Therefore, there is no danger to wild animals. The danger of biota getting exposed to

pollutants released from sediment pore water, when the bed is disturbed is minimal since

the sediments of the area are free from gross contamination.


Impact on ecological environment during operational phase is not envisaged as

there are no potential sources of impacts on terrestrial biological environment during the

operations.

4.6.3 Potential Impact on Marine Biology

Potential impacts on marine biological environment during the port construction

phase may be due to removal of wetland and coastal areas, which support flora and fauna.

The capital dredging operation and disposal of dredged spoil may also lead to potential

impacts due to:

Re-suspension and settlement of sediments

Increased turbidity decreasing the light penetration and photosynthetic

activity



4.46

Short-term depletion of dissolved oxygen levels

Changes in species diversity and structure of benthic communities

Loss of benthic habitats due to disturbance of the bottom sea floor

Potential Usages of Dredged Material

The removed material may be treated and used accordingly or disposed of

under strict environmental controls

Coastal protection, e.g. beach nourishment onshore/ offshore feeding

Habitat development or enhancement e.g. aquatic habitats, bird’s habitats

mudflats wetlands

Agricultural, horticulture, forestry

Dredging can have distinct economic and some time environmental

advantages in comparison to quarrying.

Amenity development or enhancement e.g. landscaping raising low-lying

area land become new land areas

Land reclamation, e.g. industrial development, housing, infrastructure.

Production of construction material e.g. bricks, clay aggregates

Construction of foundation of port

Machinery is to arrive on site in a clean, washed condition and is to be

maintained free of fluid leaks

Wash, refuel and service machinery and store fuel and other materials for

the machinery away from the water to prevent any deleterious substance

form entering the water

Restore banks to original condition if any disturbance occurs

Keep an emergency spill kit on site in case of fluid leaks or spills from

machinery

Vegetation all disturbed area, banks and riparian area by seeding and or

planting trees and shrubs in accordance with the guidance of forest

department. Cover seeded and vegetate area with appropriate measures to

prevent soil erosion and to help seeds germinate. The site should be

stabilized (e.g. cover exposed area with erosion control blankets) to keep

the soil in place and prevent erosion and maintain as per the requirement



4.47

4.6.4 Potential Impacts on Marine/Coastal Ecology

The location of a port affects aquatic fauna and flora through changes of water

quality, coastal hydrology and bottom contamination. Land reclamation from the sea

destroys bottom habitat and displaces fishery resources. Terrestrial fauna and flora may

also be altered by the location of a port.

Diminution of bottom biota is usually linked to a reduction of fishery resources,

and occasionally to an increase in undesirable species. Deterioration of water quality

usually gives rise to changes in aquatic biota: a decrease in the number of species; and an

increase in the quantity of one or two specific species. Further deterioration may lead to the

destruction of all kinds of aquatic biota.

Diminution of plants in a shore zone within enclosed water may degrade its

aeration capability and worsen water pollution. Mangroves in wetlands play an important

role in providing habitat for terrestrial and aquatic biota and indirectly recovering water

quality.

4.6.4.1 Impact on Mangrove Vegetation and Mitigation Measure

4.6.4.1.1 Mangrove vegetation

The study area is located on shore line of Arabian Sea. Out of the total 314 Km2

area of study area, only about 192 Km2 areas is having terrestrial habitat. The biological

environment with respect to flora and fauna is rich in this area. It spans the sea coast with

rich aquatic biodiversity and mangrove swamps at the mouths of estuarine. It harbours and

verdant topical evergreen forest.

From Karwar Bay in the North to Gangoli in the South, fast flowing rivers

descending from the western ghats to the Arabian Sea slow down as they reach the coast

and spread out into wide estuaries, lagoons and backwaters with extensive mudflats and

many small patches of mangrove forest. The mouths of most of these estuaries and creeks

are narrow and permanently open to the sea. In some cases, the width of the mouth has

been reduced by sand accretion. Many fish and prawn farms are located in the vicinity of

the mangrove areas.

Mangroves are woody plants that grow in tropical and subtropical latitudes along

the land sea interface, bays, estuaries, lagoons, backwaters, and in the rivers reaching

upstream up to the point where the water still remains saline. Mangroves are sources of

highly valued commercial products and fishery resources and also as sites for developing a

burgeoning eco-tourism. The mangrove forests have been shown to sustain more than 70



4.48

direct human activities, ranging from fuel wood collection to fisheries. Mangroves provide

critical habitat for a diverse marine and terrestrial flora and fauna. Study area has about 273

ha area covered under mangroves whereas within 5 km radial distance, it is covered with

217 ha.

4.6.4.1.2 Importance of Mangroves

While scientists have placed a high value on the ecological function of mangrove

ecosystems for some time, only recently has the broader community come to recognize the

multi-faceted role that mangroves play in the environment. The important roles played by

mangroves are as follows:

Coastal Protection

Economic Benefits

Ecological Services (Screening the solar UV‐B radiation, Reducing the

‘green house effects’)

Minimizing the fury of cyclones

Mitigating the fury of tsunami and flood

Sustainable fisheries and wildlife populations

Foreshore Protection

Trapping the sediments

Mangroves protection and management

Numerous mangroves and their associate’ species are proven to be effective

against human, animal and plant pathogens. Due to construction of various ports along the

coasts, the mangrove vegetation in the area is being destroyed at large scale. Therefore it

should be made compulsory for each industry to develop mangrove forest along the coast.

Mangroves are a sensitive ecosystem and are easily disturbed by human activities and

natural impacts. There is a close relationship between humans and mangrove forest

because 90% of fisheries products come from there. Three problems are very common in

most of the mangrove ecosystems and they are:

1. Over-exploitation of fishery resources,

2. Deforestation for firewood, cattle feed rehabilitation, reclamation and

conversion activities and

3. Lack of people’s awareness and participation in conservation activities.



4.49

Besides the above-mentioned man-made threats, mangrove areas are prone to

cyclone, storms and flood. Unless, natural protective measures are undertaken, the

mangroves vegetation in the area will be destroyed.

4.6.5 Impact on Bivalves

The construction of port typically involves the removal of sediment by dredging

from inter-tidal and sub-tidal habitats in order to create navigational channels, turning

basins, anchorages and berthing docks for the size and types vessels expected to use the

facilities. The construction of port can change physical and chemical habitat parameter

such as tidal prism, depth, water temperature salinity, wave energy, sediment transport and

current velocity. Alterations in physical characteristics of the coastal ecosystems can cause

adverse impacts on biological parameters, such as the composition, distribution and

abundance of shellfish and submerged aquatic vegetation (SAV). These changes can

impact the distribution of near-shore habitats and affect aquatic food webs.

The area of oysters is marked in the topo-sheet. The data revealed that oyster

were found in most of the estuary system. Oysters are vegetarian and eat algae; as bivalve

mollusks they are sedentary and feed by filtering water which passes by them. A single

adult oyster can filter 30 gallon of water a day (ENVIS Technical Report: 30 Nov 2008). The

study focuses on intertidal shellfishery, especially bivalve gathering a informal small scale

fishery in the Aghanashini River estuary. Bivalves gathering have been a tradition among

the inhabitants for centuries, and it is still being practiced. Harvesting is done manually

during low tides.

The targeted bivalve species are calms Paphia malabarrica, Katelysia opima,

Meretrix Sp. and Villorita cyprinoides, mussel P. viridis and oyster’s crassostrea Sp. The

harvesters sell the bivalves to traders who approach collection area or sell to the local

consumers and in the local markets. Both men and women are involved in the harvest and

about 2370 people were dependent on bivalve fisheries, for employment.

As per the topo sheet the oyster bed area is about 1.1016 Km2 with Latitude 140

32’ 58.02” N and Longitude 740 22’ 16.06” E. The oyster bed area will be affected by the

development of port and therefore it will be desirable to transplant the existing oyster bed

elsewhere in the region.

4.6.6 Mitigation of impacts of port development

The guiding principle for ecological assessment emphasizes that areas and/or

habitats of ecological importance shall be conserved as far as possible. Proposed



4.50

ecological mitigation measures for ecology, shall be in accordance with this guiding

principle and follow, in order of priority basis:

Avoidance: Potential impacts could be avoided to the maximum extent

practicable by adopting suitable measure

Minimization: Unavoidable impacts could be minimized by taking appropriate

and practicable measures such as constraints on the intensity of works operations (eg.

dredging rates) or timing of works operations.

Compensation: The loss of important species and habitats will be compensated.

Enhancement and other conservation measures should always be considered whenever

possible.

Mitigation Measures

During construction it is ensured that activities should be confined to the

minimum areas required for the works

During construction and operation best practice shall be followed to ensure

that risk of disturbance or damage to species or habitats is minimized

A habitat has to be restored after construction works have finished

Efforts should be made to enhance existing habitats, to create new habitats

of value within the site landscaping proposals

It has to be ensured that the dredging and reclamation do not extend beyond

the designated areas

A scientific way of dredging has to be adopted

Continuous monitoring has to be conducted

Concession bid documents and agreement has to be included for better

performance specification requirements for construction of work

Considering the requirements of the National Environmental Management

Protected Areas Act (2003), Biodiversity Act (2004) and Integrated Coastal

Management Act (2008), should be considered while carrying out the

development

Considering all the relevant coastal management policies, strategies and

plans, the work has to be carried out

The measure should be provided against beach erosion, e.g. construction of

sea walls, jetties, offshore breakwaters and beach nourishment

The dumping site has to be selected carefully and systematically for dredged



4.51

material

Strict port pollution and environmental management controls will be

implemented

A port environmental management master plan will be developed which

would include ecological conservation and remediation plans also

Regular compliance monitoring would be undertaken to ensure compliance

with the port environmental management master plan and any relevant

project specific approved Environmental Management Programmes

Status of Port Environment should be reported regularly

Water quality monitoring of port water sources would be undertaken as a

measure of estuarine health on regular basis

Systematic and/or random water quality monitoring of water discharge

sources (both municipal and industrial) would be undertaken

Every effort to minimize the impacts would be made

Floral and faunal sensitivity area should be restricted

Suitable “No-go” buffer zones would be defined, created and maintained

surrounding all sensitive floral sites and habitats of sensitive fauna (e.g.

nurseries, nesting sites)

Movement of organisms would be considered along natural corridors and

their access to resources (e.g. estuaries, sand banks, wetlands) by

incorporating these aspects in the design layout and features (e.g. type of

material used on sea/estuary floor, Culvert Bridge, fence design, etc.)

Suitably qualified specialist would be appointed well in advance of

construction, to undertake the planning and management of scientific

material and floral and faunal specimen search and rescue; and where

appropriate establishment of and/or safe keeping of specimens in a

nursery/shelter/aquarium for rehabilitation /reintroduction purposes.

Flora/fauna search and rescue and/or collection of material and information

for safekeeping for future reintroduction would be facilitated.

Gathering and hunting of natural resources would be prohibited

For rehabilitation purposes, the appropriate and effective removal,

stockpiling and safekeeping of top soil would be provided.

An effective rehabilitation of all areas disturbed during the development

would be provided



4.52

Rehabilitated areas would be monitored to ensure the rehabilitation with

indigenous species and long-term sustainability

Relevant legislation and contingency plans would be enacted and prepared.

During the project activities and operational phases, all efforts would be

made to prevent the production and use of toxic substances which could

lead to further damage to the marine environment

Much of the marine pollution can be prevented if coastal states and their ports

provide adequate treatment facilities for ship-generated oily and solid wastes, sewage, toxic

cargo residues and ballast water in accordance with the international guidelines.



4.53

Fig. 4.6.1: Impact Network for Biological Environment

Onshore Development Project

Construction Phase

Operation Phase

Impact on Soil Stability and Microflora

Impact on socio-cultural Environment

Activity

Tertiary Impacts

Physical

Disturbance

Removal of plants, Animals & their Habitat

Disturbance of Plants, Animals & their Habitat (Including Food Suppliers Feeding, Nesting and Breeding Areas)

Secondary Impacts

Primary Impacts

Impact on Amenity

Impact on Landscape (Visual Aspects, Landscape, Ecology)

Change in Productivity Composition of Plant & Animal Communities and Habitats

Change in Economic Use of Flora and Fauna (Agriculture, Forestry Horticulture, Fisheries etc.)

Impact on Economic Output



4.54


Predicting socio-economic impacts can best be done by means of scientifically

planned surveys with questionnaire to the public. This survey can helpful for knowing the

responses of the community about the project construction of berths project. The proposed

project will create certain impacts with beneficial as well as adverse effects on the socio-

economic environment. The impact network for the socio-economic environment is shown

in the Fig. 4.7.1. The impact can be divided into two phases is construction phase and

operation phase as shown in the flow chart.

Social environment refers to people and their surroundings, human beings and

their products, their property, groups, heritage etc. The effects of a project on people and

their responses may be direct and immediate or short term and long term. Estimation of the

change in the income in an area, value of structures, equipment, standard of living,

statistical information on population growth etc form socio-economic studies.

The Prediction of Qualitative Impacts on Socio-economic Environment is

described in Table 4.7.1, while the expected change in the predicted quality of life

(subjective and cumulative) after the implementation of EMP measures is presented in

Table 4.7.2.

It is necessary to identify the extent of these impacts for further planning of control

measures leading to mitigation of the adverse impacts. The impacts due to proposed

project on parameters of human interest have been assessed in term of:

Positive Impacts

New jobs will be created during construction phase mostly on temporary

basis and for skilled and unskilled workers

Commercial and industrial activity in the study area, general growth will be

increased

Proposed project is expected to contribute to improvement of quality of life in

the region

Negative Impacts

Increased transportation would lead to increased risk of accidents

Traffic flow will increase congestion around the project location

Interruption in project area due to construction activities

Increase in migrating population in the area

Health and daily life style impairment because of noise effects



4.55

Change in atmosphere of the surrounding community with the influx of

population having different culture, trends and lifestyle

Increased housing requirements for the employees

The environment will be polluted due to new industries and lots of

transporting activities , it will affect natural environment

The natural beauty and attraction of these places will get spoilt which will

affect tourist spots


The following measures are recommended to mitigate the impact on socio-

economic activity during construction phase:

Preference would be given for employment of the local people during

construction phase as well as maintenance activities

Drinking water requirements during the construction phase would be met

from packaged water or water transported through tankers to the

construction sites

Adequate measures for dust suppression, adequate distance from nearest

habitation would be maintained

Separate arrangements shall be made at the construction camps for water,

power supply, sanitation and fuel facilities ensure that there will not extra

load and pressures on the local resources

4.7.2 Region / Community Development Plan

Following measures are suggested for the region / community development :

Adoption of surrounding villages and working for the improvement of quality

of life of the villagers

Provision of infrastructural facilities like construction of roads, drainage

system and community welfare Centers, digging of bore wells and tube

wells, Vocational Training Centers, building for Primary Health Centers,

Public Health etc in the surrounding villages.

Livelihood development activities by imparting scientific training for livestock

and poultry farming

Capacity building training programs for fishermen community and for

enhancing farm-based livelihoods

Creating institutions to impart vocational training for acquiring and upgrading



4.56

technical skills with a view to enhance employability. Establishing

partnerships with District Administration and various Non- Governmental

Organizations to assist gainful self- employment schemes for the

unemployed youth in the area, such programs may include:

Providing fishing net facilities to local villagers

The project authority requires labourers, colony, vehicles and other staff for

the different required works. There would be more requirements of food

grains, vegetables, milk, clothing and other grocery items. As a result,

business activities would increase in the area. The local inhabitants would

be benefited by these activities. For this purpose, Village hat (markets) can

be set up where considerable amount of locally grown commodities that can

be supplied to meet their requirements. These will be helpful in the

upliftment of local economy.

Funding to fisherman society to purchase a good quality of fishing

equipment

Environmental Care and Concern

Care should be taken for the conservation of endemic and endangered plant

species (flora) in the study area to minimize the impact of vehicular pollution

Social forestry activity should undertake the program of tree plantation like

Casuarina sp, mangrove species, coconut, etc. in a row manner near the

sea shore to avoid the effect of cyclones

Construction laborers should be prohibited from using the vegetation for fuel

wood, instead they should be provided with cooking gas/ fuel for cooking

Changes in landscape quality

Excavation and building activities, the bulk movement of materials, especially

during construction, increased electricity consumption, increased consumption of water,

increased disposal of solid and liquid waste, generation of substandard water, an increase

in occupational accidents, an increased risk of radiation, generation or use of hazardous

substances, generation of acute toxic releases, increased risk of explosions, increased risk

of fires.

Increased noise levels

Noise and vibration generated by road traffic, cargo operations, ship traffic

and other port activities also cause problem to local people.



4.57

Reduction in habitat

Reduction of the dune ridge, Physical destruction or harm to vegetation,

Introduction of alien species, Changes in food webs and predator/prey relationships,

Introduction of barriers to plant and animal movement, Improved access to and from the

area, Employment for people, Increased export of goods, Improved access of the area.

Increased crime and vandalism

Increased traffic congestion

Loss or shutdown of established businesses

Increase in Waste

All kinds of wastes may be liquid or solid, are likely to be disposed of in the port

area. These wastes include dredged materials, garbage and oily mixtures discharged

from ships, wastes from cargo operations, and all types of discharges from municipal

and waterfront industry activities

4.7.2.1 Positive Impact

Small shopper and market area will be developed

Local people will get extra earning source from their houses to give the

migrants room for rent

Majority of the households blessed with various infrastructure

Increases in social vice and the development of slums activities

Improvement in the quality of education, due to increase no. of school and

institute

Insurance sector will increase in good numbers

Sharing culture and civilization with each other will boost the healthy relation

in local and migrant people

4.7.2.2 Negative Impact

Population density will be increased because of migration

Daily wage will be less because of extra manpower, unemployment or less

income due to increased competition

Population and improper sanitation will be increased which would result in to

health problems, various disease will be cause for health problem

There will be competition for daily bread in local people and migrant people

Migration can also attract criminal elements from trafficking in drugs and

criminal activities may increase in the area



4.58

Migration can become a social/political issue where racism can be used to

exploit feelings as an excuse for current woes of local population.

All stakeholders should make project developmental plan at the initial stages

in such a way that the region develops in a planned way.



4.59

Fig. 4.7.1: Impact Network for Socio-economic Environment



4.60

Table 4.7.1

Prediction of Likely Impacts on Socio-economic Environment

Parameter Local Regional Direct Indirect

Employment + + -

Income + + +

Transport + + + +

Education + + + +

Medical facilities + +

Communication + + + +

Availability of power + + +

Sanitation - -

Housing + +

Health - - -

Recreation + +

Agriculture - -

Business + + + +

Per Capita Income + + + +

Pollution - -

+: Positive Impact

- : Negative Impact

: Insignificant



4.61

Table 4.7.2

Expected Change in Subjective and Cumulative Quality of Life Before and After EMP and Welfare Measures

Sr. No.

Villages Subjective QoL Cumulative QoL

Before EMP After EMP Before EMP After EMP

1. Hittal Makki 0.56 0.60 0.53 0.55

2. Madangeri 0.53 0.56 0.54 0.56

3. Baleli 0.57 0.60 0.55 0.57

4. Yennamadi 0.52 0.54 0.52 0.54

5. Hiregutti 0.55 0.57 0.53 0.54

6. Morba 0.51 0.54 0.51 0.54

7. Mithal Gazni 0.52 0.54 0.52 0.53

8. Agnnashini 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58

9. Kagal 0.48 0.50 0.49 0.50

10. Bad 0.44 0.46 0.43 0.46

11. Gudeangadi 0.53 0.55 0.52 0.54

12. Hegde 0.54 0.57 0.54 0.56

13. Mirjan 0.55 0.58 0.54 0.56

14. Tadari 0.38 0.40 0.43 0.49

15. Gokarn 0.52 0.54 0.53 0.57

16. Belehin 0.49 0.52 0.49 0.52

17. Horumageri 0.53 0.56 0.51 0.54

18. Gangavali 0.37 0.40 0.42 0.46

19. Bonsire 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.57

20. Hoskeri 0.49 0.52 0.50 0.54

21. Torke 0.36 0.38 0.42 0.45

Average 0.47 0.50 0.50 0.53

QoL(s) = Subjective Quality of Life



4.62

4.8 Current Facilities at Tadadi

The facilities that currently exist at the Tadadi port are a light house structure, an

RCC jetty and a Transit Shed. Currently there are no commercial shipping activities taking

place at the port.

4.9 Sensitive (Holy) Places in the Study Area

Within 15 km of the project site, there are three temples. Karibeera temple was

noted on the north east side of Nushikot village, Babruvahana temple near Yanamadi -

Hiregutti village boundary and Nagadevatha temple is located near the small hill in the

project area.

Five worship stones were also observed in the project area. Two of those were at

north side of the area after railway track, one at Hiregutti (near coconut plantation), one in

survey No. 200 of Hiregutti village and fifth one near south boundary at Morha village.

Gokarna has been attracting visitors as it houses an ancient temple and it is the center for

Sanskrit studies. It is about 3 km from the port site. Four most beautiful beaches are

located to the South of Gokarna. They are the Kudle Beach, Om Beach, Halt-moon and

Paradise Beach.

Ch

aap

ter 5

:

En

viro

nm

en

tal M

on

iterin

g P

lan

CChhaapptteerr 55

EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall MMoonniittoorriinngg

PPllaann

5.1 Introduction

The developer should have a comprehensive approach towards the

construction activities at site and the ensuing operations. Environment, Safety and

Health (ESH) principles should be built into the design stages, which are followed

through when contracts are drafted for project management and operations and

maintenance. Whilst different agencies may be involved in executing and operating

different aspects of the project, the developer should retain overall responsibility for

the execution of the Management Plan.

With reference to these, developer should confirm that the contractor(s)

during the construction and operation phases would undertake the implementation

and adherence to plan that would address impacts and mitigation measures.

Adequate budgetary provisions should be made for fulfilling developer's obligations

arising from the implementation of these aspects.

During construction phase, the contractor(s) will have all contractual

responsibility for ensuring protection of the environment while social and health

issues will be jointly addressed. This should be ensured via well-articulated technical

specifications, work methodologies and specific monitoring activities.

Chapter 5:

Environmental Monitoring Plan

5.2

In the operation phase, the developer should ensure that the immediate,

medium and long-term impacts arising from the project are mapped and

incorporated into the Management Plan.

5.2 Environmental Monitoring

One of the main objectives of environmental monitoring is to check the

effectiveness of reducing/eliminating environmental impacts. Monitoring program

should be designed to assess the ability of EMPs to protect the environment, and to

select new or improve existing EMPs, as necessary. Monitoring involves collection of

data, including visual characteristics, odors, chemical quality, and biological

characteristics of uplands or waterways. Typically, monitoring is conducted after a

construction activity or an operation is brought on-line to determine the long-term

impacts to the surrounding environment. However, preconstruction/operations

monitoring can also be conducted to assess the baseline conditions of the study

area.

Pre- and post-construction/operations monitoring is used to select control

measures or EMPs that will prevent or reduce the degree of impact, and later to

assess the actual impacts resulting in improvements in, or revision of EMPs. The

type and extent of the monitoring program is dependent on:

Types of potential contaminants that may be discharged during or

after construction.

The species and/or habitats of concern in the surrounding

environment. This may relate to the season when monitoring is

necessary and the substances a species may be sensitive to (e.g.,

fuels, metals, air emissions, etc.)

The pathway that carries the pollutant to a sensitive species

Atmospheric conditions

Geologic and geographic conditions

Public concern

Regulatory requirements

Mitigation commitments

Chapter 5:


5.3

Fig. 5.1 presents an overview of the process generally used to select a

monitoring program. Pre-construction/operations monitoring programs generally

require substantial forethought and careful planning including:

Identification of Potential Project Activities: If a project is

expected in the future, the types of activities and the potential

discharges to the air or water should be characterized.

Identification of Sensitive Receptors: This involves determining the

sensitive receptors that may be affected by each activity (e.g.,

endangered species). Baseline studies may assist in identifying

sensitive receptors in the neighborhood

Identification of Receptor's Sensitivity to Contaminants or

Changes: Once the species are identified, physical changes due to

emissions/release in their habitat and life cycle should be observed.

Selection of Monitoring Parameters: The selection of monitoring

parameters is dependent on the species of concern, potential

physical changes, types of releases, and known or suspected

reaction to these changes.

Development of Monitoring Plan: The monitoring plan should be

designed to determine environmental status including seasonal and

temporal fluctuations, as necessary, and to evaluate reactions to

change. The monitoring plan should be discussed with regulatory and

resource agencies, to ensure that the results will be acceptable.

Implementation of Monitoring Program, Evaluation of Results

and Reporting: Once agreement is reached, the monitoring program

would be conducted and the results will be evaluated on a seasonal,

semi-annual, or annual basis. The results/report shall be submitted to

regulatory agency as per guidelines.

The importance of monitoring is two-fold: to establish a clear

understanding of environmental conditions and trends, and to implement and

improve upon EMPs that will enhance the environmental quality in the area.

Chapter 5:


5.4

5.3 Training

Personnel involved in the construction and operation of the project

must be trained on the hazards, safety procedures and emergency

response plan associated with their tasks in accordance with the

General health and Safety Guidelines and in the General

Environmental Guidelines.

On-site designated teams should be trained in handling oil and

chemical spills, firefighting equipment and in emergency situations.

Project developer must provide training for monitoring and mitigating

the effects of the project on environmental and socio-cultural

resources.

5.4 Summary of Impacts and Monitoring Plan

Based on the above guidelines/criteria, environmental monitoring

programme for the proposed port is suggested for different environmental

components. The monitoring plan during construction and operational phases of the

project includes the parameters to be monitored, number of sampling locations,

sampling frequency, duration, implemental agency and guiding standards, as

summarized in Tables 5.1 and 5.2 respectively.

Chapter 5:


5.5

Fig. 5.1: Development of Environmental Monitoring Program

Operation & Construction Related

Construction Related

Need a reference

Identify Sensitivity to

Various Contaminants and Changes

Identify Potential Physical

Changes From Construction

Identify Potential

Contaminants or Releases from Construction Operations

Identify Sensitive Receptors

Identify Potential Project

Activities

Select Monitoring Parameters and

Frequency of Sampling

Requirements and Testing Procedures

Develop Monitoring

Plan

Identify Monitoring Program

Obtain Construction & Operations

Permit

Regulatory Agency Public

Review of Approval

Conduct Monitoring Program

Evaluate Results

Ch

aap

ter 5

: En

viro

nm

en

tal M

on

iterin

g

Pla

n

5.6

Table 5.1

Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan: Construction Phase

Component Parameters Applicable Standards

Location Frequency Duration

Air Quality PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx

NAAQS-CPCB 2 to 4 locations in the project impact area. Minimum 1 location in upwind side, more in downwind side / impact zone on land only.

Once a month 24 hr/day for 2 consecutive working days

Noise Levels Leq-day, Leq-night

CPCB noise standards

2 to 4 locations in the project impact area including infrastructure corridor representing different receptors/land use

Once a month 1 hour each during different hours of the day & night during the peak and normal construction period

Water Quality (Surface & Ground Water)

Physico-chemical parameters, Nutrients and Organic parameters, Heavy metals

Drinking water quality Standards

All surface water bodies and 5-10 groundwater samples from hand pumps and dug wells within 5 km radius of port site and within infrastructure corridor study area.

Once in each season

One grab sample from each groundwater source and one composite sample from each surface water body

Marine Water Quality

pH, Turbidity, SS, TDS, Salinity, Temperature, DO, BOD, Faecal coliforms and other chemical parameters monitored during pre- project baseline assessment

As per Standard Techniques (APHA et. al. 2012, CPCB guidelines) to be followed for sampling and analysis

Considering probable impact, sampling points and number of samples to be decided on personal judgment within 5 km radius from the proposed site, dredge disposal site etc,

Once in each season

One grab sample, each from different locations in the anticipated impact zone

Soil Quality Particle size distribution, Texture, pH, Electrical conductivity, CEC, Alkalinity, metals, SAR, Permeability, Water holding capacity, Porosity

Contaminant threshold level given by USEPA

At all stockyard locations, construction machinery parking / refueling / maintenance locations set-up by contractor. Exact sampling spot at the yard as directed by PMC (Pollution Monitoring Committee)

At the start and end of construction activity at the relevant location

One time sample annually till construction phase is completed

Ch

aap

ter 5

: En

viro

nm

en

tal M

on

iterin

g

Pla

n

5.7



Ecology Monitoring of tree felling during pre-construction & construction

Number of trees to be fell as laid out in project detail design

At all locations/sections where tree is fell

During tree felling

Initially

Marine Water Biology

Primary productivity, Aquatic weeds, Enumeration of phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthos, Fisheries, Diversity indices, Tropics levels, Rare and endangered species

Pre-project baseline assessment values Latest Standard techniques (APHA et. al. 2012) to be followed for sampling and measurement

Considering probable impact, sampling points and number of samples to be decided on personal judgment within 10 km radius from the proposed site, dredge disposal site etc.

Once in each season


Traffic Volume Road Traffic volume, characteristics and speed

As per relevant IRC specifications

At all artery roads leading to construction site

Each on working and non working day in each season

Thrice in a year marking peak, medium and low construction activity at the site, hourly traffic during day & night time

Socio-economic Survey

Basic amenities and infrastructure

CSR Guidelines

At all villages within 10 km radius from the port site

Regular meeting with nearby villagers

Once in each quarter

Note: Institutional Responsibility: The monitoring work can be outsourced to MoEF/CPCB/SPCB recognized and NABL accredited agency, appointed by KSIIDC. However, the overall responsibility of supervision will lie with the PMC, Port Authority. Further, in-house monitoring capability needs to be developed in due course of time, within a year.

Ch

aap

ter 5

: En

viro

nm

en

tal M

on

iterin

g

Pla

n

5.8

Table 5.2

Summary of Environmental Monitoring Plan: Operation Phase



Air Quality PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, HC

NAAQS-CPCB Minimum 4 locations in the project impact area. One in upwind side, more in downwind side / impact zone on land only.

Once a week 24/8 hrs for 2 consecutive working days

Noise Levels Leq-day, Leq-night

CPCB noise standards

2 to 4 locations in the project impact area including infrastructure corridor representing different receptors/land use

Once a month 1 hour each during day & night during the peak and normal operation period

Water Quality (Surface & Ground Water)

Physico-chemical parameters, Nutrients and Organic parameters, Heavy metals

Drinking water quality Standards

All surface water bodies and 5-10 groundwater samples from hand pumps and dug wells within 5 km radius of port site and within infrastructure corridor study area.

Once in each season

One grab sample from each groundwater source and one composite sample from each surface water body

Marine Water Quality

pH, Turbidity, SS, TDS, Salinity, Temperature, DO, BOD, Faecal coliforms and other chemical parameters monitored during pre- project baseline assessment

As per Standard Techniques (APHA et. al. 2012, CPCB guidelines) to be followed for sampling and analysis

Considering probable points and number of samples to be decided on personal judgment within 5 km radius from the proposed site, dredge disposal site etc,

Once in each season Also before and after maintenance dredging activity


Soil Quality Particle size distribution, Texture, pH, Electrical conductivity, CEC, Alkalinity, metals, SAR, Permeability, Water holding capacity, Porosity

Contaminant threshold level given by USEPA

All stockyard locations, Accidental spill sites impact, sampling Debris disposal sites, if any Soil quality of nearby villages

In the event of an accident Once during post monsoon season Annually

One time sample

Ch

aap

ter 5

: En

viro

nm

en

tal M

on

iterin

g

Pla

n

5.9



Ecology Survival rate of plantation

- At all locations of compensatory plantation and landscaping

Annually ---

Marine Water Biology

Primary productivity, Aquatic weeds, Enumeration of phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthos, Fisheries, Diversity indices, Tropics levels, Rare and endangered species

Pre-project baseline assessment values Latest Standard techniques (APHA et. al. 2012) to be followed for sampling and measurement

Around the anticipated impact zone of dredging

Before and after each maintenance dredging/ dredge disposal work

Grab samples from different locations

Traffic Volume Rail/Road Traffic volume, characteristics and speed

As per relevant IRC specifications

At all artery roads/rail leading to port site including KSIIDC owned infrastructure corridor

Each on working and non working day in each season for 1 year

Thrice in a year marking peak, medium and low construction activity at the site, hourly traffic during day & night time

Socio-economic Survey

Socio-economic indicators of region, basic amenities, infrastructure, health, education, road etc.

Corresponding Baseline values, CSR Policy

At all villages within 10 km radius from the port site

Proportionate, stratified and random sampling once in a year

Periodic discussions with villagers for improvement in QOL of the people of the region

Note: Institutional Responsibility: The monitoring work can be outsourced to MoEF/CPCB/SPCB recognized and NABL accredited agency, appointed by KSIIDC. However, the overall responsibility of supervision will lie with the PMC, Port Authority. Further, in-house monitoring capability needs to be developed in due course of time, within a year.

CChhaapptteerr 66

EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

PPllaann

6.1 Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

An EMP is an implementation plan to mitigate and offset the adverse

environmental impacts of the project and to protect and where possible, it sets out in

detail, the process of implementing mitigation and compensatory measures, the timing of

these measures. EMP should be viewed as a legal commitment on the part of the

proponent to minimize environmental impacts. The process of Environmental Planning

Process (EPP) is shown in Fig. 6.1.

Ports should successfully integrate full consideration of environmental

resources, including mitigation of unavoidable adverse impacts, into the planning and

construction of berths at Tadadi Port.

In many instances, it has been found that successful implementation of EMP

has resulted in reduction in project costs in the long run. This is because the EMP

contains proposals for optimum usage of available resources plans to address minor

faults at the initial stage (spills, leakage etc. can be minimized using components like

safety valves, pressure relief valves). Disaster Management Plans to respond to

accidents.

Communities rely on the marine resources for their livelihood so it becomes

Chapter 6: Environmental Management

Plan

6.2

absolutely necessary to maintain a clean and usable waterfront. The environmental

management process consists of defining an environmental policy developing plans for

Environmental Management Implementation of the EMP Monitoring.

Environmental auditing and life cycle assessments may also be incorporated

as an integral component of the EMP. Fig. 6.2 shows component of a generic

Environmental Management Plan.

6.1.1 Environmental Policy

In principle any port should define its environmental policy and ensure

commitment to its environmental system. The policy should be displayed at prominent

points in the port so that the people visiting the area are made aware of the do's and

don'ts involved in the operation and maintenance.

Port and Harbor projects fall under activity No.7 i.e. physical infrastructure

including environment services and under Category “A” as per notification of the MoEF

No.S.O.1533 14th September 2006.

6.2 Environmental Management System (EMS)

The EMS shall be developed at the proposed project appropriately to obtain

ISO governing certification, which may also be indirectly useful for withstanding the

current open competition in global economic system. The EMS shall broadly include:

Establishment and maintenance of documented environmental objectives

and targets at all relevant levels starting from quality assurance of

feed/fuels, at each relevant operation/function at individual utilities, offsites,

power modules etc. including environmental policy matters of the

organization

Allocating responsibilities at different levels for achieving the set objectives

and targets

In order to assess the performance of environmental management system,

periodical assessment studies by an independent agency would be highly

useful

A full-fledged environmental management cell with necessary infrastructure

shall be developed at proposed project

The environment management cell comprising experienced and qualified

personnel reporting to the port incharge regarding environmental


Plan

6.3

performance and monitoring of environmental quality shall be created at

each of major industry as well as for port as a whole. The suggested

staffing pattern at each unit should be as follows :

Environmental Engineer (B.E./M.E. Environmental Engineering with 5-10

years experience)

1

Chief Chemist (Post Graduate/Ph. D. in Chemistry with 10 years of

experience in Air , Water & wastewater and Soil analysis

2

Biologist/Ecology specialist 1

Chemists (Degree in Chemistry) 3

Laboratory Technicians 3

Plant (ETP&STP) operations & Field staff for sample collection 9

6.3 Budgetary Provision for EMP

Adequate budgetary provisions have to be made for executing the

environmental management plan as delineated above. The details of project cost, annual

recurring budget and capital investments to be earmarked for pollution control,

operation/maintenance, social welfare measures, and for green belt development are as

follows:

Sr. No.

Description Estimated Cost* (Rs. Crores)

1. Total Project Cost*

2. Pollution Control/Monitoring System

a) Capital

b) Recurring/annum

3. Green belt development/Waste and solid waste management waste water treatment plant

a) Capital

b) Recurring/annum

4. Social Welfare Measures/ activities including project affected people:

Health, sanitation, communication, street light, drinking water facilities, education, Transportation.

a) Capital

b) Recurring/annum

Total

* Estimated cost to be provided by the Project Developer


Plan

6.4

6.4 Construction Phase

6.4.1 Preparation of Site and Creation of Basic Facilities

Environmental pollution during construction phase will be mainly due to site

preparation and construction of bund and Berth structure for port. Terminal and conveyor

belts on port area. These activities will involve movement of substantial quantities of soil

to fill and/or raise the land height, hence during dry weather conditions it is necessary to

reduce nuisance due to dust emissions using dust suppression equipments. Further, all

disturbed slopes will be required to be stabilized before onset of monsoon. The

manpower required for these activities should preferably be employed from nearby

villages so that avenues of employment will be open to local people.

6.4.1.1 Basic Facilities

The site should be provided with sufficient and appropriate sanitary facilities in

order to maintain hygienic conditions. These facilities should be suitably designed and

well maintained so as to minimize adverse impacts. Workers engaged during construction

phase should be provided with temporary housing facilities at planned labour colonies

located preferably nearer to the project site within one km radius.

Independent facilities for drinking water and sanitation need to be provided for

each colony. The developer will be extracting water from surface water body identified

and permitted for operation, construction and operation phases of the project. No other

resources/water sources which are currently being used by the neighboring population for

the purpose of obtaining drinking water and/or water for irrigation or other purposes will

be tapped.

The only two credible sources of potential impacts arise from uncontrolled

runoffs from the labour camps and accidental spills of oil etc. into surface and

groundwater bodies. The selected contractor will be obligated to follow the procedures

detailed in the waste management plan and the waste disposal execution plan. These

measures will adequately mitigate the possibility of any negative impacts during

construction on water quality. The wastes such as, sanitary wastes will be treated in the

sewage treatment plant of appropriate size and technology.

Provision for adequate supply of kerosene and diesel will be made for workers

living in colonies as well as site in order to prevent cutting of wood.

Effect of increased noise levels during the construction stage will be negligible


Plan

6.5

on nearby villages. However, onsite workers will be provided with Personal Protection

Equipment (PPE) including noise protection devices such as ear-muffs.

To ensure that the local inhabitants are not exposed to any hazard, the site will

be secured by fencing and manned entry points. The onsite workers will be provided with

safety measures and made aware about hazard prone areas.

6.4.1.2 Construction Equipments and Waste

It will be ensured that both gasoline and diesel vehicles required during

construction are maintained properly to minimize smoke and emissions from exhausts.

The area for maintenance of vehicles will be so located that contamination of

groundwater by accidental spillage of oil could be prevented. The unauthorized dumping

of waste will be prohibited and composite waste will be burnt in a controlled manner.

Particular care will be taken to ensure that the spent chemical wastes are neutralized /

treated before disposal.

6.4.1.3 Transportation of Materials and Waste

Regulate vehicle speed, periodic maintenance of vehicles, during

transportation provide masks for workers, and ensure proper covering for

materials (like tarpaulin cover). Periodic emission check for vehicles and

ensure use of good fuel for vehicles

Material handling conveyors will be covered

Waste materials will not be openly burnt

Provide impermeable membrane to minimize the leachates

Estimation of recharge capacity and plan for procurement of water from far

away sites will be done

Construct dikes, beams for prevention for increased turbid runoff

Stockpiles of materials will be located at least 100m away from waterfront

Control sedimentation by frequent removal of dumped material from water

body / ocean


Plan

6.6

6.5 Operation Phase


Measures proposed for mitigating impact on ambient air quality during the port

operations include the following:

Continuous sources of emissions such as DG sets and boilers will be

installed with sufficient number of stacks and of sufficient height (KPCB

norms) to ensure adequate dispersion of pollutants. Further, pollution

control systems such as low NOX burners and Sulphur free fuels will be

used as a fuel.

Gas powered or low sulphur diesel and unleaded petrol in conventional

vehicles will be used within the port area and for evacuation. Where

possible, efforts will be made to use no-emission vehicles such as electric

and fuel cell powered vehicles

Burning of solid or oil wastes will be avoided, unless in appropriate

incinerators

Storage areas and conveying systems will be adequately covered during

the handling of materials, to reduce or completely eliminate fugitive

emissions. Free fall of materials will be minimized by installation of

telescoping arm loaders and conveyors, to further minimize the fugitive

dust emission

It will be ensured that transport vehicles are covered. Whenever possible

idling of vehicles will also be minimized during transport and handling

activities

On-loading/Off-loading and storage areas will be paved to reduce dust

emissions

6.5.1.1 Discharge of pollutants to the air from operation of ships will be reduced

by using the following controls:

Efforts will be taken to encourage the use of alternative fuels and fuel

mixture in ships and keep fuel control systems in proper working

conditions

Fuel leaks will be prevented from on-land equipment, vehicle fueling by


Plan

6.7

considering installation and maintenance of vapour recovery systems

where required and/or appropriate. Further, installation of leak detection

systems and conduction of leak detection tests on fuel systems will be

done including distribution lines and tanks.

6.5.1.2 Management of Ambient Air Quality

During the construction phase, chronic gaseous emissions are expected from

the diesel generator (s). All other emission sources are intermittent and include emissions

from materials transport, from heavy vehicles on site and from marine vessels. Though

the gaseous emissions are not expected to contribute significantly to the ambient air

quality, some generic measures to reduce fugitive and gaseous (pollutants) emissions

during construction phase include the following:

The storage and handling of spoil, sub-soils, top-soils and materials will be

carefully managed to minimize the risk of windblown material and dust,

e.g., by the use of cover sheets like tarpaulin sheets

Those sections of the working area with vehicular traffic will be damped by

controlled applications of water sprays (e.g. by water blowers) as

conditions dictate.

There will be no on-site burning of any waste arising from any construction

activities

All vehicles delivering dusty construction materials to the site or removing

spoil will be enclosed and covered to prevent escape of dust.

In areas where the soils contain large quantities of silt and fine sand, which

has a tendency to blow in dry conditions, the Contractor will be responsible

for ensuring that particular attention will be paid towards dust suppression.

Vehicles or equipments will be checked for pollutant emissions over

stipulated norms

Vehicle engines will not be left running when not in use.

The engines and exhaust systems of all vehicles and equipments will be

maintained so that exhaust emissions will not reach statutory limits (set for

that vehicle/equipment type and mode of operation by (KPCB), and that all

vehicles and equipment are maintained in accordance with manufactures

guidance.


Plan

6.8

The exhausts of other equipment used for construction (e.g. generators)

will be positioned at a sufficient height to ensure dispersion of exhaust

emissions and meet the standards set by KPCB


The post-project noise levels at the nearest habitation will be less than the

stipulated standards of KPCB. However, as a good operational procedure, the following

generic measures will be implemented:

Similar measures as proposed in the construction phase for DG sets and

other noise making machinery, to ensure practically low noise levels within

the work environment. The major areas of concern for noise generation will

be adequately addressed by considering it during procurement of the

machinery from vendors, project implementation stage. Further feedback

from the monitored noise levels at sensitive locations will be taken to

ensure that the impact due to high noise levels is practically minimized.

Monitor job and locations specific noise levels for compliance with HSE

regulations by verifying acceptability of noise levels caused by the project

activities and comparison with noise criteria.

Conduct periodic audiometric tests for employees working close to high

noise levels, such as the loading and unloading sections

Provision of PPE’s will be done and their proper usage will be ensured for

eardrum protection of the workers as well as visitors

6.5.2.1 Management of Ambient Noise Quality

Considering the impact scenario on ambient noise levels due to operation of

transport vehicles and construction equipments, some of the mitigation measures

proposed for noise environment protection during the construction phase are the

following:

Noise from DG set shall be controlled by providing acoustic enclosure to

DG sets area. The enclosure shall be designed for minimum 25 dB (A)

insertion loss. The performance of acoustic enclosure will be checked by

measuring noise levels in different direction at 0.5 m from the enclosure

Each item of powered machinery used on site will be properly maintained

and serviced so as to prevent unnecessary noise emissions. All items of


Plan

6.9

plant operating on the site in intermittent use will be shut down in the

intervening periods between uses

Any item of equipment found to be emitting excessive noise levels due to a

faulty silencer, broken or ill-fitting engine covers or other reasons, will

immediately be taken out of service and be adequately serviced, repaired

or replaced

The design of the port will be such that the sound pressure level in the work

area will not exceed 85 dB(A). Restricted areas will be those locations where it is not

reasonably practicable to reduce the noise level below the work area limit. Wherever

practicable, attempts shall be made to reduce the noise level below 90 dB(A). The noise

levels will not exceed 60 dB(A) at the perimeter of the port area. The equipment will be

chosen in such a way that the above noise limit should not be exceeded.


The project developer has committed not to use other water resources

available at the site during operation stage of the project as well. Water for the project will

be drawn from the Ganga Vali River.

The operations will ensure that there will be no impact on surface or

groundwater quality in the region due to disposal of untreated waste. The sewage from

the ships will be treated within the ships, in the absence of such facilities (e.g., in older

vessels, barges), the sewage will be brought for treatment in the sewage treatment plant

on land. Therefore it is not likely that there would be any risks of contamination of surface

or groundwater as a result of the effluent or waste discharge from the ships. Oily wastes

from the ships will also not affect any surface or groundwater, as ships will not be allowed

to release any oily bilge waste or ballast water within port limits. Regular monitoring of

water quality will be carried out at the port site and in nearby surface bodies to keep track

of adverse environmental changes.

6.5.3.1 Disposal of Maintenance Dredge Spoil

The disposal logistics of maintenance dredge spoil has been carefully planned

based on economic considerations and meeting acceptable standards for its disposal.

The locations identified also have low productivity will be dispose of dredged material

after knowing its quality. If necessary to install effective sediment control measures before

starting work would be adopted, so as to prevent the entry or re-suspension of sediment


Plan

6.10

in the water body. Sediment control measures would be monitored regularly to ensure

that they are properly disposed. The following control measures will be followed:

Dredge on calm days to minimize the suspension of fine sediment particles

into the water column.

Dredging operation will almost always re-suspend sediments, but the level

of re-suspension and associated impact depend on the physical and

chemical characteristic of the sediment, as well as the site conditions, type

of equipment and dredging method. The impacts of dredging activities are

strongly influenced by the contamination of the sediment and local factors

like water depth, rate of flow, tidal currents, wave action, type of seabed

and sediment concentration of the water under natural circumstances, as

well as the dredging method.

Alteration of the bottom topography and hydrography and destruction of

local habituates and the risk of direct physical/mechanical stress to

species re-suspension of sediments will also increase turbidity.

6.5.3.2 Disposal of Material

Dredging

The types of dredging equipment is decided on the basis of the soil profile and

hydrodynamic conditions such as current, waves etc., The two type of dredger proposed

are Trailing suction hopper Dredger and Cutter Suction Dredger.

The dredging materials consist of sand, fine sand, silt and clay. Based on the

result of the bathymetric survey and the navigation channel dimension, the total dredging

quantity is estimated to be 50000000 m3, of which 27000000 m3 correspond to the outer

navigation channel and 23000000 m3 correspond to the inner navigation channel and

turning circle respectively. The quantities of the dredging to be carried out will be

minimized by optimization. The portion of the dredged material is proposed to be used to

for reclamation of the port land area is 18000000 m3 and remaining portion of the dredge

material viz., 32000000 m3 is proposed to disposed off in the offshore deep sea area

Fig.6.3.

The material dredged will be party used for filling or reclamation of the backup

area of the port and the balance will be disposed into the deep sea. As the material


Plan

6.11

dredged by the cutter dredger will have better geotechnical characteristics, they will be

used for reclamation purposes (18000000 m3).

In the case of the trailing suction hopper dredger, the dredged material end up

in a large onboard hold called a “Hopper”. A hopper dredger usually has doors/walves in

its bottom to empty the dredged materials, but some dredges empty their hopper by

splitting in to two halves of their hull. When the hopper is filled with slurry, the dredger

stops dredging and goes to a dump site where it empties its hopper.

In case the dredged material consists of sand which is suitable for reclamation,

the material is pumped to shore by the inboard pumps through a pipeline.

6.5.3.3 Dredged Material Management Plan

A detailed dredged material management plan will be drawn up in consultation

with the contractor.

6.5.3.4 Ship Generated Wastes

For a ship at berth, provision will be made of a specially equipped pump truck

to receive sewage and transport it to the treatment plant for further processing. Similarly,

arrangement will be required to offload solid waste from such ships for planned disposal.

The IMO stipulation requires that port/berth that regularly handles deep-sea ships should

be equipped with facilities to accept and dispose of up to 100 t of oily ballast and bilge

water.

These pump trucks will transport the wastes to the treatment facility where the

oil is separated from water in a standard grit/oil separator. The IMO guidelines permit the

discharge of water contaminated with oil, in harbour area provided the oil content is less

than 15 mg/l. Such facilities will be created at the project site and the effluent will be

released in the coastal water at the location identified for disposal of treated sewage.

Further, adequate vigilance measures and deterrents will be put in place to ensure the

adherence of ships and related regulations to prevent clandestine release.

6.5.3.5 Sediment Transport and Quality

The potential sources of impacts on sediment transport and quality during the

construction phase will be due to excavation, filling & disposal of capital dredging spoil.

The disposal of capital dredge spoil will be carried out in accordance with the

dredged disposal scheme planned based on modeling simulations so that the impact on

sediment quality is minimal. The selection and operation of dredging equipment and


Plan

6.12

coincidence of dredging schedules with low flow periods will be considered wherever

practical, to reduce turbidity and sediment re-suspension.

The sediment dispersed in the water column during construction may settle

elsewhere thereby causing minor change in the texture of the sediment. However, no

further mitigation measures are required considering the existing dynamic regime in the

project area that changes the character of the inter-tidal and near shore sub-tidal

sediment on shorter time scales.

6.5.3.6 Marine Environment

During Construction of berth, marine ecosystem will be disturbed as a result of

dredging, foundation and erection. The following measures are recommended to

minimize the impacts:

The construction of berth should be planned to minimize the number of

construction days so that the effect will be minimized.

Spillage of chemicals, paints, fuel oil etc. should be avoided

6.5.3.7 Marine Water Quality

The potential impacts on marine water quality may arise primarily due to

disposal of capital dredged spoil. The excavation and reclamation activities in the port site

areas for construction of berth would also dispose the bed sediment in water column

there by increasing the suspended solid in water. This will be mainly in the form of

increased sediment load and a certain amount of pollutants (particulate, dissolved

inorganic and organic). However, the effects of pollution are unlikely to be severe since

construction activities are not of the dimensions of operational activities or nor are likely to

be as intense and sustained. It is also likely that the high energy tidal regime may help in

rapid dispersal of the excess sediments and even carry them away from the site

proposed for development.

There is a distinct advantage of reduction in time of marine construction

operations by fabricating the structures (pre-cast structures) such as beams, modules,

slabs etc., in a yard on land and transporting them to the site for assembling. Given that

this is also economically efficient, it is expected that marine operations for construction

will be as limited and short as possible. As a part of the management strategy, it is

advantageous to coordinate various activities to avoid time-overruns, and complete the

project within an agreed time schedule.


Plan

6.13

The intertidal and near shore sub-tidal segments outside the port area will be

restored to their original contours once the construction activities are completed. General

clean-up used for construction related activities, adjacent to intertidal areas, creeks etc.

will be undertaken and entire discarded materials will be removed from the site and

aesthetic quality of the surroundings restored, once the construction operations area

over.

6.5.3.8 Development of Marine Facility and Environmental Management

During construction of terminals berths and conveyor belts marine ecosystem

will be disturbed due to sequential activities viz. dredging, foundation and erection. Hence

project proponent should look into following suggestions:

Minimize onsite construction to reduce number of construction days

wherever possible using prefabricated structure

As port is to cater 4 No. of vessels of 100,000 DWT for ore/coal vessels

and 3 No. of 40,000 DWT, general cargo vessels. The width of berth is

50m. a length of 990 m has been provided for berthing 4 No. of 100,000

DWT and 550 m length has been provided for berthing 3 No. of 40000

DWT vessel. However considering the future expansion for the general

cargo, an additional two berths are proposed as an extension to the

multipurpose terminal on the North Western side. Even though the

envisaged vessel size are 40,000 DWT for the multipurpose terminal all

the berth structures have been designed to accommodate 100000 DWT

vessels considering the future expansion after the completion of the port

facilities. After completion of port with expansion there will not be any

future repetition of dredging otherwise it will disturb the aquatic

environment (bottom flora and fauna).

No wastewaters due to domestic activity will be discharged into seawater

at site of construction.

6.5.3.9 Water Facility and Site Sanitation

Water will only from approved locations

The site should be provided with sufficient and appropriate sanitary

facilities in order to maintain hygienic conditions in the camps of

construction labors


Plan

6.14

Sanitation facilities should be suitably designed and well maintained so as

to minimize adverse impacts

Provide septic tanks for collection of domestic sewage


The developer will take adequate preventive measures to ensure that there are

no disposals of solid wastes generated from port or ship operations and that there are no

unconfined spillages which may contaminate the soil. Following measures are

recommended to mitigate adverse impacts on land activities during operation phase:

Development of greenbelt with carefully selected plant species is of prime

importance due to their capacity to reduce noise and air pollution impacts

by attenuation/assimilation and for providing food and habitat for local

macro and micro fauna. This not only overcomes the problem but also

enhances the beauty of area that will attract bird and insect species and by

this way ecology of the area will be maintained to great extent

Survival rate of the planted trees should be closely monitored and the trees

which could not survive should be counted and replaced by equal number

of trees

The rainwater harvesting should be done. Treated sewage and effluent in

the best combination should be used for greenbelt development. Water

scarcity should not be the reason for not expanding and strengthening

greenbelt. Provision for irrigation water should be made as part of

proposed project

6.5.4.1 Landuse/Landscape

Creation of land due to reclamation will result in changes in the landscape and

landuse in the region. No existing land is being sought for the construction of the berth.

The generic mitigation measures that will be implemented during construction phase are

presented in the following paragraphs.

The development of the berth will be done with due regard for local

development plans. It will be ensured that the proposed landuse for the berth

development is compatible with the surrounding landuse. The land use plan will be

developed with attractive rural design of the terminal operation building area to enhance

the aesthetic quality of the area. Feasible, isolated land pockets created by port


Plan

6.15

developments will be designated for specific natural uses and left undisturbed to allow

natural succession. This measure will mitigate the small change in land use caused due

to construction and future expansions.

6.5.4.2 Soil Quality

The construction of the berth will be carried out in the inter-tidal and the sub-

tidal area and hence no major impacts are anticipated on the soil quality. The solid

wastes or any other non-biodegradable wastes that have leaching characteristics will be

disposed at KPCB approved landfill sites. In the unlikely event that the soil quality is

found sensitive, contaminated soil will be removed for bio-remediation. Provision will be

made for a secure land fill site to reduce mobilization of potential contaminants into soil.

Land environment management plan will be implemented for all land-based

construction operations. In areas, where soil quality for natural vegetation is of critical

concern, loosening of soil in such areas will be done to mitigate soil compaction caused

due to operation of heavy machinery.

A storm water drainage system will be planned and implemented in and around

the areas designated for handling material to avoid penetration, seepage and drainage of

contaminated surface water and heavy metals into the soil.

6.5.4.3 Quarry Material Sources

Quarrying does change the natural topography of the area, and a reinstatement

plan suggested to quarry operator will aim at restoring the topography. One possible

beneficial use of the post quarrying area could be to use it as a catchment area for

rainwater harvesting and storage. Discussions with the local communities near the quarry

areas will help in selecting the optimal reinstatement plan.

An appropriate Occupational Exposure Limit for the quarry operations will be

identified based on the following hierarchy; in each case the most stringent limit shall be

applied:

Limits as adopted in Indian Legislative requirements, if available and

where applicable

The Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents

and Biological Indices. Issued annually and published by the American

Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)

Depending on the actual risk, protection measures may include:


Plan

6.16

Engineering controls

Suppression of dust, for instance by wetting

Enclosed driver cabins

Personal protective equipment (PPE) for the workers if the above

measures appear insufficient

6.5.4.4 Hydrology

Standard construction procedures will be implemented to ensures that the

impact on surface drainage pattern and soil erosion is kept minimal. This will necessarily

include avoiding blockage of natural surface drainage or otherwise developing

appropriate drainage system in areas, where it is unavoidable.

6.5.4.5 Morphology

The initial studies carried out on coastal morphology do not reveal erosion of

any coastal stretch.

However, due to dredging and disposal of dredged material the impact on

seabed morphology is marginal and within the realms of acceptability given the nature of

operations.

6.5.4.6 Greenbelt Development

The greenbelt development at proposed port will be of a suitable width along

the periphery of port area including residential complex, space between the units located

within the port, along the internal roads, railway sidings, the hazardous waste disposal

facilities.

Objectives

Objectives of Greenbelt development ranges from the micro level air pollution

abatement to enhancement of socio-economic status of the region.

a) The prime objective of greenbelt development is attenuation of air and

noise pollution

b) Greenbelt development can serve as a measure, to reduce the soil erosion

and aesthetic enhancement of the area

c) Greenbelt development also serves as a measure for treated waste water

utilization and CO2 sequestration

d) It generates employment avenues for local agriculture workers.


Plan

6.17

Selection of Greenbelt Plant Species

For the development of greenbelt at proposed project site, suitable plant

species shall be selected based on the following criteria apart from agro-climatic as well

as existing flora characteristics of the particular project area:

The species should be indigenous

Thick canopy cover

Perennial/evergreen to the extent possible

High sink potential for major air pollutants at proposed project

Resistant to specific air pollutants, disease & Insect

Ability to tolerate the particular weather and climate as well as soil

characteristics at project site

The “Guidelines for Development of Greenbelts” published by CPCB shall be

strictly followed by project proponent. As per CPCB guidelines, the project site and

surrounding study area falls in agro-climatic zone of west-coast plains and ghat region as

well as coastal midland sub-zone with dry sub-humid & perhumid climate and Red loamy,

coastal alluvium laterite soils (Uttar Kannada district). The plant species recommended by

CPCB particularly for the project area along with the local plant species identified during

field survey are given in Table 6.1 for development of greenbelt at proposed port project

site.

Guidelines for plantation

The plant species identified for greenbelt development should be planted using

pitting technique. The pit size should be either 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm or 60 cm x 60 cm x

60 cm, bigger pit size is preferable for marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling

the pit should be mixed with well decomposed farm yard manure or sewage sludge at the

rate of 2.5 kg for 45cm x 45 cm x 45 cm pits and 3.6 kg for 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm size

pits on dry weight basis. The filling of plantation pits should be completed at least 5-10

days prior to actual sapling plantation. Healthy saplings of the selected species should be

planted in each pit.

Roadside Plantation

Roadside plantation plays equally important role for increasing the vegetative

cover & tree shade in project area, improvement of aesthetics and for eco-development.


Plan

6.18

The approach roads to project site, colony, hospitals, etc. should be planted with avenue

trees and flowering plantation. Tadadi port site adequate care should be taken to uplift the

regional ecosystem through road side plantations, agro-forestry/waste land

afforestation/social forestry programmes in surrounding villages. The local

NGOs/voluntary organizations should take necessary initiative to encourage the massive

plantations along the roads, especially NHs & SH near study area. Trees planted on both

sides of roads are proven to increase aesthetic value as well as shady area on the roads

apart from attenuation of air pollution impacts. The species identified for roadside

plantations are:

Azadirachta indica Evergreen

Cassia fistula Deciduous

Cassia siamea Evergreen

Casuarina equisetifolia Evergreen

Dalbergia latifolia Semi-deciduous

Delonix regia Deciduous

Ficus religiosa Evergreen

Nerium indicum Evergreen

Peltophorum pterocarpum Evergreen

Polyalthia longifolia Evergreen

Thevetia peruviana Evergreen


There are no potential sources of impacts on terrestrial biology during berth

operation. However, coal dust from transport system need to be properly controlled

throughout its operation.

Dredged spoil generated during the maintenance dredging will also be

disposed at the low lying sites (if suitable for reclamation). The ecology of these sites as

well as surroundings will have special significance due to the plantation of the trees

where the dredged spoils/sediment is spread to the area.

As part of the general Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Premises, it will

be ensured that the intertidal and near shore sub-tidal segments outside the project area

will be restored to their original contours, once the construction activities are completed.

General clean-up along the corridor used for construction related activities, adjacent

intertidal areas, creeks etc. will be undertaken and all the discarded materials would be


Plan

6.19

removed from the site and aesthetic quality of the surroundings is restored, once the

construction operations are over.

6.5.5.1 General Marine Ecosystem

Project area is ecologically very sensitive and spillages of material during

loading/unloading operations and other such impacts are likely to influence the marine

biological environment adversely. However, appropriate technology and contemporary

standards and procedures would be selected to minimize possibility of such an

occurrence. The guiding principle of marine environment management is to ensure that

the perturbations due to the proposed coastal activities are within the assimilative

capacity of the coastal marine environment of harbour area. A plan of actions for

mitigating the predicted adverse effects will be prepared approximately.

6.5.5.2 Fisheries

Impacts on fish or fisheries are expected as the activities of port are on estuary

of the river. However, the impacts on fish and the livelihoods of people dependent on

fishing will be closely monitored and a suitable compensation scheme will be evolved.

6.5.5.3 Terrestrial Biology

The measures enumerated earlier will be entrusted in all contractual and

procedural obligations of the contractors and owner’s team deployed at site for the

construction. This will ensure that the measures as enumerated are enforced. Otherwise,

there are no potential sources of impacts envisaged on terrestrial biology during the berth

operations.

6.5.5.4 Aquatic Biology

The impact on biological environment during the construction phase would be

due to the erection of structures, capital dredging, filling, shore protection measures on

the intertidal area etc. The impacts on marine ecology due to such activities would be

largely confined to the duration over which the activities are spread. The alterations in

marine biota would recover and regenerate over a period of time once construction

activities are completed. No mitigation measures are possible other than using

environmentally friendly construction technologies and internationally acceptable

standards of construction. Through deforestation of mangroves during construction phase

is not envisaged, any disturbance would be compensated by planting double number of

mangrove plants. All efforts should be made to reinstate the site.


Plan

6.20

6.5.6 Socio-economic and Public Interest

It was observed that the awareness about the project was quite high among the

people. The respondents during survey conducted have expressed their expectations

from project authorities specifically related to increased job opportunities. While planning

for manpower requirement the expectations should be given due consideration so as to

create good will for the project.

Medical and drinking water facilities in few nearby villages were observed to be

very poor. Project management should extend their help to improve these facilities under

programmes of welfare activity. Efforts should also be made to raise social set up of the

region through subsidies.

The literacy level is satisfactory; technically qualified people would not be

available in the initial phase of the project. Hence, schemes for apprentice training could

be worked out leading to availability of technical manpower from the region.

6.5.6.1 Loss of Land, Livelihoods, Health and Safety

The construction of the port will have no socio-economic impact due to loss of

land as the entire port area is located on waterfront, inter-tidal (bin-number) land.

Similarly the fishing activities taking place today in project area are limited to offshore

area and port will be constructed in the estuarine zone. Thus, livelihood of the local

population due to this project is expected to get disturbed. Similarly nearly 500 m from the

Tadadi Jetty, sea shell mining is presently run by M/s Gaokar. They will lose their

business for selling the shell which is used for preparing sweet lime. This is used in pan,

pan masala, surka and bulbus excreta used as poultry fish food.

Typically, infrastructure projects like port/harbour bring with them a host of

opportunities in the ancillary areas of activities attached with port operations. This could

include provision of maintenance services and other service/manufacturing contracts. The

developer remains committed to maximize employment and income generation

opportunities for the local communities and will develop suitable mechanisms for the

same.

The movement of heavy equipment will be done with proper precaution to

prevent any accidents on the road. Occupational risk would be minimized at the port site

through safety measures.


Plan

6.21

Safety training will be provided to all construction workers on operation of

equipment. Security and fencing during non-working hours will also be provided to ensure

that there is no uncontrolled access to the machinery and equipment.

All construction workers will be medically examined prior to recruitment. The

contractors will also be vigilant to detect workers showing symptoms of communicable

diseases. All illness and incidents shall be reported and recorded at field unit of HSE.

Co-operative and open working relations should be established and

maintained throughout the life of the project

Preventive measures should be taken for controlling the pollution, which

may arise from the project

Unsanitary conditions cause number of health problems and sanitary

facilities area inadequate in rural area so project authority must arrange

different programs for enhancing cleanliness and reducing unsanitary

conditions

Awareness programs will be arranged by the project proponent based on

the common health problems caused in the region that will help to reduce

health status of the region

6.5.6.2 Status of the Fishing activities around the Port Site and Management Plan

Tadadi village is traditionally important village for fishing and marketing of fish.

Aghanashini River flowing through Tadadi is one of the sources for fishing. The fisherman

cooperative at Tadadi is one of the most active marketing forums for fishes in the Taluka

Tadadi in located on a picturesque estuary created by Aghanashini River. Aghanashini is

only free flowing river on the Western Ghats which joins the Arabian Sea at Aghanashini

village near Tadadi. The confluence of Aghanashini with Arabian Sea provides an

advantage to set up a port in the village. The estuary is also natural house of mangroves

area. The government has acquired about 566 hectares of land required for project, some

area of land is under water.

Tadadi being a minor port is under the administrative control of the Public

Works and Inland Water Transport Department. The existing facilities are a light house;

an RCC Jetty and transit shed with current draft of 2.5m. As per the social impact study

theoretical total population in the affected region is 5690 households representing from

different communities (refers from Social impact assessment report, January, 2012).


Plan

6.22

However, the actual number may vary as each source of information has given different

numbers of households. Group of villages depends on fishing and shell-fish collection in

Aghanashini River which is close to the port location another group of villages engaged in

fishing in the land region area is acquired for port development and some people depend

upon sea fishing through Tadadi port.

Aghanashini River flowing through Tadadi is one of the sources for fishing.

The fishermen having corporative society at Tadadi, they have most active marketing

forums for fishes in the taluka. Most of the communities that are directly dependent on the

port for fishing. The clusters are identified based on the type of livelihood activities that

the communities depend on the port region.

There are two groups. Most of the group of villages are dependent on fishing

and shell-fish collection in Aghanashini River which is close to the port location. The

other group of villages engaged in fishing in land region that acquired for port construction

and some villages depend on sea fishing through Tadadi Port. Salt production regions

such as Sanekatta and Nagarbaillu are also an economic source of the people.

An in depth analysis of the result of the villages survey reveals that if the

proposed port development project comes up in Tadadi, about 188 fishermen household

and 98 other caste households will be affected directly and the livelihoods of about 116

people from eight villages depend mainly on the Sangama region where the Aghanashini

River joining the Arabian sea. In Tadadi about 38 household mainly depend on the land

tracts for in land fishing, which the KSIIDCL has now acquired for the port construction.

The livelihoods of 132 households from eight villages depend mainly on deep sea fishing

in Tadadi Mangalore, Malpe, Goa, Karwar and Honnavar.

Majority of fishermen depend on fishing activities like deep-sea fishing and

fishing cluster area. During the rainy season (Jun, July and August) all the fishing

communities depend on the port land region for their livelihoods as fishing in deep sea

and in the Sangama region are affected. Some fishermen also carryout fishing activity on

the land which is under sea water.

More households from the traditional fishermen community (such as Ambega

and Harikanth), who engage mainly in fishing activity, No-traditional fishermen

communities (such as Jalthar, Naik and Gowdar) who engage in fishing only partially as

they are involved in other livelihood activities as well. Due to the good income from the

fishing activities, Government scheme (Matsyaashay) and bank loan facilities, most of the


Plan

6.23

families have good house. They get good income from the fishing activity, enables to

educate their children, as their children are also engaged in fishing activity.

The major occupation of the household members from the same group are

engaged in finishing activities such as deep-sea fishing, in land fishing shell-fishing and

selling of fish dry fish in the village also the majority of the members engaged in these

activities belong to the younger group, another interesting fact is that the fishing activities

are dominated by men and selling activity by women.

Among the surveyed population 71% of them have no land for agriculture, and

a majority of them are traditional fishermen communities. The majority of the populations

are dependent on fishing for their livelihood. 23% of them have less than one acre land

and 5% of the households have 1 to 2 acres of land.

Fishermen from village like Madangere who depend mainly on fishing in the

566 hectares of land acquired for port feel that those land area like Gangi Kendra for the

fishermen as any time, throughout the year they do fishing and can get income for the

family. If the port construction comes up they have no choice as they do not have other

skill or have agricultural land to get income during the rainy season, villager those who

depend on sea fishing, such as prawns, crabs and other fish and get a good income.

6.5.6.3 Management Plan (Resettlement and Rehabilitation)

The fishing and related people in the Aghanashini River and around the area

will be definitely affected of their livelihood. People from the villages like Aghanashini

Kosakote that are very close to the Sangama region where the port will come up, they

fear that they would lose their houses, villages that are concerned may relocate from their

residential area. Which will be away from the sea and that would make it difficult to them

to continue their occupation. So far 286 fishermen house hold will be directly affected by

the port activities.

There are about 242 hectares of land used for salt production in Sanekatta

using the backwater from sea, about 350 families, and more than 300 workers in the salt

factory are engaged in this activity will affect their livelihood due to port activity.

The affected people must be given compensation as per the government

norms. The fishermen house hold will be affected from these villages:


Plan

6.24

Sr. No. Village

1. Belegan- Tadadi

2. Betakuli

3. Gangavali

4. Kimmani

5. Mirjan- Dori Bhahil

6. Morba

7. Nusikote

8. Tadadi

9. Madangere

10. Aganasi

11. Devanna

12. Devarbhavi

13. Hosakote

14. Masakal

15. Mudangi

16. Sanekatta

17. Thoraigajini

To compensate the people affected by the fishing activities a separate fishing

harbour should be constructed with more facilities like cold storage, space for parking,

and required materials like diesel, ice, fish trays etc. The harbor will be equipped with

latest technologies that assist the fishermen with satellite information about the natural

climatic location, identification of fish shoal and marketing network will be expanded

through the new sea port. The land of 1400 Acres proposed to be acquired in the

different villages are as follow:

Sr. No. Village Acres Guntas

1 Hilalmakki 288 36

2 Yemme Madi 126 26

3 Midla gazani 364 03

4 Hiregult 475 30

5 Morba 151 01

6 Torke 12 06


Plan

6.25

For the land is acquired from the farmer suitable compensation for the

Resettlement and Rehabilitation, will be paid according to the plan as per the

Government rule.

6.5.6.4 General Recommendations

Workers engaged during construction phase should be provided with

temporary housing facilities at planned labor colonies located preferably

nearer to project site

At the time of site clearance and construction, waste disposal management

plan should be implemented to mitigate the adverse impact on human

health.

Protection of workforce against dust emissions from construction and

transportation activities should be given in the form of nose caps and

masks, similarly workers doing the welding and painting job should be

provided with requisite safety equipment.

In built fire fighting to prevent emergencies developing into major threat

should be considered on top priority.

Fire siren/alarm should be provided

During transfer of the cast pre-molded blocks inbuilt safety circuits for

automatic shutdown will be provided and to maintain the limit level of

pressure or temperature parameters

Sufficient measures would be taken to ensure the workers from possible

casualties such as fallout of blocks, continuous exposure to thermal

radiations and emission from welding and VOCs from painting activities.

An operational manual would be prepared for instructions to the workers

depending on their levels and work categories.

In order to further improve the socio-economic environment, the authorities

should consider extending welfare measures to the local population under

the community development programme

Since there is a potential to accommodate operators/workers with different

trade expertise, local youths should be encouraged and supported for

training at the Industrial Training Institute (ITI), so that these locals having


Plan

6.26

minimum basic qualifications and aspiring for job opportunities can get

employment in the same region. This would reduce influx of migrating

population and stress on the existing infrastructure.

Provision of an adequate water distribution system including pier

installations for those connections to supply fresh water to ships.

Provision of adequate sewage collection, treatment and disposal systems

to serve the entire port complex including a shoreline interceptor for

receiving liquid wastes from all shoreline installations.

Special hose connections should be provided to allow ships to discharge

sewage, bilge wastes and other liquid wastes into the sewage collection

systems. Without these provisions, ships and onshore installations are

likely to discharge their wastewater directly into the port waters. Also,

provision should be made for removal of all floatable materials including oil

slicks.

Water supply and wastewater treatment system should be maintained

Regular monitoring should be carried out to identify adverse environmental

changes caused by pollution

Developing a plantation around the port, this is an effective method of

attenuation of waste residuals subsequent to pollution control measures.

6.6 Occupational Safety

The main safety hazards involve oily spills, splashes and fugitive emissions.

While handling iron ore and coal, proposed safety measures to prevent and reduce

accident among employees are:

Electrical equipment will be grounded and checked for defective

insulations

All elevated platforms, walkways, stairways and ramps would be equipped

with handrails, toe boards and non-slip surfaces

The maintenance personnel would be provided with special footwear,

masks and dust proof clothing

Keeping all walkways free from debris, cleaning up dust/plant spills and

excess water and regular inspection and maintenance would be done.


Plan

6.27

Electricity supply system, and maintenance work would be carried out in

the presence of a supervisor.

The noise levels within the port development facility would be kept lower

than 90 dB(A). If possible, those working with the equipment would have

alternative in-house measures to reduce noise level below 75 dB(A).

6.6.1 Safety Requirements for Handling and Transfer of Cargo

The organization structure would be well defined to ensure proper and

safe handling

Weather prediction updates from the IMD would be acquired daily during

the operation periods

The port limits should be clearly marked and the movement of other traffic

would be appropriately controlled during operations. The Department of

Fisheries needs to be notified for further information to local fishermen

Safe Operation Plans (SOP) should be prepared for every operation.

According to the SOP, a checklist should be prepared. These checklists

should be completed prior to any transfer operation. All operating crew

should be required to be familiar with such procedures. No procedure

should be by-passed to expedite unloading/loading of ships.

If barges are used, they should be double-hulled barges as per MARPOL

requirements, suitably designed for each chemical and approved by the

competent authority.

Pigging operations, flushing, washing, conditioning of pipelines, etc., will

be performed under the supervision of a qualified safety professional

Adequate security for the area should be provided to avoid risks due to

vandalism, theft, riots, etc. Efforts should be made to declare the area as a

"Prohibited Area"

Smoking at the operating areas viz., Port Area, tank farm, barge and ships

should be prohibited

All employees must wear cotton clothes. Synthetic clothing should not be

permitted. Shoes should not have nails or metallic components. But

should be provided with steel toe protection.


Plan

6.28

All vehicles entering into operating areas where petroleum products/

chemicals are handled should be fitted with spark arrestors

No tools should be permitted at the location during the loading and

unloading operations. Spark proof type tools have been reported to be

ineffective.

All personnel should be trained and experienced. Annual training and

refresher training lessons/courses should be provided to re-emphasise the

need for safety procedures and handling of emergency releases.

Adequate caution boards should be prominently placed to highlight the

hazards of the Chemicals. Notices such as 'No Smoking', 'No naked lights',

'No entry to unauthorized Persons' should be placed at different locations

of the premises

The flexible hoses should be appropriately colour coded for easy

identification of products to be handled

All hoses, pipelines and fittings should be inspected and monitored during

operation by the safety officer of the port.

During slack periods, the pipelines, hoses and pipe corridors should be

inspected closely for evidence of leakage

Wireless communications between operating personnel should be

provided

First aid kits should be provided at all locations. For emergencies,

protective clothing such as neoprene gloves or boots, safety goggles, self

breathing apparatus, fire-fighting suits, safety shower and eye wash

fountain, combination units, canister gas masks for the different organic

vapour should be readily available at the location

Unauthorized persons would not be permitted in the premises under any

circumstances. Drugged or intoxicated persons will not be permitted to

enter the port premises.

No person with matches or lighters would be permitted in the area of

operation.


Plan

6.29

No hot work, hammering, chipping etc., would be permitted without safety

work permit issued by the safety officer.

No flammable materials such cotton waste, canvass, bedding or similar

absorbent material would be permitted during operations or left near the

operating area.

Buoys marked as per international regulations will be positioned at the

appropriate places.

Restricted areas would be clearly marked. There would be a proper

environmental monitoring plan under the supervision of a designated

officer.

6.6.2 Safety Requirements for Port Area

Emergency Shut Down Valves (ESDV) would be provided along the

pipelines which are actuated under very low pressure (PSLL) downstream

of ESDV's

Manually Actuated Valves (MAV / SDV) would be provided for isolating

each hose in the event of emergency

Fire water hydrant and monitors would be provided in the jetty area. One

elevated fire water line with monitor would be provided to take care of fire

in the barge

Suitable fenders would be designed to prevent structural damage to the

barge/ship due to high approach velocity

The jetty would be equipped with appropriate public alarm systems,

hooters, sirens etc.

The jetty would have surface drains with required slope to drain and wash

spills. This drain should be lead into the collection pit on jetty and pumped

to the slop pit at the tank farm using a slop line

Every operation will take place only with hundred percent standby shore

personnel including shore operating officers, staff members, fire crew and

security personnel

Gas tests would be conducted using explosimeter ( use to measure the

amount of combustible gases present in a sample) periodically to ascertain


Plan

6.30

any leak

After every loading/unloading operations, equipment should be checked

and stored as per standard procedures

The control room should have blast proof glass

6.6.3 Fire-Fighting Requirements

The fire water system at the jetty end may be designed in accordance with

OISD guidelines-156 “Fire Protection Facilities for Port Oil Terminals”, to

meet the fire water flow requirements which is the single largest risk. The

facility may be classified as a high hazard ‘B’ type of occupancy

The fire-fighting system would be designed by a professional fire-fighting

consultant and frequently inspected. The system would consist of the

following basic components

Fire water system with surface type hydrants, landing valves with hose

pipes, hydrant nozzles and fog nozzles, Foam type fire extinguishers,

Portable foam tenders, Dry Powder, Carbon Dioxide

The organization structure for the fire-fighting crew would consist of

manager (Fire and Safety), fire officer, safety officer, safety inspectors,

pump-house supervisors, pump house operators, fire men and driver

The port facility must also have an arrangement with local fire-fighting

service for fire tender services. A direct line of contact for emergencies,

with the local fire-fighting service is essential. This should form a part of

Disaster Management Plan (DMP).

6.7 General Mitigation Measures Proposed

It is recognized that certain measures at a more generic level are applicable to

port and infrastructure projects. Accordingly, the developers should propose the following

additional measures:

The construction of the structures will be undertaken as per the plans

approved by the concerned local authorities/local administration, and will

conform to the provisions of the CRZ Notification and approved Coastal

Zone Management Plans of the Karnataka State.


Plan

6.31

The relevant state/center guidelines for ensuring a safe environment at the

site will be followed

To tackle situations of disasters like cyclones/storm, the developers will

prepare an emergency plan and also the ways and means for minimizing

as well as mitigating (to the extent possible) the cyclone disasters

In order to carry out the post-project environmental monitoring, the

developers would provide an environmental laboratory to carry out the

testing of various environmental parameters

The project would incorporate eco-friendly waste etc., for compositing

purpose at site; manure is prepared in consultation with the local

municipal/village authorities and the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB).

The developers would use all the organic and kitchen waste etc., for

compositing purpose at site, in consultation with the local municipal/village

authorities and the State Pollution Control Board

In-built fire-fighting facilities is made to prevent emergencies threat to

consider on top priority in the terminal. It will be ensured that fire

siren/alarm are suitably allocated at site

During transfer of local to storage, inbuilt safety circuits for automatic

shutdown be provided

6.8 Cyclone Contingency Plan

There is a disaster management authority of Government of Karnataka working

at Tadadi. The port authority with cooperation of disaster management authority shall

resettle population from low laying areas to the safe building Tadadi Port. Authority has to

construct eight RCC framed buildings for cyclone shelters and for storage of food to

overcome the emergency situation. Tadadi Port Trust must have its own water treatment

and distribution system. In the event of failure of electricity this system will continue to

operate by generators. The measures shall be taken by Tadadi Port as under:

A team of officers to be nominated by port to supervise rescue and relief

operation and disposal of animal carcasses in coordination with the local

and district administration

Preventive measures for epidemics to be taken by the medical department


Plan

6.32

Water supply and electricity to be given priority. The electrical cabling

network to be checked area wise in the port township by the Tadadi Port

The Secretary Tadadi Port will remain overall incharge of the Cyclone

Coordination Centre

The Secretary Tadadi Port shall make a duty roster for the manning of the

Cyclone Coordination Centre by the officers of administrative, finance and

accounts, and material management department

The coordination centre will keep in constant touch with the local and

district administration for rendering necessary assistance

The Port Public Relations Officer will ensure announcement by the mike in

the township indicating the precautionary measures to be taken.

6.8.1 Cyclone Watch

Ships must keep a continuous watch on VHF channel

Ships at berth / mooring anchor must prepare for leaving berth/ mooring

and keep the main engines ready for use at short notice

Ships alongside may continue to load / discharge at the discretion of the

Harbour Master (HM) and maintain stability of the ship.

HM will prepare special signals and promulgate them to the masters of the

vessels, dredgers, tugs and any other crafts in the port. He will inform the

masters of all vessels at the berths to double the moorings, put out

insurance wires and to keep engine ready to proceed out to sea if situation

warrants. Decision regarding sending ships to the anchorage will be taken

depending on the strength of the wind likely to be encountered and

number of vessels in the port.

Any ships wishing to berth must first seek the approval of the HM, which

will only be given if the ship can safely enter, carry out cargo operation and

depart before the cyclonic conditions affect the port

6.8.2 Cyclone Warning

Force winds are expected to impact within 24 hours.

The Port is closed for arrival


Plan

6.33

Ships at anchorage will leave the port if required by the port authority

Ships at berth will cease cargo operation and keep the vessel ready to

vacate berth depending on the strength of wind.

Ships alongside will be unberthed as soon as possible, under the

instruction of Tadadi Port

Small craft inside the port will go to strong moorings as per the instruction

of HM

Ships at berth will be expected to have left by 12 hours before the

expected cyclone impact Tugs will be secured in the wet basin and

manned

The Port will be opened again by the port authority only after the cyclone

has passed the area and they are satisfied that it is safe to open the port

6.9 Post-Project Monitoring

In order to study the effectiveness of implemented measures suggested in

EMP, and to achieve the conditions stipulated in EC/NOC for prevention of environmental

degradation likely to occur due to proposed developmental activity, it is required to

monitor the environmental quality status during construction and operational phase of the

project. Thus, the project proponent has to form ‘Environmental Management Cell’,

operative right from construction of approach roads and site preparation and has to keep

it in full swing during operational phase of project. Air quality monitoring, recording of

meteorological data, noise level monitoring, performance evaluation of WTPs and STPs

and monitoring of surface water quality including sediments, biological environment

terrestrial and aquatic and sedimentation rate are the few activities to be initiated and

regularly monitored to submit six monthly report to the regulatory authorities. In this

regard, methods of monitoring and analysis are appended at Annexure V. Elaborative

Information of Methods of Sampling and Analysis can be gathered through reference

method and also used in the Environmental Quality Standard. Assessment of the

measures taken up to maintain biodiversity, preventive soil erosion, and restoring, social

harmony and enhancing of quality of life of the project may be carried out.

Since the Port Complex is fairly large and is highly environmental sensitive,

each department should have senior executives who shall report to their respective heads

of the department. The port complex will have an Environment Cell for the entire port and


Plan

6.34

units therein. The Environment cell should consists of environmental professionals with

experience in various aspects of Environment Management ranging from 7 years to 20

years. This Cell should be set up during the construction of the port itself and they should

have adequate expertise and competency in handling and implementing the Environment

Management systems and practices. The Environment Cell should monitor and measure

the environmental performance of each industry in terms of efficiency of pollution control

devices, and conduct regular energy and water audits. The cell should be regularly

coordinate with third party Environmental Audits. Members of the Environment Cell shall

participate in National Task Forces under CREP (Charter for Corporate Responsibility for

Environmental Protection) and in committees for reviewing National Standards for the

petroleum and petrochemical industry. The Port Environment Cell shall be an advisory

body on all environment related issues and support the Environment at the port.

Every industry within the port should in due time aim to be certified for ISO

14001 standards. The Environment cell in each industry should be responsible for

implementing and maintaining environment management systems. This industry should

co-ordinate with the Environmental Management Cell of port for establishing and

monitoring the compliance of ISO 14001. The Management Systems should be

established in compliance with the ISO 14001 standards which should be audited

internally by qualified internal auditors and externally by the certifying body as per the

stipulated frequency.


Plan

6.35

Fig. 6.1: Environmental Planning Process

Significant

Impact

Regulatory

Requirements

Environmental

Policy

Objectives

(Co comply with standards,

prevention of pollution and

continual improvements)

Viewer of

Interested Policy

Business

Consideration

Targets

(To reduce/Minimise

adverse impacts)

Environmental Management

Plans, Monitoring Programs,

corrective action and review


Plan

6.36

Fig. 6.2: Environmental Management Plan


Plan

6.37

Table 6.1

Plant Species for Greenbelt Development at Port

Sr. No.

Botanical Name (Family) Common / Local Name

Trees

1. Acacia ferruginea DC (Mimosaceae) Safed khair/Bannimara

2. Acacia nilotica (Mimosaceae) Indian Gum-Arabic/Karijauli

3. Ailanthus excelsa (Simaroubiaceae) Heaven/Hemaraheeramara

4. Albizia amara (Mimosaceae) Mar-Turgi Lalai

5. Albizia labbeck (Mimosaceae) Siris/Begamara

6. Albizia odoratissima(Mimosaceae) Black siris

7. Alstonia scholaris (Apocynaceae) Shaitan tree

8. Annogeissus latifolia (Combretaceae) Axlewood/Bejjalu

9. Artocarpus integrifolia (Moraceae) jack fruit/Halasu

10. Artocarpus lacucha (Moraceae) Monkey jack

11. Azadirachta indica# (Meliaceae) Neem/Bevinamara

12. Bauhinia malabarica (Fabaceae) -

13. Bauhinia racemosa (Caesalpiniaceae) Banne

14. Butea monosperma (Fabaceae) Flame of the forest/Mittuga

15. Caesalpinia pulcherrima (Caesalpiniaceae) White gold mohur/Kempukenjiga

16. Calophylum tomentosum -

17. Cane sp. (Palmae) -

18. Canna orientalis (Cannaceae) -

19. Cassia fistula# (Caesalpiniaceae) Golden Showers/Aragena

20. Cassia siamea# (Caesalpiniaceae) Iron Wood/Hiretangad

21. Casuarina equisetifolia# (Casurinaceae) Whistling pipe/Chabaku

22. Chlorophytum tuberosum (Liliaceae) -

23. Dalbergia sissoo (Fabaceaae) Shissu/Agaru

24. Dalbergia latifolia# (Fabaceaae) Black wood/Bite

25. Delonix regia# (Caesalpiniaceae) Gulmohar

26. Derris indica/Pongamia pinnata (Fabaceae) Honge

27. Erythrina indica Pangara

28. Eucalyptus globulus (Myrtaceae) Safeda

29. Ficus benghalensis (Moraceae ) Banyan/Ala

30. Ficus elastica (Moraceae ) Indian Rubber

31. Ficus glomerata (Moraceae ) Mal

32. Ficus hispida (Moraceae) -

33. Ficus religiosa# (Moraceae) Peepal tree/Arali

34. Garcinia indica (Gattiferae) Kokam

35. Gliricidia maculate (Fabaceae) -

36. Grevillea robusta (Proteaceae) Silky oak

37. Lagerstromia florsreginae (Lythraceae) -


Plan

6.38

Sr. No.


38. Lagerstromia parviflora (Lythracae) -

39. Leucaena leucocephala (Lythraceae) Subabul

40. Mallotus philippinesis (Euphorbiaceae) Kumkuma

41. Melia azedarach (Meliaceae) Persian lilac/Arebvu

42. Mimusops elengi (Sapotaceae) Bakuli

43. Peltoforum pteropcarpum# Copper pod

44. Petrocarpus marsupium (Legumineaceae) -

45. Petrocarpus santalinus (Legumineaceae) -

46. Polyalthia longifolia (Annonaceae) Putrajivi

47. Prosopis juliflora (Mimosaceae) -

48. Samanea saman (Mimosaceae) Rain tree

49. Sapindus trifoliatus (Sapindaceae) -

50. Spathodea campanulata (Bignoniaceae) Indian tulip

51. Swietenia mahagoni (Scrophulariaceae) -

52. Tabebuia rosea (Bignoniaceae) Tabebuia

53. Tamarindus indica (Caesalpiniaceae) Tamarind/Amli

54. Tectona grandis (Verbenaceae) Teak/Tega

55. Terminala alata (Combretaceae) Laurel/Sadada

56. Terminalia Arjuna (Combretaceae) Holemathi

57. Terminalia bellirica (Combretaceae) Shanthi

58. Terminalia catappa (Combretaceae) Indian Almond

59. Terminalia chebula (Combretaceae) Chebulic myroban

60. Verbena jamaicensis (Verbenaceae) -

61. Veteraia indica Saludupa

62. Zizyphus mauritiana (Rhamnaceae) Indian Jujube/Elanji

Shrubs

63. Abutilon indicum ( Malvaceae) Country mallow/Srimudrigida

64. Bougainvillea spectabilis (Nyctaginaceae) Bougainvillea

65. Calotropis gigantea (Asclepiadaceae) Gigantic swallow wort

66. Calotropis procera (Asclepiadaceae) Swallow wort

67. Clerodendrum viscosum (Verbenaceae) -

68. Dendrocalamus strictus (Poaceae) Solid Bamboo/Kiribidiru

69. Hibiscus- rosa sinensis (Malvaceae) Jasud

70. Hisbiscus cannabinus (Malvaceae) -

71. Ixora chinensis (Rubiaceae) -

72. Jatropha curcas (Euphorbiaceae) -

73. Jatropha gossypifolia (Euphorbiaceae) -

74. Lantana camara (Verbenaceae) Lantana/Natahugide

75. Lawsonia inermis (Lythraceae) Mehandi

76. Nerium Indicum# (Apocynaceae) Pink Oleander

77. Ricinus communis (Euphorbiaceae) Castor/Haralu


Plan

6.39

Sr. No.


78. Tabernaemontana divaricata ( Apocynaceae) -

79. Tecoma stans (Bignoniaceae) Koreneklar

80. Thevetia peruviana (Apocynaceae) Yellow oleaner/Kadukasi

81. Zizyphus oenoplia ( Rhamnaceae) Jackal jujube/Barige

Fruit Bearing Plants

82. Achras sapota/Manilkara zapota (Sapotaceae) Sapota/Chikoo

83. Anacardium occidentale (Aanacardiaceae) Cashew

84. Annona reticulata (Annonaceae) Bullock’s Heart/Raamaphala

85. Annona squamosa (Annonaceae) Custard apple/Seethaphala

86. Artocarpus heterophyllus (Moraceae) Jack fruit

87. Cocos nucifera (Arecaceae) Coconut

88. Emblica officinalis (Euphorbiaceae) Gooseberry/Amalaka

89. Mangifera indica (Anacardiaceae) Mango/Maavu

90. Moringa oleifera (Moringaceae) Drumstick/Nugge

91. Psidium guayava (Myrtaceae) Guava/Amrud

92. Syzygium cumini (Myrtaceae) Jamun

E : Evergreen; D : Deciduous;

# : Species suitable for roadside plantation

CChhaapptteerr 77

PPrroojjeecctt BBeenneeffiittss

7.1 Project Benefits

The Government of Karnataka has undertaken the development of the major

port called Tadadi situated in the estuary of the Aghanshini River. The backwaters of the

river Aghanashini has got vast water front at the existing port which is currently being

utilized for fishing activities alone. The government of Karnataka now sees a great

potential in developing this port with modern infrastructural facilities.

Support and development of ports and harbors contribute substantially to the

successful economic development of the community. Harbors and Ports reduce

dependence on air transportation and provide many economic benefits. Water based

transportation is the key component of many rural community economics. Good docks

and harbors are alternative to expensive air transportation and lessen transportation by

road.

The proposed project will generate direct and indirect employment

opportunities for the local people. The port will create employment for skilled as well as

semi-skilled workers directly or indirectly. Additionally, certain works like security will be

outsourced on contract basis. The secondary employment will also develop in the

neighbouring villages in the form of providing services to the employed manpower at

port/harbor.

Chapter 7: Project Benefits

7.2

Also, fishery and animal husbandry, which is already well established in the

project area will get a further boost as the demand of fish milk, meat etc. will increase due

to the influx of population related to the port activities. It will improve economic conditions

of the people and will enable them to improve their quality of life through improved animal

husbandry practices.

The port authority will also provide assistance in the development of the nearby

villages through the following:

Development of infrastructure facilities within the villages like roads,

transportation, telephones, post office, township, housing, water supply

electric power, drainage, and effluent treatment plants, improved waste

disposal system, improved environmental conditions

Setting up of primary school for the employees’ children which will also be

open for local village children

Arranging regular medical checkup camps for the employees. The facility

will also be extended to the village people

Supply of drinking water during scarcity to the nearby villages

Starting an Industrial Training Institute for the local youths will enable them

to get employment in various industries

Provision of bus service up to the nearest town for the employees and their

families. The facility will be extended to the local village population also

Promotion of fishing and related main activities like tourism, industrial,

commercial and cultural activities

Improvements in the physical infrastructure by way of ancillary industries

that may come up on account of project

Substantial enhancement in employment potential through skilled, semi

skilled and un skilled labor both during construction and operational

phases of the project with specific attention to employment opportunity to

local population. Necessary training shall be imparted to local people for

any specialized skill to the eligible for such employment in the project on a

long-term basis i.e. during operational and maintenance stages of the

project and other tangible benefits like improved standards of living, health,

education etc.

Chapter 7: Project Benefits

7.3

Revenue generation by way of royalties due to marine eco-development

Thus the proposed development of port shall help in alleviating the economic

status of the people of the region with better basic amenities leading to improvement in

quality of life of the people.

CChhaapptteerr 88

DDiissaasstteerr MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

PPllaann

8.1 Preamble

Disaster is an undesirable occurrence of events of very high magnitude that

adversely affects activities. Inspite of various preventive and precautionary measures

taken in works, the possibility of a mishap cannot be totally ruled out. An emergency

could be the result of malfunction or non-observance of operating instructions. It could, at

times, be the consequences of acts outside the control of residents / employees like

severe storm, flooding, or deliberate acts of arson or sabotage. Hence, the need to

prepare emergency plan for dealing with the incidences, which may still occur and are

likely to affect life and property in and around the port, has been identified in this plan.

During the past decade, there has been an increase in public awareness about

the actions to be taken in case of disaster like situation. It is essential to evolve a Disaster

Control / Management Plan to effectively make use of available resources. There are

many agencies viz. Civic and Government authorities, Fire Services, Civil Defence,

Medical, Police, Army, neighbouring industries, Voluntary organizations, etc which are

involved in an organized multidisciplinary approach to tackle the disaster.

Chapter 8: Disaster Management

Plan

8.2

8.2 Objectives

Disaster is an unpleasant sudden event of such a magnitude which may cause

extensive damage to life or the property due to natural calamities like an earthquake,

flood, cyclones, landslides, lightening etc. In view of this, an approach to Disaster

Management Plan (DMP) has been delineated to tackle emergency at Tadadi Port and

nearby area. The purpose of DMP is to give an approach to detailed organizational

responsibilities, actions, reporting requirements and support resources available to

ensure effective and timely management of emergencies.

8.2.1 Purpose of Disaster Management Plan

Design contingency plan, taking into account the accident scenario and

natural disasters

Safeguard personnel to prevent injuries or loss of life by protecting them

from the hazard and evacuating from the site on short notice

Obtain early warning of emergency conditions so as to prevent impact on

personnel, assets and environment

Ensure safety of people, protect the environment and safeguard

commercial considerations

Ensure immediate response to emergency situation with effective

communication network and organized procedures

Provide guidance to help stakeholders to take appropriate action to

prevent accidents and to mitigate adverse effects of accidents that do

nevertheless occur

Minimize overall impact of the event at the port

8.2.2 Disaster Management Cycle

The Disaster Management Cycle (DMC) has a significant role to play. The four

stages of disaster management cycle have their own importance in terms of their

implementation during, after and before the occurrence of any disaster. The cycle has

been shown in Fig. 8.1.


Plan

8.3

8.2.3 Different Phases of Disaster

Warning Phase

Emergencies /disasters are generally preceded by warnings during which

preventive measures may be initiated. For example, weather forecast gives warning

about formation of vapour cloud, cyclones, and equipment failure etc.

Period of Impact Phase

This is the phase when emergency /disaster actually strike and preventive

measures may hardly be taken. However, control measures to minimise the effects may

be taken through a well-planned and ready-to-act disaster management plan. The

duration may be from seconds to days.

Rescue Phase

This is the phase when impact is almost over and efforts are concentrated on

rescue and relief measures.

Relief Phase

In this phase, apart from organization and relief measures internally, depending

on severity of the disaster, external help can also be summoned to provide relief

measures (like evacuations to a safe place and providing medical help, food clothing

etc.). This phase will continue till normalcy is restored.

Rehabilitation Phase

This is the final and longest phase, during which measures required to put the

situation back to normal as far as possible are taken. Checking the systems, estimating

the damages, repair of equipments and putting them again into service are taken up.

Help from revenue/insurance authorities need to be obtained to assess the damage,

quantum of compensation to be paid etc.

8.3 Key Elements

Following are the key elements of Disaster Management Plan:

Basis of the plan

Accident/emergency response planning procedures

On-site Disaster Management Plan

Off-site Disaster Management Plan


Plan

8.4

8.3.1 Basis of the Plan

Identification and assessment of hazards is crucial for on-site emergency

planning and it is therefore necessary to identify what emergencies could arise at Port

infrastructure including various products / cargoes and their storage. Hazard analysis or

consequence analysis gives the following results.

8.3.2 Emergency Planning and Response Procedures

Emergency rarely occurs; therefore activities during emergencies require

coordination of higher order than for planned activities carried out according to fixed time

schedule or on a routine day-to-day basis. To effectively coordinate emergency response

activities, an organizational approach to planning is required. The important areas of

emergency planning are Organization and Responsibilities, Procedures, Communication,

Transport, Resource requirements and Control Centre. Offsite emergency requires

additional planning over and above those considered under onsite plans, which should be

properly integrated to ensure better coordination.

The emergency planning includes anticipatory action for emergency,

maintenance and streamlining of emergency preparedness and ability for sudden

mobilization of all forces to meet any calamity. Emergency is classified into the following

three levels.

Level 1: It is an Incident within the port and is of a minor nature with a low level of

personnel injury, interruption to work, damage level and loss of capability. The

Port Staff itself can handle it. The Emergency Management Group leader is the

Departmental Head. The examples of this level are Building/Shed Fire, Electrical

supply disruption, labour accident, vessel accidents etc.

Level 2: It is an Incident within the port area and is of a limited and moderate level of

personnel injury possible death(s), and interruption of work damage to port.

Besides Port resources, outside assistance may be required. The Disaster

Management Group leader is the Chairman of the port. The examples of this

level are Gas Leaks, Chemical/Oil Spills, Terminal Fires/ Explosions.

Level 3: It is a disaster of a severe and critical nature and could have a high level of

personnel injury (and deaths), interruption to work, damage to port and loss of

capability. It affects the port and possibly adjacent areas. Besides Port

resources, assistance from outside agencies is required. If incident is within the

port, Chairman of the port is the group leader. Information will be given to the


Plan

8.5

District Collector if the accident affects outside the port. The examples of this

level are massive Gas Leaks, Chemical/Oil Spills, Fires/ Explosions & Cyclones.

8.3.3 On-site Disaster Management Plan

Onsite Emergency/disaster is an unpleasant event of such magnitude which

may cause extensive damage to life and property due to emergencies resulting from

Natural Calamities like Flood, Cyclone and Earthquake; and deliberate and other acts of

man like Sabotage, Riot and War etc. An Onsite Disaster may occur all of a sudden or

preceded by a Major Fire. Purpose for the on-site Disaster Management Plan is:

To protect persons, property and equipments in case of all kinds of

accidents, emergencies and disasters

To inform people and surroundings about emergency if it is likely to

adversely affect them

To inform authorities including helping agencies (doctors, hospitals, fire,

police, transport etc.) in advance, and also at the time of actual happening

To identify, assess, foresee and work out various kinds of possible

hazards, their places, potential and damaging capacity and area in case of

above happenings. Review, revise, redesign, replace or reconstruct the

process, plant, vessels and control measures if so assessed.

The responsibilities and duties of the important officials are given below:

A) Fire and Safety Officer

To instruct all the security personnel to help in maintaining law and order

To ensure that systematic and proper efforts are launched to avoid chaos

or panic at site

To ensure smooth evacuation, if necessary

To close all gates except main gate, control traffic and allow only

authorized persons to enter the port

To arrange additional fire fighting aids from nearby factories and district

authorities

To cordon off the accident area

To direct external help to respective coordinators


Plan

8.6

To check or guide persons through media, through public Relations

Coordinator

To find out reasons for incident, after emergency, in co-ordination with Port

Coordinator

To ensure from Fire Officer whether all the in-plant fire fighting and safety

materials are adequate and arrange for reinforcement from other sources,

if required

To keep Chief Coordinator informed regarding status of fire, casualties,

loss of property, methods adopted to combat fire, etc

To arrange for additional fire fighting crew / equipment, if required

To inform Medical Coordinator regarding casualties, loss of life

B) Medical Coordinator

To inform hospitals regarding emergency at site and make them ready in

advance to handle casualties

To take charge of ambulances through Transport Coordinator, if required

To arrange for first aid for the injured and send them for hospitalization

To remain at site till emergency/disaster is contained.

C) Media Representatives

To assist in port evacuation in co-ordination with transport coordinator

To arrange for evacuation of neighbouring people, if warranted

To inform latest situation to Chief Coordinator and Communications

Coordinator

To receive media, government officials and consultants, and impart

information keeping the following in mind:

- Communicate directly to avoid distortion of information by others

- Impart factual information

- Only official spokesman imparts information

- Necessary facilities are made available to the media. Reasons for

restriction on media-men be duly explained to them


Plan

8.7

- Do not cover up incidences until the correct picture will finally

emerge

- Provide full information on safety measures to media for balanced

reporting

To inform insurance agency to assess damage

D) Communication Coordinator

To keep all communication equipment viz. telephone, fax, radio-telephone

(wireless), emergency mobile/cell phone with SMS and email facility etc.,

in working condition

To report to emergency site and take charge of communication equipment

To inform local authorities from whom the help be required viz. fire brigade,

hospitals, transporters, police station etc.

To act as liaison between different coordinators

To keep all communication lines free for use during emergency.

In order to handle disaster / emergency situations, an organizational chart

entrusting responsibility to various personnel of Port showing their specific roles should

be available as shown in Fig. 8.2 and conceptual Plan Framework for Emergency

Planning Process is shown in Fig 8.3.

8.3.3.1 Central Disaster Management Group

This group is formed to get better coordination between external organizations

and port authorities. Chairman or Dy. Chairman is the leader of the group with Dy.

Chairman, Secretary, FA & CAO, Chief Engineer, Traffic Manager, Materials Manager,

Chief Medical Officer, Commandant-CISF, and Commandant - Coast Guard as members.

Following are the basic functions of the group

1. Monitor and analyze reports from the onsite action team and identify the

area /population at risk

2. Activate the Response Plan and arrange the Alert siren

3. Support the Action Group with materials, equipment, information and

human resources

4. Implement changes in the current mode of action if deemed necessary


Plan

8.8

5. Adjust the Disaster classification of the incident and activate the Central

Control Room

6. Coordinate with external organizations, State Govt. as deemed necessary

7. Make the necessary arrangements and funds for evacuation transportation,

food and supplies

8. Make media statements

8.3.3.2 On-site Action Group

This group is formed to conduct search, rescue and evacuation operations.

Harbour Master /Senior Pilot is the leader of the group with Control room - Sr. Pilot, Dy.

Comdt. CISF (Fire), Executive Engineer, Dy. Chief Medical Officer, Addl. /Dy.TM, Dy.

Comdt.-CISF, Dy. Commandant - Coast Guard as members. Following are basic

functions of the group

1. Assess and classify Incident, nature-location-severity-casualties-resource

requirement -time to control.

2. Activate elements of the disaster management plan, arrange alert signal in

liaison with District Collector

3. Conduct search, rescue and evacuation operations. Provide Medical Aid

4. Manage incident operations and terminate plan, Arrange for re-entry and

restoration

Coordination between Central Disaster Management Group and On-site Action

Group is given in Fig. 8.4.

Initiation of Central Control Room

On Emergency Level II or III, Chairman of the Port would decide whether

members of the Central Disaster Management Team will operate from their respective

department control rooms and attend joint meetings at the Central Control Rooms at fixed

timings or when total central control room attendance is required. Whenever the Central

Disaster Management Team takes over responsibilities – the Onsite Action Group now

reports to the Central Control. Whenever the District Offsite Disaster Management Group

is initiated both Central Control and Onsite Action Group will continue to function under

the Port’s declared Emergency level.


Plan

8.9

8.3.4 Offsite Disaster Management Plan

The off-site emergency plan is an integral part of any hazard control system. It

should be based on those accidents identified by the Port management, which could

affect people and the environment outside the port premises. Thus, the off-site plan

follows logically from the analysis that took place to provide the basis for the on-site plan,

and the two plans should therefore complement each other. The key feature of a good

off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its application to emergencies other than those

specifically included in the formation of the plan. The roles of the various parties that may

be involved in the implementation of an off-site plan are described. The responsibility for

the off-site plan will be likely to rest either with the site management or with the local

authority.

Either way, the plan must identify an emergency coordinating officer who would

take overall command of the off-site activities. As with the on-site plan, an emergency

control center will be required within which the emergency coordinating officer can

operate. An early decision will be required in many cases on the advice to be given to

people living “within range” of the accident – in particular whether they should be

evacuated or told to go indoors. Consideration of evacuation may include the following

factors:

In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage

tank), or fly rocks due to blasting only houses close to the fire are likely to

need evacuation, although a severe smoke hazard may require this to be

reviewed periodically.

But if the fire is escalating, it might be necessary to evacuate people

nearby, but only if there is time; if insufficient time exists, people should be

advised to stay indoors and shield them from the fire.

Aspects of an off-site Emergency Plan

Some of the aspects to be included in off-site emergency plan are as follows:

Organization

Details of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,

emergency control centre, name and appointments of incident controller, site main

controller, their deputies and other key personnel.

Communications


Plan

8.10

Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network,

list of telephone numbers.

Special Emergency Equipment

Details of availability and location of heavy lifting gear, bulldozers, specified

fire-fighting equipment, fireboats etc.

Voluntary Organizations

Details of organizers, their addresses, person to be contacted, alternate

telephone numbers, resources, etc.

Chemical information

Details of the hazardous substances, if any, stored or processed on each site

and a summary of the risks associated with them.

Meteorological information

Arrangement for obtaining details of weather conditions prevailing at the time

and weather forecasts.

Humanitarian Arrangements

Transport, evacuation centres, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first

aid, ambulances, temporary mortuaries.

Public Information

Arrangements for

Dealing with the media-press office

Informing relatives, etc.

Assessment

Arrangements for

Collecting information on the causes of the emergency

Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the

emergency plan.

Role of the Emergency Coordinating Officer (ECO)

The various emergency services will be coordinated by an Emergency

Coordinating Officer (ECO) who is likely to be a senior police officer but, depending on


Plan

8.11

the circumstances, could be a senior fire officer. The ECO will liaise closely with the site

main controller. Depending on local arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or

prolonged off-site consequences, the external control may pass to a senior Local

Authority Administrator or even an Administrator appointed by the Central or State

Government.

Roles of major Hazard Works Managements

Where the local authority has the organization to formulate the plan, the role of

works managements in off-site emergency planning will be to establish liaison with those

preparing the plans and to provide information appropriate to such plans. This will include

a description of possible on-site accidents with potential far off-site harm, together with

their consequences and an indication of the relative likelihood of the accidents. Advice

should be provided by works managements to all the outside organizations which may

become involved in handling the emergency offsite and which will need previously to

have familiarized themselves with some of the technical aspects of the works

activities, e.g. emergency services, medical departments, etc.

Role of the Local Authority

Local Authority can appoint an Emergency Planning Officer (EPO) to carry out

all the duties as a part of the EPO’s roles in preparing for a whole range of different

emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO will need to liaise with the works to

obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. Rehearsals for off-site plans are

important for the same reasons as on-site plans and will need to be organized by the

EPO.

Role of the Police

The police normally assume the overall control of an emergency, with a senior

officer designated as Emergency Coordinating Officer. Formal duties of the police during

an emergency include protecting life and property and controlling traffic movements. The

functions include controlling bystanders, evacuating the public, identifying the dead and

dealing with casualties and informing relatives of dead or injured.

Role of the Fire Authorities

The control of a fire is normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade

officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller on

arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer may also have a similar responsibility for

other events, such as explosions and toxic releases. Fire authorities having major hazard


Plan

8.12

works in their area should have familiarized themselves with the location on-site of all

stores of flammable materials, water and foam supply points and fire-fighting

equipments.

Role of the Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances have a

vital role to play following a major accident and form an integral part of any emergency

plan. For major fires, injuries will be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a

varying degree and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all, but extreme,

cases may be generally available in most hospitals.

8.4 Disaster Prevention Measures

In order to prevent disaster due to fire, explosion, electrocution and other

accidents following preventive measures shall be adopted.

Design, manufacture and construction of port and machineries building will

be as per national and international codes as applicable in specific cases

and laid down by statutory authorities.

Provision of adequate access way for movement of equipment and

personnel shall be kept.

Minimum two numbers of gates for escape during disaster shall be

provided.

System of fire hydrants comprising electrical motor division and diesel

engine driven fire pumps with electrical motor driven jokey pump for

keeping the fire hydrant system properly pressurized for all important

suspected places.

Site Emergency Control Room (SECR)

In order to control the disaster more effectively, a Site Emergency Control

Room (SECR) shall be established at the port site. The facilities proposed to be provided

are given in following sections:

Port Layout

Port Layout with inventories and locations of fuel oil/furnace oil or any

hazardous material.

Storage tanks


Plan

8.13

Hazard identification chart, maximum number of people working at a time,

assembly points etc.

Population around Port area

Internal and external telephone connections

Hotline connection to district collector, police control room, fire brigade,

hospital

Public address system

List of dispensaries and registered medical practitioners around port

Area map of surrounding villages

Note pads and ball pens to record message received and instructions

The blown up copy of Layout plan showing areas where accident has

occurred.

8.5 Action Plan for Natural Disasters

Following are the action plans for natural calamities viz. earthquake, floods,

cyclone and tsunami.

8.5.1 Earthquake

Earthquake Predictions

Local earthquakes are difficult to predict, Frequency of tremors as reported in the newspapers, TV and radio

Rattling of doors and windows on multi storied building

Falling of old and weak structures

Unusual barking of dogs and zoo animals-notably elephants

Characteristics of Earthquake

Magnitude

Focal depth

Location of quake center

Rupture orientation

Property Characteristics

Distance from focus

Soil conditions

Geology

Are buildings constructed to

Resist lateral forces

Bend rather than break

Resist sway

Are foundations in sandy soil


Plan

8.14

Relief Work after an Earthquake

Department Action

Chairman To contact the District Collector, Relief Commissioner, Army, Navy, Coast Guard

Dy. Chairman To assist the Chairman to assess relief requirements

Administration Secretary - To arrange for food, shelter and transportation.

And assist the Chairman and Dy. Chairman for all relief arrangements

Elec. & Mech. Dept. Electrical and Mechanical Engineers -To provide and hire if necessary, earthmoving equipments, cranes, forklifts, bull dozers, pneumatic hammers

Civil Eng Dept. Civil Engineer to deploy assistant engineers to direct or guide earth moving equipment and cranes to remove the debris

Traffic Traffic Manager to ensure safety of cargo in cargo sheds/tanks and at railway sidings

Marine Dy. Conservator to ensure the safety of Port Marine craft and vessels alongside

CISF Commandant CISF to organize Search and Rescue of persons trapped under debris.

CISF-Fire To assist in Search and Rescue operation.

Medical Chief Medical Officer to ensure and provide proper medical aid to the injured

If you are outdoors, find a clear spot away from buildings, trees, streetlights,

and power lines. Keep lying on the ground and stay there until the shaking stops. Injuries

can occur from falling trees, street lights and power lines, or building debris.

If you are in a vehicle, pull over to a clear location, stop and stay there with

your seatbelt fastened until the shaking has stopped. Trees, power lines, poles, street

signs, and other overhead items may fall during earthquakes. Stopping will help reduce

your risk. Once the shaking has stopped, proceed with caution. Avoid bridges or ramps

that might have been damaged by the quake. Stay inside the vehicle until the shaking

stops.

8.5.2 Floods/Cyclones

Dept Action

Marine Signal Station passes weather message to HM and DC

HM places on-site action group alert


Plan

8.15

DC apprises Chairman of weather developments who places orders to the Central Disaster Management Group

Management Group on alert, if necessary

Civil Engg. Drainage system of the port i.e. inside harbour area & out side harbour area should be cleared

Trailer mounted portable Diesel pump sets to be made standby with sufficient length of hose pipes

Sand bags to be used around sensitive areas including water supply pump stations, electric sub stations

Electrical & Mechanical Engg

All the outside installations and equipment shall be properly secured.

Cyclone field units to be made alert

Administration

To make standby arrangements for transportation to evacuate population in low lying areas to cyclone centres and relief centres & arrange food and water.

HM – Harbor Master; DC–Deputy Conservator

8.5.3 Tsunami

Characteristics:

Tsunamis are a series of enormous waves created by an underwater disturbance such as an earthquake, landslide, volcanic eruption, or meteorrite. A tsunami can move about 500 miles per hour in the open ocean. Once the wave approaches the shore, it builds in height. The topography of the coastline and the ocean floor will influence the size of the wave. There may be more than one wave and the succeeding one may be larger than the one before. Drowning is the most common cause of death associated with a tsunami. Tsunami waves and the receding water are very destructive to structures.

Warning/Confirmation

Meteorological Station

Coast Guards

TV and Radio News

Department Action

Marine Harbor Master through Signal Station informs all the ships to evacuate from the berth to open sea. Signal Station keeps in touch with all vessels on VHF and SATCOM

Crew of flotilla to move tugs and launches to safe areas or deep water anchorages

Crew to wear life jackets

Administration Dy. Secy. (G) to arrange transport to evacuate to safer inland areas

Traffic Dy.TM / Addl. Traffic Manager ensures stoppage of all


Plan

8.16

cargo operations of vessels.

Civil Engineering Department

Addl. CE to ensure sand bags is kept ready

Elec. & Mech. Department

Addl. Electrical Engineer / Mechanical Engineer to ensure proper security of the cargo handling equipment and the shore cranes.

Central Disaster Management Group

Chairman Activates Central Disaster Management Group (CDMG)

Marine Deputy Conservator to apprise the group leader of the Central Disaster Management Group of any developments and early warning Systems

Administration Secretary to keep in constant touch with state Govt.

Following additional measures may be considered in port disaster management

with respect to tsunami:

The port authorities should make arrangements with the Indian National

Centre for Ocean Information Services (INCOIS), Hyderabad for linking up

with their Early Warning System (EWS) for mitigation of Tsunami disaster.

The system has the following features:

Seismic net-worth near real time monitoring of the potential tsunami-genic

earthquakes.

Interconnected broadband seismic station for real time communication.

Bottom Pressure Recorder deployed in the deep ocean near Andaman

and Nicobar islands.

Tide gauges located in the coasts with key sensors to provide early

warning of tsunami.

Extensive mangrove plantation along the inter-tidal zone may be

undertaken to create a natural barrier along with awareness campaigns on

tsunami involving local administration and NGOs

Suitable steps on war-footing basis may be adopted to restore all the

essential services like, electricity, water and food supply, tele-

communication, transportation, etc. Proper steps should also ensure the

protection and safeguard of properties.

Tsunami monitoring and warning systems can allow sufficient lead time for

preventive measures to be taken to reduce exposure or vulnerability of


Plan

8.17

equipment. Emergency shutdown of processes that depend on pumps,

motors or materials located in areas close to the shoreline would reduce

the vulnerability that might be triggered by the tsunami.

Warning would also provide some time, if adequate emergency procedures

are established beforehand, to move materials and portable equipment out

of harm’s way to avoid water damage or water intrusion, or to secure any

objects, equipment, etc. that could become water logged and inflict debris

damage on other equipment.

A series of public awareness campaign can be launched around the port

area by various means including AIR, Doordarshan and other Media.

A network of local knowledge centers (rural/urban) should be developed to

provide necessary training and emergency communication during crisis

time

Information on tsunami hazards, evacuation routes and the actions to be

taken in case of emergency should be provided to surrounding population

by distributing pamphlets, organizing the awareness program etc.

8.6 Oil Spill Contingency Management Plan

Spills of oil to land require immediate response action to stop the source of the

discharge and to limit the spread of material. Immediate response actions and notification

procedures shall be developed. Attention must be paid to fire and safety hazards. For

terrestrial areas, selection of appropriate control and containment techniques, nature of

the substrate is dependent on the:

Slope of the terrain,

Amount of product, and

Time available to implement the response action.

The quantity and time parameters reflect the reality of constructing a barrier of

appropriate size in the time available. These factors can only be judged in the field at the

time of the incident. Should it be impossible to implement the desired method at a desired

location due to a lack of time or access, a new control point would be selected further

down the slope. If containment is still impossible and human safety is in question, the

threatened area would need to be evacuated.


Plan

8.18

The spilling of oil in sea will degrade naturally but in the process may harm the

environment either by damaging amenities or by killing or injuring marine life. In an

attempt to mitigate the harmful effects of a marine oil spill it is therefore necessary to take

steps to remove oil from the sea or to accelerate the process of bio-degradation. Spills of

oil to land or sea require immediate response action to stop the source of the discharge

and to limit the spread of material. Immediate response actions and notification

procedures shall be developed. Attention must be paid to fire and safety hazards.

Marine oil spills are a problem, and invariably, a spill will create damage, the

magnitude and extent varying according to a number of factors, including, volume spilled,

location, and conditions prevailing at the time.

Spill response strategies would vary significantly attributed by the location of

the spill. Herein the spills have been envisaged in two areas as listed below:

On-Site Spills

Off-Site Spills

The various methodologies that can be adopted for spill control are described

below.

8.6.1 Response Strategies – On-Site Spills

In case of spills / leaks of hydrocarbons within the fence line of property, one of

the following techniques could be used for the control of spill.

Dikes, Berms or Retaining Walls

Dikes, berms and retaining walls are normally used in areas with the potential

for large spills, such as single or multiple above ground storage and processing tanks. To

evaluate the adequacy of a spill containment dike, the following criteria has to be

reviewed: capacity, material of construction and compatibility with tank contents, integrity,

and strength.

The slopes of earth dikes should not be steeper than 1 foot vertical to

1½ feet horizontal. On average, dikes are not to exceed an interior height of six feet.

A reinforced concrete retaining wall is used when space is not available for a

dike. Retaining walls are usually constructed of either reinforced concrete blocks or

reinforced poured concrete.


Plan

8.19

Curbing

Curbs are a very effective means of secondary containment around drum

storage areas, product dispensing areas, bulk loading and unloading areas, and pump

equipment areas. Curbing can be used where only small spills are expected. Curbing can

also be used to direct spills to drains or catchment systems.

Culverts, Gutters or Other Drainage Systems

Secondary containment, such as dikes, is not always feasible; drainage

trenches, culverts, sewers, swales, or gutters that direct a spill to a retention pond or

catchment basin are acceptable alternatives. Drainage from undiked areas should, if

possible, flow into retention areas designed to retain spills or return the material to activity

properly.

Sorbents and Drip Pans

Sorbent materials, drip pans, and drainage mats are used to isolate and

contain small drips or leaks until the source of the leak is repaired. Material handling

equipment, such as valves and pumps often have small leaks where sorbents, drip pans,

or drainage mats can be used. Although sorbents are usually used to control small

isolated spills, they can also be used to contain and collect large-volume spills before

they reach a watercourse. Sorbents include clay, vermiculite, diatomaceous earth, and

man-made materials.

Drip pans are widely used to contain small leaks from product dispensing

containers (usually drums), uncoupling of hoses during bulk transfer operations, and for

pumps, valves, and fittings. Drip pans are typically 50 to 150 litres and may be plastic or

metal, depending upon the type of chemical handled. They may be single pans for

individual dispensing drums or gutter-type continuous pans built into multiple drum

dispensing racks. Drip pans must be checked regularly and emptied when necessary so

that overflow spill does not occur.

Drainage mats are sometimes used to prevent spilled product from entering

into an uncontrolled drainage or sanitary sewer system. The mat is placed over a storm

drain, sealing the drain against the entry of spilled material. Drainage mats are especially

applicable in areas where constructing a secondary containment or diversion structure is

impractical, such as a congested tanker truck unloading area. Drainage mats are typically

made of synthetic rubber materials and can be stored on site or carried on a fuel delivery

truck. The use of drainage mats is a low-cost solution for providing a degree of


Plan

8.20

containment; however, it is not as fail-safe as the other containment techniques, since it is

dependent upon the operator properly placing the mat.

Materials such as foams and gelling agents are commonly used to contain

small spills in areas where physical secondary containment is not available. Foams that

solidify to form a physical barrier or dike are highly effective forms of emergency

secondary containment.

Spill Diversion Ponds or Retention Ponds

Spill diversion or retention ponds should be constructed with an impervious

base using HDPE sheets or geo-membranes to prevent soil and / or groundwater

contamination. These ponds should not be constructed in areas prone to flooding.

8.6.2 Response Strategies – Off-Site Spills

The objective of surface containment is to prevent the spread of oil on the soil

or substrate surface and to prepare it for recovery or treatment. This usually can be

achieved using easily available materials (i.e., shovels, earth-moving machinery, trucks,

damming materials, sorbents, etc.) to construct berms, dams, barriers, and trenches to

divert and contain the flow. Containment and damming to pool the oil are important if the

oil is to be pumped and / or sucked up. Several techniques are also discussed to contain

and divert subsurface flow.

Strategies

Act quickly

Contain and control as near the source as possible

Protect resources in oil pathway

Prevent oil reaching streams, rivers, or groundwater

Use the natural features to contain and control flow whenever possible.

Strategies for Spill Fires - Ground Level

Operators should determine the source of leakage or spill immediately and

stop it, if possible. If it is a continuous leakage which can not be stopped,

the particular piece of equipment involved should be taken out of service,

depressurised and steamed, if necessary.

Blanket small fires with steam or dry powder but avoid scattering burning

materials.


Plan

8.21

In case of large spill fire, direct high-pressure water fog into the source of

leakage. Protect surrounding structures with water spray. Maintain the

water flow unit the operators control the flow of fuel.

Apply foam to extinguish fires in oil pools or trenches.

Maintain adequate drainage of the fire area.

Avoid working above sewer drains or near firetraps.

8.7 Shoreline Response Operations

Most oil spills will reach the shorelines and cause visible oil pollution. When an

oil spill occurs on open water, the optimal solution is to intercept and recover the oil

before it reaches the shoreline. This is because:

The environmental damage is normally less critical in the open water

environment

The logistics of oil removal becomes more complex in the varied natural

environment of coastlines compared with the open sea.

The cost of oil recovery increases drastically when oil reaches sensitive

shorelines compared with open water operations.

Experience has shown that it is very difficult to avoid some oil reaching the

shorelines. Mechanical equipment and chemical treatment at sea are often insufficient to

recover all oil spilled at sea. When the oil reaches the shoreline, a number of different

parameters have to be taken into consideration:

Quantity of oil

Characteristics of the oil (for instance, toxicity, flammability and viscosity)

Prevailing on-site conditions (weather, season, tides, temperature)

Shoreline type or combination of types (cliffs, pebble, sand, marsh)

Site specific considerations.

8.7.1 Main Steps in Shoreline Clean-up Methods

The four main steps in a shoreline clean-up operation are


Plan

8.22

Step 1: Assessment

Determine the need to clean, setting priorities in line with this contingency

plan

Determine required degree of clean-up for each area in accordance with

priorities

Attain agreement between clean-up team, ecological experts, government

authorities

Step 2: Select Clean-up Method

Choose method appropriate to type of shoreline, access, degree of

spillage.

Minimize damage caused by choice of clean-up technique, degree of

clean-up

Address conflict of interest (e.g. needs of amenity use versus environment

or response speed versus aggressiveness)

Step 3: Clean-up Operations

Monitor clean-up, confirm choices made above, re-evaluate if necessary

Minimize disturbance of shoreline features

Minimize collection of un-oiled debris, sediments

Step 4: Termination / Monitoring

Ongoing assessment of clean-up operations

Determine when clean-up objectives have been met

Post-spill monitoring to confirm recovery of shoreline features, biota

8.7.2 Shoreline Clean-up Methods

The four main methods for shoreline clean-up are as follows:-

8.7.2.1 Pumping and Skimming Techniques

Applicable to shorelines that are heavily oiled. Often the first step is

cleaning a heavily contaminated shoreline


Plan

8.23

Preferred option because it results in fluid wastes that are relatively free of

sediments and debris, which are more easily dealt within disposal

Pumping and skimming techniques can also be used in conjunction with

flushing techniques

8.7.2.2 Flushing Techniques

Use water or steam to flush oil from the beach, and direct it to a recovery

location

Applicable to heavily contaminated beaches, and substrates that are

relatively impermeable (e.g., mud and saturated beaches, boulders, and

man-made structures) that will not allow the flushed oil to penetrate the

beach surface

Typically carried out in conjunction with a skimming operation. The flushed

oil is directed down-slope to skimmers positioned at the water's edge, with

booms deployed around the skimmers to prevent any loss of the water

Options of using low or high pressure water, and of using ambient

temperature water versus warm water or steam

Low pressure, cold water is generally the least effective, particularly with

sticky oils and emulsions, but is least harmful on the environment

High pressure water and heated water and steam are more effective, but

may remove and/or kill beach-dwelling organisms

8.7.2.3 Sediment Removal Techniques

Applicable to a variety of shoreline types, and in particular, when the

shoreline is heavily contaminated, though likely to cause the greatest

environmental impact

The requirements are access for the heavy equipment required for

transporting away oily debris and sediments for disposal and a surface

which is able to support heavy equipment

An important factor to consider is the depth of oil penetration

Important to limit the depth of material removed in order to minimise

disturbance to the beach, and to minimise disposal requirements


Plan

8.24

The best option is to use manual labour to pick up the oily sediment and

mechanical means to transport it away

8.7.2.4 Biodegradation Techniques

Generally refers to "active" bioremediation, where nutrients and/or

microorganisms are applied to enhance natural degradation

Generally suitable for areas that are lightly oiled, especially lightly oiled

salt marshes and tidal flats where the use of equipment could increase the

environmental effects by forcing oil into the substrate

It can also be used as a final clean-up step following more active efforts

8.8 Reporting Oil Spills

All Staff and Contractors must report any observation of oil or oil-like substance

on the sea or shoreline. Notification from the Public is very important. Upon receiving a

report of oil spillage, or oil on the sea, the Incident Controller will:

Verify the report

Ensure that no risk to human health and safety exists and take appropriate

actions if such a situation does exist.

Determine and record:

the name of vessel and master reporting the spill;

position of the vessel at time of observation;

Time of report.

Initiate the immediate response, if necessary

Ensure that appropriate steps have been taken to determine the source of

the spill;

Ensure that the fault, if any, is being rectified.

Preliminary Spill Assessment

The preliminary assessment of an oil spill is to be undertaken by the Incident

Controller or a trained nominee. The following parameters should be recorded.


Plan

8.25

Volume

Estimates of spill volumes can often be made on the basis of the cause of the

spill and the duration the spill event. It is also possible to estimate the volume of a slick on

the basis of its appearance and area covered.

Oil Type

The type of oil spill should be recorded. It is important to differentiate between

spills of crude oils, bunkers or refined product. Spillages of refined volatile product

present distinct risks to human health and safety and the spill control

Wind Speed and Direction

Wind speed and direction at the time of a spill can assist in determining the

initial trajectory of the slick. The Duty Pilot should obtain wind speed and direction from

the anemometer at the Jetty or the Port control room.

Tides

Tidal currents are the main influence on oil movement within port limits. The

time of the spill should be noted, and current tide tables be consulted in order to

determine tidal direction and time of next change.

Waves

The direction wave height and period determine / influence movement of oil spills

in the offshore areas.


Plan

8.26

Fig. 8.1: Disaster Management Cycle


Plan

8.27

Disaster Management

Incident Command & ControlLevel III

Offsite Action

Central Disaster

Management Group

Onsite Action

Group

Level I, II & III

Legal Safety &

Environment

External LiaisonPublic Affairs &

Media

Planning Operations Logistics Finance

Safety of Life

Safety of

Environment

Safety of Port

Facility

Security

Documentation

Harbour

Port Infrastructure

Port Township

Evacuation

Communications &

Information

Man Power

Maintenance

Transportation

Equipment

Food/Shelter/

Medical Aid

Procurement of

Supplies

Funding

Administration

Accounts of Claims

Fig. 8.2 : Conceptual Plan Framework for Disaster Management


Plan

8.28

Fig. 8.3: Conceptual Plan Framework for Emergency Planning Process


Plan

8.29

Fig. 8.4: Onsite Port Disaster Management Organization

CChhaapptteerr 99

BBiivvaallvveess iinn

AAgghhaannaasshhiinnii EEssttuuaarryy

9.1 Introduction

India has a coastline of 7,516 km, adjoining the continental regions and the

offshore islands and a very wide range of coastal ecosystems such as estuaries, lagoons,

mangroves, backwaters, salt marsh, rocky coast, sand stretches and coral reefs, which

are unique biotic and abiotic properties and process (Venkataraman and Wafer, 2005).

Estuaries play a pivotal role in rural livelihood by providing valuable resources like fishes,

molluscs, crabs, prawns, shrimps, etc. and thus constitute an important socio-economic

entity. They are highly productive, dynamic and unique ecosystem providing food,

transport, recreation, etc. Mangroves, one of the unique ecosystems, high ranking in

productivity, are often associated with tropical and sub-tropical estuaries. These are semi-

enclosed coastal body of water, which has a free connection with the open sea, and

within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage

(Pritchard, 1967). The Karnataka coastal region, which extends between the Western

Ghats edge of the Karnataka Plateau in the east and the Arabian Sea in the West, covers

Uttara Kannada; The Uttara Kannada district located in central Western Ghats comprises

four estuaries namely Kali (Sadashivagad), Bedthi (Gangavali), Aghanashini (Tadri) and

Sharavathi (Gersoppa/Banaganga).

Chapter 9:

Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary

9.2

The Western Ghats in India is one among the 34 biodiversity hotspots of the

world is a chain of mountains, stretching north-south along the western peninsular India

for about 1,600 km, harbours rich flora and fauna. Various forest types such as tropical

evergreen, semi-evergreen, moist and dry deciduous and high altitude sholas mingle with

natural and manmade grasslands, savannas and scrub, in addition to, agriculture,

plantation crops, tree monocultures, river valley projects, mining areas and many other

land-uses. Over 4,000 species of flowering plants (38% endemics), 330 butterflies (11%

endemics), 156 reptiles (62% endemics), 508 birds (4% endemics), 120 mammals (12%

endemics) 289 fishes (41% endemics) and 135 amphibians (75% endemics) (Daniels,

2003; Babu and Nayar, 2004; Dahanukar et al, 2004; Gururaja, 2004) are among the

known biodiversity of the Western Ghats. This rich biodiversity coupled with higher

endemism could be attributed to the humid tropical climate, topographical and geological

characteristics, and geographical isolation (Arabian Sea to the west and the semiarid

Deccan Plateau to the east). The four major rivers (Kali, Bedthi, Aghanashini and

Sharavathi) of Uttara Kannada district of Karnataka together account for 92 fish species

(Bhat, 2003).

9.2 Oysters

9.2.1 Occurrence

The oyster begins its life as free-floating plankton. In summer when water

temperature reaches its highest, sexually mature oysters release eggs and sperms into

the water column. A single female oyster can broadcast up to 30 million eggs in a single

season. An entire bed of oysters can produce trillions of eggs. The eggs and sperm mix in

the warm current and quickly develop into free swimming larvae. They join with the

hundreds of other immature marine organisms that together make up a vast pool of

zooplankton (very small animals). This pool of plankton is vital to the estuary, as only one

in a million larvae of any species will actually reach maturity. The rest become food for

each other and for more mature creatures. The entire food chain from the smallest crab to

largest game fish depends on this reproductive fecundity for survival. Together with

phytoplankton (very small plants) they become part of the very bottom of the food chain.

Oysters were found throughout most estuary systems. Oysters are vegetarians

and eat algae. As bivalve mollusks are sedentary and they feed by filtering water which

passes by them. A single adult oyster can filter 115 litres of water a day. The amount of

water filtered by a bed of 3 million oysters is enormous. By filter feeding on algae, oysters

keep the population of algae in check. This increases water clarity and allows light to

Chapter 9:


9.3

penetrate far deeper than without them. This in turn enhances the growth of other

submerged aquatic vegetation such as macro algae (seaweed) and eelgrass. This is vital

in estuary systems that have excessive nutrient loading. The smaller planktonic

vegetation that grow in the upper layer of the water column, quickly “bloom” on the rich

food. These populations explode and then crash, leaving vast amounts of plant matter to

sink and decay.

9.3 Molluscs

The name Mollusc (Mollusk) was derived from Latin mollus meaning soft. They

belong to the Phylum Mollusca. The first Mollusc appeared as far back as the Cambrian

period, approximately 500 million years ago. They are the second largest phylum among

the invertebrates comprising more than 100,000 species. In India, till today, 5070 species

of Mollusca have been recorded of which, 3370 species are from marine environment

(Venkataraman and Wafer, 2005), while rest from the freshwater and terrestrial

environment. They have been exploited worldwide for food, ornamentation and pearls

throughout human history. Geologic evidence from South Africa indicates that systematic

human exploitation of marine resources started about 70,000 to 60,000 years ago

(Volman, 1978).

In Molluscs, Lamellibranchia (Pelecypoda or Bivalvia), Gastropoda and

Cephalopoda are the only classes fished. The utilization of gastropods for food is very

limited, and a few important species occasionally collected for this purpose. In India,

Molluscs fishery comprises mainly bivalves such as clams, mussels and oysters. Except

for the chank and pearl-oyster beds, the most productive of which are concentrated on

the south eastern coast, the shell-fish resources of other commercial species of molluscs

are generally more plentiful on the West Coast (CSIR, 1962b).

9.4 Lamellibranchia (Pelecypoda or Bivalvia)

Bivalves are the second largest Class in the Phylum Mollusca. It has two shells

or valves join together with the help of teeth like structure called hinge and fibrous tissue -

ligament (Fig. 9.1). The shells are made up of calcium carbonate.

Most of the forms are completely sedentary remaining attached to hard substrata

(Fig. 9.2) by thread-like byssus of the foot or by one of their shell valves. A few forms

burrow into submerged timbers, and commensal and parasitic types are also known. Some

marine forms extend to a depth of 4.94 km. Life histories of bivalves pass through larval stages,

which undergo remarkable changes before attaining adult characteristics. Most commonly

Chapter 9:


9.4

utilized bivalves for food include clams (Veneridae), sea-mussels (Mytilidae) and edible oysters

(Ostreidae) (CSIR, 1962a).

Globally, commercial exploitation of bivalves for food is dominated by epifaunal taxa

such as ostreids, mytilids and pectinids. Annual harvests of bivalves for human consumption

represent about 5% by weight of the total world harvest of aquatic resources (Roberts,

1999). In India eight species of oysters, two species of mussels and 17 species of clams were

identified, but only six species of oysters, four species of giant clams, one species of window-

pane oyster are exploited extensively from marine regions. However, the Molluscan fishery is

not well organized along the Indian Coast. They are exploited in large quantities by traditional

methods and sold in live and dried conditions in the market for human consumption

(Venkataraman and Wafer, 2005; Chatterji, 2002). Rushikulya estuary, Orissa has 317

species of molluscs (Ghosh, 1992). 34 of 70 creeks of Maharashtra support clam fishery

(Mane, 1973) and clam fishery in Maharashtra is mainly dependent on M. meretrix,

Katelysia opima and Paphia laterisules (Ranade, 1964). Molluscs especially clams, are

abundant in Dakshina Kannada District, Karnataka and are harvested by traditional

methods during non monsoon period (James et al, 1975; Chatterji et al. 2002).

The CMFRI (Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute) estimate show

increasing trend with 4,583 t of bivalves (in 2006), compared to 905 t (in 1997). Total

molluscs collection in Karnataka shows similar trend with 16,225 t (in 2006) and 239 t in

1985 (http://www.cmfri.com/html/cmfriDATA01.html). Table 9.1 lists some edible species of

bivalves in India (CSIR, 1962a; CSIR, 1962b). The bivalves are rich in nutrients,

particularly proteins, fats and minerals (CSIR 1962a). The Indian edible bivalves have

protein (5-14%), fats (0.5-3%), calcium (0.04-1.84%), and phosphorus (0.1-0.2%) and

iron (1-29 mg/100 g of the fresh weight). Chemical composition of a few important edible

Indian Bivalves (CSIR, 1962a; Nagabhushanam and Thompson, 1997) are given in

Table 9.2.

The role of small-scale fisheries and how they fit into the rural economy

remains poorly understood. Unlike large-scale industrial fisheries, they receive little

attention from policy-makers. Globally, this kind of informal small-scale fisheries and

fisheries-related activities (processing, trading, etc.) make an important contribution to the

nutrition, food security, sustainable livelihoods and poverty alleviation of many, especially

developing countries (Staples et al., 2004).

This study focuses on intertidal shellfishery, especially bivalve gathering - a

informal small-scale fishery in the Aghanashini River estuary situated towards the center

Chapter 9:


9.5

of South Indian West Coast, in the State of Karnataka. Bivalve gathering has been a

tradition among the inhabitants for centuries, and it is still being practiced. Harvesting is

done manually during low tides. The collectors may wade through shallow waters or use

small boats to collect in deeper water. The targeted bivalve speceis are Clams P.

malabarica, K. opima, Meretrix sp., and V. cyprinoides, Mussel P. viridis, and Oysters

Crassostrea sp. The harvesters sell the bivalves to traders who come to the collection

centres or sell to the local consumers by house to house sale or in the local markets.

Typically, harvesting is carried out in the 19 coastal villages by Harikanthra

and Ambiga fishing communities as well as by Halakkivokkals, Namdharis, and

Gramvokkals (basically farming communities). Both men and women are involved in the

harvest and about 2370 people were dependent on bivalve fisheries, for employment.

This study will provide an insight to policy and decision makers in understanding the role

of small-scale fishery and its sustainable livelihood value and enable them to conserve

such neglected, nevertheless ecologically and economically important, habitats for

posterity.

Clams are considered to be nutritious and delicious and are fished in

considerable quantities in some coastal places. Clams and other bivalves of their kind are

usually handpicked in shallow waters at low tides.

Indian waters have two species of large size mussels; they are the brown

mussel, Perna indica and the green mussel, Perna viridis Linn, belonging to Mytilidae

family usually grow over submerged rocks where they attach themselves by means of

their slimy thread like structures called byssus. The brown mussel, Perna sp., is restricted

in its distribution from south of Quilon to Cape Comorin on the West Coast and up to

Tirunelveli dist. on the East Coast. The green mussel, Perna viridis Linn, is abundant at

Cochin, Malabar and north of Kerala and distributed on both the coasts. In Bombay,

Ratnagiri and Karwar. It is reported to be rare.

The green mussel occurs not only in the coastal waters, but also in the

brackwaters. The bearded weaving mussel, Modiolus barbatus (Linn.), occurring in great

abundance in the Palk Bay and pearl bank region of the Gulf of Mannar, is also used

as food (CSIR, 1962a; Nagabhushanam and Thompson, 1997). Oysters are inhabited

where brackish water is renewed by tidal flow and the substratum is suitable for their

attachment.

The backwater oyster, Crassostera madrasensis (Peterson), is commonly

found to be confined to the southern regions on the West Coast but widely distributed

Chapter 9:


9.6

in all estuaries and backwaters of the East Coast, the rock oyster, C. cucullata (Born),

from the intertidal rocky coast, of Bombay and Karwar, the Disc Oyster C. discoidea

(Gould), from the littoral zone of the coastal areas and C. gryphoides (Newton & Smith)

found in the muddy creeks, of Kutch, Dwarka, Bombay, Ratnagiri, Jaytapur, Karwar, etc.

on the West Coast, all belonging to the family Ostreidae of the class Bivalvia (CSIR,

1962a).

9.5 Economic Importance of Bivalves

Bivalves have been exploited worldwide for food, ornamentation and pearls

throughout human history. Economic importances of bivalves are:

i.) Fish bait: Molluscs like cuttlefish, squids, octopods and fingered chank shells

are used as efficient bait in fishing. Mussels, clams, and gastropods are also

often used as fish bait (CSIR, 1962a).

ii.) Medicinal uses: A number of species of Molluscan soft bodies and their shells

are used in the treatment of various diseases and preparation of medicines and

medicinal oils. Some of the medicinally useful species and their treatment in

different diseases are listed in the following Table 9.3 (CSIR, 1962a).

iii.) Ornaments and Jewellery: The Pearl Oysters and other molluscan shells

fished for decorative and ornamental purposes are of considerable

commercial importance in Madagascar, Western Australia, Philippines, Japan

and Ceylon. In India, pearl fisheries and chank fisheries have been exploited

from ancient times. Among bivalves, the shell of the Windowpane Oyster,

Placuna placenta, is used for glazing windows and verandah roofs. The

common freshwater mussel, Lamellidens marginalis, produces pearls of fair

quality in large numbers; they are collected and sold in South India. Pearls of

poor lustre are also reported from the Green Mussel, Perna viridis, from

Sonapur backwaters (CSIR, 1962a; Nagabhushanam and Thompson, 1997).

iv.) Pearl fisheries: Pearls of high value are obtained from pearl-oysters of the

genus Pinctada Roding (class Bivalvia, family Pteriidae), of which several

species, viz. P. vulgaris (Schumacher), P. chemnitzi (Philippi), P. margaritifera

(Linn.), P. anomioides (Reeve), and P. atropurpurea (Bunker), occur in

Indian waters. Of these P. vulgaris is by far the commonest and the most

important and is widely distributed in the Gulf of Kutch, Gulf of Mannar and

the Palk Bay (CSIR, 1962b).

Chapter 9:


9.7

v.) Shells: The calcium rich bivalve shells are mainly used for lime making and

poultry feeds. The lime is used for white-washing and for chewing with betel

pan. Lime is used for neutralizing acidic agricultural soils (CSIR, 1962a).

vi.) Lime Manufacture: The production of lime from molluscan shells

(Fig. 9.3 (a) and Fig. 9.3 (b) is an important industry in the coastal areas of

India. Shells of various species of gastropod and more especially

bivalves are gathered in large quantities from the estuaries and

backwaters. Lime produced by burning molluscan shells is of superior

quality for use in masonry construction and white washing. It is used also as

a fertilizer, prawn feed and poultry feed. The shells are directly used for the

production of high grade cement (CSIR, 1962a).The commonly used

bivalve species for lime manufacture in the Aghanashini estuarine region

are the Paphia malabarica, Meretrix meretrix, M. casta, Katelysia opima and

Vellorita cyprinoids. The death shells of these bivalves are mixed with

charcoal or outer shell of coconut then the mixture is burnt in to powder.

Burning process may continue for one to two hours depending upon the

amount of material kept for the lime making process.

vii.) Miscellaneous: The shells, of the Placuna Bruguiere, Spirula Lam., and of

cockles (Chiefly Cardiidae), are used in the manufacture of toothpastes. The

shells are collected in Tuticorin and sent to Calcutta and Madras for this

purpose (CSIR, 1962a).

9.5.1 Harmful molluscs

Marine borers belonging to the families Pholadidae and Teredinidae of

Bivalves cause substantial damage to underwater wooden construction, wooden sailing

craft and floating timber, particularly in the tropics. The sea fishing industry which depends

mainly on wooden catamarans and boats is reported to suffer an annual loss of about a

crore of rupees as a result of borer damage.

Martesia striata (Linn.) is a common burrowing pholad mollusc can bore into

floating wood up to a depth of 17 m. in the sea. Several species of teredinids of shipworms

belonging to the genera Teredo Linn, and Bankia Gray are particularly destructive. A few

important among them are: Teredo manni (Wright), T. diedrichseni Roch, Bankia carinata

Leach and B. companuellata Moll. Some species of the genus Teredo burrow in the wood

when it is tiny and continue to live in the burrow. Some species would attain a length of

Chapter 9:


9.8

1 m or more, with a diameter of 6.3 mm (CSIR, 1962a).

9.6 Morphology of Bivalves

Fig. 9.4 illustrates the typical morphology of bivalves. Some of the general

features are:

SHELL: The bivalve shell acts as a skeleton to protect against predators,

and in burrowing species. It helps to keep mud and sand out of the mantle

cavity. Its main component is calcium carbonate and is formed by the

deposition of crystals of this salt in an organic matrix of the protein,

conchiolin. Calcium for shell growth is obtained from the diet, or taken up

from seawater. The colour, shape and markings on the shell vary

considerably between the different groups of bivalves (Gosling, 2003).

Shell Formation: The shell is secreted by the mantle. The calcium ions

excreted from the blood mix with the fluid present in the mantle cavity,

forming calcium carbonate. The calcium carbonate is absorbed by

"conchiolin", a secretion of the mantle. The conchiolin crystallises into

various forms, of which calcite and argonite forms are utilised in shell

formation (Apte, 1998).

MAITLE : In bivalves the mantle consists of two lobes of tissue which

completely enclose the animal within the shell. Between the mantle and the

internal organs is a capacious mantle cavity. Cilia on the inner surface of

the mantle play an important role in directing particles onto the gills and in

deflecting heavier material along rejection tracts towards the inhalant

opening (Gosling, 2003).

GILLS: The lamellibranch gills, or ctenidia, are two large, curtain-like

structures that are suspended from the ctenidial axis that is fused along the

dorsal margin of the mantle. Generally, the gills follow the curvature of the

shell margin with the maximum possible surface exposed to the

inhalant water flow. Cilia on the gill filaments have specific arrangements

and functions. They are responsible for drawing water into the mantle cavity

and passing it through the gill filaments, and then upwards to the exhalant

chamber and onwards to the exhalant opening. In bivalves the gills have a

respiratory as well as a feeding role. Their large surface area and rich

haemolymph supply make them well suited for gas exchange (Gosling, 2003).

Chapter 9:


9.9

STOMACH: The mouth is ciliated and leads into a narrow ciliated

oesophagus. Ciliary movement helps to propel material towards the stomach.

Indeed, this method of moving material is found throughout the length of the

alimentary canal, primarily because it lacks a muscular wall. The stomach is

large and ovalshaped and lies completely embedded in the digestive gland,

which opens into it by several ducts (Gosling, 2003).The digestive gland,

which is brown or black and consists of blind-ending tubules that connect to

the stomach by several ciliated ducts, is the major site of intracellular

digestion. Within these ducts there is a continuous two-way flow: Materials

enter the gland for intracellular digestion and absorption and wastes leave en

route to the stomach and intestine. Rejected particles from the stomach as

well as waste material from the digestive gland pass into the long coiled

intestine. The waste is formed into faecal pellets that are voided through the

anus and are swept away through the exhalant opening (Gosling, 2003).

FOOT: The primitive mollusc had a broad ciliated flat foot, well supplied with

mucous gland cells, and the animal is believed to have moved over the

lubricated substrate in a gliding motion, using a combination of ciliary action

and muscular contractions. In the evolution of bivalves the body became

laterally compressed. Consequently, the foot lost its flat creeping sole and

became blade-like and directed in an anterior direction as an adaptation for

burrowing. Bivalves use the foot for locomotion and burrow in to substrate

(Gosling, 2003).

GOIADS: The reproductive system in bivalves is exceedingly simple. The

gonads are paired and each gonad is little more than a system of branching

tubules, and gametes are budded off the epithelial lining of these tubules. The

tubules unite to form ducts that lead into larger ducts and eventually terminate

in a short gonoduct (ibid). In primitive bivalves, e.g. the nut shell, / ucula, the

gonoducts open into the kidneys, and eggs and sperm exit through the kidney

opening (nephridiopore) into the mantle cavity. In most bivalves the

gonoducts open through independent pores into the mantle cavity, close to the

nephridiopore. With the exception of oysters (Ostrea sp.), fertilisation is

external and the gametes are shed through the exhalant opening (Gosling,

2003).

HEART: The heart lies in the mid-dorsal region of the body, close to the

hinge line of the shell. It lies in a space called the pericardium, which

Chapter 9:


9.10

surrounds the heart dorsally and a portion of the intestine ventrally. The heart

consists of a single, muscular ventricle and two thin-walled auricles. The

circulatory system is an open system with the haemolymph in the sinuses

bathing the tissues directly. From the sinuses the haemolymph is carried to

the kidneys for purification (Gosling, 2003).

EXCRETORY ORGANS: There are two types of excretory organs in

bivalves, the pericardial glands and the paired kidneys (in Mytilus U-shaped).

The brown-coloured pericardial glands, sometimes referred to as Keber's

organs, develop from the epithelial lining of the pericardium and come to lie

over the auricular walls of the heart. Waste accumulates in certain cells of the

pericardial glands and this is periodically discharged into the pericardial

cavity and from there it is eliminated via the kidneys (Gosling, 2003).

NERVES: The nervous system of bivalves is fundamentally simple. It is

bilaterally symmetrical and consists of three pairs of ganglia and several pairs

of nerves. The cerebral ganglia innervate the palps, anterior adductor muscle,

and part of the mantle, as well as the statotocysts and osphradia. The pedal

ganglia control the foot. The visceral ganglia control a large area: gills, heart,

pericardium, kidney, digestive tract, gonad, posterior adductor muscle, part or

the entire mantle, siphons and pallial sense organs (Gosling, 2003).

9.7 Economic Valuation

Economic valuation is a tool to aid and improve use and management of

natural resources by providing a means for measuring and comparing the various benefits

of resources. The resources are quantified based on the goods and services made

possible by ecosystem's functions. The economic worth of goods or services,

generally measured in terms of what individuals are willing to pay for. The value of

the benefit is determined by its price, i.e., the amount of money for which it will be

exchanged. The value of a benefit is the price of that product in the open market and

the worth of that benefit to a potential buyer. This is measured in economic terms as

willingness to pay. In other words, the economic value of the ecosystem

services/commodity is measured by people's willingness to pay (WTP) for those

benefit (http://wgbis.ces.iisc.ernet.in/energy/water/paper/ecodoc2004.htm).

Chapter 9:


9.11

Economic valuation is an effective method to understand the significance of

ecosystem goods or services provided by nature. The strength of the economic

valuation methods is that, their concept of value incorporates the relationship between

humankind and ecosystem products (Winkler, 2006).

9.8 Objective

The study will provide a basis to the planners to have a re-look at the estuary.

These ecosystems have been under constant threat due to lack of knowledge of the

benefits derived from these ecosystems and a more importantly lack of holistic approaches

in the implementation of developmental projects. Locating major projects in an ecologically

sensitive regions rather demonstrates lack of understanding of ecosystem functioning and

also services and goods on the part of regional decision makers.

Objectives of this endeavour were: i) to document the diversity of bivalves and

ii) to describe the benefits derived from them by harvesters and others who are

associated with processing and trade. This involved:

Inventorisation and mapping of the edible bivalve species of Aghanashini

estuary

Estimation of the number of people associated with bivalve collection and

trade

Methods and techniques of bivalve harvesting and

Quantification of benefits derived from bivalves: economic valuation of

bivalves

9.9 Materials and Methods

9.9.1 Study Area

The Aghanashini or Tadri River (total length 121 km) originates in the Sirsi

taluk of Uttara Kannada district in the central Western Ghats of Karnataka State. Winding

its way through deep gorges and valleys the river meets the tides of the Arabian Sea and

forms a large estuarine expanse (13 km long and 2 to 6 km wide) in the coastal taluk of

Kumta. The estuary has its outlet into the sea in between the villages of Aghanashini

in the south and Tadri in the north. The study area lies between the Lat. 14.391° to

14.585° N and Long. 74.304° to 74.516° E. Situated in the estuarine complex of the

river are about 25 villages of which people from 19 villages traditionally are associated

with bivalve harvesting (Fig. 9.5).

Chapter 9:


9.12

9.9.2 Methods

The survey (both household and field) was undertaken during June 2006 to

March 2007. Diversity and distribution of edible bivalve species, was documented by field

observations. Bivalve harvesting villages were identified by interviewing people living

closer to Aghanashini estuary. In the bivalve collecting villages, household surveys were

undertaken using questionnaires. Within the identified villages we located the hamlets of

communities which have bivalve collection as major activity. The local gram panchayath

also guided us regarding bivalve collecting families. About 10% of these households of

the bivalve collecting families were surveyed primarily to estimate:

i.) Number of individuals involved in bivalve harvesting

ii.) Number of bivalve harvesting months and

iii.) Number of bivalve harvesting days per month.

In addition to these, 5% of the bivalve collecting community households in

each village was subjected to another level of survey to elicit the following information:

i.) Quantity of bivalve collection per person per day

ii.) Valuation of bivalves collected and

iii.) Expenditure incurred in collection (including local transport and

processing).

We also estimated the additional income generated from the sale of bivalve

shells as well as from dried bivalve meat, which constitute smaller components of the

economy. There is also a shell mining industry in operation which mines for deposits of

empty shells from another part of the estuary where live bivalves are not normally

available. This industry also procures from bivalve collectors, a small quantity of empty

shells incidentally gathered or disposed off after removing the meat. Employment

generated from this activity is also estimated.

9.10 Results

Fig. 9.6 gives the spatial distribution of clams, mussel and oysters in the

Aghanashini estuary. Clam P. malabarica inhabits deeper water whereas species like K.

opima, M. meretrix and M. casta are associated with the mud flats of the estuary. The

estuarine as well as fresh water bivalve species V. cyprinoides inhabits farthest part of

estuary with lower salinity in the moderately deep water region. One specimen of blood

Chapter 9:


9.13

clam Area granosa was encountered near Aghanashini village. Mussel (P. viridis)

occupies deep water rocky surface of the river mouth region, while two species of oysters

(Crassostrea sp.) occupied littoral zone of the estuary region which is often referred as

oyster bed (Fig. 9.7).

9.10.1 Distribution of Bivalves

The bivalve harvesters of Aghanashini estuary normally collect eight species of

edible bivalves. However, yet another edible species, Area granosa known as blood clam,

is rare and not of significance to the collectors. The edible bivalves are popularly

categorised as clams, mussels and oysters. Table 9.4 provides species-wise habitat and

distribution and use of these bivalves in Aghanashini estuary and also elsewhere in India.

Spatial distribution of these bivalves is given in Fig. 9. 6. Harvested bivalve species, except V.

cyprinoides are found within a distance of 4 km from the river mouth. In this part of the

estuary the summer (in April) salinity at high tide, as estimated by Bhat (2003) is almost

closer to the sea water at 32-34 ppt. Of the bivalves here the green mussel P. viridis Fig.

9.8 (a), grows on steep rocky substratum towards the river mouth in the sub-tidal zone in

close proximity to the sea. Two oyster species of Crassostrea Fig. 9.8 (b) occupy inter-tidal

zone on mud-flats mixed with sand and shell fragments. P. malabarica Figure 9.8 (c)

inhabits deeper water with sandy substratum normally not exposed during low tides. K. opima

Fig. 9.8 (d), M meretrix Fig. 9.8 (e) and M casta Fig. 9.8 (f) are associated with mud-flats of

this zone. A. granosa Fig. 9.8 (g) also occurs here. K. opima has its distribution zone

extending up to Paduvani (7 km away) where summer (in April) salinity is 31-32 ppt. The clam

V. cyprinoides Fig. 9.8 (h) inhabits the farthest part of the estuary that is 10 km away from the

river mouth (salinity 26-34 ppt; Bhat 2003)) and beyond into the freshwater zone more than 18

km away.

9.10.2 Bivalve Harvesting and Trade

Both men and women are engaged in harvesting of bivalves Fig. 9.9 (a) and

Fig. 9.9 (b), except P. viridis which only men harvest. Women normally avoid dangerously

deep waters and rocky substratum towards the interface of the sea, which is the preferred

habitat of P. viridis. Harvesting is done by hand, feet or with the aid of a small hand-held

digging stick. The collectors work for three to four hours per day during the low tides.

Bivalves are collected in cone shaped nets, baskets, plastic boxes, cement bags, etc. Small

non-mechanised crafts are normally used for collection from deeper waters and for transport

of bivalves from the collection site to the villages. The boats may be steered by men or

women. Harvesting methods, for various bivalves are briefly discussed below.

Chapter 9:


9.14

Clams: P. malabarica is most common in Aghanashini estuary followed by K.

opima, M. meretrix, M. casta and V. cyprinoides. Searching for P. malabarica

is done in shallow water by using hands or feet. K. opima, M. meretrix, M.

casta, associated with mud-flats are picked by hand or dug out using sticks,

mostly by women. V. cyprinoides is collected from shallow water, through

direct searching using hands or feet mostly by women.

Mussels: P. viridis, the only edible mussel of Aghanashini is usually found

attached to the steep sub-tidal rocky parts of the river mouth. The species

adheres to the substratum by thread like structures called byssus and is

manually picked by men.

Oysters: Crassostrea sp. form beds on the mud-flats and also attach to the

inter-tidal rocks. Usually women extract the meat by opening the oyster shell

using a knife. However it was observed from the information of fishermen that

at present there are no oysters observed within 25 Km from the coast. In high

seas oyster available in that area.

9.10.3 Processing

Dead bivalves and empty shells are removed from the collection Fig. 9.10

before marketing. These empty shells are used for making lime and poultry feed. Small

quantities of bivalves, especially P. malabarica, are boiled for couple of hours along with

shells and then meat is removed and sundried for preservation and subsequent usage.

An estimated 2,347 individuals from 1,202 households are associated with

bivalve harvesting; of these 1,738 are men and 609 are women, who belong to 19

estuarine villages, 1,202 families. The majority who harvest bivalves for trade belong to

local fishing communities such as Harikanthras and Ambigas. Halakkivokkals, Namdharis,

and Gramvokkals, who are traditionally agriculturists, also gather bivalves mostly for

domestic consumption and sometimes for trade. Bulk of the harvesters are from

Aghanashini village (35.15%) followed by Divgi (18.75%), Gokarn (9.67%), Torke (7.84%)

and Mirjan (7.63%). Aghanashini closer to the river mouth has a substantial production of

bivalves and also accounts for the largest number of harvesters (825).

Total number of bivalve collecting days in a year is 140 for male and 147 for

females. Hence, bivalve harvest in the estuary alone generates 332,843 days of human

employment per year. Bulk of the employment for men is through the collection of P.

malabarica, which is found in deeper parts of the estuary (water depth >lm at lowtide).

However, collecting P. viridis from steep and rocky parts of the river mouth being a riskier

Chapter 9:


9.15

task only a small number of men (2.11% of men collectors) venture to do it. V. cyprinoides

is collected from shallow waters by both men and women. Collection of the K. opima, M.

meretrix, M. casta and Crassostrea sp. from the mudflats is mostly woman's domain.

Village and season-wise estimated quantity of bivalves harvested per day is

listed in Table 9.7. The quantity of bivalves harvested per day is 11.17% more during

November to May. Aghanashini and Divgi village people alone contribute 67% of the

bivalve harvested per day.

Village, season and gender-wise average quantity of bivalves harvested is

given in Table 9.8 (a) and 9.8 (b). The post monsoon period of November to May is more

congenial for bivalve harvesting. Women collect bivalves from shallow regions and

mudflats compared to men who harvest from deeper regions. Bivalves are abundant in

deeper parts of estuary compared to shallow regions and mudflats. The average quantity

harvested is 65±24.78 kg/individual/day for men and 22±13.46 kg/day/individual for women.

Spot purchases of bivalves harvested are made by traders Fig. 9.11 (a) who

transport them to nearby towns and even to neighbouring states, especially to Goa. The

local marketing is usually carried out by the women of fishing communities, who make

household sales in Kumta town and nearby villages. Some female also carry the bivalves to

the local fish markets Fig. 9.11 (b). The harvesters also use small part of the collection for

domestic use. Bivalve harvested in this estuary is estimated at 22,006 t/yr, which generates

a total primary annual net income of about Rs. 57.8 million (Rs. 57,018,710 from bivalve

collection and Rs. 816,267 from supplementary products like empty shells and dried meat).

Aghanashini village, which accounts for the highest production of bivalves alone earns

about Rs. 33 million (58% of total income). More details about village, season and gender-wise

income per year is given in Table 9.9. The average income for the male was Rs. 29,129 from

140 collection days for the study year 2006-07, whereas it was Rs. 10,497 for the female

from 147 collection days. Some quantity of bivalves collected is used for the production of

dried meat, which earns marginally more profit than sale of fresh bivalves. The estimated

annual income from the sale of empty shells is Rs. 483,850 (Table 9.10) and from dried

bivalve meat is Rs. 334,983 (Table 9.11).

9.10.4 Shell Mining

Parts of the estuary are leased out for the mining of empty shells, which are

used by various industries for the production of poultry-feed, lime, fertilizers, etc. The

annual production of shells is around 80, 000 to 100,000 t and the market price ranges

Chapter 9:


9.16

from Rs. 750 to 950/t. About 600 persons (only men, especially those operating native

boats) are engaged in shell mining Fig. 9.12 (a) in addition to transporters - about 200

persons Fig. 9.12 (b). As shell mining depends largely on the deposits of dead shells, in

the long run it is not going to be sustainable. Sustainable harvest has to be limited to

procurement of shells of live bivalves and annual deposits of dead shells of unexploited

bivalves which needs further investigation. The gross annual value of the shells is about

Rs. 76.5 million.

9.10.5 Dried Meat

Clams are used in the drying process. In general, locally collected sticks,

woods or purchased wood is used for boiling the vessel containing bivalves and freshwater.

The boiling process may take about half to one and half hour or more depending on the

quantity involved in the boiling process. Then their shells are removed and flesh sun-dried

for two days. The dried bivalves Fig. 9.13 can be kept for years for human consumption. The

cost of one kolaga (approximately 1 to 1.25 kg) of dried bivalves will be Rs. 80 to 200

depending on the season and demand.

9.10.6 Valuation of estuary based only on bivalve production

The annual harvest of bivalves in Aghanashini estuary is estimated to be

22,006 t (edible portion Fig. 9.14 about 9% of fresh weight). On an average an individual

consumes 50 g of meat for about 200 days a year. Therefore the bivalves of this estuary

alone contribute substantially towards protein and mineral rich nutrition of about 198,000

people of the West Coast.

About 186 ha of the estuary, estimated to be used for bivalve harvesting

Fig. 9.15. Therefore the average annual income per year for every hectare of bivalve

harvesting area can be put at Rs. 306,552. It is an amazing yield/ha compared to any other

natural ecosystem or agricultural systems, and that too this yield is without input of any kind

into the system by humans. Majority of the 105 harvesters whom we interviewed opined that

over the years, despite the harvests, there has been hardly any change in the availability of

bivalves. However, a small number of harvesters expressed that there has been a

declining trend in recent years. It is learnt that during 2007 - 08 period over harvesting due

to rising demand from Goa has created local scarcity and spiraling of bivalve prices.

Shell mining is done in an area of 100 ha per year out of a total lease area of

809.37 ha (20 years lease period). The shells mined at prevailing market prices are worth

Rs. 765,000/ha/yr. Hence, the total value of the estuary based on live bivalve and shell

Chapter 9:


9.17

production is worth Rs. 1,071,552/ha/yr. This demonstrates the high productive potential of

the estuary compared to any other economic sectors.

This valuation does not include other goods that the estuary provides such as

production of shrimps, fish, crabs, salt, mangroves, etc. in addition to services such as fish

spawning grounds, nutrient cycling, hydrology, flood control, soil protection, sink for carbon,

etc. Estuaries are ranked among the highest productive natural ecosystems of the world.

Based on all goods and services that estuaries provide Costanza et al. (1997)

estimated the value of an estuary as USD 22,832/ha/yr. The West Coast of India is dotted

with the estuaries of numerous rivers which originate in the Western Ghats, one of the global

biodiversity hotspots. Yet there has been an almost callous neglect and misuse of these high

ranking productive ecosystems causing inestimable losses.

9.11 NEERI Work

The samples were collected from the Tadadi Port of the Aghanashini Estuary

Area by the consortium of M/s Prointek S.A. and Mir group, samples were identified in

NEERI laboratory. The Bivalves were identified as presented in the Fig. 9.16.

9.11.1 Management

Bivalve area is demarcated before construction of the port

Care should be taken while constructing the port on the Bivalve area

9.11.2 Study

A fresh study should be undertaken for the confirmation of the presence of

Oysters in the identified area and Aghanashini Estuary simultaneously, while

development of the port is also carried out.

Chapter 9:


9.18

References

1. Apte, D. 1998. The Book of Indian Shells. Bombay Natural History Society, Oxford

University Press, Mumbai.

2. Babu, K.K.S. and Nayar, C.K.G. 2004. A new species of the blind fish Horaglanis

Menon (Siluroifea: Claridae) from Parappukara (Trichur District) and a new report

of Horaglanis krishnai Menon from Ettumanur (Kottayam district), Kerala. JBNHS,

Vol. 101 (2): 296 – 299.

3. Bhat, A. 2003. Diversity and composition of freshwater fishes in four river systems

of Central Western Ghats, India. Environmental Biology of Fishes. 68:25-38.

4. Bhat, P. K. 2003. Hydrological Studies of Aghanashini Estuary, Kumta – Central

West Coast of India. Ph. D Thesis. Karnataka University, Dharwad.

5. Chatterji, A., Z. A. Ansari, B. S. Ingole, M. A. Bichurina, M. Sovetova and Y. A.

Boikov. 2002. Indian marine bivalves: Potential source of antiviral drugs. Current

Science, 82: 1279-1282.

6. Costanza, R., R. d'Arge, R. deGroot, S. Farber, M. Grasso, B. Hannon, K.

Limburg, S. Naeem, R.V. O'Neill, J. Paruelo, R.G. Raskin, P. Sutton and M. van

den Belt. 1997. The valuation of the world’s ecosystem services and natural

capital. Nature, 387: 253-260.

7. CSIR. 1962a. The Wealth of India: Raw Materials Vol. VI: L-M. National Institute

of Science Communication and Information Resources, CSIR, New Delhi, India.

8. CSIR. 1962b. The Wealth of India: Raw Materials Vol. IV Supplement - Fish and

Fisheries. National Institute of Science Communication and Information

Resources, CSIR, New Delhi, India.

9. Dahanukar, N., Raut, R. and Bhat, A.2004. Distribution, endemism and threat

status of freshwater fishes in the Western Ghats of India. Journal of

Biogeography. 31:123- 136.

10. Daniels, R.J.R. 2003. Biodiversity of the Western Ghats: An overview. In ENVIS

Bulletin: Wildlife and Protected Areas, Conservation of Rainforests in India, A.K.

Gupta, Ajith Kumar and V Ramakantha (editors), Vol. 4, No. 1, 25 – 40.

11. ftp://ftp.fao.org/docrep/fao/009/y4160e/y4160e04.pdf (Accessed on November 08,

2008).

12. Ghosh, A.K. 1992. Estuarine Ecosystem in India and Faunal Resources.

Estuarine Ecosystem series No (1) Rushikulya estuary. Zoological Survey of

India, 1-5.

13. Gosling, E. 2003. Bivalve molluscs –Biology, Ecology and Culture. Blackwell,

United Kingdom.

14. Gururaja, K.V. 2004. Sahyadi Mandooka: Western Ghats Amphibians, Sahyadri

enews: 6. http://wgbis.ces.iisc.ernet.in/biodiversity/newsletter/ issue6/index.htm.

15. http://india.gov.in/sectors/defence2.php (Accessed on January 04, 2007).

Chapter 9:


9.19

16. http://www.biodiversityhotspots.org/xp/hotspots/hotspotsscience/key_findings/Pag

es/default.aspx (Accessed on November 08, 2008)

17. http://www.cmfri.com/html/cmfriDATA01.html (accessed on July 25, 2008).

18. http://www.cmfri.com/html/cmfriDATA01.html (accessed on July 25, 2008).

19. http://www.karnataka.com/profile/physiography.html (Accessed on December 21,

2007)

20. http://zpkarwar.kar.nic.in/CensusAnkolaVWP.htm (accessed on July 21, 2008).

21. James, P.S.B.R., S.L. Shanbhogue and T.R.C. Chandrasekhara Gupta. 1975.

Estuarine fisheries resources of South Kanara District, Karnataka. In: Recent

Researches in Estuarine Biology. (ed. Natarajan, R). pp. 99 – 104. Hindustan

Publishing Corporation, Delhi, India.

22. Mane U. H. 1973. Studies on the Biology, Ecology and Physiology of the Marine

Clams. Ph.D Thesis. University of Bombay, India.

23. Nagabhushanam, R. and Thompson M. 1997. Fouling Organisms of the Indian

Ocean: Biology and Control Technology. CRC Press.

24. Pritchard, D. W., 1967. Observations of circulation in coastal plain estuaries. In:

Estuaries. Ed. G.H. Lauff. Am. Ass. Adv. Sci., 83: 37-44.

25. Ranade. 1964. Studies on the Biology, Ecology and Physiology of the Marine

Clams. Ph.D Thesis. University of Bombay, India.

26. Roberts, D. 1999. Commercial exploitation of bivalves. International meeting on

Biology and Evolution of the Bivalvia, Malacological Society, London.

27. Staples D., Satia, B. and Gardiner, P.R. 2004. A research agenda for small-scale

fisheries. Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations Regional Office

for Asia and the Pacific, Bangkok.

28. Venkataraman, K. and Wafar, M. (2005) Coastal and marine biodiversity of India.

Indian J. Mar. Sci., 34 (1): 57-75.

29. Volman, T. P. 1978. Early Archeological Evidence for Shellfish Collecting.

Science, 201: 911-913.

30. Winkler, R. 2006. Valuation of ecosystem goods and services Part 1: An

integrated dynamic approach. Ecological Economics, 59: 82-93.

31. Economic valuation of Bivalves in the Aghanashini Estuary West Coast,

Karnataka ENVIS Technical report 30 November 2008.

Chapter 9:


9.20

Fig. 9.1: Paphia Malabarica

Fig. 9.2: Perna Viridis Attached to Stone by Thread-like Byssus

Fig. 9.3 (a): Bivalve Shells Burnt along with Coconut Shell to make Lime Powder

Fig. 9.3 (b): Lime Powder Packing

Chapter 9:


9.21

Fig. 9.4: General Features of a Bivalve (ftp://ftp.fao.org/)

Chapter 9:


9.22

Fig. 9.5 : Sampling Points in Aghanashini Estuary

Chapter 9:


9.23

Fig. 9.6: Spatial Distribution of Calm, Mussel and Oysters in the Aghanashini Estuary

Chapter 9:


9.24

Fig. 9.7: Oyster Bed

Fig. 9.8(a): Perna Viridis

Fig. 9.8(b): Crassostrea sp.

Fig. 9.8(c): Paphia malabarica

Fig. 9.8(d): Katelysia opima Fig. 9.8(e): Meretrix meretrix

Chapter 9:


9.25

Fig. 9.8(f): M. Casta Fig. 9.8(g): Arca granosa

Fig. 9.8(h): Vellorita cyprinoides

Fig. 9.9 (a): Bivalve collecting men

Fig. 9.9 (b): Bivalve collecting women

Fig. 9.10: Women removing empty and dead shells from the collection

Chapter 9:


9.26

Fig 9.11(a): Harvester Selling the Bivalves to the Wholesaler

Fig 9.11 (b): Women Selling the Bivalves in the Kumta Market

Fig 9.12 (a): Shell Mining People Fig 9.12 (b): Shell Transporting People

Fig. 9.13: Dried Meat Fig 9.14: Edible Portion of Bivalves

Chapter 9:


9.27

Fig. 9.15: Bivalve Harvesting and Shell Mining Areas

a) Non-identified Species b) Identified Species

Fig. 9.16 : Bivalves (Calms, mussels and oysters)

Chapter 9:


9.28

Table 9.1

Some Edible Species of Bivalves in India

Sr. No. Common Name Scientific Name

1 Bay clam Meretrix meretrix (Linn.)

2 Backwater clam M. casta (Deshayes)

3 Katelysia (Eumarcia) opima (Gmelin)

4 Black clam Velorita cyprinoids (Gray.)

5 Cockle clam Gafrarium (Gafrarium) tumidum (Roding)

6 G. (Circe) divaricatum Gmelin

7 False cockle Cardita bicolor Lam.

8 False clam Paphia malabarica (Dilwyn)

9 P. marmorata (Reeve)

10 P. marmorata (Reeve)

11 Mesodesma glabratum (Lam.)

12 Mactra corbiculoides (Deshayes)

13 Asiatic cockle Cardium asiaticum (Bruguiere)

14 Wedge-shells/clams Donax cuneatus Linn

15 D. scortum Linn.

16 Green mussel Perna viridis

17 Bearded weaving mussel Modiolus barbatus (Linn.)

18 Estuarine oyster Crassostrea madrasensis

19 Rock oyster C. cucullata (Born)

20 Disc oyster C. discoidea (Gould)

21 Giant oyster C. gryphoides (Newton & Smith)

22 Ribbed ark-shell Acra granosa Linn.

23 True scallop Chlamys senatoria Gmelin (Pectinidae)

24 Sanguinolaria (Soletellina) diphos (Gmelin)

25 S. (Soletellina) atrata (Deshayes)

26 Razor-shells Solen truncatus (Sowerby)

27 S. brevis (Hanley)

Chapter 9:


9.29

Table 9.2

Chemical Composition of a Few Important Edible Indian Bivalves

Species Edible Portion

%

Moisture %

Protein %

Fat %

Carbo-hydrates

%

Ash %

Ca% P% Iron mg/ 100 g.

Backwater clam (Meretrix castd) 7.62-17.72 73.18-84.02

5.96-12.29

0.5-1.89 - 0.67-2.31 0.06-0.37 0.11-0.20 1.42-16.56

Backwater oyster (Crassostrea madrasensis)

5.03-17.36 76.67-85.04 5.72-13.31

1.36-3.07

- 0.52-2.06 0.04-0.40 0.10-0.21 2.53-29.63

Green mussel (Perna viridis) 42.8 81.46 9.92 1.97 - 3.04 1.84 0.16 -

Freshwater mussel (Lamellidens marginalis)

79.45 14.50 1.61 2.13 2.31 0.59 0.41 -

Table 9.3

Medicinal Uses of Few Molluscs

Scientific Name Common Name Treatment

Turbinella pyrum Sacred chank Dyspepsia, piles, general debility, and some skin and lung diseases

Caked shell Demulcent and cardiac stimulant

Chank Spleen enlargement in Bengal

Cypraea moneta Linn Spleen enlargement

Pila globosa Apple snail Sore eyes in south India

Achatinafulica Ferusasc Shell is used in the preparation of medicated oils

Placuna placenta Linn Windowpane oyster Eye diseases

Pinctada margaritifera (Linn.) Black-lipped pearl-oysters

Used medicinally in the form of ash

Crassostrea madrasensis Estuarine oyster Demulcent

C. gryphoides Giant oyster Demulcent

Freshwater mussels Seed pearls are credited with invigorating properties

Sea-mussels Manufacture of vitamin products

Chapter 9:


9.30

Table 9.4

Species-wise Habitat and Distribution of Edible Bivalves in Aghanashini Estuary and Elsewhere in India

Scientific Name

Common

Name

Habitat in

Aghanashini

Estuary

Distribution and Habitat in India

Uses

Paphia malabarica

False clam At water depth >1

m at low tide

East and west coasts sandy

bottom, mid-littoral

Food for humans,

lime production and

poultry feed

Katelysia opima Mud-flats or sandy

bottom

Marine and estuarine

shallow waters, mud-flats or

sandy bottom

do

Meretrix meretrix

Bay clam Mud-flats or sandy

bottom

West coast mud-flats or

sandy bottom, mid-littoral

do

Meretrix casta Backwater

clam

Mud-flats or sandy

bottom

Estuaries and backwaters of

east and west coasts, mudflats

or sandy bottom, midlittoral

do

Villorita cyprinoides

Black clam At water depth <1

m at low tide

West coast backwaters and

estuaries

do

Arca granosa Blood clam Sandy bottom

inter-tidal

Back-waters and estuaries

along the Indian coast,

sandy bottom, inter-tidal

do

Crassostrea sp. Oyster Inter-tidal mudflats

mixed with

sand and shell

fragments

East and west coast

estuaries, and backwaters

Food for humans,

lime production

fertilizer and poultry

feed

Perna viridis Green mussel

Sub-tidal: steep,

rocky areas near

river mouth

East and west coast marine

intertidal, sub tidal and

estuarine, rocky shores

Food for humans

Source: Apte 1 998; Chatterji et al. 2002; CSIR 1962a; CSIR 1962b.

Chapter 9:


9.31

Table 9.5

Taxonomic hierarchy of Paphia malabarica (Chenmitz), Katelysia opima (Gmelin), Meretrix meretrix (Linne), M. casta, Villorita cyprinoides (Gray.),

Perna viridis (Linne), Area granosa (Lamarek), Crassostrea sp.

Kingdom : Animalia

Phylum: Mollusca

Class: Bivalvai

Order: Veneroida

Family: Veneridae

Genus : Paphia Katelsia Meretrix Meretrix

Species: Malabarica (Chenmitz)

Opima (Gmelin) Meretrix (Linne) Casta (Deshayes)

Order: Veneroida Mytioids Arcoida Ostreoida

Family: Corbiculidae Mytilidae Arcidae Ostreidae

Genus: Villorita Perna Acra Crassostrea

Species: Cyprinoids (Gray)

Viridis (Linne) Granosa (Lamarek)

Chapter 9:


9.32

Table 9.6

Village-wise Estimated Number of Bivalve Collecting (BC) Households (HH) and Number of Individuals Involved in Bivalve Harvesting

Village No. of NH**

BC HH

% of BC HH

BC Men

BC Women

Total BC Persons

Hiregutti 596 1 0.17 1 1

Bargigazani 14 5 35.71 5 5

Aigalkurve 120 5 4.17 2 6 8

Bargi 359 7 1.95 7 4 11

Paduvani 331 13 3.93 3 11 14

Balale 213* 10 4.69 14 14

Betkuli 316 22 6.96 25 25

Lukkeri 280 32 11.43 34 34

Kodkani 407 29 7.13 25 10 35

Hegde 1311 31 2.36 29 19 48

Kagal 711 33 4.64 44 9 53

Madangeri 279 20 7.17 56 56

Morba 180 34 18.89 81 10 91

Toregazani 38 38 100 69 28 97

Mirjan 630 89 14.13 85 94 179

Torke 261 72 27.59 158 26 184

Gokarn 2,532 98 3.87 205 22 111

Divgi 524 323 61.64 237 203 440

Aghanashini 579 340 58.72 692 133 825

Total 9,681 1,202 12.42 1,738 609 2,347

**http://zpkarwar.kar.nic.in/CensusKumtaVWP.htm

*http://zpkarwar.kar.nic.in/CensusAnkolaVWP.htm

Chapter 9:


9.33

Table 9.7

Village and Season-wise Average Quantity of Bivalves Harvested (Kg. wet weight with shells/day)

Village Jun-Oct % of Total Harvest

Nov-May % of Total Harvest

Hiregutti 105 0.09 105 0.07

Aigalkurve 300 0.25 300 0.20

Bargigazani 337 0.28 337 0.22

Bargi 412 0.34 412 0.27

Balale 420 0.35 420 0.28

Lukkeri 431 0.36 637 0.42

Paduvani 489 0.41 588 0.39

Betkuli 708 0.59 843 0.56

Hegde 851 0.71 2,062 1.37

Kodkani 1,275 1.06 2,175 1.45

Madangeri 1,680 1.40 1,680 1.12

Morba 2,497 2.08 3,060 2.04

Toregazani 2,551 2.13 6,014 4.01

Kagal 4,890 4.08 4,230 2.82

Torke 5,782 4.82 7,188 4.79

Mirjan 5,940 4.96 7,320 4.88

Gokarn 9,945 8.30 11,922 7.95

Divgi 23,565 19.66 30,465 20.31

Aghanashini 57,683 48.12 70,270 46.84

Total 119,861 150,028

Chapter 9:


9.34

Table 9.8 (a)

Village and Season-wise Average Quantity of Bivalves Harvested by Men (in Kg. wet weight with shells/day)

Village QHD:

Jun-Oct BCD in Jun-Oct

Total harvest (kg)- Jun-Oct

QHD: Nov-May

BCD in Nov-May

Total harvest (kg)- Nov-May

Hiregutti 105 44 4,620 105 154 16,170

Bargigazani 338 32 10,800 338 64 21,600

Bargi 263 26 6,825 263 96 25,200

Aigalkurve 165 13 2,145 165 182 30,030

Paduvani 225 100 22,500 225 140 31,500

Balale 420 9 3,780 420 108 45,360

Betkuli 709 9 6,379 844 85 71,719

Hegde 638 13 8,288 1,849 120 221,850

Morba 2,475 8 19,800 3,038 78 236,925

Kodkani 1,125 10 11,250 1,875 132 247,500

Madangeri 1,680 96 161,280 1,680 168 282,240

Kagal 4,620 18 83,160 3,960 80 316,800

Toregazani 2,498 48 119,880 5,951 96 571,320

Mirjan 3,960 40 158,400 4,500 138 621,000

Torke 5,760 45 259,200 7,110 102 725,220

Gokarn 9,430 33 311,190 11,378 78 887,445

Divgi 15,960 10 159,600 21,330 90 1,919,700

Aghanashini 56,689 71 4,024,951 67,278 117 7,871,580

Total 107,058 5,374,047 132,307 14,143,159

BCD - Bivalve collecting days; QHD - Quantity harvested per day

Chapter 9:


9.35

Table 9.8 (b)

Village and Season-wise Average Quantity of Bivalves Harvested by Women (in Kg. wet weight with shells/day)

Village QHD: Jun-Oct

BCD in Jun-Oct

Total Harvest (kg)-

Jun-Oct

QHD: Nov-May

BCD in Nov-May

Total harvest (kg)-

Nov-May

Morba 23 34 765 23 119 2,678

Toregazani 54 30 1,620 63 96 6,048

Torke 23 51 1,148 78 102 7,956

Aigalkurve 135 10 1,350 135 133 17,955

Bargi 150 36 5,400 150 126 18,900

Kagal 270 7 1,890 270 98 26,460

Paduvani 264 10 2,640 363 90 32,670

Hegde 214 12 2,565 214 168 35,910

Kodkani 150 10 1,500 300 126 37,800

Gokarn 516 75 38,672 545 105 57,173

Lukkeri 431 10 4,313 638 102 65,025

Aghanashini 994 49 48,694 2,993 114 341,145

Mirjan 1,980 48 95,040 2,820 161 454,020

Divgi 7,605 11 83,655 9,135 120 1,096,200

Total 12,807 289,251 17,725 2,199,939

BCD - Bivalve collecting days;

QHD - Quantity harvested per day

Chapter 9:


9.36

Table 9.9

Village, Season and Gender-wise Income per year from Bivalve Collection

Village Men Women Total (Rs.)

June-Oct Nov-May June-Oct Nov-May

Aghanashini 14,247,842 17,979,543 158,992 704,600 33,090,977

Divgi 568,830 4,428,772 291,182 2,378,217 7,667,001

Mirjan 563,418 1,422,253 328,839 967,109 3,281,619

Gokarn 969,601 1,836,715 135,472 130,651 3,072,439

Torke 795,644 1,427,533 62,813 285,116 2,571,106

Toregazani 431,482 1,333,506 86,293 201,571 2,052,852

Madangeri 588,305 672,031 1,260,336

Kagal 289,145 719,192 6,867 62,622 1,077,826

Kodkani 41,044 589,468 5,036 79,019 714,567

Hegde 29,770 515,903 9,405 86,184 641,262

Morba 60,376 425,015 36,535 77,000 598,926

Paduvani 75,219 65,406 9,579 77,161 227,365

Betkuli 21,459 150,423 171,882

Aigalkurve 7,714 69,957 4,950 43,092 125,713

Balale 13,589 105,607 119,196

Lukkeri 11,397 89,487 100,884

Bargi 14,748 22,534 19,365 43,839 100,486

Bargigazani 38,767 50,173 88,940

Hiregutti 16,848 38,485 55,333

Total 18,773,801 31,852,516 1,166,725 5,225,668 57,018,710

Chapter 9:


9.37

Table 9.10

Village-wise Income from Sale of Shell Sale (Rs./year)

Village BHH SHH No of basket (Shells) sales /

Rs. family

Rs./ basket

Income (Rs.) / family

Total (Rs.) / Village

Hiregutti 1 1 25 10 250 250

Aigalkurve 5 3 28 10 280 840

Kodkani 29 20 11 11 121 2,420

Balale 10 10 28 11 303 3,025

Paduvani 13 7 35 13 438 3,063

Hegde 31 19 16 11 176 3,344

Bargigazani 5 5 50 15 750 3,750

Madangeri 20 20 40 10 400 8,000

Mirjan 89 36 23 11 256 9,207

Torke 72 18 75 9 638 11,475

Gokarn 98 33 41 12 488 16,088

Toregazani 38 19 148 11 1,623 30,828

Kagal 33 26 118 12 1,416 36,816

Morba 34 26 143 12 1,710 44,460

Divgi 323 226 35 14 490 110,740

Aghanashini 340 139 118 12 1,416 196,824

Total 1,141 609 10,752 481,129

BHH - Bivalve collecting households;

SHH - Shell selling households

Chapter 9:


9.38

Table 9.11

Village-wise Income from Sale of Dried Meat (Rs./year)

Village BHH DHH kg sales / family

Rs. / kg Expense (Rs.)

Income (Rs.) / family

Total (Rs.)

/village

Bargigazani 5 5 2 200 300 1,500

Hiregutti 1 1 18 150 2,625 2,625

Paduvani 13 3 9 250 110 2,140 6,420

Torke 72 13 4 160 20 620 8,060

Aigalkurve 5 3 20 150 135 2,865 8,595

Kagal 33 13 6 175 200 894 11,619

Morba 34 17 8 166 88 1,159 19,709

Balale 10 5 40 100 25 3,975 19,875

Madangeri 20 20 8 175 150 1,163 23,250

Divgi 323 129 2 120 13 183 23,543

Toregazani 38 29 17 150 147 2,353 68,247

Aghanashini 340 170 8 127 175 834 141,696

Total 894 408 19,110 335,138

BHH - Bivalve collecting households;

DHH -Dried meat selling households

CChhaapptteerr 1100

TTrraaffffiicc aanndd DDeemmaanndd

SSttuuddyy 10.1 Traffic Study and Demand Assessment

M/s Prointec, Mir Projects & Consultants, has carried out Feasibility Study for

the Development of Tadadi Port, wherein Traffic load in terms of quantity of material

(import & export) to be handled through the port is projected until the year 2040-41.

Further, feasibility/options for transport of material (iron ore, coal, steel, containers,

general cargoes etc.) through existing road and rail network has been assessed and need

for developing additional road and rail network has been assessed under different

scenarios. The salient features of the final report (January 2012) has been presented

here.

The methodology adopted for the traffic study and demand assessment is

presented in Fig. 10.1.

10.2 Export of Iron Ore

Three scenarios; optimistic, realistic and pessimistic scenarios have been

evaluated. The Iron ore export projected through Tadadi port for different scenarios is

presented in Fig. 10.2, which indicates that the iron ore export traffic will start after the

third year of concession (2015-16). After that the traffic will grow exponentially till 2020-21

and then further increase is expected, once the new railway line between Hubli and

Chapter 10: Traffic and Demand Study

10.2

Ankola is commissioned. This will cause a gradual increase in the annual iron ore traffic.

Depending on the scenario, in 2023-24, 2024-25 and 2025-26, traffic will reach its

maximum, and thereafter, the export traffic is expected to stabilize.

10.3 Import of Coal

Similar to the iron ore, three scenarios; optimistic, realistic and pessimistic

scenarios have been evaluated. The Coal traffic, that would be imported by the Tadadi

port under three different scenarios is presented in Fig. 10.3, which shows that the port

will not commence until 2020-21, till commissioning of the new Railway line between

Hubli and Ankola. Subsequently, coal import traffic will increase at a faster rate and

thereafter; the traffic will stabilize to its maximum capacity by 2037-38.

10.4 Export of Steel

Similar to iron ore and coal, three scenarios; optimistic, realistic and pessimistic

scenarios have been considered. The steel traffic export scenarios presented in Fig. 10.4

show that after the year 2015-16, the steel export would start at the Tadadi port and

thereafter it will rise at a rapid rate, attaining maximum export by the year 2037-38. Then,

the export of steel will stabilize at the maximum export rate.

10.5 Complementary Traffics

The following other complementary traffics were also analyzed:

General cargo and containers

Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)

Passengers

Ship yard

Only the general cargo and containers can generate enough traffic to be

considered at the new port. In this case, the hinterland area is the northern half of the

Karnataka State. Regarding LNG, NTPC intends to establish a power plant of

4200 MW adjacent to the port land. Though, establishment of a shipyard is not

contemplated at present, area south of the proposed port can be explored taking

advantage of the proposed Tadadi Port.


10.3

10.6 Analysis of Connectivity to Port

Port connectivity is a critical factor for determining the feasibility of the

proposed port at Tadadi. The capacity of existing roads and railways and the forecasts of

future extensions will determine the traffic handling capacity of the Port.

The hinterland for the main traffic is the Bellary – Hospet region, from where

the iron ore and steel products shall arrive for export, and also where iron and steel

industries using imported coal will be located.

10.6.1 Connectivity by Road

10.6.1.1 Existing connections

The road connectivity link between Bellary – Hospet and Tadadi would be via

Hubli on the National Highway NH-63 [represented with red line in Fig. 10.5]. At Hubli two

options exist for connecting to Tadadi:

Option 1: NH 63 (From Hubli region to Ankola) and NH-66 (From Ankola to

Tadadi) [represented with blue line in Fig. 10.5].

Option 2: NH-4 (From Hubli to Tadas), SH-69 – (From Tadas to Kumta),

NH-66 (from Kumta to Tadadi) [represented with green line at Fig. 10.5].

For both alternatives there is a common stretch, corresponding to the NH-63

between Bellary-Hospet and Hubli. This stretch will control the admissible road traffic

between Bellary-Hospet and Tadadi. Therefore, the National Highway NH-63 will have to

be analyzed to determine both the present capacity and the future capacity and the

number of lanes will have to be increased accordingly.

Another strategic connectivity options linking the Bellary-Hospet region with

Tadadi by road was identified as Tadadi to Hospet -Bellary via Haveri. It comprises of

NH66 (from Tadadi to Kumta), SH 69 and SH 2 (Kumta to Haveri) and NH 63 (Haveri -

Koppal-Hospet-Bellary).

Iron ore traffic

According to the report “Pre-Feasibility study for (transport) logistics

architecture in Karnataka”, carried out by iDeck in April 2010, out of the 31.9 millions

tonnes export from the Bellary-Hospet region through both the eastern and western

Indian ports, 21.52 million tonnes were transported through road (67.3 %) and 10.27

millions by railway (32.7%). Considering the same scenario, it has been estimated that


10.4

the 67.3 % of the iron ore to be exported through the Tadadi Port will arrive by road and

the rest 32.7 % by railway.

Coal Traffic

It has been assumed that all the imported coal traffic will be transported from

the Tadadi Port to the Bellary-Hospet area by railway. In order to get a greater flexibility, it

has been assumed that once the coal Terminal become operative, 10% of the traffic will

be transported by road.

Steel Products Traffic

The modal distribution of the exported steel products has been considered to

be 50 % by road and 50% by railway.

10.7 Connectivity by Railway

10.7.1 Existing connections

The existing nearest railway station is Ankola on the Konkan railway line which

does not cater to Bellary Hospet region. The connectivity of the Tadadi port by railway

can be improved by the construction of the line between Hubli and Ankola, which is

assumed to be completed by 2019-20. Till then, no railway traffic has been considered for

the Tadadi Port. In any case, the stretch of railway between Hubli and Bellary-Hospet will

have to support all the traffic to/from Mormugao and Tadadi ports.

10.7.2 Conclusions

In order to estimate the evolution of port traffic at the Tadadi Port, it would be

appropriate to select the realistic hypothesis as the most suitable scenario.

Based on the figures of the realistic scenario and taking into account the

limitations on the road traffic due to the maximum capacities of the existing roads until the

year 2019-20 and the future construction of the railway line between Hubli and Ankola,

year-wise traffics that can be operated through the port is presented in Table 10.1. It

indicates that Tadadi Port will start its activities with traffic volume of 2.87 million tonnes in

the year 2015-16. Over the following years, this volume will increase until the year 2040-

41, where it is estimated to reach 62.36 million tonnes.


10.5

10.7.3 Road and Rail Layout within the Port Area

Roadway

A four-lane road entering the port is being further redirected at the junction

towards the Dry bulk terminal and Multi -purpose terminal as shown in Fig. 10.6.

Necessary access control at the entry of the port is also provided. The road to the port is

connected to existing NH 66. There are two options suggested for this; which is also

shown in Fig. 10.6. (Option A: northern side road, and Option B: southern side road).

Rail lines

The railway tracks taking off from the Konkan rail to the port has been

bifurcated into five tracks, out of which one leads to the multipurpose berth and the rest

cater to the iron and coal berths.

10.7.4 Connectivity with the Mainland

The road to the port is connected to existing NH 66 (formerly called NH 17).

Two options were studied (option A and option B as shown in the Fig. 10.7) and finally

option A was found to be appropriate. Option B may be considered for stage 2 of the port

development. The stretch of the rail line from the port connecting to the existing Konkan

railway is also shown in the Fig. 10.7.

Fig. 10.1: Methodology Adopted for the Traffic Study and Demand Assessment


10.6

Fig. 10.2: Iron Ore Export Traffic Scenarios

Fig. 10.3: Coal Import Traffic Scenarios


10.7

Fig. 10.4: Steel Export Traffic Scenarios


10.8

Road Connection between Bellary- Hospet and Tadadi via Haveri

Fig. 10.5: Road Connections between Bellary - Hospet and Tadadi


10.9

Fig. 10.6: Road and Rail Layout within the Port Premises


10.10

Fig. 10.7: Road and Rail Connection to the Existing Rail / Road Infrastructure


10.11

Table 10.1

Projected Total Traffic Generated at the Tadadi Port (thousand tonnes)

YEAR Iron Ore

Coal Steel General Cargo +

Containers TOTAL

2010-11 0 0 0 0 0

2011-12 0 0 0 0 0

2012-13 0 0 0 0 0

2013-14 0 0 0 0 0

2014-15 0 0 0 0 0

2015-16 2870 0 0 0 2870

2016-17 4235 0 0 0 4235

2017-18 5598 0 0 0 5598

2018-19 6959 0 0 0 6959

2019-20 7503 0 0 0 7503

2020-21 21174 1967 2326 857 26324

2021-22 22818 4174 2732 913 30637

2022-23 24462 6642 3181 974 35259

2023-24 26106 9399 3678 1038 40221

2024-25 27171 10763 3920 1106 42960

2025-26 27171 11431 4178 1179 43959

2026-27 27171 12143 4453 1256 45023

2027-28 27171 12901 4746 1339 46157

2028-29 27171 13710 5058 1427 47366

2029-30 27171 14571 5391 1521 48654

2030-31 27171 15490 5746 1621 50028

2031-32 27171 16469 6124 1728 51492

2032-33 27171 17512 6527 1841 53051

2033-34 27171 18624 6956 1963 54714

2034-35 27171 19809 7414 2092 56486

2035-36 27171 21072 7902 2229 58374

2036-37 27171 22418 8422 2376 60387

2037-38 27171 23344 8779 2532 61826

2038-39 27171 23344 8779 2699 61993

2039-40 27171 23344 8779 2877 62171

2040-41 27171 23344 8779 3066 62360

CChhaapptteerr 1111

HHyyddrrooddyynnaammiicc SSttuuddyy

A detailed study on the Hydrodynamic aspects of the Aghanashini river

has been carried out during the feasibility study and is attached as Appendix – F.

CChhaapptteerr1122

SSeeddiimmeenntt DDiissppeerrssiioonn SSttuuddyy

12.0 Dispersion Study

12.1 Introduction

Engineering surveys and investigations carried out by M/s PROINTEC & MIR

Consultants on the proposed alignment of the berth and the navigation channel has

indicated that there is requirement of dredging of the sea bed, both the capital dredging

for the construction of the port (navigation channel, turning circles and berths) as well as

annual maintenance dredging to maintain the required drafts. A large volume of the

dredged material is proposed to be disposed offshore. Therefore, it is necessary to

identify a suitabale offshore location where the dredged sediments could be disposed.

Consequently, a dispersion study has been carried out to identify a well defined area

which will guarantee a complete precipitation of the sediment disposed with the least

environmental degradation.

12.2 Methodology

The methodology adopted for the study has the following stages:

Definition of the sediment

Definition of the climate conditions

Modeling

Analysis of the results

Chapter 12:

Sediment Dispersion Study

12.2

12.2.1 Definition of the Sediment

From the Subsurface investigation (Geotechnical investigation report by MIR

Consultant), the analysis of the sediment in the area of dredging was carried out. From

the results of the boreholes investigations, it is concluded that in the outer approach

channel the material of the seabed is mainly sand with some pockets of clay. Fig.12.1

depicts the average grain size distribution for the samples obtained from the boreholes

(SBH-1 to SBH-4), at four different locations at depths varying from 0 to (-)5 m CD, from

(-)5 to (-)10 m CD, from (-)10 to (-)15 m CD and below (-)15 m CD. It can be observed

that on an average, the material above (-)15 m CD is sand (material with D50 > 0.063

mm) and only the material below (-)15 m CD is clay or silt.

From the results of the boreholes investigation in the inner channel, the turning

circles as well as alongside the berths, the material of the seabed has a wider distribution

i.e. both fine sand and clay/silt. Fig.12.2 depicts the average grain size distribution of the

samples obtained from boreholes (SWBH-01 to SWBH-06), at four different depth levels:

from 0 to (-)5 m CD, from (-)5 to (-)10 m CD, from (-)10 to (-)15 m CD and below (-)15 m

CD.

It was observed that on an average the material above (-)5 m CD and below

(-)15 m CD is fine sand (material with D50 > 0.063 mm) and the material between

(-)5 m CD and (-)15 m CD is clay or silt. This result fits quite good with the classification

at the boreholes, although the soil classifications for the samples obtained above

(-)5 m CD show 4 sands (SM or SP-SM) and 4 clays (CH or CI), this is 50%-50%

between sand and clay. Therefore, an average size (D50 = 0.063) mm represents the

finest portion of the sediment to be dredged.

12.2.2 Definition of the Climate Conditions

As the sediment will be disposed off approximately 5 m below the sea surface

(at the depth equal to the draft of the dredger), the main environmental parameters that

can affect the sediment movement are the currents. Neither the direct action of the wind

(that is above the water surface) nor the waves (that at depths around 15/20 m) will have

significant influence in the sediment dispersion process. Regarding the currents, only

those generated by wind will be significant, as at this area, the tidal effect is not important

and the disposal areas will be located in open sea, where the tidal currents are

comparatively weaker. Therefore, the wind conditions at the area have been analyzed in

order to calculate the currents that can be generated. As per the “Wave Modeling and

Chapter 12:


12.3

Siltation Analysis Report”; the tide, wave and wind climate has been studied. Fig. 12.3

summarizes the wind characteristics through the annual wind rose. The frequencies for

each direction are (from highest to lowest): SSW (32 %), W (18.9 %), NW (15.9%), WSW

(13.3 %), NNW (4.4 %),S (3.7 %), SW (2.9 %), ENE (2.6 %), WNW (2.5 %), NE (1.3 %),

E (0.7 %), SSE (0.7 %), N (0.6 %), NNE (0.5 %), SE (0.1 %) and ESE (0 %), Further,

Weibull Cumulative Probability Distributions are presented for each direction, which allow

correlating the wind speed with the average annual exceedance probability.

Table 12.1 shows the value of the wind speed (m/s) for each direction and

different annual exceedance probabilities (5 %, 2 %, 1 % and 0.5 %).

12.2.3 Modeling

The modeling of the sedimentation process of the material dumped from the

dredge hopper has been carried out by means of the program DUMP, developed by

PROINTEC. It is an analytical model developed specifically to analyze the sedimentation

process of solids into a fluid. It requires the following variables as input data :

Density of the water

Bottom depth

Density of the material dumped

Average size of the material dumped

Velocity of the dredge during the dumping

Direction of the dredge during the dumping

Depth of dumping

Velocity of general current

Direction of general current

Velocity of tidal current

Direction of tidal current

Wind velocity

Wind direction

The program DUMP solves the movement equation for a spherical particle

under the action of the i) gravity, ii) buoyancy and iii) friction force (in a direction opposite

to the velocity direction of the particle). The program considers the velocity induced to the

particle by the dredge movement during the dumping and by the existing current along

the water column. Three types of currents can be considered: a) general current, b) tidal

current and c) wind-induced current. The first two are introduced directly in the program

Chapter 12:


12.4

as input data, whereas the wind-induced current velocity profile is calculated by the

program using the Ekman’s approximation. The result of the program gives the horizontal

distance covered by the particle during its sedimentation since the point of dumping until

it touches the seabed. Several cases have been considered:

16 wind directions (sectors each of 22.5º)

Values of exceedance probabilities for the wind speeds (5 %, 2 %, 1 %

and 0.5 %)

Different values of the particle size

12.2.4 Analysis of the results

The results obtained for the different cases mentioned above are shown in

Fig. 12.4. The average depth considered at the dumping area is 20 m below CD.

For the strongest winds (W and WSW with an exceedance probability of 0.5 %),

the horizontal distance covered by particles with an average size of 0.064 mm is 1,078 m.

The area defined for the disposal of the dredged material from the hopper has

dimensions of 3,000 m x 4,000 m = 12 million m2. Nevertheless additional dimensions

must be included to consider the sedimentation of the sediments after having been

dumped. Depending on the wind direction these additional dimensions are different (i.e.

the horizontal displacement of the particles until touching the seabed. Fig. 12.5 represent

the enveloping of the sedimentation area for the particles (note that the longitudinal axis

of the dumping rectangle 3,000 m x 4,000 m and has the direction NW to SE). It is

concluded that the area needed including for the sedimentation of particles D50 = 0.064

mm) for the strongest winds (associated to an exceedance probability of 0.5 %) is 4,500

m x 5,300 m. This is the total area which shall be considered for the dumping site for the

proposed Port of Tadadi.

The study has finally identified two areas for the dumping of the dredged

material, one to either side of the navigation channel, with a clearance of 1,000 from the

channel (Fig. 12.6). The average depth of these two areas is (-)20 m CD and the

minimum depth (-)15 m CD.

Chapter 12:


12.5

Source: PROINTEC & (MIR

Fig. 12.1: Grain Size Distribution of Seabed in the Outer Approach Channel

Source: PROINTEC & MIR

Fig.12.2: Grain Size Distribution of Seabed at the Estuary

Chapter 12:


12.6


Fig. 12.3: Annual Frequency of Wind Speed by Direction

Chapter 12:


12.7


Fig. 12.4: Horizontal Displacements of the Particles during the Sedimentation Process


Fig. 12.5 : Areas of Dumping and Sedimentation

Chapter 12:


12.8


Fig. 12.6: Identified Areas for Dumping and Sedimentation of Dredged

Material

Chapter 12:


12.9

Table 12.1

Wind speed (m/s) Vs. Annual Exceedance Probability

P = 5 % P = 2 % P = 1 % P = 0.5 %

Direction Vw

(m/s) Direction

Vw (m/s)

Direction Vw

(m/s) Direction

Vw (m/s)

N …. N …. N …. N 2

NNE …. NNE …. NNE …. NNE ….

NE …. NE …. NE 2.5 NE 4.5

ENE …. ENE 3 ENE 5 ENE 6.5

E …. E …. E …. E 3.5

ESE …. ESE …. ESE …. ESE ….

SE …. SE …. SE …. SE ….

SSE …. SSE …. SSE …. SSE 2.5

S …. S 3.25 S 5 S 6.5

SSW …. SSW 7 SSW 7.5 SSW 8

SW …. SW 3.25 SW 7 SW 8

WSW 6.5 WSW 9 WSW 10 WSW 11.5

W 7.5 W 9.5 W 10.5 W 11.5

WNW …. WNW 3.5 WNW 6 WNW 7

NW …. NW 7 NW 8 NW 9

NNW 6 NNW 5 NNW 6.5 NNW 7.5

CChhaapptteerr1133

DDiisscclloossuurree ooff CCoonnssuullttaannttss

EEnnggaaggeedd

13.1 NEERI Profile

NEERI (National Environmental Engineering Research Institute) is a Constituent

Laboratory of CSIR (Council of Scientific & Industrial Research), India (Website:

www.neeri.res.in) was established in 1958.

13.1.1 NEERI Mission and Vision

NEERI Mission

The Institute dedicates itself in the service of mankind by providing innovative

and effective solutions to environmental and natural resource problems. It strives to

enable individuals and organizations to achieve productive and sustainable use of natural

resources on which all life and human activity depend. Highly skilled and motivated, the

Institute strives for excellence in environmental science, technology and management by

working hand in hand with its partners.

NEERI Vision

NEERI envisions a world in which

All individuals and Institutions have capacity to act in a manner that

ensures achievement of sustainable environmental and economic goals.

Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants

Engaged

13.2

The natural balance is no longer threatened and all share the benefit of a

healthy environment.

NEERI would continue to strive for

Leadership in environmental science, technology and management

domestically and worldwide.

Strong and effective working relationship with its partners in ensuring

ecological health of all regions in India.

13.1.2 Mandate of NEERI

To conduct R&D studies in environmental science and engineering.

To render assistance to the industries of the region, local bodies etc. in

solving the problems of environmental pollution.

To interact and collaborate with academic and research institutions on

environmental science and engineering for mutual benefit.

To participate in CSIR thrust area and mission projects.

13.1.3 NEERI Activities

R&D Thrust Areas

Environmental Monitoring

Environmental Modeling

Environmental Impact & Risk Assessment

Environmental System Design

Environmental Biotechnology

Environmental Genomics

Environmental Policy Analysis

Advisory

Central Govt. Ministries

State Govt. Ministries

Industries

Judiciary


Engaged

13.3

13.1.4 NEERI Services & Goods

Research intensive areas

Air, Water, Wastewater, Soil (Land), Solid & Hazardous Waste

Environmental Biotechnology & Genomics

Environmental Materials

Public and strategic areas

Environmental Monitoring

Environmental Policy Analysis

Socio-economic areas (urban & rural)

Drinking water

Clean Air

Environment & Health

Advice to Central & State Government Agencies

Judiciary

Industry focus

Environmental Monitoring, Management and Audit

Environmental Technology Assessment

Environmental Impact & Risk Assessment

13.1.5 NEERI Human Resources

NEERI : Human Resources Total : 331 (As on March, 2013)


Engaged

13.4

13.1.6 Organisational Chart of CSIR and NEERI

CSIR, India (Organisational Chart)

CSIR-NEERI : Human Resource (Scientific) (As on March 2013)

An Autonomus R&D Society President: Prime Minister

Vice President : Minister, S&T

Governing Body Chairman: Director

General

CSIR HQrs Head : Director General

Laboratories (38) NEERI is one Amongst These Head : Director

Research Council

Performance Appraisal Board

Management Council

Advisory Board


Engaged

13.5

NEERI: Organisation Chart

13.1.7 Financial Resources of NEERI

Financial Resources (2010-2013) (Rs. in Crore)

(ECF- Environmental Consultancy Fund, LRF- Laboratory Reserve Fund)

Director Research Council

Management Council

R&D Divisions/Units

• Air Pollution Control

• Environmental Analytical Instrumentation

• Environmental Biotechnology

• Environmental Genomics

• Environmental Impact and Risk Assessment

• Environmental Materials

• Environmental Systems Design and Modelling

• Geo-environment Management

• Analytical Instrumentation

• Solid Waste Management

• Wastewater Technology

Zonal Laboratories

• Chennai

• Delhi

• Hyderabad

• Kolkata

• Mumbai

Support Services (Technical)

• Construction & Maintenance

• Instrumentation Workshop

• Mechanical Workshop

• Electrical Workshop

• Photography

Support Services (Administration)

• Controller of Administration

• Finance & Accounts Officer(s)

• Administrative Officer(s)

• Bill Section

• Establishment Section

• General Section

• Personnel & Vigilance Section

• Purchase Section

• Stores Section

• Security

• Hospital/Medical Facilities

Support Services (Scientific)

• R&D Planning and Business Development

• Project Monitoring

• Information Technology

• Library & Documentation


Engaged

13.6

13.1.8 Analytical Instruments, Computer Systems and Software at NEERI

13.1.8.1 Analytical Instrumentation Resource

UV-VIS-NIR Spectrophotometer : Hitachi 330

Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer : GBC 904 A

Fluorescence Spectrophotometers : Hitachi F-4000 & Hitachi F-4500

Mercury Analyzers : Perkin Elmer MAS-50 A and MAS-50 B

Gas Chromatographs : Perkin Elmer Autosystem – 5 nos.

High Performance Liquid Chromatographs : Waters 204 and 501;

Shimadzu – LC10

Gas Chromatograph-Mass Spectrometer : Varian Saturn III

Liquid Chromatograph-Mass Spectrometer-Mas Spectrometer : Quattro

Ultima

Ocean related studies : ADCP, CODAR, GPS, Ekmen Dredge, Reversible

sampler, (Nishkin type) DRDF, Reversible thermometer, Tide Gauges

Doppler SODAR

Mini Sonde

Microscopes

Biolistic particle delivery system with accessories

Gene Pulser II System with accessories & consumables

Membrane Bioreactor Assembly

Wet air Oxidation High pressure reactor

Ground Penetrating Radar

Multi Electrode resistivity Imaging system

Ambient Ozone Analysers

Eight Stage Cascade Impactor

Microwave Furnace

CHNS Analyser Vario ELIII

Porosimeter Quanta Chrome PM33-7

Mercury Analyser – Milestoen DMA80

FTIR Spectrometer – Bruker Vertex 70


Engaged

13.7

Catalyst Evaluation assembly with GC

Simultaneous Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometer

(for Heavy Metals ) : Perkin Elmer Optima 4100 DV

Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (for Heavy Metals ) : Perkin Elmer

Analyst 800 with Auto Sampler and HGA Furnace

Total Organic Carbon (TOC) Analyser: Thermo Euroglass TC 1200

VOC Analyser : Photovac 2020 and Photovac Voyager for Analysis of

VOCs in Ambient Air

Carbon Analyser : Behr Labor Technis C-30-IRF

13.1.8.2 Computer Hardwares & Prepherials

Computer Hardware

High performance computer systems configures around RISC workstations

Sun Ultra Sparc Computer Station: Sun Ultra 1 Model 170

Silicon Graphics 02 Workstations

Silicon Graphics 2000 Workstations

HP APOLLO 90001730 Workstations

Personal Computers

Laptop Computers

Local Area Network

13.1.8.3 Supporting Software

Geographic Information Systems – ARC INFO, MAP INFO

Knowledge Based System – Prokappa

Digital Image Processing – ERDAS, EASIPACE, PCI WORKS

INGRES

CADCORE

SPSS

IMSL

COMPLIERS

GRAPHICS

MATLAB

DIVAST


Engaged

13.8

Softwares for Mathematical Modeling (Available at NEERI)

Air Environment

Model Used for Predicting Impacts due to

PAL-DS Point (stacks), area (quarry) and line (vehicular) sources in short range

ISCST-3 Point and area sources in short range

CALINE 4 Vehicular sources close to road

RTDM3.2 Point and area sources existing at rough terrain in short range

VALLEY Point and area sources existing in valley in short range

MESOPUFF Point and area sources in long range

CDM Point and area sources in short range

RAM Point and area sources in short range

BLP Point and line sources in short range

SDM Point and area sources existing in coastal region in short range

CAL3QHC Vehicular sources close to road for Hydrocarbon Levels

ADAM Point and area sources in long range

ADMS-3 Point and area sources in long range

PANACHE Meteorological data and point, area & line sources in any range

MTDDIS Point and area sources in long range

TAPM Meteorological data and impacts due to point, area and line sources in short and long range

Noise Environment


FHWA Vehicular sources

Wave Divergence Stationary sources

Aquatic Environment – Ground Water


GMS Flow, direction, contaminant transport in saturated and unsaturated zones, subsurface solute transport with aerobic and sequential anaerobic biodegeneration, remediation

FEMWATER/

LEWASTE

Stable contaminant transport & pollution, groundwater pollution and remediation

PATRIOT Hydrology, stable contaminant transport & pollution and landuse management

PRZM3 Stable contaminant transport & pollution and landuse management, consequence of surface water pollution on groundwater

WhAEM2000 Risk of groundwater contamination, hydrology, stable contaminant transport & pollution


Engaged

13.9

Aquatic Environment – Surface Water


MIKE 11 One dimensional model for dam break analysis, sediment transport, ecological and water quality assessments in rivers and wetlands

MIKE 21 Two dimensional model for Environmental Impact Assessment of marine infrastructure, sediment and mud transport, spill analysis

MIKE 3 Three dimensional model for various applications in different water bodies for water pollutions studies

MIKE SHE Integrated surface and groundwater modeling

ECO LAB For ecological modeling in rivers wetlands, lakes, reservoirs, estuaries, coastal waters and sea

CORMIX Software for simulation for fluid-flow mixing in different water bodies

EXAMS Aquatic Chemistry & Biology in streams and sea

GCSOLAR Photolysis, half life

HSCTM2D Hydrology, sediment & contaminant transport in river and estuary

HSPF Aquatic chemistry and biology sediment transport and deposition in rivers

OXYREF Dissolved oxygen, respiration, ventilation

PLUMES Available dilution, design of marine outfall

PRZM3 Hydrology, metals and pesticides prediction in surface water

QUAL2EU Water quality in stream, planning, non-point sources

SED3D Hydrodynamics, sediment transport, 3-D, lakes, estuary, harbour, coastal

SMPTOX3 Toxic-chemicals in streams, aquatic biology, combined sewers

SWMM Aquatic biology, combine sewers, community discharge, rivers, streams

TMDL USLE

Soil and sediment loss, watershed management

Visual Plumes

Surface water, contaminant transport

WASP Hydrodynamics, aquatic biology, toxicant dispersal, hydrology

Surface Water Runoff


HEC-5 Flood hydrography, runoff estimation, catchment area treatment

HSPF Hydrologic simulation in reservoir, nutrient growth

STORM Urban watershed, storage/reservoir routing, sedimentation, erosion, reservoir chemistry


Engaged

13.10

Ecology


ECOMOD Estuary linked reservoirs, tidal action, saltwater intrusion, in-stream and in-reservoir dissolved oxygen primary and secondary productivity estimation

LAKE-I Thermal stratification primary and secondary productivity

Food Chain


EGETS Exposure levels and effects of contaminants on organisms which make food chain

LC50 Lethal concentration, LC50 toxicity levels

Multimedia

Model Useful for Predicting Impacts due to

3MRA Multimedia pathway, receptor exposure, risk assessment

MINTEQA2 Aquatic biology, multimedia pathway

MMSOILS Multimedia pathway, exposure assessment

MULTIMED (1.01)

Environmental effects of waste disposal in one media to another surface & ground water

Dam Break Analysis


DAMBRK Downstream flow simulation consequent to dam break

Risk Assessment


SAFETI 6.21 & 6.42V

Complete package for consequence analysis and risk analysis in onshore process engineering

PHAST 6.21 V & 6.42V

Complete package for consequence analysis in onshore process engineering


Engaged

13.11

13.1.9 Clients of NEERI

13.1.9.1 Clients: International

The World Bank

Asian Development Bank

United Nations Development Programme

United Nations Environment Programme

World Health Organization

International Union of Conservation for Nature

Danish International Development Agency

Global Scan Technologies, Dubai

Global Tech Safety & Environmental Consultancy, Dubai

Dept. of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) / Environment and Social

Services Office (ESSO), Philippines

13.1.9.2 Clients: Central Government

Atomic Energy Regulatory Board

Bharat Oman Refineries Limited

Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited

Gas Authority of India Limited

Hindustan Organic Chemicals Limited

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

Indian Oil Corporation Limited

Indian Petrochemicals Corporation Limited

Jawaharlal Nehru Port Trust


Engaged

13.12

Madras Refineries Limited

Mangalore Refinery and Petrochemicals Limited

Mumbai Port Trust

National Aluminium Corporation Limited

National Hydroelectric Power Corporation

National Thermal Power Corporation Limited

Nuclear Power Corporation India Limited

Numaligarh Refineries Limited

Oil India Limited

Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Limited

Rashtriya Chemicals & Fertilizers Limited

Tuticorin Port Trust

13.1.9.3 Clients: State Government

Gujarat Industrial Development Corporation Limited

Gujarat Narmada Valley Fertilizers Company Limited

Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited

Gujarat State Petronet Limited

Kudremukh Iron Ore Company Limited

Maharashtra State Electricity Board

Tamilnadu Industrial Development Corporation

Chattisgarh State Electricity Board

Narmada Water Resources, Water Supply & Kalpasar Deptt.

Karnataka State Industrial Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd.

Steel Authority of India

13.1.9.4 Clients : Private Industries (National)

Alembic Pharmaceuticals Ltd.

Asian Paints India Ltd.

Andhra Sugars

Ballarpur Industries Ltd.

Dighi Port Pvt. Ltd.

Dony Polo Petrochemicals Ltd.

Electrosteel Castings Ltd.

ESSAR Oil Ltd.


Engaged

13.13

Grasim Industries Ltd.

Gujarat Pipavav Port Ltd.

Gujarat Positra Port Infrastructure Ltd.

Hazira Port Pvt. Ltd.

Hindustan Oil Exploration Company Ltd.

Jindal Vijaynagar Steel Pvt. Ltd.

Paradeep Phosphates Ltd.

Pipavav Ship Dismantling & Engineering Ltd.

Reliance Petrochemical Ltd.

Reliance Industries Ltd.

Sahara India Pvt. Ltd.

Saurashtra Chemicals Ltd.

Search Chem Industries Ltd.

Tata Petrodyne

United Phosphorus Ltd.

Zuari Industries Ltd.

ABG Cement

NCTL Pvt. Ltd.

Amanora Park Town

Lavasa Corporation Ltd.

Nagarjuna Fertilizer and Chemicals

13.1.9.5 Clients : Private Industries (Multi-National)

British Gas International (India)

Cairn Energy India Pty. Limited

Command Petroleum, Australia

Enron Oil & Gas India Limited

Hindustan Oil Exploration Company Limited

Hindustan Oman Petroleum Company Limited

Niko Resources Limited

Petro Energy Products Company India Limited

Rio Tinto Orissa Mining Limited

Shell India Private Limited


Engaged

13.14

South Asia LPG Company Limited (a JV of M/s Total Gas & Power India)

Mitsui & Company, Japan

OAO Gazprom, Russia

Mosbacher India L.L.C

13.1.10 Studies with International Funding

Construction of Middle Vaitarna Dam for Augmentation of Water

Resources and Irrigation near Mumbai (WB) (1990-1993)

Augmentation of Chennai Water Supply – a Project at New Veeranam,

Tamilnadu (WB) (1994-1995)

Construction of Aerated Lagoons and Selection of Marine Outfall Location

(Worli) off Mumbai Coast (WB) (1994-1995)

Water Quality Studies for Hyderabad Water Supply and Sanitation Project

(WB) (1995-1990)

Oceanographic Modeling Studies for Sewage Outfall Location (Bandra) off

Mumbai Coast (WB) (1995-1998)

Strengthening EIA capacity and environmental legislation in India (ADP)

(1998-2000)

Implementation off Master Tourism Plan in Andaman Islands (UNDP)

(1999-2000)

Design & Implementation of Information Network for Indian Centre for

Cleaner Technologies (WB) (1999-2002)

Planning for Coastal and Marine Environment under Gujarat State

Environmental Action Programme (WB) (1999-2000)

Development of National Guidance Manual & Support Manual on EIA

Practices for Enhancing the Quality & Effectiveness of Indian EIA’s (WB)

(2002-2004)

Water needs of Brahmani & Sabrmati river basins (ICID) (2002-2004)

Technical Assistance to ESSO to Enhance the Management of Social and

Environmental Safeguards for DPWH Projects, Manila, Philippines (WB)

(2005-2007)


Engaged

13.15

13.1.11 US-AEP AWARD TO NEERI


Engaged

13.16

14.1.12 Conformity to ISO 9001:2008

14.1.13 Contact Persons

DIRECTOR : Dr. S.R. Wate

Phone : +91 712 2249999 Fax : +91 712 2249900 GSM : +91 98231 10987

Email : [email protected]

SCIENTIST& HEAD: Dr. S.K. Goyal

Environmental Impact & Risk Assessment Division Phone : +91 712 2247844 Fax : +91 712 2249896 GSM : +91 9423400470 Email : [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


Engaged

13.17

V.1

Annexure V

Methods of Monitoring and Analysis

Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes (Also Please

Refer CPCB Guidelines on Methods of Monitoring and Analysis)

Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks

A. Air Environment Network Frequency

Meteorological IS 5182 Part 1-20

· Wind speed Minimum 1 site 1 hourly Mechanical/automatic Site specific primary data is

· Wind direction in the project continuous weather station essential

· Dry bulb temperature impact area

· Wet bulb temperature

· Relative humidity Rain gauge Secondary data from IMD,

· Rainfall

As per IMD specifications New Delhi

· Solar radiation

As per IMD specifications

· Cloud cover

CPCB guidelines

· Environmental Lapse Rate

Mini Sonde/SODAR

Pollutants 10 to 15 locations 24 hourly twice a Gravimetric (High-Volume)

Monitoring Network

· SPM · Minimum 2 locations in

in the project week upwind side, more sites in

impact area (Please refer downwind side / impact

National Ambient Gravimetric (High-Volume

zone

· RPM · All the sensitive receptors

Air Quality with Cyclone) need to be covered

Standards, CPCB EPA Modified West & Gaeke

· SO2 Notification dated Measurement Methods

11 th April, 1994) method

· NOx

Arsenite modified Jacob & As per CPCB standards for

Hochheiser NAQM, 1994

· CO 8 hourly twice a NDIR technique

week

· H2S*

24 hourly twice a Methylene-blue

· NH*3

week Nessler’s method

· HC* Infra Red analyser

· Fluoride* Specific Ion meter

· Pb*

*Project Specific

Note: For Rapid Environmental Impact Assessment one complete season data except monsoon is adequate while the comprehensive

Environmental Impact Assessment Resources coverage of three seasons

Guidance for Assessment of Representative Ness and Reliability of Baseline Environmental Attributes

Attributes Sampling Measurement Remarks

Method

B. Noise Network Frequency

· Hourly equivalent noise Identified study area Once in each Instrument : Noise level IS:4954-1968 as adopted by CPCB

levels season meter

· Hourly equivalent noise Inplant (1.5 metre Once Instrument : Noise level CPCB/OSHA

levels from machinery) meter

· Hourly equivalent noise Highways Once in each Instrument : Noise level CPCB/IS:4954-1968

levels season meter

· Peak particle velocity 150-200m from Once PPV meter

blast site

V.2

C. Water

Parameters for water · Set of grab Diurnal and Samples for water

quality samples during Season wise quality should be

· pH, temp, turbidity, pre and collected and analysed

magnesium hardness, post-monsoon as per :

total alkalinity, chloride, for ground and · IS : 2488 (Part 1-5)

sulphate, nitrate, fluoride, surface water for methods for

sodium, potassium, 10 km distance sampling and testing

salinity of Industrial

· Total nitrogen, total ·

effluents

phosphorus, DO, BOD, Standard methods

COD, Phenol for examination of

· Heavy metals water and

· Total coliforms, faecal wastewater analysis

coliforms published by

· Phyto plankton American Public

· Zoo plankton Health Association.



Network Frequency

For River Bodies

· Total Carbon · Standard · Yield of water sources to be Samples for water quality Data should be collected

· pH methodology measured during critical should be collected and from relevant offices such

· Dissolved Oxygen for collection of season analysed as per : as central water

· Biological Oxygen surface water · River Stretch within project · IS : 2488 (Part 1-5) commission, state and

Demand (BIS standards) area be divided in grids (say 1 methods for sampling and central ground water

· Free NH4 km length and 1/3 width) and testing of Industrial board, Irrigation dept.

· At least one samples should be from each effluents

· Boron

grab sample per grid at a time when the · Standard methods for

· Sodium Absorption

location per wastewater discharged by examination of water and

Ratio

· season other sources of pollution is wastewater analysis

Electrical

expected to be maximum published by American

Conductivity Public Health Association.



Network Frequency

Parameters for wastewater · In plant · Diurnal and Samples for water quality All plant sources categorised as : characterisation sources season wise should be collected and · Process wastewater · Temp, colour, odour, · Grab and variation analysed as per : · ETP wastewater

turbidity, TSS, TDS composite · IS : 2488 (Part 1-5) · Domestic/sanitary wastewater · pH, alkalinity as CaCO3, sampling methods for sampling and

p value, M value, total testing of Industrial

hardness as CaCO3, effluents chloride as Cl sulphate as Standard methods for

SO4, Nitrate as N O3, examination of water and Fluoride as F, Phosphate wastewater analysis

as PO4, Chromium as Cr. published by American

(Hexavalent, total) Public Health Association. Ammonical Nitrogen as

N, TKN, % sodium, BOD

at 20°C, COD, DO, total

residual chlorine as Cl2, oil and grease, sulphide,

phenolic compound

V.3



Network Frequency

D. Land Environment

Soil One surface Seasonwise Collected and analysed as

· Particle size distribution sample from each per soil analysis reference

· Texture village, (soil book, M.I.Jackson and soil

· pH samples be analysis reference book by

· Electrical conductivity collected as per C.A. Black

BIS specifications)

· Cation exchange capacity

· Alkali metals

· Sodium Absorption Ratio

· (SAR)

Permeability

· Water holding capacity

· Porosity

Land use/Landscape At least 20 points Global positioning system

· Location code along the

· Total project area boundary Topo sheets

· Topography

· Drainage (natural) Satellite Imageries*

(1:25,000)

· Cultivated, forest,

Satellite Imageries*

plantations, water bodies,

(1:25,000)

roads and settlements

*Project specific



Network Frequency

Solid Waste

Domestic Waste Grab and Seasonwise Guidelines

· Per capita contribution composite IS 9569 : 1980

· Collection, transport and disposal samples IS 10447 : 1983

system IS 12625 : 1989

· Process waste IS 12647 : 1989

· Quality (oily, chemical, biological) IS 12662 (PTI) 1989

Quality Grab and Seasonwise Analysis

· Loss on heating composite IS 9334 : 1979

· pH samples IS 9235 : 1979

· EC IS 10158 : 1982

· Calorific value, metals etc.

Hazardous Waste Grab and Analysis

· Permeability and porosity composite IS 9334 : 1979

· Moisture pH samples IS 9235 : 1979

· Electrical conductivity IS 10158 : 1982

· Loss on ignition

· Phosphorous

· Total nitrogen

· Cation exchange capacity

· Particle size distribution

· Heavy metal

· Arsenic

· Fluoride

V.4



Network Frequency

E. Biological Environment · Considering probable Season wise Standard techniques · Seasonal sampling for aquatic

Aquatic impact, sampling points (APHA et. al. 1995, Rau biota

· Primary productivity and number of samples and Wooten 1980) to be · One season for terrestrial

· Aquatic weeds to be decided on followed for sampling and biota, in addition to

· Enumeration of phyto personal judgement measurement vegetation studies during

plankton, zoo plankton and within 10/25 km radius monsoon season

benthos ·

from the proposed site · Preliminary assessment

· Fisheries Samples to collect from · Microscopic analysis of

· Diversity indices upstream and plankton and me bents,

· Trophic levels downstream of studies of macro fauna,

· Rare and endangered species discharge point, nearby aquatic vegetation and

· Marine Parks/ Sanctuaries/ tributaries at down application of indices, viz.

stream, and also from

Shannon, similarity,

closed areas /coastal regulation

dug wells close to

dominance IVI etc.

zone (CRZ)

activity site

· Point quarter plot less

Terrestrial

· Vegetation-species list, method for terrestrial

economic importance, forest vegetation survey

produce, medicinal value

· Importance value index (IVI)

· of trees

Fauna


Attributes Sampling Measurement

Method Remarks

Network Frequency

· Avi fauna · For forest studies, · Secondary data to collect from

· Rare and endangered species direction of wind Government offices, NGOs,

· Sanctuaries / National park / should be published literature

Biosphere reserve considered while · Plankton net

· Migratory routes selecting forests · Sediment dredge

· Depth sampler

· Microscope

· Field binocular

F. socio-economic

· Demographic structure Socio-economic survey Minimum for two Primary data collection Secondary data from census records,

· Infrastructure resource base is based on phases of the through questionnaire statistical hard books, topo sheets,

· Economic resource base proportionate, stratified project health records and relevant official

· Health status : Morbidity and random sampling records available with Govt. agencies

method

pattern

·

Cultural and aesthetic

· attributes

Education

Annexure I National Ambient Air Quality Standards

(November 2009) Sr.

No.

Pollutant Time

weighted

Average

Concentration in Ambient Air

Industrial,

Residential,

Rural and

Other Area

Ecologically

Sensitive Area

(notified by Central

Government)

Methods of Measurement

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1. Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2), g/m3

Annual*

24 hours**

50

80

20

80

- Improved west and Gaeke

- Ultraviolet Fluorescence

2. Nitrogen Dioxide

(NOx), g/m3

Annual*

24 hours**

40

80

30

80

- Modified Jacob & Hochheiser

(Na-Arsenite)

- Chemiluminescence

3. Particulate Matter

(size less than 10 m

or PM10), g/m3

Annual*

24 hours**

60

100

60

100

- Gravimetric

- TOEM

- Beta attenuation

4. Particulate Matter

(size less than 2.5

m or PM2.5), g/m3

Annual*

24 hours**

40

60

40

60

- Gravimetric

- TOEM

- Beta attenuation

5. Ozone (O3), g/m3 8 hours*

1 hour**

100

180

100

180

- UV photometric

- Chemilminescence

- Chemical Method

6. Lead (Pb), g/m3 Annual*

24 hours**

0.50

1.0

0.50

1.0

- AAS/ICP method after sampling

on EMP 2000 or equivalent filter paper

- ED-XRF using Teflon filter

7. Carbon Monoxide

(CO), mg/m3

8 hours*

1 hour **

02

04

02

04 - Non Dispersive Infra Red (NDIR)

spectroscopy

8. Ammonia (NH3),

g/m3

Annual*

24 hours**

100

400

100

400 - Chemiluminescence

- Indophenol blue method

9. Benzene (C6H6),

g/m3

Annual* 05 05 - Gas chromatography based

continuous analyzer

- Adsoprtion and Desorption

followed by GC analysis

10. Benzo(a)Pyrene

(BaP), particulate

phase only, g/m3

Annual* 01 01 - Solvent extraction followed by

HPLC/GC analysis

11. Arsenic (As), ng/m3

Annual* 06 06 - AAS/ICP method after sampling

on PM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

12. Nickel (Ni), ng/m3 Annual * 20 20 - AAS/ICP method after sampling

on PM 2000 or equivalent filter paper

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular site taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform

intervals

** 24 hourly or 08 hourly or 01 hourly monitored values, as applicable, shall be complied with 98% of the time in a year. 2% of the

time, they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days of monitoring

I

Ambient Standards in Respect of Noise

Area Code Category of Area/Zone Limits in dB(A) Leq* ------------------------------------------------ Day Time Night Time

(A) Industrial Area 75 70 (B) Commercial Area 65 55 (C) Residential Area 55 45 (D) Silence Zone 50 40

Notes :

1. Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m.

2. Night time shall mean from 10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m.

3. Silence zone is defined as an area comprising not less than 100 meters

around Hospitals, Educational Institutions and courts. The silence zones are

zones which are declared as such by the competent authority.

4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four

abovementioned categories by the Component Authority.

* dB(A) Leq denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels

on scale A which is related to human hearing

"A", in dB(A) Leq, denotes the frequency weighting in the measurement of noise

and corresponds to frequency response characteristics of human ear

Leq : It is an energy mean of the noise level over a specified period

Annexure II

III-1

Indian Standards/Specifications for Drinking Water IS : 10500 - 1991

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Essential Characteristics 1. Colour, Hazen unit 5 Above, consumer 25 4 of 3025, 1983 Extended upto 25 acceptance only if toxic substances decreases are not suspected in absence of alternate source 2. Odour Unobjectionable - 5 of 3025, 1983 a. Test cold and when heated b. Test at several dilutions 3. Taste Agreeable - - Test to be conducted only after safety has been established

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An

nexu

re III

III-2

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4. Turbidity, NTU 5 Above, consumer 10 8 - acceptance decreases 5. pH value 6.5-8.5 Beyond this range No 8 - the water will affect relaxation the mucous membrane and/or water supply system 6. Total hardness, 300 Encrustation on water 600 - - mg/L as CaCO3 supply structure and adverse effects on domestic use 7. Iron (as Fe), mg/L 0.3 Beyond this limit, 1.0 32 of 3025, 1964 - taste/appearance are affected, has adverse effect on domestic uses and water supply structures, & promotes iron bacteria

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

III-3

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 8. Chlorides (as Cl)m 250 Beyond this limit, 1000 32 of 3025, 1988 - mg/l taste, corrosion and palatability are affected 9. Residual free 0.2 - - 26 of 3025, 1986 To be applicable only chlorine, mg/L when water is chlorinated Tested at consumer end, When protection against viral infection is required, it should be min 0.5 mg/L

Desirable Characteristics

10. Dissolved solids, 500 Beyond this 2000 16 of 3025, 1984 mg/L palatability decrease and may cause gastrointestinal irritation 11. Calcium (as Ca), 75 - 200 40 of 3025, 1984 mg/L

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

III-4

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 12. Copper (as Cu), 0.05 Astringent, taste 1.5 36 of 3025, 1964 mg/L discoloration of pipes, fitting and utensils will be caused beyond this 13. Manganese (as Mn), 0.1 Astringent taste, 0.3 35 of 3025, 1964 mg/L discoloration of pipes, fitting and utensils will be caused beyond this 14. Sulphates, 200 Beyond this 400 24 of 3025, 1986 May be extended upto (as SO4), mg/L causes gastro 400 provided (as Mg) intestinal irritation does not exceed 30 mg/L when magnesium or sodium are present 15. Nitrates (as 45 Beyond this 100 - - NO3), mg/L methaemoglobinemia takes place

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

III-5

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 16. Fluoride (as F), 1.0 Fluoride may be kept 1.5 23 of 3025, 1964 - mg/L as low as possible. High fluoride may cause fluorosis 17. Phenolic substances, 0.001 Beyond this, it may 0.002 54 of 3025, 1964 mg/L (as C6H5OH) cause objectionable taste and odour 18. Mercury (as Hg), 0.001 Beyond this, the water No see note mercury To be tested mg/L becomes toxic relaxation ion analyser when pollution is suspected 19. Cadmium (as Cd), 0.01 Beyond this, the No see note mercury To be tested mg/L water becomes toxic relaxation ion analyser when pollution is suspected 20. Selenium (as Se) 0.01 Beyond this, the No 28 of 3025, 1964 To be tested when mg/L water becomes toxic relaxation pollution is suspected 21. Arsenic (As), mg/L 0.05 Beyond this, the No 37 of 3025, 1988 To be tested when water becomes toxic relaxation pollution is suspected

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

III-6

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 22. Cyanide (CN), mg/L 0.05 Beyond this, the No 27 of 3025, 1986 To be tested when water becomes toxic relaxation pollution is suspected 23. Lead (Pb), mg/L 0.05 Beyond this, the No See note 86 To be tested when water becomes toxic relaxation pollution plumbosolvency is suspected 24. Zinc (as Zn), mg/L 5 Beyond this limit 15 39 of 3025, 1964 To be tested when it can cause astringent pollution is suspected taste and an opalescence in water 25. Anionic detergents, 0.2 Beyond this limit, 1.0 Methylene blue To be tested when mg/L (as MBAS) it can cause a light extraction method pollution is suspected froth in water 26. Chromium (as Cr+6), 0.01 May be carconogenic 0.05 28 of 3025, 1964 To be tested when mg/L above this limit pollution is suspected 27. Polynuclear aromatic - May be carcinogenic - - - hydrocarbons (as PAH), mg/L

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

III-7

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________ S. Substances or Requirement Undesirable Permissible Method of Test Remarks No. Characteristic (Desirable effects out- limit in Cl Ref of IS : 3025 Max. limit) side the desi- absence of rable limit alternate source ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) _________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 28. Mineral oil, mg/L 0.01 Beyond this limit 0.03 Gas chromatographic To be tested when undesirable taste method pollution is suspected and odour after chlo- rination takes place 29. Pesticides, mg/L Absent Toxic 0.001 58 of 3025, 1964 - 30. Radioactive materials a. Alpha emitters Bq/L - - 0.1 - - b. Beta emitters pci/L - - 1.0 - - 31. Alkalinity 200 Beyond this limit 600 13 of 3025, 1964 - (as CaCO3), mg/L taste becomes unpleasant 32. Aluminimum (as Al), 0.03 Cumulative effect 0.2 31 of 3025, 1964 - mg/L is reported to cause dementia 33. Boron (as B), mg/L 1 - 5 29 of 3025, 1964 - ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Note : Atomic absorption spectrophotometric method may be used

ANNEXURE IV

ENVIRONMENTAL (PROTECTION) THIRD AMENDMENT RULES, 1993

SCHEDULE-VI

General Standards for discharge of Environmental Pollutants-Part A. Effluents

(Marine Coastal area Standards)

Sr. No.

Parameter Standards for Effluent Disposal to Marine Coastal Areas

1. Colour and obour Efforts to remove colour and odour

2. Suspended solids mg/l Max a) For process waste water 100

b) For cooling water effluent 10 percent above total suspended matter of influent

3. Particle size of suspended solids a) Floatable solids

b) Settleable solids max. 850 microns

4. Dissolved solids (inorganic) mg/l ---

5. Ph value 5.5 to 9.0

6. Temperature

Shall not exceed 50C above the receiving water temperature

7. Oil and grease mg/I, Max 20

8. Total residual chlorine, mg/I Max 1.0

9. Ammonical nitrogen (as N) mg/I, Max. 50

10. Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (as NH3) mg/I, Max 100

11. Free ammonia (as NH3) mg/I, Max. 5.0

12. Biochemical oxygen demand (5 days at 20°C)

100

13. Chemical Oxygen demand, mg/I, Max 250

14. Arsenic (as As) mg/I, Max. 0.2

15. Mercury (As Hg) mg/I, Max 0.01

16. Lead (as Pb) mg/I, Max. 2.0

17. Cadmium (as Cd), mgll, Max. 2.0

18. Hexavalent chromium (as Cr+6) mg/I, Max.

1.0

Sr. No.

Parameter Standards for Effluent Disposal to Marine Coastal Areas

19. Total chromium (as Cr) mg/l, Max. 2.0

20. Copper (as Cu) mg/l, Max 3.0

21. Zinc (as Zn) mg/I, Max. 15

22. Selenium (as Se) mg/l, Max. 0.05

23. Nickel (as N) mg/l, Max. 5.0

24. Cyanide (as CN) mg/l, Max. 0.2

25. Fluoride (as F) mg/l, Max. 15

26. Sulphide (as S) mg/l, Max. 5.0

27. Phenolic compounds (as C6HsOH), mg/l Max.

5.0

28. Radioactive materials

a) Alpha emitters uC/ml, Max.

b) Beta emitters uC/ml, Max.

10-4

10-4

29. Bio-assay test

90% survival of fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent

30. Manganese (as Mn) 2 mh/l

31. Iron (as Fe) 3 mg/l

32. Vanadium (as V) 0.2 mg/l

33. Nitrate Nitrogen 20 mg/l

Source: MoEF

ANNEXURE IV (a)

Water Quality Standards

(Natural Coastal & Beach Water)

Sr. No.

Characteristics Tolerance limit for bathing,

recreation commercial fish

culture and salt manufacture

1. Colour and obour No noticeable colour or

offensive odour

2. Floating material No visible floating matter or sewage or industrial waste origin

3. Suspended solids No visible suspended solids of sewage or industrial waste origin

4. Ph value 6.5 to 8.5

5. Free ammonia (as N) mg/I, Max. 1.2

6. Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH), mg/I, Max. 0.1

7. Dissolved oxygen, min.

40 percent saturation value or 3 mg/I whichever is higher

8. Biochemical oxygen demand (5 days at 20 degree centigrade) mg/lit. Max.

5

9. Coliform Bacteria, MPN inder per 100 ml. Max. 1000

ANNEXURE IV (b)

Tolerance Limits of Water Quality of Harbour Region

Parameter Tolerance Limit

pH 6.5 to 8.5

Temperature 320 C

Dissolved Oxygen <4-5

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (5 days-200C) 4

Chemical and grease 180

Oil and grease 1

Ammonical Nitrogen 1.2

Cadmium 0.3

Chromium (hexavalent) 0.2

Copper 1.5

Nickel 0.3

Iron 0.3

Lead 0.1

Zinc 1.5

Phenolic Compounds 0.005

Total Coliform MPN/100 ml 100

APPENDIX – I

Monitoring Shedule (Octomber-2010)

Sr. No. Locations I II III IV V VI VII VIII

1 Hiregutti 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31

2 Hittalmakki 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31

3 Mithal Gazani 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31

4 Burgi 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31

5 Gokarna 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 30 - 31

6 Mirjan 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1

7 Gangavali 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1

8 Gudkaghat 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1

9 Kenkon 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1

10 Koligudda 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 28 - 29 31 - 1

Monitoring Shedule (November-2010)

Sr. No. Locations I II III IV V VI VII VIII

1 Hiregutti 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30

2 Hittalmakki 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30

3 Mithal Gazani 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30

4 Burgi 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30

5 Gokarna 2 - 3 6 - 7 10 - 11 14 - 15 18 - 19 22 - 23 26 - 27 29- 30

6 Mirjan 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1

7 Gangavali 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1

8 Gudkaghat 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1

9 Kenkon 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1

10 Koligudda 4 - 5 8 - 9 12 - 13 16 - 17 20 - 21 24 - 25 27 - 28 30 - 1

eia report - ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯ ಮಾಲಿನ್ಯ...

Documents